Toyota 2007 4Runner Owners Manual

2015-09-07

: Toyota Toyota-2007-4Runner-Owners-Manual-762999 toyota-2007-4runner-owners-manual-762999 toyota pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 486 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Pocket Reference Guide
foreword
Quick Index
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2
3
4
5
6
71
72
73
8
9
110
impman
imptoy
rm
seat

327

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

INFORMATION BEFORE DRIVING YOUR

TOYOTA

Information before driving your Toyota

Off−road vehicle precautions 328. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Break−in period 329. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fuel 329. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fuel pump shut off system 331. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Operation in foreign countries 331. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Three−way catalytic converters 332. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Engine exhaust cautions 333. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Facts about engine oil consumption 333. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Iridium−tipped spark plugs 334. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Brake system 335. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Brake pad wear limit indicators 338. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Limited−slip differential 339. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Your Toyota’s identification 339. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Theft prevention labels 340. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Suspension and chassis 341. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tire information 342. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Vehicle load limits 350. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cargo and luggage 351. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Types of tires 354. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

06 06.08

SECTION

328 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY20035

This vehicle belongs to the utility ve-

hicle class, which has higher ground

clearance and narrower tread in relation

to the height of its center of gravity to

make it capable of performing in a wide

variety of off−road applications. Specific

design characteristics give it a higher

center of gravity than ordinary passen-

ger cars. This vehicle design feature

causes this type of vehicle to be more

likely to rollover. And, utility vehicles

have a significantly higher rollover rate

than other types of vehicles. An advan-

tage of the higher ground clearance is

a better view of the road allowing you

to anticipate problems. It is not de-

signed for cornering at the same

speeds as ordinary passenger cars any

more than low−slung sports cars de-

signed to perform satisfactorily under

off−road conditions. Therefore, sharp

turns at excessive speeds may cause

rollover.

CAUTION

Always observe the following precau-

tions to minimize the risk of serious

personal injury or damage to your ve-

hicle:

In a rollover crash, an unbelted per-

son is significantly more likely to

die than a person wearing a seat

belt. Therefore, the driver and all

passengers should fasten their seat

belts whenever the vehicle is mov-

ing.

Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneu-

vers, if at all possible. Failure to

operate this vehicle correctly may

result in loss of control or vehicle

rollover causing death or serious

injury.

Loading cargo on the roof luggage

carrier will make the center of the

vehicle gravity higher. Avoid high

speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns,

sudden braking or abrupt maneu-

vers, otherwise it may result in loss

of control or vehicle rollover due to

failure to operate this vehicle cor-

rectly.

06 06.08

Off−road vehicle precautions

329

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Always slow down in gusty cross-

winds. Because of its profile and

higher center of gravity, your ve-

hicle is more sensitive to side

winds than an ordinary passenger

car. Slowing down will allow you to

have better control.

When driving off−road or in rugged

terrain, do not drive at excessive

speeds, jump, make sharp turns,

strike objects, etc. This may cause

loss of control or vehicle rollover

causing death or serious injury. You

are also risking expensive damage

to your vehicle’s suspension and

chassis.

Do not drive horizontally across

steep slopes. Driving straight up or

straight down is preferred. Your ve-

hicle (or any similar off−road ve-

hicle) can tip over sideways much

more easily than forward or back-

ward.

Drive gently and avoid high speeds.

Your vehicle does not need an elaborate

break−in. But following a few simple tips

for the first 1600 km (1000 miles) can add

to the future economy and long life of

your vehicle:

Avoid full throttle acceleration when

starting and driving.

Avoid racing the engine.

Try to avoid hard stops during the first

300 km (200 miles).

Do not drive for a long time at any

single speed, either fast or slow.

Do not tow a trailer during the first 800

km (500 miles).

FUEL TYPE

Your new vehicle must use only un-

leaded gasoline.

To help prevent gas station mix−ups, your

Toyota has a smaller fuel tank opening.

The special nozzle on pumps with un-

leaded fuel will fit it, but the larger stan-

dard nozzle on pumps with leaded gas will

not.

At a minimum, the gasoline you use

should meet the specifications of ASTM

D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB 3.5−M93

in Canada.

NOTICE

Do not use leaded gasoline. Use of

leaded gasoline will cause the three−

way catalytic converter to lose its ef-

fectiveness and the emission control

system to function improperly. Also,

this can increase maintenance costs.

06 06.08

Break−in period Fuel

330 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

OCTANE RATING

Select Octane Rating 87 (Research

Octane Number 91) or higher.

Use of unleaded fuel with an Octane Rat-

ing lower than 87 may result in engine

knocking. Persistent knocking can lead to

engine damage.

If your engine knocks...

If you detect heavy knocking even when

using the recommended fuel, or if you

hear steady knocking while holding a

steady speed on level roads, consult your

Toyota dealer.

However, occasionally, you may notice

light knocking for a short time while accel-

erating or driving up hills. This is normal

and there is no need for concern.

GASOLINE CONTAINING DETERGENT

ADDITIVES

Toyota recommends the use of gasoline

that contains detergent additives to

avoid build−up of engine deposits.

However, all gasoline sold in the U.S.

contains detergent additives to keep clean

and/or clean intake systems.

QUALITY GASOLINE

Automotive manufacturers in the U.S.,

Europe and Japan have developed a

specification for quality fuel named

World−Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) that

is expected to be applied world wide.

The WWFC consists of four categories

that depend on required emission lev-

els. In the U.S., category 3 or 4 has

been adopted. The WWFC improves air

quality by providing for better emis-

sions in vehicle fleets, and customer

satisfaction through better vehicle per-

formance.

CLEANER BURNING GASOLINE

Cleaner burning gasoline, including re-

formulated gasoline that contains oxy-

genates such as ethanol or MTBE is

available in many areas.

Toyota recommends the use of cleaner

burning gasoline and appropriately blended

reformulated gasoline. These types of gas-

oline provide excellent vehicle perfor-

mance, reduce vehicle emissions, and im-

prove air quality.

OXYGENATES IN GASOLINE

Toyota allows the use of oxygenate

blended gasoline where the oxygenate

content is up to 10% ethanol or 15%

MTBE. If you use gasohol in your

Toyota, be sure that it has an octane

rating no lower than 87.

Toyota does not recommend the use of

gasoline containing methanol.

GASOLINE CONTAINING MMT

Some gasoline contain an octane en-

hancing additive called MMT (Methylcy-

clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).

Toyota does not recommend the use of

gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel con-

taining MMT is used, your emission con-

trol system may be adversely affected.

The Malfunction Indicator Lamp on the in-

strument cluster may come on. If this hap-

pens, contact your Toyota dealer for ser-

vice.

GASOLINE QUALITY

In a very few cases, you may experience

driveability problems caused by the partic-

ular gasoline that you are using. If you

continue to have unacceptable driveability,

try changing gasoline brands. If this does

not rectify your problem, then consult your

Toyota dealer.

06 06.08

331

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

NOTICE



Do not use gasohol other than

stated above. It will cause fuel sys-

tem damage or vehicle performance

problems.



If driveability problems occur (poor

hot starting, vaporizing, engine

knock, etc.), discontinue the use.



Take care not to spill gasohol dur-

ing refueling. Gasohol may cause

paint damage.

FUEL TANK CAPACITY

87 L (23.0 gal., 19.1 Imp. gal.)

The fuel pump shut off system stops sup-

plying fuel to the engine to minimize the

risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls

or an airbag inflates upon collision. To

restart the engine after the fuel pump shut

off system activates, turn the ignition

switch to “ACC” or “LOCK” once and start

it.

CAUTION

Inspect the ground under the vehicle

before restarting the engine. If you

find that fuel has leaked onto the

ground, the fuel system has been

damaged and is in need of repair. In

this case, do not restart the engine.

If you plan to drive your Toyota in

another country...

First, comply with the vehicle registration

laws.

Second, confirm the availability of the cor-

rect fuel (unleaded and minimum octane

number).

06 06.08

Fuel pump shut off system Operation in foreign countries

332 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY20011

The three−way catalytic converter is an

emission control device installed in the

exhaust system.

The purpose is to reduce pollutants in the

exhaust gas.

CAUTION

Keep people and combustible mate-

rials away from the exhaust pipe

while the engine is running. The

exhaust gas is very hot.

Do not idle or park your vehicle

over anything that might burn easi-

ly such as grass, leaves, paper or

rags.

NOTICE

A large amount of unburned gases

flowing into the three−way catalytic

converter may cause it to overheat

and create a fire hazard. To prevent

this and other damage, observe the

following precautions:



Use only unleaded gasoline.



Do not drive with an extremely low

fuel level; running out of fuel could

cause the engine to misfire, creat-

ing an excessive load on the three−

way catalytic converter.



Do not allow the engine to run at

idle speed for more than 20 min-

utes.



Avoid racing the engine.



Do not push−start or pull−start your

vehicle.



Do not turn off the ignition while

the vehicle is moving.



Keep your engine in good running

order. Malfunctions in the engine

electrical system, electronic ignition

system/distributor ignition system

or fuel systems could cause an ex-

tremely high three−way catalytic

converter temperature.



If the engine becomes difficult to

start or stalls frequently, take your

vehicle in for a check−up as soon

as possible. Remember, your Toyota

dealer knows your vehicle and its

three−way catalytic converter sys-

tem best.



To ensure that the three−way

catalytic converter and the entire

emission control system operate

properly, your vehicle must receive

the periodic inspections required by

the Toyota Maintenance Schedule.

For scheduled maintenance

information, refer to the “Scheduled

Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s

Manual Supplement”.

06 06.08

Three−way catalytic converters

333

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CAUTION

Avoid inhaling the engine exhaust.

It contains carbon monoxide, which

is a colorless and odorless gas. It

can cause unconsciousness or even

death.

Make sure the exhaust system has

no holes or loose connections. The

system should be checked from

time to time. If you hit something,

or notice a change in the sound of

the exhaust, have the system

checked immediately.

Do not run the engine in a garage

or enclosed area except for the

time needed to drive the vehicle in

or out. The exhaust gases cannot

escape, making this a particularly

dangerous situation.

Do not remain for a long time in a

parked vehicle with the engine run-

ning. If it is unavoidable, however,

do so only in an unconfined area

and adjust the heating or cooling

system to force outside air into the

vehicle.

Keep the back door and back win-

dow closed while driving. An open

or unsealed back door and back

window, may cause exhaust gases

to be drawn into the vehicle.

To allow proper operation of your

vehicle’s ventilation system, keep

the inlet grilles in front of the wind-

shield clear of snow, leaves, or oth-

er obstructions.

If you smell exhaust fumes in the

vehicle, open the windows and

close the back door and back win-

dow to ensure plenty of fresh air

enters the vehicle. If you can smell

exhaust fumes even though there

are no other vehicles in the sur-

rounding area, have your vehicle

checked by your Toyota dealer.

Continued inhalation of exhaust

fumes can lead to death by gas poi-

soning.

FUNCTIONS OF ENGINE OIL

Engine oil has the primary functions of

lubricating and cooling the inside of the

engine, and plays a major role in main-

taining the engine in proper working order.

ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION

It is normal that an engine should con-

sume some engine oil during normal

engine operation. The causes of oil

consumption in a normal engine are as

follows.

Oil is used to lubricate pistons, piston

rings and cylinders. A thin film of oil

is left on the cylinder wall when a pis-

ton moves downwards in the cylinder.

High negative pressure generated when

the vehicle is decelerating sucks some

of this oil into the combustion chamber.

This oil as well as some part of the oil

film left on the cylinder wall is burned

by the high temperature combustion

gases during the combustion process.

Oil is also used to lubricate the stems

of the intake valves. Some of this oil

is sucked into the combustion chamber

together with the intake air and is

burned along with the fuel. High tem-

perature exhaust gases also burn the

oil used to lubricate the exhaust valve

stems.

06 06.08

Engine exhaust cautions Facts about engine oil

consumption

334 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

The amount of engine oil consumed de-

pends on the viscosity of the oil, the

quality of the oil and the conditions the

vehicle is driven under.

More oil is consumed by high−speed driv-

ing and frequent acceleration and decel-

eration.

A new engine consumes more oil, since

its pistons, piston rings and cylinder walls

have not become conditioned.

Oil consumption: Max. 1.0 L per 1000

km (1.1 qt./600 miles, 0.9 Imp. qt./600

miles)

When judging the amount of oil con-

sumption, note that the oil may become

diluted and make it difficult to judge

the true level accurately.

As an example, if a vehicle is used for

repeated short trips, and consumes a nor-

mal amount of oil, the dipstick may not

show any drop in the oil level at all, even

after 1000 km (600 miles) or more. This

is because the oil is gradually becoming

diluted with fuel or moisture, making it ap-

pear that the oil level has not changed.

The diluting ingredients evaporate out

when the vehicle is then driven at high

speeds, as on an expressway, making it

appear that oil is excessively consumed

after driving at high speeds.

IMPORTANCE OF ENGINE OIL LEVEL

CHECK

One of the most important points in prop-

er vehicle maintenance is to keep the en-

gine oil at the optimum level so that oil

function will not be impaired. Therefore, it

is essential that the oil level be checked

regularly. Toyota recommends that the oil

level be checked every time you refuel

the vehicle.

NOTICE

Failure to check the oil level regularly

could lead to serious engine trouble

due to insufficient oil.

For detailed information on oil level check,

see “Checking the engine oil level” on

page 420 in Section 7−2.

CY20008

Your engine is fitted with iridium−tipped

spark plugs.

NOTICE

Use only iridium−tipped spark plugs.

Do not adjust gaps for engine perfor-

mance or smooth driveability.

06 06.08

Iridium−tipped spark plugs

(4.7 L V8 [2UZ−FE] engine)

335

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

This brake system has 2 independent hy-

draulic circuits. If either circuit should fail,

the other will still work. However, the ped-

al will be harder to press, and your stop-

ping distance will increase. Also, the

brake system warning light may come on.

CAUTION

Do not drive your vehicle with only a

single brake system. Have your

brakes fixed immediately.

BRAKE BOOSTER

The brake booster uses brake fluid pres-

surized by the pump to power−assist the

brakes. If the brake booster fails during

driving, the brake system warning light

comes on and buzzer sounds continuous-

ly. In this case, the brakes may not work

properly. If they do not work well, depress

the brake pedal firmly. If the brake system

warning light comes on, immediately stop

your vehicle and contact your Toyota deal-

er.

It is not a malfunction that the brake sys-

tem warning light may stay on for 60 sec-

onds after the ignition key is turned to the

“ON” position.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly

may turn on the brake system warning

light and buzzer. It is normal if the light

turns off and the buzzer stops sounding

after a few seconds.

You may hear a small sound in the engine

compartment after the engine is started or

the brake pedal is depressed repeatedly.

This is a pump pulsating sound of the

brake system, and it is not a malfunction.

CAUTION

Do not pump the brake pedal if the

engine stalls. Each push on the

pedal uses up your brake fluid

pressure reserve.

Even if the power assist is com-

pletely lost, the brakes will still

work. But you will have to push the

pedal hard, much harder than nor-

mal. And your braking distance will

increase.

ANTI−LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

(with “ABS” warning light)

The anti−lock brake system is designed

to help prevent lock−up of the wheels

during a sudden braking or braking on

slippery road surfaces. This assists in

providing directional stability and steer-

ing performance of the vehicle under

these circumstances.

Effective way to press the ABS brake

pedal: When the anti−lock brake system

function is in action, you may feel the

brake pedal pulsating and hear a noise.

In this situation, to let the anti−lock

brake system work for you, just hold the

brake pedal down more firmly. Do not

pump the brake in a panic stop. This

will result in reduced braking performan-

ce.

The anti−lock brake system becomes op-

erative after the vehicle has accelerated

to a speed in excess of approximately 10

km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when the

vehicle decelerates to a speed below

approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).

06 06.08

Brake system

336 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Depressing the brake pedal on slippery

road surfaces such as on a manhole cov-

er, a steel plate at a construction site,

joints in a bridge, etc. on a rainy day

tends to activate the anti−lock brake sys-

tem.

You may hear a click or motor sound in

the engine compartment for a few seconds

when the engine is started or just after

the vehicle begins to move. This means

that the anti−lock brake system is in the

self−check mode, and does not indicate a

malfunction.

When the anti−lock brake system is ac-

tivated, the following conditions may

occur. They do not indicate a malfunc-

tion of the system:

You may hear the anti−lock brake sys-

tem operating and feel the brake pedal

pulsating and the vibrations of the ve-

hicle body and steering wheel. You

may also hear the motor sound in the

engine compartment even after the ve-

hicle is stopped.

At the end of the anti−lock brake sys-

tem activation, the brake pedal may

move a little forward.

CAUTION

Do not overestimate the anti−lock

brake system: Although the anti−lock

brake system assists in providing ve-

hicle control, it is still important to

drive with all due care and maintain

a moderate speed and safe distance

from the vehicle in front of you, be-

cause there are limits to the vehicle

stability and effectiveness of steering

wheel operation even with the anti−

lock brake system on.

If tire grip performance exceeds its

capability, or if hydroplaning occurs

during high speed driving in the rain,

the anti−lock brake system does not

provide vehicle control.

Anti−lock brake system is not de-

signed to shorten the stopping dis-

tance: Always drive at a moderate

speed and maintain a safe distance

from the vehicle in front of you.

Compared with vehicles without an

anti−lock brake system, your vehicle

may require a longer stopping dis-

tance in the following cases:

Driving on rough, gravel or snow−

covered roads.

Driving with tire chains installed.

Driving over the steps such as the

joints on the road.

Driving on roads where the road

surface is pitted or has other differ-

ences in surface height.

Install all 4 tires of specified size at

appropriate pressure: The anti−lock

brake system detects vehicle speeds

using the speed sensors for respec-

tive wheels’ turning speeds. The use

of tires other than specified may fail

to detect the accurate turning speed

resulting in a longer stopping dis-

tance.

06 06.08

337

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY20034

Type A

CY20032

Type B

“ABS” warning light

The light comes on when the ignition key

is turned to the “ON” position. If the anti−

lock brake system and the brake assist

system work properly, the light turns off

after a few seconds. Thereafter, if either

of the systems malfunctions, the light

comes on again.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (and

the brake system warning light is off), the

following systems do not operate, but the

brake system still operates conventionally.

Anti−lock brake system

Brake assist system

Traction control system

(two−wheel drive models)

Active traction control system

(four−wheel drive models)

“AUTO LSD” system

(two−wheel drive models)

Vehicle stability control system

Downhill assist control system

(four−wheel drive models)

Hill−start assist control system

When the “ABS” warning light is on (and

the brake system warning light is off), the

anti−lock brake system does not operate

so that the wheels will lock up during a

sudden braking or braking on slippery

road surfaces.

“VSC TRAC” warning light may come on

with the “ABS” warning light (brake assist

system warning light) when there is a mal-

function somewhere in the anti−lock brake

system (brake assist system).

If either of the following conditions oc-

curs, this indicates a malfunction some-

where in the components monitored by

the warning light system. Contact your

Toyota dealer as soon as possible to

service the vehicle.

The light does not come on when the

ignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-

tion, or remains on.

The light comes on while you are dri-

ving.

A warning light turning on briefly during

operation does not indicate a problem.

06 06.08

338 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CAUTION

If the “ABS” warning light remains on

together with the brake system warn-

ing light, immediately stop your ve-

hicle at a safe place and contact your

Toyota dealer.

In this case, not only the anti−lock

brake system will fail but also the

vehicle will become extremely unsta-

ble during braking.

Either of the following conditions may

occur, but do not indicate a malfunc-

tion:

The light may stay on for about 60

seconds after the ignition key is turned

to the “ON” position. It is normal if it

turns off after a while.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly

may turn on the light. It is normal if it

turns off after a few seconds.

DRUM−IN−DISC TYPE PARKING BRAKE

SYSTEM

Your vehicle has a drum−in−disc type

parking brake system. This type of brake

system needs bedding−down of the brake

shoes periodically or whenever the parking

brake shoes and/or drums are replaced.

Have your Toyota dealer perform the bed-

ding−down.

BRAKE ASSIST SYSTEM

When you slam the brakes on, the

brake assist system judges as an emer-

gency stop and provides more powerful

braking for a driver who cannot hold

down the brake pedal firmly.

When you slam the brakes on, more pow-

erful braking will be applied. At this time,

you may hear a sound in the engine

compartment and feel the vibrations of the

brake pedal. This does not indicate a mal-

function.

The brake assist system becomes opera-

tive after the vehicle has accelerated to

a speed in excess of approximately 10

km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when the

vehicle decelerates to a speed below

approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).

For an explanation of this system’s warn-

ing light, see “Service reminder indicators

and warning buzzers” on page 147 in Sec-

tion 1−6.

CY20004

The brake pad wear limit indicators on

your disc brakes give a warning noise

when the brake pads are worn to where

replacement is required.

If you hear a squealing or scraping noise

while driving, have the brake pads

checked and replaced by your Toyota

dealer as soon as possible. Expensive ro-

tor damage can result if the pads are not

replaced when necessary.

06 06.08

Brake pad wear limit

indicators

339

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Your Toyota is equipped with a limited−slip

center differential (transfer). If one wheel

begins to spin, the limited−slip center dif-

ferential (transfer) is designed to aid trac-

tion by automatically transmitting driving

force to the wheels on the other drive

axle. It transmits driving force to the front

wheels if a rear wheel spins, and to the

rear wheels if a front wheel spins.

CAUTION

Do not start or run the engine while

your vehicle is supported by a jack.

The vehicle could be driven off the

jack and could pose a danger or re-

sult in serious injury.

NOTICE

Use only a spare tire of the same

brand, size, construction and load ca-

pacity as the original tires on your

Toyota because damage to the limit-

ed−slip differential could possibly oc-

cur with another tire type.

CY20013

The vehicle identification number (VIN)

is the legal identifier for your vehicle.

This number is on the left top of the

instrument panel, and can be seen

through the windshield from outside.

This is the primary identification number

for your Toyota. It is used in registering

the ownership of your vehicle.

CY20023

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is

also on the Certification Label.

06 06.08

Limited−slip differential

(four−wheel drive models) Your Toyota’s identification—

—Vehicle identification number

340 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY20014

4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine

CY20005

4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine

The engine number is stamped on the

engine block as shown. Your new vehicle carries theft preven-

tion labels which are approximately 47

mm (1.85 in.) by 12 mm (0.47 in.).

The purpose of these labels is to reduce

the incidence of vehicle thefts by facilitat-

ing the tracing and recovery of parts from

stolen vehicles. The label is designed so

that once it is applied to a surface, any

attempt to remove it will result in destroy-

ing the integrity of the label. Transferring

these labels intact from one part to anoth-

er, will be impossible.

NOTICE

You should not attempt to remove the

theft prevention labels as it may vio-

late certain state or federal laws.

06 06.08

—Engine number Theft prevention labels

(except for Canada)

341

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CAUTION

Do not modify the suspension/chassis

with lift kits, spacers, springs, etc. It

can cause dangerous handling charac-

teristics resulting in loss of control.

06 06.08

Suspension and chassis

342 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

This illustration indicates typical tire

symbols.

1. Tire size—For details, see “—Tire

size” on page 344.

2. DOT and Tire Identification

Number (TIN)—For details, see

“—DOT and Tire Identification

Number (TIN)” on page 343.

3. Uniform tire quality grading—

For details, see “Uniform tire quali-

ty grading” that follows.

4. The location of the tread wear

indicators—For details, see

“Checking and replacing tires” on

page 427.

5. Tire ply composition and mate-

rials—Plies mean a layer of rub-

ber−coated parallel cords. Cords

mean the strands forming the plies

in the tire.

6. Radial tires or bias−ply tires—A

radial tire has “RADIAL” on the

sidewall. A tire not marked with

“RADIAL” is a bias−ply tire.

06 06.08

Tire information—

—Tire symbols

CY20028y

343

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

7. “TUBELESS” or “TUBE

TYPE”—A tubeless tire does not

have a tube inside the tire and air

is directly filled in the tire. A tube

type tire has a tube inside the tire

and the tube maintains the air

pressure.

8. Load limit at maximum cold tire

inflation pressure—For details,

see “Checking and replacing tires”

on page 427.

9. Maximum cold tire inflation

pressure—This means the pres-

sure to which a tire may be in-

flated. For details about recom-

mended cold tire inflation

pressure, see “Tires” on page 451.

10.Summer tire or all season

tire—An all season tire has “M+S”

on the sidewall. The tire not

marked with “M+S” is a summer

tire. For details, see “Types of

tires” on page 354.

CY20027

This illustration indicates typical DOT

and Tire Identification Number (TIN).

1. “DOT” symbol

2. Tire Identification Number (TIN)

3. Tire manufacturer’s identification

mark

4. Tire size code

5. Manufacturer’s optional tire type

code (3 or 4 letters)

6. Manufacturing week

7. Manufacturing year

The “DOT” symbol certifies that the

tire conforms to applicable Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

06 06.08

—DOT and Tire Identification

Number (TIN)

344 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY20029

This illustration indicates typical tire

size.

1. Tire use (P=Passenger car,

T=Temporary use)

2. Section width (in millimeters)

3. Aspect ratio (tire height to section

width)

4. Tire construction code (R=Radial,

D=Diagonal)

5. Wheel diameter (in inches)

6. Load index (2 digits or 3 digits)

7. Speed symbol (alphabet with one

letter)

Z20007

1. Section width

2. Tire height

3. Wheel diameter

Z20008

1. Bead

2. Sidewall

3. Shoulder

4. Tread

5. Belt

6. Inner liner

7. Reinforcing rubber

8. Carcass

9. Rim lines

10.Bead wires

11.Chafer

06 06.08

—Tire size —Name of each section of tire

345

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

This information has been prepared

in accordance with regulations issued

by the National Highway Traffic Safe-

ty Administration of the U.S. Depart-

ment of Transportation. It provides

the purchasers and/or prospective

purchasers of Toyota vehicles with in-

formation on uniform tire quality grad-

ing.

Your Toyota dealer will help answer

any questions you may have as you

read this information.

DOT quality grades—All passenger

vehicle tires must conform to Fed-

eral Safety Requirements in addi-

tion to these grades. Quality

grades can be found where appli-

cable on the tire sidewall between

tread shoulder and maximum sec-

tion width. For example: Treadwear

200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear—The treadwear grade is

a comparative rating based on the

wear rate of the tire when tested un-

der controlled conditions on a speci-

fied government test course. For ex-

ample, a tire graded 150 would wear

one and a half (1−1/2) times as well

on the government course as a tire

graded 100. The relative performance

of tires depends upon the actual

conditions of their use, however, and

may depart significantly from the

norm due to variations in driving hab-

its, service practices and differences

in road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B, C—The traction

grades, from highest to lowest, are

AA, A, B, and C, and they represent

the tire’s ability to stop on wet pave-

ment as measured under controlled

conditions on specified government

test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.

A tire marked C may have poor trac-

tion performance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned

to this tire is based on braking

(straight ahead) traction tests and

does not include cornering (turning)

traction.

06 06.08

—Uniform Tire Quality

Grading

346 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Temperature A, B, C—The tempera-

ture grades are A (the highest), B,

and C, representing the tire’s resis-

tance to the generation of heat and

its ability to dissipate heat when

tested under controlled conditions on

a specified indoor laboratory test

wheel. Sustained high temperature

can cause the material of the tire to

degenerate and reduce tire life, and

excessive temperature can lead to

sudden tire failure. The grade C cor-

responds to a level of performance

which all passenger car tires must

meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standard No.109. Grades B

and A represent higher levels of per-

formance on the laboratory test wheel

than the minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grades for

this tire are established for a tire that

is properly inflated and not over-

loaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-

tion, or excessive loading, either sep-

arately or in combination, can cause

heat buildup and possible tire failure.

06 06.08

347

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Tire related term Meaning

Accessory weight

the combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be

replaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power

windows, power seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that these items

are available as factory−installed equipment (whether installed or not)

Cold tire inflation pressure tire inflation pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at least 3

hours or more, or it has not been driven more than 1.5 km or 1 mile

under that condition

Curb weight the weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the

maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so equipped, air

conditioning and additional weight optional engine

Intended outboard sidewall

(A) the sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears

manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or

deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or

(B) the outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular

side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle

Maximum inflation pressure the maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated and it

is shown on the sidewall of the tire

Maximum loaded vehicle weight

the sum of—

(a) curb weight;

(b) accessory weight;

(d) production options weight

06 06.08

—Glossary of tire terminology

348 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Tire related term Meaning

Normal occupant weight 68 kg (150 lb.) times the number of occupants specified in the second

column of Table 1 that follows

Occupant distribution distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table

1 that follows

Production options weight

the combined weight of those installed regular production options weighing

over 2.3 kg (5 lb.) in excess of those standard items which they replace,

not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including

heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special

trim

Recommended inflation pressure cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer

Rim a metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads

are seated

Rim diameter (Wheel diameter) nominal diameter of the bead seat

Rim size designation rim diameter and width

Rim type designation the industry of manufacturer’s designation for a rim by style or code

Rim width nominal distance between rim flanges

Vehicle capacity weight

(Total load capacity) the rated cargo and luggage load plus 68 kg (150 lb.) times the vehicle’s desig-

nated seating capacity

Vehicle maximum load on the tire the load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle

its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing by two

06 06.08

349

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Tire related term Meaning

Vehicle normal load on the tire the load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle

its share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight

(distributed in accordance with Table 1 that follows) and dividing by two

Weather side the surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire

Table 1—Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities

Designated seating capacity,

number of occupants Vehicle normal load, number of

occupants Occupant distribution in a normally

loaded vehicle

2 through 4 22 in front

5 through 10 32 in front, 1 in second seat

06 06.08

350 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Vehicle load limits include total load

capacity, seating capacity, towing ca-

pacity and cargo capacity. Follow the

load limits shown below. Total load ca-

pacity and seating capacity are also

described on the tire and loading in-

formation label. For location of the tire

and loading information label, see

“Checking tire inflation pressure” on

page 425.

Total load capacity:

With 5 occupants:

431 kg (950 lb.)

With 7 occupants:

477 kg (1050 lb.)

Total load capacity means com-

bined weight of occupants, cargo

and luggage. Tongue load is in-

cluded when trailer towing.

Seating capacity:

Without third seats:

Total 5 (Front 2, Rear 3)

With third seats:

Total 7 (Front 2, Rear 5)

Seating capacity means the maxi-

mum number of occupants whose

estimated average weight is 68 kg

(150 lb.) per person. Depending on

the weight of each person, the seat-

ing capacity given may exceed the

total load capacity.

NOTICE

Even if the number of occu-

pants are within the seating ca-

pacity, do not exceed the total

load capacity.

Towing capacity:

For weight carrying hitch

2268 kg (5000 lb.)

Also for weight distributing hitch

(4.7 L V8 [2UZ−FE] engine only)

Two−wheel drive models

3311 kg (7300 lb.)

Four−wheel drive models

3175 kg (7000 lb.)

Towing capacity means the maxi-

mum gross trailer weight (trailer

weight plus its cargo weight) that

your vehicle is able to tow.

06 06.08

Vehicle load limits

351

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Cargo capacity

Cargo capacity may increase or de-

crease depending on the size (weight)

and the number of occupants. For de-

tails, see “Capacity and distribution”

that follows.

CAUTION

Do not apply the load more than

each load limit. That may cause

not only damage to the tires, but

also deterioration to the steering

ability and braking ability, which

may cause an accident.

When stowing cargo and luggage in

the vehicle, observe the following:

Put cargo and luggage in the lug-

gage compartment when at all

possible. Be sure all items are se-

cured in place.

Be careful to keep the vehicle bal-

anced. Locating the weight as far

forward as possible helps maintain

balance.

For better fuel economy, do not

carry unneeded weight.

CAUTION

To prevent cargo and luggage

from sliding forward during

braking, do not stack anything

in the luggage compartment

higher than the seatbacks.

Keep cargo and luggage low,

as close to the floor as pos-

sible.

Do not store more than 91 kg

(200 lb.) of cargo and luggage

in the luggage compartment. If

the third seats are occupied,

do not store cargo and luggage

in the luggage compartment.

Do not place anything on the

flattened seat or it may slide

forward during braking.

Never allow anyone to ride in

the luggage compartment. It is

not designed for passengers.

They should ride in their seats

with their seat belts properly

fastened. Otherwise, they are

much more likely to suffer seri-

ous bodily injury, in the event

of sudden braking or a colli-

sion.

06 06.08

Cargo and luggage—

—Stowage precautions

352 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Do not place anything on the

luggage cover. Such items may

be thrown about and possibly

injure people in the vehicle

during sudden braking or an

accident. Secure all items in a

safe place.

Do not drive with objects left

on top of the instrument panel.

They may interfere with the

driver’s field of view. Or they

may move during sharp vehicle

acceleration or turning, and im-

pair the driver’s control of the

vehicle. In an accident they

may injure the vehicle occu-

pants.

Cargo capacity depends on the to-

tal weight of the occupants.

(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capac-

ity) – (Total weight of occupants)

Steps for Determining Correct

Load Limit—

(1) Locate the statement “The com-

bined weight of occupants and

cargo should never exceed XXX

kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s

placard.

(2) Determine the combined weight

of the driver and passengers that

will be riding in your vehicle.

(3) Subtract the combined weight of

the driver and passengers from

XXX kg or XXX lbs.

(4) The resulting figure equals the

available amount of cargo and

luggage load capacity. For exam-

ple, if the “XXX” amount equals

1400 lbs. and there will be five

150 lb passengers in your ve-

hicle, the amount of available

cargo and luggage load capacity

is 650 lbs. (1400–750

(5x150)=650 lbs.)

(5) Determine the combined weight

of luggage and cargo being

loaded on the vehicle. That

weight may not safely exceed the

available cargo and luggage load

capacity calculated in Step 4.

(6) If your vehicle will be towing a

trailer, load from your trailer will

be transferred to your vehicle.

Consult this manual to determine

how this reduces the available

cargo and luggage load capacity

of your vehicle.

For details about trailer towing, see

page 362.

06 06.08

—Capacity and distribution

353

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Z20004

Cargo

capacity

Total load

capacity

Example on Your Vehicle

In case that 2 people with the com-

bined weight of 166 kg (366 lb.) are

riding in your vehicle with the total

load capacity of 431 kg (950 lb.), the

available amount of cargo and lug-

gage load capacity will be as follows:

With 5 occupants:

431 kg – 166 kg = 265 kg.

(950 lb. – 366 lb. = 584 lb.)

With 7 occupants:

477 kg – 166 kg = 311 kg.

(1050 lb. – 366 lb. = 684 lb.)

From this condition, if 3 more passen-

gers with the combined weight of 176

kg (388 lb.) get on, the available car-

go and luggage load will be reduced

as follows:

With 5 occupants:

265 kg – 176 kg = 89 kg.

(584 lb. – 388 lb. = 196 lb.)

With 7 occupants:

311 kg – 176 kg = 135 kg.

(683 lb. – 388 lb. = 295 lb.)

As shown in the above example, if the

number of occupants increases, the

cargo and luggage load equaling the

combined weight of occupants who

got on later must be reduced. In other

words, if the increase in the number

of occupants causes the excess of

the total load capacity (combined

weight of occupants plus cargo and

luggage load), you have to reduce the

cargo and luggage on your vehicle.

For details about total load capacity,

see “Vehicle load limits” on page 350.

CAUTION

Even if the total load of occu-

pant’s weight and the cargo load

is less than the total load capac-

ity, do not apply the load uneven-

ly. That may cause not only dam-

age to the tire but also deteriora-

tion to the steering ability due to

unbalance of the vehicle, causing

an accident.

06 06.08

354 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY20024

Cargo

capacity

Weight of the

removed third

seat

SEATING CONFIGURATION

VARIATION

In case of removing the rear seats,

it is possible to load as much cargo

as the weight of the removed seats.

(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capac-

ity) − (Total weight of occupants) +

(Weight of the removed rear seats)

Rear seats weights:

Each seat 11 kg (24 lb.)

Determine what kind of tires your

vehicle is originally equipped with.

1. Summer tires

Summer tires are high−speed capabil-

ity tires best suited to highway driving

under dry conditions.

Since summer tires do not have the

same traction performance as snow

tires, summer tires are inadequate for

driving on snow−covered or icy roads.

For driving on snow−covered or icy

roads, we recommend using snow

tires. If installing snow tires, be sure

to replace all four tires.

2. All season tires

All season tires are designed to pro-

vide better traction in snow and to be

adequate for driving in most winter

conditions, as well as for use all year

round.

All season tires, however, do not have

adequate traction performance

compared with snow tires in heavy or

loose snow. Also, all season tires fall

short in acceleration and handling

performance compared with summer

tires in highway driving.

The details about how to distinguish

summer tires from all season tires are

described on page 342.

CAUTION

Do not mix summer and all sea-

son tires on your vehicle as

this can cause dangerous han-

dling characteristics, resulting

in loss of control.

Do not use tire other than the

manufacturer’s designated

tires, and never mix tires or

wheels of the sizes different

from the originals.

06 06.08

Types of tires

355

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

STARTING AND DRIVING

Starting and driving

Before starting the engine 356. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

How to start the engine 356. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tips for driving in various conditions 357. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Off−road driving precautions 359. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Winter driving tips 360. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Dinghy towing 361. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Trailer towing 362. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

How to save fuel and make your vehicle last longer 371. . . . . . . . . . . . .

06 06.08

SECTION

356 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

1. Check the area around the vehicle be-

fore entering it.

2. Adjust seat position, seatback angle,

seat cushion angle, head restraint

height and steering wheel angle.

3. Adjust the inside and outside rear view

mirrors.

4. Lock all doors.

5. Fasten seat belts.

Once you turn the ignition key to “START”

position and release it, the cranking hold

function continues to crank the engine in

“ON” position until it starts.

The function stops cranking the engine

after about 25 seconds maximum if the

engine has not started yet. When you

crank the engine again, wait a few sec-

onds and restart it.

If you hold the key in “START” position,

the function will keep cranking for about

30 seconds maximum.

1. Apply the parking brake firmly.

2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces-

sories.

3. Put the selector lever in “P”. If you

need to restart the engine while the

vehicle is moving, put the selector le-

ver in “N”. A starter safety device will

prevent the starter from operating if the

selector lever is in any drive position.

4. Depress the brake pedal and hold it to

the floor until driving off.

06 06.08

Before starting the engine How to start the engine—

—Cranking hold function (a) Before cranking

357

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Before starting the engine, be sure to fol-

low the instructions in “(a) Before crank-

ing”.

Normal starting procedure

The multiport fuel injection system/sequen-

tial multiport fuel injection system in your

engine automatically controls the proper

air−fuel mixture for starting. You can start

a cold or hot engine as follows:

With your foot off the accelerator pedal,

turn the ignition key to “START” position,

then release it.

Engine should be warmed up by driving,

not in idle. For warming up, drive with

smoothly turning engine until engine cool-

ant temperature is within normal range.

If the engine stalls...

Simply restart it, using the correct proce-

dure given in normal starting.

If the engine will not start...

See “If your vehicle will not start” on page

374 in Section 4.

NOTICE



Do not race a cold engine.



If the engine becomes difficult to

start or stalls frequently, have the

engine checked immediately.

Always slow down in gusty crosswinds.

This will allow you much better control.

Drive slowly onto curbs and, if pos-

sible, at a right angle. Avoid driving

onto high, sharp−edged objects and

other road hazards. Failure to do so

can lead to severe tire damage such

as a tire burst.

Drive slowly when passing over bumps

or travelling on a bumpy road. Other-

wise, the impact could cause severe

damage to the tires and/or wheels.

When parking on a hill, turn the front

wheels until they touch the curb so

that the vehicle will not roll. Apply the

parking brake, and place the transmis-

sion in “P”. If necessary, block the

wheels.

Washing your vehicle or driving through

deep water may get the brakes wet. To

see whether they are wet, check that

there is no traffic near you, and then

press the pedal lightly. If you do not

feel a normal braking force, the brakes

are probably wet. To dry them, drive

the vehicle cautiously while lightly

pressing the brake pedal with the park-

ing brake applied. If they still do not

work safely, pull to the side of the road

and call a Toyota dealer for assistance.

06 06.08

(b) Starting the engine Tips for driving in various

conditions

358 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Vehicles with rear height control air

suspension: When you drive on a

bumpy road, it is recommended that

the vehicle height should be set in the

“N” (normal) or “H” (high) mode.

CAUTION

Before driving off, make sure that

the parking brake is fully released

and the parking brake reminder

light is off.

Do not leave your vehicle unat-

tended while the engine is running.

Do not rest your foot on the brake

pedal while driving. It can cause

dangerous overheating, needless

wear, and poor fuel economy.

To drive down a long or steep hill,

reduce your speed and downshift.

Remember, if you ride the brakes

excessively, they may overheat and

not work properly.

Be careful when accelerating, up-

shifting, downshifting or braking on

a slippery surface. Sudden accelera-

tion or engine braking, could cause

the vehicle to skid or spin.

Do not drive in excess of the speed

limit. Even if the legal speed limit

permits it, do not drive over 140

km/h (85 mph) unless your vehicle

has high−speed capability tires.

Driving over 140 km/h (85 mph) may

result in tire failure, loss of control

and possible injury. Be sure to con-

sult a tire dealer to determine

whether the tires on your vehicle

are high−speed capability tires or

not before driving at such speeds.

Do not continue normal driving

when the brakes are wet. If they are

wet, your vehicle will require a

longer stopping distance, and it

may pull to one side when the

brakes are applied. Also, the park-

ing brake will not hold the vehicle

securely.

Vehicles with rear height control air

suspension: If you drive through

deep water over about 700 mm (28

in.) in depth, put the vehicle height

in the “H” (high) mode with the

height select switch and then turn

off the rear height control air sus-

pension by pushing the “HEIGHT

CONTROL OFF” switch. Drive your

vehicle at 30 km/h (19 mph) or low-

er speed.

06 06.08

359

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

When driving your vehicle off−road, please

observe the following precautions to en-

sure your driving enjoyment and to help

prevent the closure of areas to off−road

vehicles.

a. Drive your vehicle only in areas where

off−road vehicles are permitted to trav-

el.

b. Respect private property. Get owner’s

permission before entering private prop-

erty.

c. Do not enter areas that are closed.

Honor gates, barriers and signs that re-

strict travel.

d. Stay on established roads. When condi-

tions are wet, driving techniques should

be changed or travel delayed to pre-

vent damage to roads.

For owners in U.S. mainland, Hawaii and

Puerto Rico:

To obtain additional information pertaining

to driving your vehicle off−road, consult

the following organizations.

State and Local Parks and Recreation

Departments

State Motor Vehicle Bureau

Recreational Vehicle Clubs

U.S. Forest Service and Bureau of

Land Management

CAUTION

Always observe the following precau-

tions to minimize the risk of serious

personal injury or damage to your ve-

hicle:

Drive carefully when off the road.

Do not take unnecessary risks by

driving in dangerous places.

Do not grip the steering wheel

spokes when driving off−road. A

bad bump could jerk the wheel and

injure your hands. Keep both hands

and especially your thumbs on the

outside of the rim.

Always check your brakes for effec-

tiveness immediately after driving in

sand, mud, water or snow.

After driving through tall grass,

mud, rock, sand, rivers, etc., check

that there is no grass, bush, paper,

rags, stone, sand, etc. adhering or

trapped on the underbody. Clear off

any such matter from the under-

body. If the vehicle is used with

these materials trapped or adhering

to the underbody, a breakdown or

fire could occur.

In a rollover crash, an unbelted per-

son is significantly more likely to

die than a person wearing a seat

belt. Therefore, the driver and all

passengers should fasten their seat

belts whenever the vehicle is mov-

ing.

When driving off−road or in rugged

terrain, do not drive at excessive

speeds, jump, make sharp turns,

strike objects, etc. This may cause

loss of control or vehicle rollover

causing death or serious injury. You

are also risking expensive damage

to your vehicle’s suspension and

chassis.

06 06.08

Off−road driving precautions

360 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

NOTICE



If driving through water, such as

when crossing shallow streams,

first check the depth of the water

and the bottom of the river bed for

firmness. Drive slowly and avoid

deep water.



Take all necessary safety measures

to ensure that water damage to the

engine or other components does

not occur.

Water entering the engine air intake

will cause severe engine damage.



Water entering the automatic trans-

mission will cause deterioration in

shift quality, locking up of your

transmission accompanied by vibra-

tion, and ultimately damage.

Water can wash the grease from

wheel bearings, causing rusting and

premature failure, and may also en-

ter the differentials, transmission

and transfer case, reducing the gear

oil’s lubricating qualities.



Sand and mud that has accumulated

in brake drums and around brake

discs may affect braking efficiency

and may damage brake system com-

ponents.



Always perform a maintenance

inspection after each day of

off−road driving that has taken you

through rough terrain, sand, mud,

or water. For scheduled

maintenance information, refer to

the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide”

or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

Make sure your coolant is properly pro-

tected against freezing.

Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”

or similar high quality ethylene glycol

based non−silicate, non−amine, non−nitrite,

and non−borate coolant with long−life hy-

brid organic acid technology. (Coolant with

long−life hybrid organic acid technology is

a combination of low phosphates and or-

ganic acids.)

See “Checking the engine coolant level”

on page 422 in Section 7−2 for details of

coolant type selection.

For the U.S.A.—“Toyota Super Long Life

Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and

50% deionized water. This coolant pro-

vides protection down to about −35C

(−31F).

For the Canada—“Toyota Super Long Life

Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and

45% deionized water. This coolant pro-

vides protection down to about −42C

(−44F).

NOTICE

Do not use plain water alone.

06 06.08

Winter driving tips

361

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Check the condition of the battery and

cables.

Cold temperatures reduce the capacity of

any battery, so it must be in top shape to

provide enough power for winter starting.

Section 7−3 tells you how to visually in-

spect the battery. Your Toyota dealer and

most service stations will be pleased to

check the level of charge.

Make sure the engine oil viscosity is

suitable for the cold weather.

See page 420 in Section 7−2 for recom-

mended viscosity. Leaving a heavy sum-

mer oil in your vehicle during winter

months may cause harder starting. If you

are not sure about which oil to use, call

your Toyota dealer—they will be pleased

to help.

Keep the door locks from freezing.

Squirt lock de−icer or glycerine into the

locks to keep them from freezing.

Use a washer fluid containing an anti-

freeze solution.

This product is available at your Toyota

dealer and most auto parts stores. Follow

the manufacturer’s directions for how

much to mix with water.

NOTICE

Do not use engine antifreeze or any

other substitute because it may dam-

age your vehicle’s paint.

Do not use your parking brake when

there is a possibility it could freeze.

When parking, put the transmission into

“P” and block the front wheels. Do not

use the parking brake, or snow or water

accumulated in and around the parking

brake mechanism may freeze, making it

hard to release.

Keep ice and snow from accumulating

under the fenders.

Ice and snow built up under your fenders

can make steering difficult. During bad

winter driving, stop and check under the

fenders occasionally.

Depending on where you are driving,

we recommend you carry some emer-

gency equipment.

Some of the things you might put in the

vehicle are tire chains, window scraper,

bag of sand or salt, flares, small shovel,

jumper cables, etc.

CY30020

Your vehicle is not designed to be

dinghy towed (with four wheels on the

ground) behind a motorhome.

NOTICE

Do not tow your vehicle with four

wheels on the ground. This may

cause serious damage to your vehicle.

06 06.08

Dinghy towing

362 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Your vehicle is designed primarily as a

passenger−and−load−carrying vehicle. Tow-

ing a trailer will have an adverse effect on

handling, performance, braking, durability

and driving economy (fuel consumption,

etc.). Your safety and satisfaction depend

on the proper use of correct equipment

and cautious driving habits. For your safe-

ty and the safety of others, you must not

overload your vehicle or trailer. Ask your

local Toyota dealer for further details be-

fore towing.

CAUTION

Vehicles with rear height control air

suspension: When disconnecting a

trailer, put the vehicle height in the

“LO” (low) mode and push the

“HEIGHT CONTROL OFF” switch to

turn off the rear height control air

suspension. Otherwise, the vehicle

height may be changed in the auto-

matic leveling function, resulting in

accident. For details see “Rear height

control air suspension” on page 184

in Section 1−7.

WEIGHT LIMITS

Before towing, make sure the total trail-

er weight, gross combination weight,

gross vehicle weight, gross axle weight

and trailer tongue load are all within

the limits.

The total trailer weight and tongue load

can be measured with platform scales

found at a highway weighing station, build-

ing supply company, trucking company,

junk yard, etc.

CY30023

For weight carrying hitch

CY30024

Also for weight distributing hitch

06 06.08

Trailer towing

363

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CAUTION

The maximum gross trailer weight

(trailer weight plus cargo weight)

must never exceed the following for

vehicle with equipped. For details,

contact your Toyota dealer.

According to the hitch receiver

type, the maximum gross trailer

weight and hitch that can be used

differs. Refer to the above illustra-

tions to confirm the hitch receiver

type for your vehicle.

For weight carrying hitch

2268 kg (5000 lb.)

Also for weight distributing hitch

(4.7 L V8 [2UZ−FE] engine only)

Two−wheel drive models

3311 kg (7300 lb.)

Four−wheel drive models

3175 kg (7000 lb.)

If towing a trailer and cargo weigh-

ing over 2268 kg (5000 lb.), Toyota

recommends to use a weight dis-

tributing hitch.

If towing a trailer and cargo weigh-

ing over 907 kg (2000 lb.), it is

necessary to use a sway control

device with sufficient capacity. The

combination of the gross trailer

weight added to the total weight of

the vehicle, occupants and vehicle

cargo must never exceed a total of

the following.

For weight carrying hitch

4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine

4354 kg (9600 lb.)

4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine

4422 kg (9750 lb.)

Also for weight distributing hitch

(4.7 L V8 [2UZ−FE] engine only)

5443 kg (12000 lb.)

Exceeding the maximum weight of

the trailer, the vehicle, or the ve-

hicle and trailer combination, can

cause an accident resulting in seri-

ous personal injuries.

CY30015

Trailer hitch assemblies have differ-

ent weight capacities established by

the hitch manufacturer. Even though

the vehicle may be physically capa-

ble of towing a higher weight, the

operator must determine the maxi-

mum weight rating of the particular

hitch assembly and never exceed

the maximum weight rating speci-

fied for the trailer−hitch. Exceeding

the maximum weight rating set by

the trailer hitch manufacturer can

cause an accident resulting in seri-

ous personal injuries.

06 06.08

364 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

The gross vehicle weight must not

exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight

Rating (GVWR) indicated on the

Certification Label. The gross vehi-

cle weight is the sum of weights of

the unloaded vehicle, driver, pas-

sengers, luggage, hitch and trailer

tongue load. It also includes the

weight of any special equipment

installed on your vehicle.

The load on either the front or rear

axle resulting from distribution of

the gross vehicle weight on both

axles must not exceed the front and

rear Gross Axle Weight Ratings

(GAWR) listed on the Certification

Label.

CY30001

Total trailer weight Tongue load

Tongue load

Total trailer weight

100 = 10%

The trailer cargo load should be

distributed so that the tongue load

is 10% of the total trailer weight,

not exceeding the maximum load of

the following.

For weight carrying hitch

227 kg (500 lb.)

Also for weight distributing hitch

(4.7 L V8 [2UZ−FE] engine only)

Two−wheel drive models

331 kg (730 lb.)

Four−wheel drive models

317 kg (700 lb.)

Never load the trailer with more

weight in the back than in the

front. About 60% of the trailer load

should be in the front half of the

trailer and the remaining 40% in the

rear.

06 06.08

365

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

HITCHES

If you wish to install a trailer hitch, you

should consult with your Toyota dealer.

Use only a hitch recommended by the

hitch manufacturer and the one which

conforms to the total trailer weight re-

quirement.

According to the hitch receiver type,

the maximum gross trailer weight and

hitch that can be used differs. Refer to

the above illustrations to confirm the

hitch receiver type for your vehicle.

If you wish to install an aftermarket

hitch, the hitch must be bolted securely

to the vehicle frame and installed ac-

cording to the hitch manufactures’ in-

structions.

The hitch ball and king pin should have

a light coat of grease.

Toyota recommends the ball mount as-

sembly be removed when not towing to

prevent injury and to prevent damage

in the event of a rear end collision.

After removing the ball mount assem-

bly, install the grommet to the hitch to

prevent entry of dirt and mud.

CAUTION

Do not tow the vehicle using the

hooked portion of the weight carrying

hitch. The hooked portion may break

and cause serious injury or damage

to the vehicle.

NOTICE



Do not install weight distributing

hitch to weight carrying hitch re-

ceiver because it will be damaged

your vehicle.



Do not use axle−mounted hitches as

they can cause damage to the axle

housing, wheel bearings, wheels or

tires. Also, never install a hitch

which may interfere with the normal

function of an Energy Absorbing

Bumper, if so equipped.

CY30003

1 Trailer ball load rating

2 Ball diameter

3 Shank length

4 Shank diameter

06 06.08

366 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

TRAILER BALL

Follow these easy steps to properly deter-

mine the correct trailer ball for your ap-

plication:

1. Determine the correct trailer ball size

for the trailer coupler. Most couplers

are stamped with the required trailer

ball size. The sizes you will most likely

find stamped on the coupler are:

Trailer class Typical trailer ball size

IV 2 5/16 in.

II and III 2in.

I1 7/8 in.

2. Select the appropriate trailer ball to

match or exceed the gross trailer

weight rating of the trailer. The trailer

ball load rating should be printed on

the top of the ball.

3. When mounted in the ball mount, the

threaded ball shank must protrude be-

yond the bottom of the lock washer

and nut at least 2 threads. The trailer

ball shank must be matched to the ball

mount hole diameter size.

NOTICE

Only use a ball mount attachment

specified for the Toyota 4runner.

CY30004

CY30005

1 Coupler

2 Trailer ball

3 Ball mount attachment

MATCHING TRAILER BALL HEIGHT TO

TRAILER COUPLER HEIGHT

No matter which class of tow hitch ap-

plies, for a safe trailer hookup, the trailer

ball setup on must be the proper height

for the coupler on the trailer.

BRAKES AND SAFETY CHAINS

Toyota recommends trailers with

brakes that conform to any applica-

ble federal and state/provincial regu-

lations.

A safety chain must always be used

between the towing vehicle and the

trailer. Leave sufficient slack in the

chain for turns. The chain should

cross under the trailer tongue to

prevent the tongue from dropping to

the ground in case it becomes dam-

aged or separated. For correct safety

chain procedures, follow the hitch or

trailer manufacturer’s recommenda-

tions.

06 06.08

367

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CAUTION

If the total trailer weight exceeds

453 kg (1000 lb.), trailer brakes are

required.

Never tap into your vehicle’s hy-

draulic system as it would lower its

braking effectiveness.

Never tow a trailer without using a

safety chain securely attached to

both the trailer and the vehicle. If

damage occurs to the coupling unit

or hitch ball, there is danger of the

trailer wandering over into another

lane.

CY30008

SERVICE CONNECTOR FOR TOWING

BRAKE CONTROLLER

Your vehicle is equipped with a service

connector for the towing brake controller

as shown. Link the connector to the tow-

ing brake controller via the sub wire har-

ness stored in the glove box. The detailed

explanation of the sub wire harness circuit

is packed together with the sub wire har-

ness.

Be sure to position the towing brake con-

troller where it does not prevent the driver

from operating the pedal.

Toyota recommends that the sub wire har-

ness be stored in the glove box when it

is not in use.

TIRES

Ensure that your vehicle’s tires are

properly inflated. See page 425 in Sec-

tion 7−2 and page 451 in Section 8 for

instructions.

The trailer tires should be inflated to

the pressure recommended by the trail-

er manufacturer in respect to the total

trailer weight.

06 06.08

368 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY30025

TOWING CONNECTOR FOR TRAILER

LIGHTS

Your vehicle is equipped with a wire

harness stored in the rear end under

body. Some models are fitted with a

socket for trailer lights under the rear

bumper. Use either of them to connect

and operate the trailer lights. However,

the trailer lights must comply with fed-

eral, state/provincial and local regula-

tions. See your local recreational ve-

hicle dealer or rental agency for the

correct type of wiring and relays for

your trailer. Check for correct operation

of the turn signals and stop lights each

time you hitch up. Direct splicing may

damage your vehicle’s electrical system

and cause a malfunction of your lights.

The towing connector can be also con-

nected to the trailer brake and trailer

sub battery.

BREAK−IN SCHEDULE

Toyota recommends that you do not

tow a trailer with a new vehicle or a

vehicle with any new power train com-

ponent (engine, transmission, differen-

tial, wheel bearing, etc.) for the first

800 km (500 miles) of driving.

MAINTENANCE

If you tow a trailer, your vehicle will

require more frequent maintenance due

to the additional load. For this

information, please refer to the

scheduled maintenance information in

the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or

“Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

Retighten all fixing bolts of the towing

ball and bracket after approximately

1000 km (600 miles) of trailer driving.

CONNECTING A TRAILER (models with

rear height control air suspension)

Stop your vehicle and a trailer in line and

perform the following:

1. Put the rear height control air suspen-

sion in the “LO” (low) mode. Turn the

ignition switch off or push the “HEIGHT

CONTROL OFF” switch to turn off the

rear height control air suspension.

2. Connect a trailer.

3. Turn the ignition switch on or push the

“HEIGHT CONTROL OFF” switch to

turn on the rear height control air sus-

pension. Select the “N” (normal) mode

with the height select switch.

06 06.08

369

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

DISCONNECTING A TRAILER (models

with rear height control air suspension)

Stop your vehicle and a trailer in line and

perform the following:

1. Put the rear height control air suspen-

sion in the “LO” (low) mode. (Make

sure the vehicle height is in the “LO”

(low) mode by pushing the height se-

lect switch on the “” side.)

2. Turn the ignition switch off or push the

“HEIGHT CONTROL OFF” switch to

turn off the rear height control air sus-

pension.

3. Set the supporting leg of a trailer on

the ground and raise the hitch by 100

mm (4 in.).

4. Turn the ignition switch on or push the

“HEIGHT CONTROL OFF” switch to

turn on the rear height control air sus-

pension.

5. Wait for about 20 seconds until the

rear vehicle height is lowered by the

automatic leveling function.

6. Make sure the hitch is disconnected. If

not, raise the hitch higher and repeat

steps 2 through 5.

7. Move the vehicle forward in the “LO”

(low) mode where the hitch does not

touch anything in the “N” (normal)

mode.

8. Put the rear height control air suspen-

sion in the “N” (normal) mode.

PRE−TOWING SAFETY CHECK

Check that your vehicle remains level

when a loaded or unloaded trailer is

hitched. Do not drive if the vehicle has

an abnormal nose−up or nose−down

condition, and check for improper

tongue load, overload, worn suspension

or other possible causes.

Make sure the trailer cargo is securely

loaded so that it cannot shift.

Check that your rear view mirrors con-

form to any applicable federal, state/

provincial or local regulations. If not,

install the rear view mirrors required

for towing purpose.

TRAILER TOWING TIPS

When towing a trailer, your vehicle will

handle differently than when not tow-

ing. The three main causes of vehicle−

trailer accidents are driver error, exces-

sive speed and improper trailer loading.

Keep these in mind when towing:

Before starting out, check operation of

the lights and all vehicle−trailer connec-

tions. After driving a short distance,

stop and recheck the lights and con-

nections. Before actually towing a trail-

er, practice turning, stopping and back-

ing with a trailer in an area away from

traffic until you learn the feel.

Backing with a trailer is difficult and

requires practice. Grip the bottom of

the steering wheel and move your hand

to the left to move the trailer to the

left. Move your hand to the right to

move the trailer to the right. (This pro-

cedure is generally opposite to that

when backing without a trailer.) Also,

just turn the steering wheel a little at

a time, avoiding sharp or prolonged

turning. Have someone guide you when

backing to reduce the risk of an acci-

dent.

06 06.08

370 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Because stopping distance may be in-

creased, vehicle−to−vehicle distance

should be increased when towing a

trailer. For each 16 km/h (10 mph) of

speed, allow at least one vehicle and

trailer length between you and the ve-

hicle ahead. Avoid sudden braking as

you may skid, resulting in jackknifing

and loss of control. This is especially

true on wet or slippery surfaces.

Avoid jerky starts or sudden accelera-

tion.

Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns.

The trailer could hit your vehicle in a

tight turn. Slow down before making a

turn to avoid the necessity of sudden

braking.

Remember that when making a turn,

the trailer wheels will be closer than

the vehicle wheels to the inside of the

turn. Therefore, compensate for this by

making a larger than normal turning

radius with your vehicle.

Crosswinds and rough roads will ad-

versely affect handling of your vehicle

and trailer, causing sway. Pay attention

to the rear from time to time to pre-

pare yourself for being passed by large

trucks or buses, which may cause your

vehicle and trailer to sway. If swaying

happens, firmly grip the steering wheel

and reduce speed immediately but

gradually. Never increase speed. Steer

straight ahead. If you make no extreme

correction with the steering or brakes,

the vehicle and trailer will stabilize.

Be careful when passing other ve-

hicles. Passing requires considerable

distance. After passing a vehicle, do

not forget the length of your trailer and

be sure you have plenty of room befo-

re changing lanes.

In order to maintain engine braking effi-

ciency, do not put the transmission in

“D”.

Because of the added load of the trail-

er, your vehicle’s engine may overheat

on hot days (at temperatures over

30C [85F]) when going up a long or

steep grade with a trailer. If the engine

coolant temperature gauge indicates

overheating, immediately turn off the air

conditioning (if in use), pull off the road

and stop in a safe spot. Refer to “If

your vehicle overheats” on page 378 in

Section 4.

Always place wheel blocks under both

the vehicle and trailer wheels when

parking. Apply the parking brake firmly.

Put the transmission in “P”. Avoid park-

ing on a slope with a trailer, but if it

cannot be avoided, do so only after

performing the following:

1. Apply the brakes and hold.

2. Have someone place wheel blocks un-

der both the vehicle and trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel blocks are in place,

release your brakes slowly until the

blocks absorb the load.

4. Apply the parking brake firmly.

5. Shift into “P” and turn off the engine.

06 06.08

371

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

When restarting out after parking on a

slope:

1. With the transmission in “P” position,

start the engine. Be sure to keep the

brake pedal depressed.

2. Shift into gear.

3. Release the parking brake and brake

pedal and slowly pull or back away

from the wheel blocks. Stop and apply

your brakes.

4. Have someone retrieve the blocks.

CAUTION

Do not exceed 72 km/h (45 mph) or

the posted towing speed limit,

whichever is lower. Because insta-

bility (swaying) of a towing vehicle−

trailer combination usually in-

creases as the speed increases, ex-

ceeding 72 km/h (45 mph) may

cause loss of control.

Slow down and downshift before

descending steep or long downhill

grades. Do not make sudden down-

shifts.

Avoid holding the brake pedal down

too long or too frequently. This

could cause the brakes to overheat

and result in reduced braking effi-

ciency.

Improving fuel economy is easy—just take

it easy. It will help make your vehicle last

longer, too. Here are some specific tips

on how to save money on both fuel and

repairs:

Keep your tires inflated at the cor-

rect pressure. Underinflation causes

tire wear and wastes fuel. See page

425 in Section 7−2 for instructions.

Do not carry unneeded weight in

your vehicle. Excess weight puts a

heavier load on the engine, causing

greater fuel consumption.

Avoid lengthy warm−up idling. Once

the engine is running smoothly, begin

driving—but gently. Remember, howev-

er, that on cold winter days this may

take a little longer.

Put the selector lever into the “D”

when engine braking is not required.

Driving with the selector lever in “4”

will reduce the fuel economy. (For de-

tails, see “Automatic transmission” on

page 159 in Section 1−7.)

Accelerate slowly and smoothly.

Avoid jackrabbit starts. Get into high

gear as quickly as possible.

06 06.08

How to save fuel and make

your vehicle last longer

372 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Avoid long engine idling. If you have

a long wait and you are not in traffic,

it is better to turn off the engine and

start again later.

Avoid engine lugging or over−rev-

ving. Use a gear position suitable for

the road on which you are travelling.

Avoid continuous speeding up and

slowing down. Stop−and−go driving

wastes fuel.

Avoid unnecessary stopping and

braking. Maintain a steady pace. Try

to time the traffic signals so you only

need to stop as little as possible or

take advantage of through streets to

avoid traffic lights. Keep a proper dis-

tance from other vehicles to avoid sud-

den braking. This will also reduce wear

on your brakes.

Avoid heavy traffic or traffic jams

whenever possible.

Do not rest your foot on the brake

pedal. This causes premature wear,

overheating and poor fuel economy.

Maintain a moderate speed on high-

ways. The faster you drive, the greater

the fuel consumption. By reducing your

speed, you will cut down on fuel con-

sumption.

Keep the front wheels in proper

alignment. Avoid hitting the curb and

slow down on rough roads. Improper

alignment not only causes faster tire

wear but also puts an extra load on

the engine, which, in turn, wastes fuel.

Keep the bottom of your vehicle free

from mud, etc. This not only lessens

weight but also helps prevent corro-

sion.

Keep your vehicle tuned−up and in

top shape. A dirty air cleaner,

improper valve clearance, dirty plugs,

dirty oil and grease, brakes not

adjusted, etc. all lower engine

performance and contribute to poor fuel

economy. For longer life of all parts

and lower operating costs, keep all

maintenance work on schedule, and if

you often drive under severe

conditions, see that your vehicle

receives more frequent maintenance.

(For scheduled maintenance

information, please refer to the

“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or

“Owner’s Manual Supplement”.)

CAUTION

Never turn off the engine to coast

down hills. Your power steering and

brake booster will not function with-

out the engine running. Also, the

emission control system operates

properly only when the engine is run-

ning.

06 06.08

373

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY

In case of an emergency

If your vehicle will not start 374. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If your engine stalls while driving 377. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If you cannot increase engine speed 378. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If your vehicle overheats 378. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If you have a flat tire 379. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If your vehicle becomes stuck 389. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If your vehicle needs to be towed 389. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If you cannot shift automatic transmission selector lever 394. . . . . . . .

If you lose your keys 395. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If you lose your wireless remote control transmitter 395. . . . . . . . . . . . .

06 06.08

SECTION

374 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Before making these checks, make sure

you have followed the correct starting pro-

cedure given in “How to start the engine”

on page 356 in Section 3 and that you

have sufficient fuel. Also, check whether

the other keys will start the engine. If

they work, your key may be broken. Have

the key checked at your Toyota dealer. If

none of your keys work, there may be a

malfunction in the immobilizer system. Call

your Toyota dealer. (See “Keys” on page

12 in Section 1−2.)

If the engine is not turning over or is

turning over too slowly—

1. Check that the battery terminals are

tight and clean.

2. If the battery terminals are O.K., switch

on the interior light.

3. If the light is out, dim or goes out

when the starter is cranked, the battery

is discharged. You may try jump start-

ing. See “(c) Jump starting” on page

375 for further instructions.

If the light is O.K., but the engine still will

not start, it needs adjustment or repair.

Call a Toyota dealer or qualified repair

shop.

NOTICE

Do not pull− or push−start the ve-

hicle. It may damage the vehicle or

cause a collision when the engine

starts. Also the three−way catalytic

converter may overheat and become a

fire hazard.

If the engine turns over at its normal

speed but will not start—

1. Turn the ignition key to “ACC” or

“LOCK” and try starting the engine

again.

2. If the engine will not start, the engine

may be flooded because of repeated

cranking. See “(b) Starting a flooded

engine” on page 374 for further instruc-

tions.

3. If the engine still will not start, it needs

adjustment or repair. Call a Toyota

dealer or qualified repair shop.

If the engine will not start, your engine

may be flooded because of repeated

cranking.

If this happens, turn the ignition key to

“START” with the accelerator pedal fully

depressed, and hold the key at this posi-

tion for about 30 seconds. Then the

cranking hold function stops cranking au-

tomatically, and you can try starting the

engine with your foot off the accelerator

pedal.

If the engine does not start, wait a few

minutes and try again.

If the engine still will not start, it needs

adjustment or repair. Call a Toyota dealer

or qualified repair shop for assistance.

06 06.08

If your vehicle will not start—

(a) Simple checks (b) Starting a flooded engine

375

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

To avoid serious personal injury and

damage to your vehicle which might re-

sult from battery explosion, acid burns,

electrical burns, or damaged electronic

components, these instructions must be

followed precisely.

If you are unsure about how to follow this

procedure, we strongly recommend that

you seek the help of a competent me-

chanic or towing service.

CAUTION

Batteries contain sulfuric acid

which is poisonous and corrosive.

Wear protective safety glasses when

jump starting, and avoid spilling

acid on your skin, clothing, or ve-

hicle.

If you should accidentally get acid

on yourself or in your eyes, remove

any contaminated clothing and flush

the affected area with water imme-

diately. Then get immediate medical

attention. If possible, continue to

apply water with a sponge or cloth

while en route to the medical office.

The gas normally produced by a

battery will explode if a flame or

spark is brought near. Use only

standardized jumper cables and do

not smoke or light a match while

jump starting.

NOTICE

The battery used for boosting must

be 12 V. Do not jump start unless you

are sure that the booster battery is

correct.

JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE

1. If the booster battery is installed in

another vehicle, make sure the vehicles

are not touching. Turn off all unneces-

sary lights and accessories.

When boosting, use the battery of

matching or higher quality. Any other

battery may be difficult to jump start

with.

If jump starting is difficult, charge the

battery for several minutes.

2. If required, remove all the vent plugs

from the booster and discharged batter-

ies. Lay a cloth over the open vents

on the batteries. (This helps reduce the

explosion hazard, personal injuries and

burns.)

3. If the engine in the vehicle with the

booster battery is not running, start it

and let it run for a few minutes. During

jump starting run the engine at about

2000 rpm with the accelerator pedal

lightly depressed.

06 06.08

376 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY40009

Discharged battery

Booster

battery

Jumper cable

Positive

terminal

(“+” mark) Positive terminal

(“+” mark)

4. Make the cable connections in the or-

der a, b, c, d.

a. Connect the clamp of the positive

(red) jumper cable to the positive (+)

terminal on the discharged battery.

b. Connect the clamp at the other end

of the positive (red) jumper cable to

the positive (+) terminal on the booster

battery.

CY40010

Jumper cable

Booster battery

Discharged battery

Negative

terminal

(“−” mark)

c. Connect the clamp of the negative

(black) jumper cable to the negative (−)

terminal on the booster battery.

d. Connect the clamp at the other end

of the negative (black) jumper cable to

a solid, stationary, unpainted, metallic

point of the vehicle with the discharged

battery.

The recommended connecting points

are shown in the following illustrations:

CY40045

Connecting point for 4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE)

engine

CY40036

Connecting point for 4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE)

engine

06 06.08

377

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Do not connect the cable to or near

any part that moves when the engine

is cranked.

CAUTION

When making the connections, to

avoid serious injury, do not lean over

the battery or accidentally let the

jumper cables or clamps touch any-

thing except the correct battery termi-

nals or the ground.

5. Charge the discharged battery with the

jumper cables connected for approxi-

mately 5 minutes. At this time, run the

engine in the vehicle with the booster

battery at about 2000 rpm with the ac-

celerator pedal lightly depressed.

6. Start your engine in the normal way.

After starting, run it at about 2000 rpm

for several minutes with the accelerator

pedal lightly depressed.

7. Carefully disconnect the cables in the

exact reverse order: the negative cable

and then the positive cable.

8. Carefully dispose of the battery cover

cloths—they may now contain sulfuric

acid.

9. If removed, replace all the battery vent

plugs.

If the cause of your battery discharging is

not apparent (for example, lights left on),

you should have it checked at your Toyota

dealer.

If the first start attempt is not success-

ful...

Check that the clamp on the jumper

cables are tight. Recharge the discharged

battery with the jumper cables connected

for several minutes and restart your en-

gine in the normal way.

If the another attempt is not successful,

the battery may be depleted. Have it ch-

ecked at your Toyota dealer.

If your engine stalls while driving...

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping

a straight line. Move cautiously off the

road to a safe place.

2. Turn on your emergency flashers.

3. Turn the ignition key to “ACC” or

“LOCK”, and try starting the engine

again.

If the engine will not start, see “If your

vehicle will not start” on page 374 in this

Section.

CAUTION

If the engine is not running, the pow-

er assist for the brakes and steering

will not work so steering and braking

will be much harder than usual.

06 06.08

If your engine stalls while

driving

378 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

If engine speed does not increase when

the accelerator pedal is depressed, there

may be a problem somewhere in the elec-

tronic throttle control system.

At this time, vibration may occur. Howev-

er, if you depress the accelerator pedal

more firmly and slowly, you can drive your

vehicle at low speeds. Have your vehicle

checked by your Toyota dealer as soon as

possible.

Even if the abnormality of the electronic

throttle control system is corrected during

low speed driving, the system may not be

recovered until the engine is stopped and

the ignition key is turned to the “ACC” or

“LOCK” position.

CAUTION

Be especially careful to prevent erro-

neous pedal operation.

If your engine coolant temperature

gauge indicates overheating, if you ex-

perience a loss of power, or if you hear

a loud knocking or pinging noise, the

engine has probably overheated. You

should follow this procedure...

1. Pull safely off the road, stop the ve-

hicle and turn on your emergency

flashers. Put the transmission in “P”

and apply the parking brake. Turn off

the air conditioning if it is being used.

2. If coolant or steam is boiling out of the

radiator or reservoir, stop the engine.

Wait until the steam subsides before

opening the hood. If there is no coolant

boiling over or steam, leave the engine

running.

CAUTION

To help avoid personal injury, keep

the hood closed until there is no

steam. Escaping steam or coolant is

a sign of very high pressure.

3. Look for obvious coolant leaks from the

radiator, hoses, and under the vehicle.

However, note that water draining from

the air conditioning is normal if it has

been used.

CAUTION

When the engine is running, keep

hands and clothing away from the

moving fan and engine drive belts.

4. If the engine drive belt is broken or the

coolant is leaking, stop the engine im-

mediately. Call a Toyota dealer for as-

sistance.

5. If the engine drive belt is O.K. and

there are no obvious leaks, you may

help the engine cool down more quickly

by running it at about 1500 rpm for a

few minutes with the accelerator pedal

lightly depressed.

6. Check the coolant reservoir. If it is dry,

add coolant to the reservoir while the

engine is running. Fill it about half full.

For the coolant type, see “Coolant type

selection” on page 422 in Section 7−2.

06 06.08

If you cannot increase engine

speed If your vehicle overheats

379

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CAUTION

Do not attempt to remove the radiator

cap when the engine and radiator are

hot. Serious injury could result from

scalding hot fluid and steam blown

out under pressure.

7. After the engine coolant temperature

has cooled to normal, again check the

coolant level in the reservoir. If neces-

sary, bring it up to half full again. Seri-

ous coolant loss indicates a leak in the

system. You should have it checked as

soon as possible at your Toyota dealer.

1. Reduce your speed gradually,

keeping a straight line. Move cau-

tiously off the road to a safe place

well away from the traffic. Avoid

stopping on the center divider of

a highway. Park on a level spot

with firm ground.

2. Stop the engine and turn on your

emergency flashers.

3. Firmly set the parking brake and

put the transmission in “P”.

4. Have everyone get out of the ve-

hicle on the side away from traffic.

5. Read the following instructions

thoroughly.

CAUTION

When jacking, be sure to observe

the following to reduce the possi-

bility of death or serious injury:

Follow jacking instructions.

Do not put any part of your

body under the vehicle sup-

ported by the jack. Otherwise,

personal injury may occur.

Do not start or run the engine

while your vehicle is supported

by the jack.

Stop the vehicle on a level firm

ground, firmly set the parking

brake and put the transmission

in “P”. Block the wheel diago-

nally opposite to the one being

changed if necessary.

06 06.08

If you have a flat tire—

380 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Make sure to set the jack prop-

erly in the jack point. Raising

the vehicle with jack improper-

ly positioned will damage the

vehicle or may allow the ve-

hicle to fall off the jack and

cause death or serious injury.

Never get under the vehicle

when the vehicle is supported

by the jack alone.

Use the jack only for lifting

your vehicle during wheel

changing.

Do not raise the vehicle with

someone in the vehicle.

When raising the vehicle, do

not place any objects on top

of or underneath the jack.

Raise the vehicle only high

enough to remove and change

the tire.

NOTICE



Do not continue driving with

a deflated tire. Driving even a

short distance can damage a

tire and wheel beyond repair.



Vehicles with rear height con-

trol air suspension: When

jacking up or installing the

tire chains, be sure to turn

off the rear height control

and stop the engine. Other-

wise, the vehicle height may

change in the automatic lev-

eling function, resulting in

accident.

CY40055

1. Get the required tools and

spare tire.

1. Tool bag

2. Jack

To prepare yourself for an emergency,

you should familiarize yourself with

the use of the jack, each of the tools

and their storage locations.

When storing the tool bag, make sure

it is securely held by the tightening

strap.

06 06.08

—Required tools and spare

tire

381

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY40056

Turn the jack joint by hand.

To remove: Turn the joint in direction

1 until the jack is free.

To store: Turn the joint in direction 2

until the jack is firmly secured to pre-

vent it flying forward during a collision

or sudden braking.

CY40050

To remove the spare tire under the

luggage compartment:

1. Put a jack handle and jack handle

extensions together as shown in

the illustration.

1. Jack handle extensions

2. Jack handle

CY40052

When connecting the jack handle ex-

tensions, use the jack handle to tight-

en the square head bolt. Make sure

that the bolt fits into the depression

on the joint.

When connecting the jack handle ex-

tension with the jack handle, tighten

the round head bolt by hand.

NOTICE

Tighten the square head bolt

securely. Otherwise, the exten-

sion may come off and it may

damage the paint or vehicle

body.

06 06.08

382 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY40047

2. Insert the end of the jack handle

extension into the lowering screw

and turn it counterclockwise with

the handle.

3. After the tire is lowered completely

to the ground, remove the holding

bracket.

When storing the spare tire, put it in

place with the outer side of the wheel

facing up. Then secure the tire, taking

care that the tire goes straight up

without catching on any other part, to

prevent it from flying forward during

a collision or sudden braking.

CY40011

2. Block the wheel diagonally op-

posite the flat tire to keep the

vehicle from rolling when it is

jacked up.

When blocking the wheel, place a

wheel block in front of one of the front

wheels or behind one of the rear

wheels.

CY40020

3. Remove the wheel ornament.

Pry off the wheel ornament, using the

beveled end of the wheel nut wrench

as shown.

CAUTION

Do not try to pull off the orna-

ment by hand. Take due care in

handling the ornament to avoid

unexpected personal injury.

06 06.08

—Blocking the wheel —Removing wheel ornament

383

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY40021

4. Loosen all the wheel nuts.

Always loosen the wheel nuts before

raising the vehicle.

Turn the wheel nuts counterclockwise

to loosen. To get maximum leverage,

fit the wrench to the nut so that the

handle is on the right side, as shown

above. Grab the wrench near the end

of the handle and pull up on the han-

dle. Be careful that the wrench does

not slip off the nut.

Do not remove the nuts yet—just un-

screw them about one−half turn.

CAUTION

Never use oil or grease on the

bolts or nuts. The nuts may loose

and the wheels may fall off,

which could cause a serious ac-

cident. CY40059

Front Rear

5. Position the jack at the correct

jack point as shown.

Make sure the jack is positioned on

a level and solid place.

JACK POINTS:

Front—Under the frame side rail

Rear—Under the rear axle housing

06 06.08

—Loosening wheel nuts —Positioning the jack

384 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY40051

Put a jack handle, jack handle exten-

sions and jack handle end together

as shown in the illustration.

1. Jack handle end

2. Jack handle extensions

3. Jack handle

CY40052

When connecting the jack handle ex-

tension(s) and jack handle end, use

the jack handle to tighten the square

head bolt. Make sure that the bolt fits

into the depression on the joint.

When connecting the jack handle ex-

tension with the jack handle, tighten

the round head bolt by hand.

NOTICE

Tighten the square head bolt

securely. Otherwise, the exten-

sion may come off and it may

damage the paint or vehicle

body.

CY40054

Front of

vehicle

6. After making sure that no one

is in the vehicle, as the jack

touches the vehicle and begins

to fit, double−check that it is

properly positioned.

Rear side only—

When positioning the jack under the

rear axle housing, make sure the

groove on the top of the jack fits with

the rear axle housing.

06 06.08

—Raising your vehicle

385

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY40058

7. Raise the vehicle high enough

so that the spare tire can be

installed.

Remember you will need more ground

clearance when putting on the spare

tire than when removing the flat tire.

To raise the vehicle, insert the jack

handle end into the jack (it is a loose

fit) and turn it clockwise with the han-

dle.

CAUTION

Never get under the vehicle when

the vehicle is supported by the

jack alone. CY40022

8. Remove the wheel nuts and

change tires.

Lift the flat tire straight off and put it

aside.

Roll the spare wheel into position and

align the holes in the wheel with the

bolts. Then lift up the wheel and get

at least the top bolt started through

its hole. Wiggle the tire and press it

back over the other bolts.

06 06.08

—Changing wheels

386 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY40023

Before putting on wheels, remove any

corrosion on the mounting surfaces

with a wire brush or such. Installation

of wheels without good metal−to−met-

al contact at the mounting surface can

cause wheel nuts to loosen and

eventually cause a wheel to come off

while driving.

CY40024

9. Reinstall all the wheel nuts fin-

ger tight.

Reinstall the wheel nuts (tapered end

inward) and tighten them as much as

you can by hand. Press back on the

tire back and see if you can tighten

them more.

CAUTION

Never use oil or grease on the

bolts or nuts. Doing so may lead

to overtightening the nuts and

damaging the bolts. The nuts

may loose and the wheels may

fall off, which could cause a seri-

ous accident. If there is oil or

grease on any bolt or nut, clean

it.

06 06.08

—Reinstalling wheel nuts

387

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY40025

10.Lower the vehicle completely

and tighten the wheel nuts.

Turn the jack handle extension coun-

terclockwise with handle to lower the

vehicle.

Use only the wheel nut wrench and

turn it clockwise to tighten the nuts.

Do not use other tools or any addition-

al leverage other than your hands,

such as a hammer, pipe or your foot.

Make sure the wrench is securely en-

gaged over the nut.

Tighten each nut a little at a time in

the order shown. Repeat the process

until all the nuts are tight.

CAUTION

When lowering the vehicle,

make sure all portions of your

body and all other persons

around will not be injured as

the vehicle is lowered to the

ground.

Have the wheel nuts tightened

with torque wrench to 110 N·m

(11.5 kgf·m, 83 ft·lbf), as soon

as possible after changing

wheels. Otherwise, the nuts

may loosen and the wheels

may fall off, which could cause

a serious accident.

CY40026

11.Reinstall the wheel ornament.

Put the wheel ornament into position

and then tap it firmly with the side or

heel of your hand to snap it into place.

06 06.08

—Lowering your vehicle —Reinstalling wheel ornament

388 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CAUTION

Take due care in handling the

ornament to avoid unexpected

personal injury.

Do not attach a heavily dam-

aged plastic wheel ornament.

It may fly off the wheel and

cause accidents while the ve-

hicle is moving.

12.Check the air pressure of the re-

placed tire.

Adjust the air pressure to the specifi-

cation designated on page 451 in

Section 8. If the pressure is lower,

drive slowly to the nearest service

station and fill to the correct pressure.

Do not forget to reinstall the tire infla-

tion valve cap as dirt and moisture

could get into the valve core and

possibly cause air leakage. If the cap

is missing, have a new one put on as

soon as possible.

13.Restow all the tools, jack and

flat tire securely.

As soon after changing wheels as

possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the

torque specified on page 451 in Sec-

tion 8 with a torque wrench. Have a

technician repair the flat tire.

CAUTION

Before driving, make sure all the

tools, jack and flat tire are se-

curely in place in their storage

location to reduce the possibility

of personal injury during a colli-

sion or sudden braking.

06 06.08

—After changing wheels

389

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow,

mud, sand, etc., then you may attempt

to rock the vehicle free by moving it

forward and backward.

Turn off the traction control system to

become unstuck to allow the tires to

spin enough to remove the vehicle from

the obstruction. (For details, see

“Traction control system” on page 170

in Section 1−7.)

CAUTION

Do not attempt to rock the vehicle

free by moving it forward and back-

ward if people or objects are any-

where near the vehicle. During the

rocking operation the vehicle may

suddenly move forward or backward

as it becomes unstuck, causing injury

or damage to nearby people or ob-

jects.

NOTICE

If you rock your vehicle, observe the

following precautions to prevent dam-

age to the transmission and other

parts.



Do not depress the accelerator ped-

al while shifting the selector lever

or before the transmission is com-

pletely shifted to forward or reverse

gear.



Do not race the engine and avoid

spinning the wheels.



If your vehicle remains stuck after

rocking the vehicle several times,

consider other ways such as tow-

ing.

CY40012

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck—

—From front

—From rear

(b) Using flat bed truck

Two−wheel drive models

06 06.08

If your vehicle becomes stuck If your vehicle needs to be

towed—

390 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY40013

(b) Using flat bed truck

—From rear

—From front

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck—

Four−wheel drive models

If towing is necessary, we recommend

you to have it done by your Toyota

dealer or a commercial tow truck ser-

vice. In consultation with them, have

your vehicle towed using either (a) or

(b).

Only when you cannot receive a towing

service from a Toyota dealer or

commercial tow truck service, tow your

vehicle carefully in accordance with the

instructions given in “—Emergency

towing” on page 392 in this Section.

Proper equipment will help ensure that

your vehicle is not damaged while being

towed. Commercial operators are generally

aware of the state/provincial and local

laws pertaining to towing.

Your vehicle can be damaged if it is

towed incorrectly. Although most operators

know the correct procedure, it is possible

to make a mistake. To avoid damage to

your vehicle, make sure the following pre-

cautions are observed. If necessary, show

this page to the tow truck driver.

TOWING PRECAUTIONS:

Use a safety chain system for all towing,

and abide by the state/provincial and local

laws. The wheels and axle on the ground

must be in good condition. If they are

damaged, use a towing dolly.

CAUTION

Vehicles with rear height control air

suspension: When your vehicle is

towed, put the vehicle height in the

“N” (normal) mode and push the

“HEIGHT CONTROL OFF” switch to

turn off the rear height control air

suspension. Otherwise, the vehicle

height may be changed in the auto-

matic leveling function, resulting in

accident. For details, see “Rear

height control air suspension” on

page 184 in Section 1−7.

06 06.08

391

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Two−wheel drive models—

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck

From front—Use a towing dolly under the

rear wheels.

NOTICE

Never tow a vehicle from the front

with the rear wheels on the ground,

as this may cause serious damage to

the transmission.

From rear—Place the ignition key in the

“ACC” position.

NOTICE



When lifting wheels, take care to

ensure adequate ground clearance

for towing at the opposite end of

the raised vehicle. Otherwise, the

bumper and/or underbody of the

towed vehicle will be damaged dur-

ing towing.



Do not tow with the key removed or

in the “LOCK” position, as the

steering lock mechanism is not

strong enough to hold the front

wheels straight while towing.

(b) Using flat bed truck

Four−wheel drive models—

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck

FULL−TIME FOUR WHEEL DRIVE

MODELS

Use a towing dolly under the wheels not

lifted by the truck.

MULTI−MODE FOUR WHEEL DRIVE

MODELS

From front—Use a towing dolly under the

rear wheels.

NOTICE

Never tow a vehicle from the front

with the rear wheels on the ground,

as this may cause serious damage to

the transmission.

From rear—We recommend using a tow-

ing dolly under the front wheels. If you do

not use a towing dolly, place the ignition

key in the “ACC” position, put the trans-

mission in “N” and the multi−mode control

switch knob in “H2”.

NOTICE



When lifting wheels, take care to

ensure adequate ground clearance

for towing at the opposite end of

the raised vehicle. Otherwise, the

bumper and/or underbody of the

towed vehicle will be damaged dur-

ing towing.



Do not tow with the key removed or

in the “LOCK” position when tow-

ing from the rear without a towing

dolly. The steering lock mechanism

is not strong enough to hold the

front wheels straight.

(b) Using flat bed truck

06 06.08

392 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY40014

type truck

All models—

NOTICE

Do not tow with sling type truck, ei-

ther from the front or rear. This may

cause body damage.

CY40061

If towing is necessary, we recommend

you to have it done by your Toyota

dealer or a commercial tow truck ser-

vice.

If towing service is not available in an

emergency, your vehicle may be tempo-

rarily towed by a cable or chain se-

cured to one of the emergency towing

eyelets under the front of the vehicle.

Use extreme caution when towing the

vehicles.

NOTICE



Only use specified towing eyelet;

otherwise your vehicle may be dam-

aged.



Never tow a vehicle from the rear

with four wheels on the ground.

This may cause serious damage to

the transmission.

A driver must be in the vehicle to steer

it and operate the brakes.

Towing in this manner may be done only

on hard−surfaced roads for a short dis-

tance and at low speeds. Also, the

wheels, axles, drive train, steering and

brakes must all be in good condition.

CAUTION

Use extreme caution when towing ve-

hicles. Avoid sudden starts or erratic

driving maneuvers which would place

excessive stress on the emergency

towing eyelet and towing cable or

chain. The eyelet and towing cable or

chain may break and cause serious

injury or damage.

06 06.08

—Emergency towing

393

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

NOTICE

Use only a cable or chain specifically

intended for use in towing vehicles.

Securely fasten the cable or chain to

the towing eyelet provided.

Before towing, release the parking brake

and put the transmission in “N”. The key

must be in “ACC” (engine off) or “ON”

(engine running).

Four−wheel drive models—On multi−mode

four−wheel drive models, put the multi−

mode control switch knob in “H2”. On full−

time four−wheel drive models, unlock the

center differential.

CAUTION

If the engine is not running, the pow-

er assist for the brakes and steering

will not work so steering and braking

will be much harder than usual.

Before emergency towing, check that

the eyelet is not broken or damaged

and that the installation bolts are not

loose.

Fasten the towing cable or chain se-

curely to the eyelet.

Do not jerk the eyelet. Apply steady

and even force.

To avoid damaging the eyelet, do not

pull from the side or at a vertical

angle. Always pull straight ahead.

CAUTION

If the emergency towing eyelet is

used to get out when your vehicle

becomes struck in mud, sand or oth-

er condition from which the vehicle

cannot be driven out under its own

power, make sure to observe the pre-

cautions mentioned below. Otherwise,

excessive stress will be put on the

eyelet and the towing cable or chain

may break, causing serious injury or

damage.

If the towing vehicle can hardly

move, do not forcibly continue the

towing. Contact your Toyota dealer

or a commercial tow truck service

for assistance.

Tow the vehicle as straight ahead

as possible.

Keep away from the vehicle during

towing.

06 06.08

—Emergency towing eyelet

precautions

394 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

The following methods are effective to

get out when your vehicle is struck in

mud, sand or other condition from

which the vehicle cannot be driven out

under its own power. Use extreme cau-

tion when towing vehicles. In addition,

keep away from the vehicles and towing

cable or chain when towing.

Remove the soil and sand in the front

and the back of the tires.

Place a stone or wood under the tires.

CY40015

If you cannot shift the selector lever

out of the “P” position to other posi-

tions even though the brake pedal is

depressed, use the shift lock override

button as follows:

1. Turn the ignition key to the “LOCK”

position. Make sure the parking

brake is set.

2. Pry up the cover with a flathead

screwdriver or equivalent.

CY40016

3. Insert the screwdriver or equivalent

into the hole to push down the shift

lock override button. You can shift

out of the “P” position only while

pushing the button.

4. Shift into the “N” position.

5. Insert the cover.

6. Start the engine. For your safety,

keep the brake pedal depressed.

Be sure to have the system checked by

your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

06 06.08

—Tips for towing a stuck

vehicle If you cannot shift automatic

transmission selector lever

395

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

You can purchase a new key at your

Toyota dealer if you can give them the

key number and master key.

Even if you lose only one key, contact

your Toyota dealer to make a new key. If

you lose all your master keys, you cannot

make new keys; the whole engine immobi-

lizer system must be replaced.

See the suggestion given in “Keys” on

page 12 in Section 1−2.

If your keys are locked in the vehicle and

you cannot get a duplicate, many Toyota

dealers can still open the door for you,

using their special tools. If you must

break a window to get in, we suggest

breaking the smallest side window be-

cause it is the least expensive to replace.

Be extremely cautious to avoid cuts from

the glass.

Please contact your nearest Toyota

dealer and you can purchase a new

wireless remote control transmitter.

Have the registered identification numbers

of your transmitters deleted from your ve-

hicle by your Toyota dealer as soon as

possible to avoid the possibility of theft or

an accident. Then, have the identification

number of your new transmitter registered.

At the same time, you must bring all of

the remaining transmitters to have them

registered again as well.

06 06.08

If you lose your keys If you lose your wireless

remote control transmitter

396 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

06 06.08

397

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CORROSION PREVENTION AND

APPEARANCE CARE

Corrosion prevention and appearance care

Protecting your Toyota from corrosion 398. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Washing and waxing your Toyota 399. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cleaning the interior 401. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rain clearing mirrors 403. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

06 06.08

SECTION

398 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Toyota, through the diligent research, de-

sign and use of the most advanced

technology available, helps prevent corro-

sion and provides you with the finest qual-

ity vehicle construction. Now, it is up to

you. Proper care of your Toyota can help

ensure long−term corrosion prevention.

The most common causes of corrosion

to your vehicle are:

The accumulation of road salt, dirt and

moisture in hard−to−reach areas under

the vehicle.

Chipping of paint, or undercoating

caused by minor accidents or by

stones and gravel.

Care is especially important if you live

in particular areas or operate your ve-

hicle under certain environmental condi-

tions:

Road salt or dust control chemicals will

accelerate corrosion, as will the pres-

ence of salt in the air near the sea−

coast or in areas of industrial pollution.

High humidity accelerates corrosion es-

pecially when temperatures range just

above the freezing point.

Wetness or dampness to certain parts

of your vehicle for an extended period

of time, may cause corrosion even

though other parts of the vehicle may

be dry.

High ambient temperatures can cause

corrosion to those components of the

vehicle which do not dry quickly due to

lack of proper ventilation.

The above signifies the necessity to keep

your vehicle, particularly the underside, as

clean as possible and to repair any dam-

age to paint or protective coatings as

soon as possible.

To help prevent corrosion on your

Toyota, follow these guidelines:

Wash your vehicle frequently. It is, of

course, necessary to keep your vehicle

clean by regular washing, but to prevent

corrosion, the following points should be

observed:

If you drive on salted roads in the

winter or if you live near the ocean,

you should hose off the undercarriage

at least once a month to minimize cor-

rosion.

High pressure water or steam is effec-

tive for cleaning the vehicle’s underside

and wheel housings. Pay particular

attention to these areas as it is difficult

to see all the mud and dirt. It will do

more harm than good to simply wet the

mud and debris without removing. The

lower edge of doors, rocker panels and

frame members have drain holes which

should not be allowed to clog with dirt

as trapped water in these areas can

cause corrosion.

Wash the underside of the vehicle thor-

oughly when winter is over.

See “Washing and waxing your Toyota” on

page 399 in this Section for more tips.

Check the condition of your vehicle’s

paint and trim. If you find any chips or

scratches in the paint, touch them up im-

mediately to prevent corrosion from start-

ing. If the chips or scratches have gone

through the bare metal, have a qualified

body shop make the repair.

06 06.08

Protecting your Toyota from

corrosion

399

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Check the interior of your vehicle. Wa-

ter and dirt can accumulate under the

floor mats and could cause corrosion. Oc-

casionally check under the mats to make

sure the area is dry. Be particularly care-

ful when transporting chemicals, cleans-

ers, fertilizers, salt, etc; these should be

transported in proper containers. If a spill

or leak should occur, immediately clean

and dry the area.

Use mud shields on your wheels. If you

drive on salted or gravel roads, mud

shields help protect your vehicle. Full−size

shields, which come as near to the ground

as possible, are the best. We recommend

that the fittings and the area where the

shields are installed be treated to resist

corrosion. Your Toyota dealer will be

happy to assist in supplying and installing

the shields if they are recommended for

your area.

Keep your vehicle in a well ventilated

garage or a roofed place. Do not park

your vehicle in a damp, poorly venti-

lated garage. If you wash your vehicle in

the garage, or if you drive it covered with

water or snow, your garage may be so

damp as to cause corrosion. Even if your

garage is heated, a wet vehicle can cor-

rode if the ventilation is poor.

Washing your Toyota

Keep your vehicle clean by regular

washing.

The following cases may cause weakness

to the paint or corrosion to the body and

parts. Wash your vehicle as soon as pos-

sible.

When driving in a coastal area

When driving on a road sprinkled with

antifreeze

When exposed to coal tar, tree sap,

bird droppings and carcass of an insect

When driving in areas where there is

a lot of smoke, soot, dust, iron dust or

chemical substances

When the vehicle becomes remarkably

dirty with dust and mud

Hand−washing your Toyota

Work in the shade and wait until the

vehicle body is not warm to the touch.

CAUTION

When cleaning under floor or chas-

sis, be careful not to injure your

hands.

Exhaust gases cause the exhaust

pipe to become quite hot. When

washing the vehicle, be careful not

to touch the pipe until it has cooled

sufficiently, as touching a hot ex-

haust pipe can cause burns.

1. Rinse off loose dirt with a hose. Re-

move any mud or road salt from the

underside of the vehicle or the wheel

wells.

2. Wash with a mild car−wash soap,

mixed according to the manufacturer’s

instructions. Use a soft cotton mitt and

keep it wet by dipping it frequently into

the wash water. Do not rub hard—let

the soap and water remove the dirt.

Fuel filler door: Do not apply water (high−

pressure car wash, for example) at or

near the fuel tank inlet with the fuel filler

door opened. If the water enters the air

vent, you may experience trouble with re-

fueling or rough engine idling.

Rear height control air suspension: Do not

spray a jet of high−pressure water at the

air suspension unit, especially the air

spring, at an extremely close range. This

may damage the air suspension.

06 06.08

Washing and waxing your

Toyota

400 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Plastic wheel ornaments: The plastic

wheel ornaments are damaged easily by

organic substances. If any organic sub-

stances splash an ornament, be sure to

wash them off with water and check if the

ornament is damaged.

Aluminum wheels: Use only a mild soap

or neutral detergent.

Plastic bumpers: Wash carefully. Do not

scrub with abrasive cleaners. The bumper

faces are soft.

Exterior lights: Wash carefully. Do not use

organic substances or scrub them with a

hard brush. This may damage the sur-

faces of the lights.

Road tar: Remove with turpentine or

cleaners that are marked safe for painted

surfaces.

3. Rinse thoroughly—dried soap can

cause streaking. In hot weather you

may need to rinse each section right

after you wash it.

4. To prevent water spots, dry the vehicle

using a clean soft cotton towel. Do not

rub or press hard—you might scratch

the paint.

NOTICE



Do not use organic substances

(gasoline, kerosene, benzine or

strong solvents), which may be tox-

ic or cause damage.



Do not scrub any part of the ve-

hicle with a hard brush, which may

cause damage.

Automatic car wash

Your vehicle may be washed in an auto-

matic car wash, but remember that the

paint can be scratched by some types of

brushes, unfiltered washing water, or the

washing process itself. Scratching reduces

paint durability and gloss, especially on

darker colors. The manager of the car

wash should be able to advise you wheth-

er the process is safe for the paint on

your vehicle.

Waxing your Toyota

Polishing and waxing is recommended

to maintain the original beauty of your

Toyota’s finish.

Apply wax once a month or if the vehicle

surface does not repel water well.

1. Always wash and dry the vehicle be-

fore you begin waxing, even if you are

using a combined cleaner and wax.

2. Use a good quality polish and wax. If

the finish has become extremely weath-

ered, use a car−cleaning polish, fol-

lowed by a separate wax. Carefully fol-

low the manufacturer’s instructions and

precautions. Be sure to polish and wax

the chrome trim as well as the paint.

Exterior lights: Do not apply wax on the

surfaces of the lights. Wax may cause

damage to the lenses. If you accidentally

put wax on the light surfaces, wipe or

wash it off.

3. Wax the vehicle again when water

does not bead but remains on the sur-

face in large patches.

06 06.08

401

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CAUTION

Vehicles with side airbags and cur-

tain shield airbags:

Be careful not to splash water or

spill liquid on the floor. This may

prevent the side airbags and curtain

shield airbags from activating cor-

rectly, resulting in serious injury.

Do not wash the vehicle floor with

water, or allow water to get onto

the floor when cleaning the vehicle

interior or exterior. Water may get

into audio components or other

electrical components above or un-

der the floor carpet (or mat) and

cause a malfunction; and it may

cause body corrosion.

Vinyl interior

The vinyl upholstery may be easily

cleaned with a mild soap or detergent

and water.

First vacuum over the upholstery to re-

move loose dirt. Then, using a sponge or

soft cloth, apply the soap solution to the

vinyl. After allowing it to soak in for a few

minutes to loosen the dirt, remove the dirt

and wipe off the soap with a clean damp

cloth. If all the dirt does not come off,

repeat the procedure. Commercial foam-

ing−type vinyl cleaners are also available

which work well. Follow the manufacturer’s

instructions.

NOTICE

Do not use solvent, thinner, gasoline

or window cleaner on the interior.

Carpets

Use a good foam−type shampoo to

clean the carpets.

Begin by vacuuming thoroughly to remove

as much dirt as possible. Several types of

foam cleaners are available; some are in

aerosol cans and others are powders or

liquids which you mix with water to pro-

duce a foam. To shampoo the carpets,

use a sponge or brush to apply the foam.

Rub in overlapping circles.

Do not apply water—the best results are

obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as

possible. Read the shampoo instructions

and follow them closely.

Seat belts

The seat belts may be cleaned with

mild soap and water or with lukewarm

water.

Use a cloth or sponge. As you are clean-

ing, check the belts for excessive wear,

fraying, or cuts.

06 06.08

Cleaning the interior

402 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

NOTICE



Do not use dye or bleach on the

belts—it may weaken them.



Do not use the belts until they be-

come dry.

Windows

The windows may be cleaned with any

household window cleaner.

NOTICE



When cleaning the inside of the

rear window, be careful not to

scratch or damage the heater wires

or connectors.



When cleaning the inside of the

rear quarter window, be careful not

to scratch or damage the printed

antenna.

Air conditioning control panel, audio

panel, instrument panel, console panel

and switches

Use a soft damp cloth for cleaning.

Soak a clean soft cloth in water or luke-

warm water then lightly wipe off dirt.

NOTICE



Do not use organic substances (sol-

vents, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline,

etc.) or alkaline or acidic solutions.

These chemicals can cause discol-

oring, staining or peeling of the

surface.



If you use cleaners or polishing

agents, make sure their ingredients

do not include the substances men-

tioned above.



If you use a liquid car freshener, do

not apill the liquid onto the ve-

hicle’s interior surfaces. It may con-

tain the ingredients mentioned

above. Immediately clean any spill

using the method mentioned above.

Leather interior

The leather upholstery may be cleaned

with neutral detergent for wool.

Remove dirt using a soft cloth dampened

with 5% solution of neutral detergent for

wool. Then thoroughly wipe off all traces

of detergent with a clean damp cloth.

After cleaning or whenever any part of the

leather gets wet, dry with a soft clean

cloth. Allow the leather to dry in a venti-

lated shaded area.

NOTICE



If a stain should fail to come out

with a neutral detergent, apply a

cleaner that does not contain an

organic solvent.



Never use organic substances such

as benzine, alcohol or gasoline, or

alkaline or acid solutions for clean-

ing the leather as these could

cause discoloring.



Use of a nylon brush or synthetic

fiber cloth, etc. may scratch the

fine grained surface of the leather.



Mildew may develop on soiled leath-

er upholstery. Be especially careful

to avoid oil spots. Try to keep your

upholstery always clean.



Long exposure to direct sunlight

may cause the leather surface to

harden and shrink. Keep your ve-

hicle in a shaded area, especially in

the summer.

06 06.08

403

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)



The interior of your vehicle is apt

to heat up on hot summer days, so

avoid placing on the upholstery

items made of vinyl or plastic or

containing wax as these tend to

stick to leather when warm



Improper cleaning of the leather up-

holstery could result in discolor-

ation or staining.

If you have any questions about the

cleaning of your Toyota, your local

Toyota dealer will be pleased to answer

them.

On some models, the outside rear view

mirrors have been coated to produce a

“rain clearing” effect. This coating

causes the raindrops to spread, clear-

ing the driver’s rear view when it rains.

It is sufficient to wash the mirrors with

water for day to day care.

The rain clearing effect is reduced in

drizzle and light rain.

In the following cases, the rain clearing

effect will be reduced temporarily, but will

gradually recover.

After wiping dirt off the mirrors

When the mirrors fog up

After waxing your vehicle in an auto-

matic car wash

After your vehicle has been parked for

a long period in underground parking

lots, etc. where there is no direct sun-

light.

If you would like to restore the rain clear-

ing effect to its normal level immediately

in the above cases, wash the mirrors with

neutral detergent, then rinse thoroughly.

NOTICE

To maintain the rain clearing ability,

and prevent the mirrors from being

scratched, observe the following pre-

cautions.



Do not use any glass cleaners that

contain compounds.



If ice should jam the mirror, do not

scrape the mirror. Use a spray de−

icer to free the mirror.



Wash off any wax stuck to the mir-

rors with neutral detergent and

rinse thoroughly as any wax on the

surface of the mirrors can cause

the rain clearing effect to be lost.



Do not use any water repellents as

they can destroy the rain clearing

effect. If any repellent gets stuck on

the surface of the mirrors, wash it

off with neutral detergent, then

rinse thoroughly.

06 06.08

Rain clearing mirrors

404 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

06 06.08

405

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE AND CARE

Vehicle maintenance and care

Maintenance requirements 406. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General maintenance 407. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Does your vehicle need repairing? 409. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Emissions Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) programs 410. . . . . . . . .

For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the

“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

06 06.08

SECTION

406 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Your Toyota vehicle has been designed for

fewer maintenance requirements with long-

er service intervals to save both your time

and money. However, each regular mainte-

nance, as well as day−to−day care, is

more important than ever before to ensure

smooth, and trouble−free, safe, and eco-

nomical drivings.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make

sure the specified maintenance, including

general maintenance service, is performed.

Note that both the new vehicle and

emission control system warranties specify

that proper maintenance and care must be

performed. See “Owner’s Warranty

Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual

Supplement” for complete warranty

information.

General maintenance

General maintenance items are those day−

to−day care practices that are important to

your vehicle for proper operation. It is the

owner’s responsibility to ensure that the

general maintenance items are performed

regularly.

These checks or inspections can be done

either by yourself or a qualified technician,

or if you prefer, your Toyota dealer will be

pleased to do them at a nominal cost.

Scheduled maintenance

The scheduled maintenance items listed in

the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or

“Owner’s Manual Supplement” are those

required to be serviced at regular inter-

vals.

For details of your maintenance schedule,

read the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide”

or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

It is recommended that any replacement

parts used for maintenance or for the

repair of the emission control system

be Toyota supplied.

The owner may elect to use non−Toyota

supplied parts for replacement pur-

poses without invalidating the emission

control system warranty. However, use

of replacement parts which are not of

equivalent quality may impair the effec-

tiveness of the emission control sys-

tems.

You may also elect to have

maintenance, replacement, or repair of

the emission control devices and

system performed by any automotive

repair establishment or individual

without invalidating this warranty. See

“Owner’s Warranty Information Booklet”

or “Owner’s Manual Supplement” for

complete warranty information.

Where to go for service?

Toyota technicians are well−trained spe-

cialists and are kept up to date with the

latest service information through technical

bulletins, service tips, and in−dealership

training programs. They learn to work on

Toyotas before they work on your vehicle,

rather than while they are working on it.

You can be confident that your Toyota

dealer’s service department performs the

best job to meet the maintenance require-

ments on your vehicle—reliably and eco-

nomically.

Your copy of the repair order is proof that

all required maintenance has been per-

formed for warranty coverage. If any prob-

lems should arise with your vehicle while

under warranty, your Toyota dealer will

promptly take care of it. Again, be sure

to keep a copy of the repair order for any

service performed on your Toyota.

What about do−it−yourself maintenance?

Many of the maintenance items are easy

to do yourself if you have a little mechani-

cal ability and a few basic automotive

tools. Simple instructions for how to per-

form them are presented on page 411 in

Section 7.

06 06.08

Maintenance requirements

407

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

If you are a skilled do−it−yourself

mechanic, the Toyota service manuals are

recommended. Please be aware that

do−it−yourself maintenance can affect your

warranty coverage. See “Owner’s Warranty

Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual

Supplement” for the details.

Listed below are the general maintenance

items that should be performed as fre-

quently as specified. In addition to check-

ing the items listed, if you notice any

unusual noise, smell or vibration, you

should investigate the cause or take your

vehicle to your Toyota dealer or a quali-

fied service shop immediately. It is recom-

mended that any problem you notice be

brought to the attention of your dealer or

the qualified service shop for their advice.

CAUTION

Make these checks only with ade-

quate ventilation if you run the en-

gine.

IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT

Items listed below should be checked

from time to time, e.g. each time when

refueling.

Washer fluid

Make sure there is sufficient fluid in the

tank. See page 437 in Section 7−3 for

additional information.

Engine coolant level

Make sure the coolant level is between

the “F” and “L” lines on the see−through

reservoir when the engine is cold. See

page 422 in Section 7−2 for additional

information.

Radiator, condenser and hoses

Check that the front of the radiator and

condenser are clean and not blocked with

leaves, dirt, or insects. See page 423 in

Section 7−2 for additional information.

Battery condition

Check the battery condition by the indica-

tor color. See page 434 in Section 7−3 for

additional information.

Brake fluid level

Make sure the brake fluid level is correct.

See page 423 in Section 7−2 for addition-

al information.

Engine oil level

Check the level on the dipstick with the

engine turned off and the vehicle parked

on a level spot. See page 420 in Section

7−2 for additional information.

06 06.08

General maintenance

408 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Power steering fluid level

Check the level through the reservoir. The

level should be in the “HOT” or “COLD”

range depending on the fluid temperature.

See page 424 in Section 7−2 for addition-

al information.

Exhaust system

If you notice any change in the sound of

the exhaust or smell exhaust fumes, have

the cause located and corrected immedi-

ately. (See “Engine exhaust cautions” on

page 333 in Section 2.)

INSIDE THE VEHICLE

Items listed below should be checked

regularly, e.g. while performing periodic

services, cleaning the vehicle, etc.

Lights

Make sure the headlights, stop lights, tail

lights, turn signal lights, and other lights

are all working. Check headlight aim.

Service reminder indicators and warning

buzzers

Check that all service reminder indicators

and warning buzzers function properly.

Steering wheel

Check that it has the specified free play.

Be alert for changes in steering condition,

such as hard steering or strange noise.

Seats

Check that all front seat controls such as

seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. op-

erate smoothly and that all latches lock

securely in any position. Check that the

head restraint move up and down smooth-

ly and that the locks hold securely in any

latched position. For folding−down rear

seatbacks and swing−up rear seat cush-

ions (vehicles without third seats), tum-

bling second seats (vehicles with third

seats), folding−up third seats and detach-

able third seats, check that the latches

lock securely.

Seat belts

Check that the seat belt system such as

buckles, retractors and anchors operate

properly and smoothly. Make sure that the

belt webbing is not cut, frayed, worn or

damaged.

Accelerator pedal

Check the pedal for smooth operation and

uneven pedal effort or catching.

Brake pedal

Check the pedal for smooth operation and

that the pedal has the proper clearance.

Check the brake booster function.

Brakes

In a safe place, check that the brakes do

not pull to one side when applied.

Parking brake

Check that the pedal has the proper travel

and that, on a safe incline, your vehicle

is held securely with only the parking

brake applied.

Automatic transmission “Park” mecha-

nism

On a safe incline, check that your vehicle

is held securely with the selector lever in

“P” position and all brakes released.

OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE

Items listed below should be performed

from time to time, unless otherwise

specified.

Fluid leaks

Check underneath for leaking fuel, oil, wa-

ter or other fluid after the vehicle has

been parked for a while. If you smell fuel

fumes or notice any leak, have the cause

found and corrected immediately.

06 06.08

409

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Doors and engine hood

Check that all doors including back door

operate smoothly and all latches lock se-

curely. Make sure the engine hood sec-

ondary latch secures the hood from open-

ing when the primary latch is released.

Tire inflation pressure

Check the pressure with a gauge ev-

ery two weeks, or at least once a

month. See page 425 in Section 7−2

for additional information.

Tire surface and wheel nuts

Check the tires carefully for cuts,

damage or excessive wear. See page

427 in Section 7−2 for additional in-

formation. When checking the tires,

make sure no nuts are missing, and

check the nuts for looseness. Tighten

them if necessary.

Tire rotation

Rotate the tires according to the

maintenance schedule. (For

scheduled maintenance information,

please refer to the “Scheduled

Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s

Manual Supplement”.) See page 429

in Section 7−2 for additional

information.

Be on the alert for changes in perfor-

mance, sounds, and visual tip−offs that

indicate service is needed. Some impor-

tant clues are as follows:

Engine missing, stumbling, or pinging

Appreciable loss of power

Strange engine noises

A leak under the vehicle (however, wa-

ter dripping from the air conditioning

after use is normal.)

Change in exhaust sound (This may

indicate a dangerous carbon monoxide

leak. Drive with the windows open and

have the exhaust system checked im-

mediately.)

Flat−looking tire; excessive tire squeal

when cornering; uneven tire wear

Vehicle pulls to one side when driving

straight on a level road

Strange noises related to suspension

movement

Loss of brake effectiveness; spongy

feeling brake pedal; pedal almost

touches floor; vehicle pulls to one side

when braking

Engine coolant temperature continually

higher than normal

If you notice any of these clues, take your

vehicle to your Toyota dealer as soon as

possible. It probably needs adjustment or

repair.

CAUTION

Do not continue driving with the ve-

hicle unchecked. It could result in se-

rious vehicle damage and possibly

personal injury.

06 06.08

Does your vehicle need

repairing?

410 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Some states have vehicle emission in-

spection programs which include OBD

(On−Board Diagnostics) checks.

The OBD system monitors the operation

of the emission control system. When the

OBD system determines that a problem

exists somewhere in the emission control

system, the malfunction indicator lamp

comes on. In this case, your vehicle may

not pass the I/M test and need to be

repaired. Contact your Toyota dealer to

service the vehicle.

Even if the malfunction indicator lamp

does not come on, your vehicle may not

pass the I/M test as readiness codes

have not been set in the OBD system.

Readiness codes are automatically set

during ordinary driving. However, when the

battery is disconnected or run down, the

codes are erased. Also, depending on

your driving habits, the codes may not be

completely set.

Also, if the malfunction indicator lamp had

come on recently due to temporary mal-

function such as a loose fuel tank cap,

your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.

The malfunction indicator lamp will go off

after taking several driving trips, but the

error code in the OBD system will not be

cleared unless about 40 trips or more are

taken.

If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test

even the malfunction indicator lamp does

not come on, contact your Toyota dealer

to prepare the vehicle for re−testing.

06 06.08

Emissions Inspection and

Maintenance (I/M) programs

2007

Pocket Reference Guide

Customer Experience Center

1-800-331-4331

MN 00452-PRG07-4RUN

Printed in USA 07/06

Spare tire & tools

Tool location

Removing the spare tire

OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

Assemble the jack handle.

Insert the jack handle end through the opening in

the bumper, and into the lowering screw.

Turn the jack handle counterclockwise.

Refer to the Owner’s Manual for tire changing and

jack positioning procedures.

!A word about safe vehicle operations

This Pocket Reference Guide is a summary of

basic vehicle operations. It contains brief

descriptions of fundamental operations so you

can locate and use the vehicle’s main

equipment quickly and easily.

The Pocket Reference Guide is not intended

as a substitute for the Owner’s Manual

located in the vehicle’s glove box. We

strongly encourage you to review the Owner’s

Manual and supplementary manuals so you

will have a better understanding of the

vehicle’s capabilities and limitations.

Your dealership and the entire staff of Toyota

Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. wish you many years

of satisfied driving in your new 4Runner.

This Pocket Reference Guide is not a full

description of 4Runner operations. Every

4Runner owner should review the Owner’s

Manual that accompanies this vehicle.

Pay special attention to the boxed

“ ” information highlighted in

this reference guide and throughout the

Owner’s Manual. Each box contains safe

operating instructions to help you avoid

injury or equipment malfunction.

All information in this Pocket Reference

Guide is current at the time of printing.

Toyota reserves the right to make changes

at any time without notice.

This utility vehicle has a significantly higher

rollover rate than other types of vehicles. Refer to

the Owner’s Manual for important rollover

information.

2007

4Runner

Tool bag

Jack

OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

INDEX

Item Page no.

OVERVIEW

Engine maintenance 7

Fuel tank door release and cap 6

Hood release 7

Indicator symbols 4-5

Instrument cluster 4

Instrument panel 2-3

Keyless entry26

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Air Conditioning/Heating 17

Audio 18-19

Auto lock functions1, 2

Auto LSD (Limited Slip Differential)21

Automatic Transmission 8

Bottle holders 23

Clock 13

Cruise control 16

Cup holders 22

Door locks 20

Four-wheel drive 9

Garage door opener (HomeLink®

)

321

Light control-Instrument panel 13

Lights2&turn signals 14

Moonroof222

Parking brake 11

Power outlets 23

Rear seat entertainment system 20

Seat adjustments-Front 10

Seat adjustments-Rear 12

Seat heaters 16

Seats-Head restraints 11

Tilt and telescopic steering wheel 10

Windows215

Window-Rear hatch215

Windshield wiper & washer 13

SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

Doors-Child safety locks 24

Seat belts 24

Seat belts-Shoulder belt anchor 24

Spare tire & tools 25

Tire Pressure Warning System 24

1Programmable by customer.Refer to the Owner’s

Manual for instructions and more information.

2Visit your Toyota dealer for information on

customizing this feature.

3HomeLink®is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.

OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

Hood release

Fuel tank door opener

“RSCA OFF”(Roll Sensing of Curtain shield Airbags

“OFF”) switch1

“AUTO LSD” switch1

Center differential lock switch1

115V AC Power outlet ON/OFF switch1

Instrument panel light control

Steering wheel audio controls1,2

Te l e p h o n e switches1,2

Navigation voice command button1,2

12V DC Power outlet/Cigarette lighter

115V AC Power outlet1

AUX adapter

A/V input adapter1

1If equipped

2For details, refer to the “Navigation System

Owner’s Manual.”

OVERVIEW

Driving position memory switches1

Headlight, turn signal and front fog light1control

Wiper and washer controls

Power back window switch

Audio system or navigation system1,2

Front passenger seat belt reminder light

Engine immobilizer/Theft deterrent system

indicator1

Front passenger occupant classification indicator

Multi-information display

Emergency flasher switch

Air Conditioning controls

Auxiliary boxes

Back window and outside rear view mirror defogger1

switch

Four-wheel drive selector1(full-time 4WD models)

or two wheel/four-wheel drive selector1(part-time

4WD models)

Ignition switch

Cruise control

Instrument panel

Steering wheel switches (if equipped)

Rear console box

OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

1-7, 2007 Owner’s Manual.

4If this light flashes, refer to “Rear height control air

suspension,” Section 1-7, 2007 Owner’s Manual.

5If this light flashes, refer to “Cruise control,” Section 1-7, 2007

Owner’s Manual.

Automatic Transmission indicator

Front passenger occupant classification indicator

Tu r n signal indicator

Front fog light indicator

Four-wheel drive indicator3

Low speed four-wheel drive indicator3

Center differential lock indicator3

Slip indicator

Vehicle Stability Control “OFF” indicator

Downhill Assist Control indicator

“AUTO LSD” indicator

Cruise control indicator5

Height control indicator

Height control “OFF” indicator4

Automatic Transmission fluid temperature

warning1

Low Tire Pressure Warning1

Roll Sensing of Curtain shield Airbag “OFF”

indicator1,2

Engine immobilizer/Theft deterrent system

indicator

Open door warning1

Airbag SRS warning1

•Vehicle Stability Control warning1

•“AUTO LSD” warning1

•Tra c ti on Control warning1

•Downhill Assist Control warning1

•Active Trac t io n Control warning1

•Hill-start Assist Control warning1

Headlight high beam indicator

OVERVIEW

1For details, refer to “Service reminder indicators and warning

buzzers,” Section 1-6, 2007 Owner’s Manual.

2For details, see “Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off

switch,” Section 1-3, 2007 Owner’s Manual.

3If this light flashes, refer to “Four-wheel drive system,” Section

Tachometer

Speedometer

Service indicator and reminder

Fuel gauge

Low fuel level warning

Engine coolant temperature

Tri p meter reset knob

Odometer and two trip meters

Height control indicator

Instrument cluster

Charging system warning1

Low engine oil pressure warning1

Brake system warning1

Malfunction/Check Engine indicator1

Engine oil replacement reminder1

Anti-lock Brake System warning1

When the Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) function is in

action, you may feel the brake pedal pulsating and

hear a noise. In this situation, to let the Anti-lock

Brake System work for you, just hold the brake pedal

down more firmly. Do not pump the brake as this will

result in reduced braking performance.

Indicator symbols

Driver/Front passenger seat belt

reminder1

Limited model only

Low windshield washer fluid level warning1

NOTE:Tighten until one click is heard. If the cap is

not tightened enough, Check Engine “ ” indicator

may illuminate.

OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

Windshield and back window washer fluid tank

Power steering fluid reservoir

Engine oil level dipstick

Engine coolant reservoir

Engine oil filler cap

Note: Regularly scheduled maintenance, including

oil changes, will help extend the life of

your vehicle and maintain performance.

Please refer to the “Owner’s Warranty

Information Booklet,” “Scheduled

Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual

Supplement.”

Engine maintenance

6cylinder (1GR-FE) engine

8 cylinder (2UZ-FE) engine

OVERVIEW

Fuel tank door release and cap Hood release

Pull up Tu r n

Store

Pull Pull up latch

and raise

hood

NOTE:After unlocking, if a door is not opened within

30 seconds, all doors will relock for safety.

Alarm operation

Keyless entry (if equipped)

Locking operation Unlocking operation

Back window operation

Beep sound can be switched “ON” or “OFF.” Refer to

the Owner’s Manual for more details.

Push

Push ONCE: Driver door

TWICE: All doors

Push and hold

OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

Auto lock functions

Automatic door locks can be programmed to operate

in 4 different modes, or turned OFF.

-Doors lock when shifting from “Park.”

-Doors lock when the vehicle speed goes above

approximately 12 mph.

-Doors unlock when shifting into “Park.”

-Doors unlock when the ignition switch is set from

“ON” to “ACC” or “OFF” and driver’s door is opened.

Refer to the Owner’s Manual for more details.

Automatic Transmission

1The ignition switch must be ON, and the brake

pedal depressed to shift from “Park.”

Downshifting increases power going uphill, or

provides engine braking downhill. For best fuel

economy during normal driving conditions, always

drive with the shift lever in the “D” position.

Park1

Reverse

Neutral

Drive

Third gear

Second gear

First gear

Fourth gear

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Four-wheel drive (if equipped)

Full-time four-wheel drive models

Part-time four-wheel drive models

High speed (2WD)

High speed (4WD)

Tu r n to “H4” with

speed below 62

mph.

Low speed (4WD)

Shift to “N” position,

then push and turn

to “L4.”

Center differential lock button

For best fuel economy and performance under

normal driving conditions:

•“H2” position (part-time four-wheel drive models)

•“H4” position (full-time four-wheel drive models),

Center differential unlocked (center differential

lock indicator and “VSC OFF” indicator is not

illuminated.)

Center differential lock/unlock

High speed

Tu r n to “H4” with

speed below 62

mph.

Low speed

Shift to “N” position,

then push and turn

to “L4.”

OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Position

Cushion angle (driver side only)

Height crank (driver side only)

Seatback angle

Lumbar support (driver side only)

Driver seat: position, cushion angle and height

Passenger seat: position

Seatback angle

Lumbar support (driver side only)

Seat adjustments-Front

Manual seat Power seat

Seats-Head restraints

Front

Second row seat

Third row

Lock release button

Lock release button Lock release button

Lock release button

With third seat Without third seat

To change the angle Hold the steering wheel,

pull the lock release lever, tilt to the desired

angle, and release the lever.

To change the column length Push the lock

release lever down, set the desired length, and

return the lever to its locked position.

Note: Do not attempt to adjust while the vehicle

is in motion.

Tilt and telescopic (if equipped) steering wheel

Parking brake

Set: Depress

Release: Depress again

(2)

(1)

(2)

(1)

(2)

(1)

(2)

(1)

OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Windshield wiper & washer

Rear

Front

Second row seats

Third row seats

Interval wipe

Slow

Fast

Pull to wash and wipe

Adjust interval

Seatback angle

Seatback

angle

Seatback angle

Wash and wipe

Wipe

Interval wipe

Wash and wipe

Seat adjustments-Rear

(vehicles with third row seats)

Seat adjustments-Rear

(vehicles without third row seats)

(1) Push

(2) Lower

(3) Pull up

(5) Fold-down

(4) Push down

NOTE: Rear wiper and washer operate only when rear

window is fully closed. If battery is disconnected, rear

washer will not function until rear window is reinitialized

by being fully opened and then closed.

Light control-Instrument panel

Brightness

control

Clock

H- Hour set

M- Minute set

:00- Round off

minutes

OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Operating from inside

Windows

Driver side

Automatic operation (driver side only) Push the

switch completely down or pull it completely up and

release to fully open or close. To stop window

midway, lightly push the switch in the opposite

direction.

Window lock switch Deactivates all passenger

windows. Driver’s window remains operable.

NOTE: If the battery is disconnected, the window

will need to be reinitialized. Refer to the Owner’s

Manual for more details.

Window-Rear hatch

Operating from outside

Down

Window

lock switch

Window lock

switch

Tu r n left

and hold

Down

Open

Tu r n right

and hold

Lights & turn signals

Turn signals

Headlights

AUTO*

High beam flasher

*If equipped

Low beam

Front fog lights (if equipped)

Headlights

-Daytime Running Light system (if equipped)

Automatically turns on the headlights at a reduced

intensity.

-Automatic light cut off system Will automatically

turn lights off after a delay of 30 seconds, or the

lock switch on remote may be pushed.

Front fog lights come on only when the headlights

are on low beam.

Parking lights

High beam

Right turn

Tu r n

Lane change

Left turn

NOTE: If the battery is disconnected, the rear hatch

window will need to be reinitialized. Refer to the

Owner’s Manual for more details.

OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Air Conditioning/Heating

With “DUAL” button (if equipped)

Fan speed

Temperature

Automatic climate control ON/OFF

“DUAL” button

Indicator ON: Separate temperature settings

for driver and passenger.

Indicator OFF: Synchronize temperature

settings for driver and passenger.

Air flow vent

Fresh or recirculate cabin air

Air Conditioning ON/OFF

Rear defogger

Climate control OFF

Cruise control

1The set speed may also be cancelled by depressing

the brake pedal.

2The set speed may be resumed once vehicle speed

exceeds 25 mph.

Refer to the Owner’s Manual for more details.

Turning system ON/OFF

Functions

System ON/OFF

Resume2/Increase speed

Set/Decrease speed

Cancel1

Without “DUAL” button

In “ ” or “ ” mode, use fresh air (“ ”

indicator “OFF”) to reduce window fogging.

Seat heaters

Left front seat

Right front seat

OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

“”

Volume control

“”

-In radio mode Push to select a preset station;

push and hold to seek the next strong station.

-In CD mode Push to skip up or down to next/

previous track.

“MODE”

Push to turn audio ON and select an audio mode.

Push and hold to turn the audio system OFF.

By inserting a mini plug into the AUX audio jack, you

can listen to music from a portable audio device

through the vehicle’s speaker system.

Steering wheel controls (if equipped)

CD PLAYER

To scan tracks on a disc Push “SCAN.” Push again to

hold selection.

CD Changer (Type 2 and 3)

-To load one disc Push “LOAD” and insert one disc.

-To load multiple discs Push and hold “LOAD” until

you hear a beep. Insert one disc. Shutter will close

and then re-open for next disc.

To select a file (MP3/WMA only) Tu r n “TUNE.FILE.”

To select a folder (MP3/WMA only) Push either side

of “FOLDER” or “TYPE/FOLDER.”

AUX adapter

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Audio

Typ e 2 additional functions

Typ e 3 additional functions

View radio/CD

information

Eject CD

Push to turn

ON/OFF

Push to

adjust

tone &

balance

Push to

skip

up/down

folder

Seek

station/

CD track

select Station/CD

track scan

Mode

Load CD(s)

Preset buttons - functions in other

modes indicated above number.

View genre/Push to skip up/down folder

RADIO

To preset stations Tune in the desired station and

hold down a preset button (1-6) until you hear a

beep. Push desired preset button (1-6) to select.

To scan stations Push “SCAN.” Push and hold to scan

preset stations. Push again to hold selection.

Typ e 1

AM/Satellite radio

Center console

OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Front audio system

DVD player

DVD screen

Remote control

A/V input adapter

115V AC Power outlet

115V AC Power outlet ON/OFF switch

Push the “AUTO LSD” switch when the vehicle is

stopped. To deactivate, push the switch again.

Note: Auto LSD will ONLY work in 2-wheel drive.

It should ONLY be used when wheel

spinning occurs on slippery or unpaved

surfaces.

Refer to the Owner‘s Manual for more details on

this system before attempting to use it.

Garage door openers manufactured under license

from HomeLink®*can be programmed to operate

garage doors, estate gates, security lighting, etc.

Refer to the Owner’s Manual for more details.

For programming assistance, contact the To y o t a

Customer Experience Center at 1-800-331-4331, or

visit http://www.homelink.com

*HomeLink®is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.

Garage door opener (HomeLink®)*

(if equipped)

Door locks

Unlock Lock

Auto LSD (Limited Slip Differential)

(if equipped)

Rear seat entertainment system

(if equipped)

OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Power outlets

12V DC

115V AC (if equipped)

ON/OFF switch

Inside center console

Push

Auxiliary box Luggage compartment

Moonroof (if equipped)

Tilting operation

Sliding operation

Open

Tilt NOTE: Designed for car accessories. Key must be in

the “ACC” or “ON” position to be used.

NOTE: Key must be in the “ON” position to be used.

NOTE: If battery is disconnected, the moonroof will

need to be reinitialized. Refer to the Owner’s

Manual for more details.

Cup holders

Center console Rear

Second row seat

Third row side trim

Bottle holders

Front doors Rear doors

Tire Pressure Warning System

The system is designed to provide a warning “ ”

when tire pressure of any one of the tires (including

the spare) is reduced.

Refer to the Owner’s Manual for more details.

SAFETY AND

EMERGENCY FEATURES

Seat belts-Shoulder belt anchor

Push up or squeeze

lock release to lower

Moving the lever to “LOCK” will allow the door to

be opened only from the outside.

Door-Child safety locks

Rear door

If belt is fully extended, then retracted even

slightly, it cannot be re-extended beyond that point,

unless fully retracted again. This feature is used to

help hold child restraint systems securely.

To f i n d more information about seat belts, and how

to install a child restraint system, refer to the

Owner’s Manual.

Keep as low on

hips as possible

Take up

slack

To o high

Seat belts

Spare tire & tools

Tool location

Removing the spare tire

OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

Assemble the jack handle.

Insert the jack handle end through the opening in

the bumper, and into the lowering screw.

Turn the jack handle counterclockwise.

Refer to the Owner’s Manual for tire changing and

jack positioning procedures.

Tool bag

Jack

445

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

SPECIFICATIONS

Specifications

Dimensions and weights 446. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Engine 447. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fuel 447. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Service specifications 447. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tires 451. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fuses 452. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

06 06.08

SECTION

446 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Towing capacity (trailer weight + cargo

weight), kg (lb.):

For weight carrying hitch 2268 (5000)

Also for weight distributing hitch

(4.7 L V8 [2UZ−FE] engine only)

Two−wheel drive models 3311 (7300)

Four−wheel drive models 3175 (7000)

06 06.08

Dimensions and weights

Overall width mm (in.)

2790 (109.8)

Overall height∗1mm (in.)

1575 (62.0)

Wheelbase mm (in.)

Front tread mm (in.) 1575 (62.0)

Rear tread mm (in.)

431 (950)∗7

477 (1050)∗8

∗1: Unladen vehicle

∗2: Two−wheel drive models

∗3: Four−wheel drive models

∗4: With roof rails

∗5: With rear spoiler

∗6: With rear height control air suspension

∗7: With 5 occupants

∗8: With 7 occupants

Overall length mm (in.)

Vehicle capacity weight (occupants + luggage) kg (lb.)

4805 (189.2)

1910 (75.2)

1820 (71.7)∗2or3,4

1800 (70.9)∗2, 3, 5

1755 (69.1)∗2, 3

1805 (71.1)∗2or3,4,6

1785 (70.3)∗2or3,5,6

1740 (68.5)∗2or3,6

91 (200)∗7

0(0)

∗8

Luggage compartment load capacity kg (lb.)

447

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Model:

1GR−FE and 2UZ−FE

Type:

1GR−FE engine

6 cylinder V type, 4 cycle, gasoline

2UZ−FE engine

8 cylinder V type, 4 cycle, gasoline

Bore and stroke, mm (in.):

1GR−FE engine

94.0 95.0 (3.70 3.74)

2UZ−FE engine

94.0 84.0 (3.70 3.31)

Displacement, cm3 (cu. in.):

1GR−FE engine 3956 (241.4)

2UZ−FE engine 4664 (284.5)

Fuel type:

Unleaded gasoline, Octane Rating 87

(Research Octane Number 91) or higher.

Fuel tank capacity, L (gal., Imp. gal.):

87 (23.0, 19.1)

ENGINE

Valve clearance (engine cold), mm (in.):

4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine

Intake 0.15—0.25 (0.006—0.010)

Exhaust 0.29—0.39 (0.011—0.015)

4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine

Intake 0.15—0.25 (0.006—0.010)

Exhaust 0.25—0.35 (0.010—0.014)

Spark plug type:

4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine

DENSO K20HR−U11

NGK LFR6C11

4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine

DENSO SK20R11

NGK IFR6A11

Spark plug gap, mm (in.):

1.1 (0.043)

ENGINE LUBRICATION

Oil capacity (drain and refill), L (qt., Imp.

qt.):

4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine

With filter 5.2 (5.5, 4.6)

Without filter 4.9 (5.2, 4.3)

4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine

With filter 6.2 (6.5, 5.5)

Without filter 5.7 (6.0, 5.0)

06 06.08

Engine Fuel Service specifications

448 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in

your Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent

to satisfy the following grade and

viscosity.

Oil grade:

ILSAC multigrade engine oil

Recommended oil viscosity:

SAE 5W−30

OIL008

Outside temperature

Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-

ther details.

COOLING SYSTEM

Total capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):

4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine

9.8 (10.4, 8.6)

4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine

12.3 (13,0, 10.8)

Coolant type:

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is

used in your Toyota vehicle at factory

fill. In order to avoid technical problems,

only use “Toyota Super Long Life

Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene

glycol based non−silicate, non−amine,

non−nitrite, and non−borate coolant with

long−life hybrid organic acid technology.

(Coolant with long−life hybrid organic

acid technology is a combination of low

phosphates and organic acids.)

Do not use plain water alone.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for

further details.

BATTERY

Open voltage∗ at 20C (68F):

12.6—12.8 V Fully charged

12.2—12.4 V Half charged

11.8—12.0 V Discharged

∗: Voltage that is checked 20 minutes af-

ter the key is removed with all the

lights turned off

Charging rates:

5 A max.

06 06.08

449

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

Fluid capacity (drain and refill),

L (qt., Imp. qt.):

Up to 3.0 (3.2, 2.6)

Fluid type:

Toyota Genuine ATF WS

Change automatic transmission fluid only

as necessary.

Generally, it is necessary to change

automatic transmission fluid only if your

vehicle is driven under one of the Special

Operating Conditions listed in your

“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or

“Owner’s Manual Supplement”. When

changing the automatic transmission fluid,

use only “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” (ATF

JWS3324 or NWS9638) to aid in assuring

optimum transmission performance.

Notice: Using automatic transmission

fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF

WS” may cause deterioration in shift

quality, locking up of your transmission

accompanied by vibration, and ultimate-

ly damage the automatic transmission

of your vehicle.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-

ther details.

TRANSFER

Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):

1.4 (1.5, 1.2)

Oil type:

Hypoid gear oil API GL−5

Recommended oil viscosity:

SAE 75W−90

DIFFERENTIAL (4.0 L V6 [1GR−FE] en-

gine)

Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):

Two−wheel drive models 3.05 (3.2, 2.7)

Four−wheel drive models

Front 1.5 (1.6, 1.3)

Rear 3.05 (3.2, 2.7)

Oil type:

Hypoid gear oil API GL−5

Recommended oil viscosity:

Front

SAE 75W−90

Rear

Above −18C (0F)

SAE 90

Below −18C (0F)

SAE 80W or 80W−90

DIFFERENTIAL (4.7 L V8 [2UZ−FE] en-

gine)

Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):

Two−wheel drive models 3.05 (3.2, 2.7)

Four−wheel drive models

Front 1.4 (1.5, 1.2)

Rear 3.05 (3.2, 2.7)

Oil type:

Hypoid gear oil API GL−5

Recommended oil viscosity:

Above −18C (0F)

SAE 90

Below −18C (0F)

SAE 80W or 80W−90

CHASSIS LUBRICATION

Propeller shafts:

Spiders

Lithium base chassis grease, NLGI

No.2

Slide yokes

Molybdenum−disulfide lithium base

chassis grease, NLGI No.2 or lithium

base multipurpose grease, NLGI No.2

06 06.08

450 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

BRAKES

Minimum pedal clearance when depressed

with the force of 490 N (50 kgf, 110 lbf)

with the engine running, mm (in.):

54 (2.1)

Pedal free play, mm (in.):

1—6 (0.04—0.24)

Pad wear limit, mm (in.):

1.0 (0.04)

Lining wear limit, mm (in.):

1.0 (0.04)

Parking brake adjustment when depressed

with the force of 294 N (30 kgf, 66.1 lbf):

5—7 clicks

Fluid type:

SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3

STEERING

Wheel free play:

Less than 30 mm (1.2 in.)

Power steering fluid type:

Automatic transmission fluid DEXRONII

or III

06 06.08

451

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Tire size, cold tire inflation pressure and wheel size:

Tire size

Cold tire inflation pressure

kPa (kgf/cm2 or bar, psi) Wheel size

Tire

size

Front Rear Spare

Wheel

size

P265/70R16 111S

220 (2 2 32)

16 7J∗1

P265

70R16 111

220

(

2.2, 32

)

220

(

2.2, 32

)

220

(

2.2, 32

)

16 7JJ∗2

P265/65R17 110S 220 (2.2, 32) 220 (2.2, 32) 220 (2.2, 32) 17 71/2JJ

P265/60R18 109H 220 (2.2, 32) 220 (2.2, 32) 220 (2.2, 32) 18 71/2J

∗1: Vehicles with steel wheels

∗2: Vehicles with aluminum wheels

NOTE: For a complete information on tires (e.g. replacing tires or replacing wheels), see “Checking tire inflation pres-

sure” through “Aluminum wheel precautions”, pages 425 through 432 in Section 7−2.

Wheel nut torque, N·m (kgf·m, ft·lbf):

110 (11.5, 83)

06 06.08

Tires

452 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY80013

Engine compartment

Fuses (type A)

1. SPARE 10 A: Spare fuse

2. SPARE 15 A: Spare fuse

3. STOP 10 A: Stop/tail lights, high

mounted stoplight, shift lock control

system, anti−lock brake system, trac-

tion control system (two−wheel drive

models), active traction control system

(four−wheel drive models), vehicle sta-

bility control system, rear height control

air suspension, multiport fuel injection

system/sequential multiport fuel injec-

tion system, trailer brake controller,

trailer lights (tail lights)

CY80010

Instrument panel

4. AC115V INV 15 A: AC inverter

5. FR FOG 15 A: Front fog lights

6. OBD 7.5 A: On−board diagnosis sys-

tem

7. HEAD (LO RH) 10 A: Right−hand

headlight (low beam)

8. HEAD (LO LH) 10 A: Left−hand head-

light (low beam)

9. HEAD (HI RH) 10 A: Right−hand head-

light (high beam)

10. HEAD (HI LH) 10 A: Left−hand head-

light (high beam)

11. EFI NO.2 10 A: Multiport fuel injection

system/sequential multiport fuel injec-

tion system

12. HEATER NO.2 7.5 A: Air conditioning

system

13. AIRSUS NO.2 10 A: Rear height con-

trol air suspension

14. SEAT HEATER 25 A: Seat heaters

15. DEFOG 30 A: Back window defogger,

multiport fuel injection system/sequen-

tial multiport fuel injection system

16. MIR HEATER 10 A: Outside rear view

mirror heater

17. DOME 10 A: Interior light, personal

lights, wireless remote control system,

door courtesy lights, gauge and meter,

vanity lights, instrument panel lights,

running board lights, multiplex commu-

nication system

18. RADIO NO.1 20 A: Audio system, nav-

igation system, rear seat entertainment

system

06 06.08

Fuses

453

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

19. ECU−B 10 A: Anti−lock brake system,

traction control system (two−wheel

drive models), active traction control

system (four−wheel drive models), ve-

hicle stability control system, air condi-

tioning system, multiplex communica-

tion system, theft deterrent system,

driving position memory system, front

passenger occupant classification sys-

tem

20. ALT−S 7.5 A: Charging system

21. HORN 10 A: Horns

22. A/F HEATER 15 A: A/F sensor

23. TRN−HAZ 15 A: Turn signal lights,

emergency flashers

24. ETCS 10 A: Multiport fuel injection

system/sequential multiport fuel injec-

tion system

25. EFI 20 A: Multiport fuel injection sys-

tem/sequential multiport fuel injection

system

26. DR/LCK 20 A: Power door lock system

27. TOWING 30 A: Towing converter

28. RADIO NO.2 20 A: Audio system

29. IGN 10 A: Multiport fuel injection sys-

tem/sequential multiport fuel injection

system, anti−lock brake system, trac-

tion control system (two−wheel drive

models), active traction control system

(four−wheel drive models), vehicle sta-

bility control system, meter and gauge,

front passenger occupant classification

system

30. SRS 10 A: SRS airbag system

31. GAUGE 7.5 A: Meter and gauge

32. STA NO.2 7.5 A: Multiport fuel injec-

tion system/sequential multiport fuel in-

jection system

33. FR WIP−WSH 30 A: Windshield wipers

and washer

34. 4WD 20 A: Four−wheel drive control

system

35. D P/SEAT 30 A: Driver’s power seat

36. P P/SEAT 30 A: Front passenger’s

power seat

37. PWR OUTLET 15 A: Power outlets

38. RR WSH 15 A: Back window washer,

multiplex communication system

39. ECU−IG 10 A: Shift lock control sys-

tem, power windows, anti−lock brake

system, traction control system (two−

wheel drive models), active traction

control system (four−wheel drive mod-

els), vehicle stability control system,

electric moon roof, multiplex commu-

nication system, theft deterrent system,

rear height control air suspension, tire

pressure warning system, driving posi-

tion memory system

40. IG1 15 A: Anti−lock brake system,

traction control system (two−wheel

drive models), active traction control

system (four−wheel drive models), ve-

hicle stability control system, air condi-

tioning system, charging system, back

window defogger, back−up lights, emer-

gency flashers, seat heaters, AC invert-

er, instrument panel light control, auto

anti−glare inside rear view mirror, seat

belt tension reducer

41. STA 7.5 A: No circuit

42. SECU/HORN 10 A: Theft deterrent sys-

tem

06 06.08

454 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

43. TAIL 10 A: Tail lights, license plate

lights, parking lights, instrument panel

light control, multiport fuel injection

system/sequential multiport fuel injec-

tion system, instrument panel lights,

meter and gauge, glove box light

44. ACC 7.5 A: Power outlets, outside rear

view mirrors, audio system, navigation

system, shift lock control system, in-

strument panel lights, rear seat enter-

tainment system

45. CIG 10 A: No circuit

Fuses (type B)

46. A/PUMP 50 A: Multiport fuel injection

system/sequential multiport fuel injec-

tion system

47. AIRSUS 50 A: Rear height control air

suspension

48. AM1 50 A: All components in “ACC”,

“CIG”, “IG1”, “ECU−IG”, “FR WIP−

WSH”, “RR−WSH”, “4WD”, and “STA”

fuses

49. TOWING BRK 30 A: Trailer brake con-

troller

50. J/B 50 A: All components in “PWR

OUTLET”, “D P/SEAT”, “P P/SEAT”,

“POWER”, “TAIL” and “SECU/HORN”

fuses

51. BATT CHG 30 A: Trailer sub battery

52. TOWING 40 A: Trailer lights (tail

lights)

53. ABS MTR 40 A: Anti−lock brake sys-

tem, traction control system (two−wheel

drive models), active traction control

system (four−wheel drive models), ve-

hicle stability control system

54. AM2 30 A: Starter system, “IGN”,

“GAUGE”, “STA NO.2” and “SRS” fuses

55. ABS SOL 30 A: Anti−lock brake sys-

tem, traction control system (two−wheel

drive models), active traction control

system (four−wheel drive models), ve-

hicle stability control system

56. POWER 30 A: Power windows, electric

moon roof

Fuses (type C)

57. ALT 140 A: All components in

“A/PUMP”, “AIRSUS”, “AM1”, “TOWING

BRK”, “J/B”, “BATT CHG”, “TOWING”,

“TAIL”, “STOP”, “AC 115V INV”, “FR

FOG”, “OBD”, “DEFOG” and “MIR

HEATER” fuses

58. HEATER 60 A: Air conditioning system

06 06.08

455

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS FOR U.S.

OWNERS

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners 456. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

06 06.08

SECTION

456 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

If you believe that your vehicle has a de-

fect which could cause a crash or could

cause injury or death, you should immedi-

ately inform the National Highway Traffic

Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition

to notifying Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A.,

Inc.

(Toll−free: 1−800−331−4331).

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it

may open an investigation, and if it finds

that a safety defect exists in a group of

vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy

campaign. However, NHTSA cannot be-

come involved in individual problems be-

tween you, your dealer, or Toyota Motor

Sales, U.S.A., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may either call

the Auto Safety Hotline toll−free at

1−888−327−4236 (or 366−0123 in Wash-

ington, DC area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S.

Department of Transportation, Washington,

DC 20590. You can also obtain other in-

formation about motor vehicle safety from

the Hotline.

06 06.08

Reporting safety defects for

U.S. owners

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND

CONTROLS

Overview of instruments and controls

Instrument panel overview 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Instrument cluster overview 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Indicator symbols on the instrument panel 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

06 06.08

SECTION

−

22007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

1. Side vents

2. Side defroster outlets

3. Instrument cluster

4. Center vents

5. Personal lights

6. Electric moon roof switch

7. Garage door opener

8. Auxiliary boxes

9. Glove box

10. Automatic transmission selector lever

11. Power door lock switches

12. Power window switches

13. Seat heater switches

14. Rear height control air suspension

switch

15. Rear vents

16. Trash holder

17. Toyota electronic modulated suspension

mode select switch

18. Downhill assist control switch

19. Front cup holders

20. Tilt steering lock release lever

06 06.08

Instrument panel overview

CY11050y

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

21. Telescopic steering lock release lever

22. Parking brake pedal

23. Window lock switch

24. Power rear view mirror control switches

CY11048

Rear console box

1. Power outlet (12 VDC)

2. Power outlet (115 VAC)

3. AUX adapter

4. A/V input adapter

06 06.08

42007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

1. Driving position memory switches

2. Headlight, turn signal and front fog

light switches

3. Wiper and washer switches

4. Power back window switch

5. Audio system/rear view monitor system

and navigation system including audio

system (For the navigation system, see

the separate “Navigation System

Owner’s Manual”.)

6. Front passenger’s seat belt reminder

light

7. Engine immobilizer/theft deterrent

system indicator light

8. Front passenger occupant classification

indicator light

9. Multi−information display

10. Emergency flasher switch

11. Air conditioning controls

12. Auxiliary box

13. Back window and outside rear view

mirror defogger switch

14. Four−wheel drive control switch knob

(full−time four−wheel drive models) or

multi−mode control switch knob

(multi−mode four−wheel drive models)

06 06.08

CY11088y

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

15. Ignition switch

16. Cruise control switch

17. Hood lock release lever

18. Fuel filler door opener

19. Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags

off switch

20. “AUTO LSD” switch

21. Center differential lock switch

22. Power outlet main switch

23. Instrument panel light control dial

CY11065

1. Volume control switches for audio

system/hands−free system (For the

hands−free system, see the separate

“Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.)

2. “” switch

3. “MODE” switch

4. Telephone switches (See the separate

“Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.)

5. Speech command switch (See the

separate “Navigation System Owner’s

Manual”.)

06 06.08

Steering switches

62007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY11062

1. Tachometer

2. Speedometer

3. Service reminder indicators and

indicator lights

4. Fuel gauge

5. Low fuel level warning light

6. Engine coolant temperature gauge

7. Trip meter reset knob

8. Odometer and two trip meters

06 06.08

Instrument cluster overview

Type A

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY11067

1. Service reminder indicators and

indicator lights

2. Tachometer

3. Speedometer

4. Fuel gauge

5. Low fuel level warning light

6. Engine coolant temperature gauge

7. Trip meter reset knob

8. Odometer and two trip meters

06 06.08

Type B

82007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Driver’s seat belt reminder light∗1

Low engine oil pressure warning light∗1

Engine oil replacement reminder light∗1

(for vehicles sold in U.S.A.)

Brake system warning light∗1

Malfunction indicator lamp∗1

Charging system warning light∗1

Anti−lock brake system warning light∗1

SRS warning light∗1

Open door warning light∗1

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light∗1

Vehicle stability control system warning

light∗1

Traction control system warning light∗1

(two−wheel drive models)

Active traction control system warning light∗1

(four−wheel drive models)

“AUTO LSD” system warning light∗1

(two−wheel drive models)

Downhill assist control system warning

light∗1 (four−wheel drive models)

Hill−start assist control system warning

light∗1

Automatic transmission fluid temperature

warning light∗1 (four−wheel drive models)

Tire pressure warning light∗1

06 06.08

Indicator symbols on the instrument panel

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Center differential lock indicator light∗3

(four−wheel drive models)

Automatic transmission indicator lights

Slip indicator light

Turn signal indicator lights

Low speed four−wheel drive indicator light∗3

(four−wheel drive models)

Downhill assist control system indicator light

(four−wheel drive models)

Headlight high beam indicator light

Engine immobilizer/theft deterrent system

indicator light

Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off

indicator light∗2

Headlight low beam indicator light

Tail light indicator light

“AUTO LSD” indicator light

(two−wheel drive models)

Low windshield washer fluid level warning

light∗1 (for vehicles sold in Canada)

Front passenger occupant classification indicator

light Vehicle stability control system off indicator light

(four−wheel drive models)

Four−wheel drive indicator light∗3

(multi−mode four−wheel drive models)

Front fog light indicator light

06 06.08

10 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

∗1: For details, see “Service reminder indicators and warning

buzzers” on page 147 in Section 1−6.

∗2: For details, see “Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off

switch” on page 95 in Section 1−3.

∗3: If this light flashes, see “Four−wheel drive system” on page

164 in Section 1−7.

∗4: If this light flashes, see “Rear height control air suspension”

on page 184 in Section 1−7.

∗5: If this light flashes, see “Cruise control” on page 196 in

Section 1−7.

Cruise control indicator light∗5

Height control “OFF” indicator light∗4

Height control indicator lights

06 06.08

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND

CONTROLS

Keys and Doors

Keys 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Engine immobilizer system 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Wireless remote control 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Side doors 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Power windows 27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Power back window 30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Back door 32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Hood 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Theft deterrent system 35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fuel tank cap 37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Electric moon roof 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

06 06.07

SECTION

−

12 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY12049

Your vehicle is supplied with the two

kinds of keys.

1. Master keys (black)—These keys work

in every lock. Your Toyota dealer will

need one of them to make a new key

with a built−in transponder chip.

2. Sub key (gray)—This key does not

work in the glove box.

A transponder chip for engine immobilizer

system has been placed in the head of

the master and sub keys. These chips are

needed to enable the system to function

correctly, so be careful not to lose these

keys. If you make your own duplicate key,

you will not be able to cancel the system

or start the engine.

To protect items locked in the glove box

when using valet parking, leave the sub

key with the attendant.

Since the side doors can be locked with-

out a key, you should always carry a

spare key in case you accidentally lock

your keys inside the vehicle. CY12022

NOTICE

When using a key containing a trans-

ponder chip, observe the following

precautions:



When starting the engine, do not

use the key with a key ring resting

on the key grip and do not press

the key ring against the key grip.

Otherwise the engine may not start,

or may stop soon after it starts.

06 06.07

Keys

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY12023



When starting the engine, do not

use the key with other transponder

keys around (including keys of oth-

er vehicles) and do not press other

key plates against the key grip.

Otherwise the engine may not start,

or may stop soon after it starts. If

this happens, remove the key once

and then insert it again after remov-

ing other transponder keys (includ-

ing keys of other vehicles) from the

ring or while gripping or covering

them with your hand to start the

engine.

CY12024



Do not bend the key grip.



Do not cover the key grip with any

material that cuts off electromagnet-

ic waves.



Do not knock the key hard against

other objects.



Do not leave the key exposed to

high temperatures for a long period,

such as on the dashboard and hood

under direct sunlight.



Do not put the key in water or

wash it in an ultrasonic washer.



Do not use the key with electromag-

netic materials.

06 06.07

14 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY12025

KEY NUMBER PLATE

Your key number is shown on the plate.

Keep the plate in a safe place such as

your wallet, not in the vehicle.

If you should lose your keys or if you

need additional keys, duplicates can be

made by a Toyota dealer using the key

number.

We recommend writing down the key num-

ber and storing it in a safe place.

CY12026

The engine immobilizer system is a

theft prevention system. When you in-

sert the key in the ignition switch, the

transponder chip in the key’s head

transmits an electronic code to the ve-

hicle. The engine will start only when

the electronic code in the chip corre-

sponds to the registered ID code for

the vehicle.

CY12074

The system is automatically set when the

key is removed from the ignition switch.

The indicator light will start flashing to

show the system is set.

If any of the following indicator conditions

occurs, contact your Toyota dealer.

The indicator light stays on except

when the theft deterrent system is set-

ting or activating. (See “Theft deterrent

system” on page 35 in this Section.)

The indicator light does not start flash-

ing when the key is removed from the

ignition switch.

The indicator light flashes inconsistent-

ly.

06 06.07

Engine immobilizer system

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Inserting the registered key in the ignition

switch automatically cancels the system,

which enables the engine to start. The

indicator light will go off.

For your Toyota dealer to make you a

new key with built−in transponder chip,

your dealer will need your key number

and master key. However, there is a limit

to the number of additional keys your

Toyota dealer can make for you.

If you make your own duplicate key,

you will not be able to cancel the sys-

tem or start the engine.

NOTICE

Do not modify, remove or disas-

semble the engine immobilizer sys-

tem. If any unauthorized changes or

modifications are made, proper opera-

tion of the system cannot be guaran-

teed.

For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause harmful

interference, and (2) this device must

accept any interference received, includ-

ing interference that may cause unde-

sired operation.

CAUTION

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party respon-

sible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equip-

ment.

For vehicles sold in Canada

This device complies with RSS−210 of

Industry Canada. Operation is subject to

the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept

any interference, including interference

that may cause undesired operation of

the device.

CY12070

1. “LOCK” switch

2. “UNLOCK” switch

3. Back window open switch

4. “PANIC” switch

06 06.07

Wireless remote control—

16 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

The wireless remote control system is

designed to lock or unlock all the side

doors and back door, open the back

window or activate the “PANIC” mode

from a distance within approximately 1

m (3 ft.) of the vehicle.

When you operate any switch, push it

slowly and securely.

The wireless remote control transmitter is

an electronic component. Observe the fol-

lowing instructions in order not to cause

damage to the transmitter.

Do not leave the transmitter in places

where the temperature becomes high

such as on the dashboard.

Do not disassemble it.

Avoid knocking it hard against other

objects or dropping it.

Avoid putting it in water.

You can use up to 4 wireless remote con-

trol transmitters for the same vehicle.

Contact your Toyota dealer for detailed

information.

If the wireless remote control transmitter

does not actuate the doors, back window

or alarm, operate from a normal distance:

Check for closeness to a radio trans-

mitter such as a radio station or an

airport which can interfere with normal

operation of the transmitter.

The battery may have been consumed.

Check the battery in the transmitter. To

replace the battery, see “—Replacing

battery” on page 20.

If you lose your transmitter, contact your

Toyota dealer as soon as possible to

avoid the possibility of theft, or an

accident. (See “If you lose your wireless

remote control transmitter” on page 395 in

Section 4.)

CY12082

Locking operation

CY12083

Unlocking operation

06 06.07

—Locking and unlocking

doors

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

To lock and unlock all the side doors

and back door, push the switches of

the transmitter slowly and securely.

To lock: Push the “LOCK” switch. All the

side doors and back door are locked si-

multaneously. At this time one beep will

be heard, and the turn signal lights flash

once.

Check to see that all the side doors and

back door are securely locked.

If any of the side doors or the back door

is not securely closed, locking cannot be

performed by the “LOCK” switch and a

beep will sound continuously for 10 sec-

onds. However, if the key is in the ignition

switch, a beep will not sound.

To stop the buzzer, close all the side

doors and back door securely or push the

“UNLOCK” switch.

The buzzer can be disabled. For details,

contact your Toyota dealer.

To unlock: Push the “UNLOCK” switch

once to unlock the driver’s door alone.

Pushing the switch twice within 3 seconds

unlocks all the side doors and back door

simultaneously. Each time the “UNLOCK”

switch is pushed, two beeps will be heard,

and the turn signal lights flash twice.

This double switch operation to unlock all

the side doors and back door can be

changed to a single switch operation. For

details, contact your Toyota dealer.

When the “UNLOCK” switch is pressed,

the interior light, luggage compartment

light, ignition switch light and running

board lights (on some models) will come

on and remain on for about 15 seconds

before fading out. (For details, see

“Interior light” on page 136, “Luggage

compartment light” on page 138, “Ignition

switch light” on page 139 and “Running

board lights” on page 140 in Section 1−5.)

You have 30 seconds to open a door after

using the wireless remote unlock feature.

If a door is not opened by then, all the

side doors and back door will be automati-

cally locked again.

The timing for the automatic door lock

function can be changed. For details, con-

tact your Toyota dealer.

If the “LOCK” or “UNLOCK” switch is kept

pressed in, the locking or unlocking opera-

tion is not repeated. Release the switch

and then push again.

The following adjustments can be made in

this system. For details, contact your

Toyota dealer.

Cancelling the wireless door locking or

unlocking function

Cancelling the flash of the turn signal

lights

Changing the volume of beep sound

06 06.07

18 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY12084

To open the back window, push the

back window open switch of the trans-

mitter for about 1 second. The window

will fully open.

At this time, you can hear a beep.

If the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi-

tion, the back window cannot be opened

by the back window open switch.

To open the back window with the key,

see “Power back window” on page 30 in

this Section.

The back window opening program by

wireless remote control can be changed or

disabled. For details, contact your Toyota

dealer.

CY12051

Pushing the “PANIC” switch blows the

horn intermittently and flashes the

headlights, tail lights and turn signal

lights, and turns on the interior and

luggage compartment lights.

The “PANIC” switch is used to deter ve-

hicle theft when you witness anyone at-

tempting to break into or damage your

vehicle.

The alarm will last for one minute. To stop

alarm midway, push any of the switch on

the wireless remote control transmitter.

You can also stop the alarm by turning

the ignition key from the “LOCK” to “ON”

position.

The “PANIC” mode does not work when

the ignition key is in the “ON” position.

This alarm function can be disabled. For

details, contact your Toyota dealer.

06 06.07

—Opening back window —Activating panic mode

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful

interference, and (2) this device must

accept any interference received, includ-

ing interference that may cause unde-

sired operation.

NOTICE:

This equipment has been tested and

found to comply with the limits for a

Class B digital device, pursuant to Part

15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are

designed to provide reasonable protec-

tion against harmful interference in a

residential installation. This equipment

generates, uses and can radiate radio

frequency energy and, if not installed

and used in accordance with the instruc-

tions, may cause harmful interference to

radio communications. However, there is

no guarantee that interference will not

occur in a particular installation. If this

equipment does cause harmful interfer-

ence to radio or television reception,

which can be determined by turning the

equipment off and on, the user is en-

couraged to try to correct the interfer-

ence by one or more of the following

measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving an-

tenna.

Increase the separation between the

equipment and receiver.

Connect the equipment into an outlet

on a circuit different from that to

which the receiver is connected.

Consult the dealer or an experienced

radio / TV technician for help.

FCC WARNING:

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party respon-

sible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equip-

ment.

06 06.07

20 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

For vehicles sold in Canada

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept

any interference, including interference

that may cause undesired operation of

the device.

For replacement, use a CR2016 lithium

battery or equivalent.

CAUTION

Special care should be taken to pre-

vent small children from swallowing

the removed transmitter battery or

components.

NOTICE



When replacing the transmitter bat-

tery, be careful not to lose the com-

ponents.



Replace only with the same or

equivalent type recommended by a

Toyota dealer.



Dispose of used batteries according

to the local laws.

Replace the transmitter battery by follow-

ing these procedures:

CY12033

1. Using a coin or equivalent, open the

transmitter case.

06 06.07

—Replacing battery

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY12088

2. Remove the discharged transmitter bat-

tery by ballpoint pen.

Insert the tip of ballpoint pen at the

guide groove and lift as shown in the

above illustration.

NOTICE

Do not bend the terminals.

CY12089

3. Put in a new transmitter battery with

positive (+) side up.

Close the transmitter case securely.

NOTICE



Make sure the positive side and

negative side of the transmitter bat-

tery are faced correctly.



Do not replace the battery with wet

hands. Water may cause unexpected

rust.



Do not touch or move any compo-

nents inside the transmitter, or it

may interfere with proper operation.



Be careful not to bend the electrode

when inserting the transmitter bat-

tery and that dust or oils do not

adhere to the transmitter case.



Close the transmitter case securely.

After replacing the battery, check that the

transmitter operates properly. If the trans-

mitter still does not operate properly, con-

tact your Toyota dealer.

06 06.07

22 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY12001

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH KEY

Insert the key into the keyhole and turn

it.

To lock: Turn the key forward.

To unlock: Turn the key backward.

All the side doors and back door lock and

unlock simultaneously with the driver’s

door. In the driver’s door lock, turning the

key once will unlock the driver’s door and

twice in succession will unlock all the side

doors and back door simultaneously.

This double key turning operation to un-

lock all the side doors and back door can

be changed to a single key turning opera-

tion. For details, contact your Toyota deal-

er.

When any of the side doors and back

door is unlocked with a key, the interior

light, luggage compartment light, ignition

switch light and running board lights (on

some models) will come on and remain on

for about 15 seconds before fading out.

(For details, see “Interior light” on page

136, “Luggage compartment light” on page

138, “Ignition switch light” on page 139

and “Running board lights” on page 140

in Section 1−5.)

CY12002

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH

INSIDE LOCK KNOB

Move the lock knob.

To lock: Push the knob forward.

To unlock: Pull the knob backward.

The front doors can be opened by pulling

the inside handles even if the lock knobs

are in the locked position.

06 06.07

Side doors—

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CAUTION

Do not pull the inside handle of the

front doors while driving. The doors

will open and an accident may occur.

Toyota strongly recommends that all

children be placed in the rear seat of

the vehicle.

Closing the door with the lock knob in the

lock position will also lock the door. Be

careful not to lock your keys in the ve-

hicle.

The front doors cannot be locked if you

leave the key in the ignition switch. CY12073

Front passenger’s side

Driver’s side

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH

POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

Push the switch.

To lock: Push the switch down on the

front side.

To unlock: Push the switch down on the

rear side.

Operating the switch simultaneously locks

or unlocks all the side doors and back

door.

If you do either of the following, no side

door or back door can be unlocked with

the power door lock switch.

Lock all the side doors and back door

with the key or wireless remote control

transmitter when all the side doors and

back door are closed.

Open the driver’s door or front passen-

ger’s door and move the inside lock

knobs of both front doors to the lock

position, then close the front doors.

06 06.07

24 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

The power door lock switch can be reset

in the following ways.

Turn the ignition key to “ON”.

Unlock all the side doors and back

door with the key or wireless remote

control transmitter.

Unlock the driver’s door or front pas-

senger’s door with the inside lock

knob, and then unlock all the side

doors and back door with the power

door lock switch.

This unlocking protection with the power

door lock switch can be disabled. For de-

tails, contact your Toyota dealer.

CY12004

REAR DOOR CHILD−PROTECTORS

Move the lock lever to the “LOCK”

position as shown on the label.

When the child−protector is locked, you

cannot open the rear door by the inside

door handle. We recommend using this

feature whenever small children are in the

vehicle.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure that the doors

are closed and locked, especially

when small children are in the ve-

hicle. Along with the proper use of

seat belts, locking the doors helps

prevent the driver and passengers

from being thrown out from the ve-

hicle in an accident. It also helps pre-

vent the doors from being opened

unintentionally.

06 06.07

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKING

You can select the following functions:

Locking linked with the shift position

All doors are automatically locked when

the selector lever is moved out of “P”

position.

Locking linked with vehicle speed

All doors are automatically locked when

the vehicle speed goes above about 20

km/h (12 mph).

You can set or cancel the automatic

door locking functions:

Be sure to apply the parking brake when

performing the following operations.

To select the locking linked with the

shift position:

1. Close all doors and turn the ignition

switch to the “ON” position.

2. Shift the selector lever to the “P” posi-

tion.

3. Within 10 seconds of turning the igni-

tion switch to the “ON” position, press

and hold the driver’s side power door

lock switch in the lock position for 5

seconds and then release.

The doors will be locked and unlocked

to indicate that the function is set.

To cancel the function, do the above op-

eration again.

To select the locking linked with the

vehicle speed:

1. Close all doors and turn the ignition

switch to the “ON” position.

2. Shift the selector lever from “P” to the

“N” position.

3. Within 10 seconds of turning the igni-

tion switch to the “ON” position, press

and hold the driver’s side power door

lock switch in the lock position for 5

seconds and then release.

The doors will be locked and unlocked

to indicate that the function is set.

To cancel the function, do the above op-

eration again.

06 06.07

—Automatic door locking and

unlocking functions

26 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

AUTOMATIC DOOR UNLOCKING

You can select the following functions:

Unlocking linked with the shift posi-

tion

All doors are automatically unlocked

when the selector lever is moved to

“P” position.

Unlocking linked with the ignition

switch

All doors are automatically unlocked

when the driver’s door is opened within

10 seconds after the ignition switch is

turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” posi-

tion, or the key is removed.

You can set or cancel the automatic

door unlocking functions:

Be sure to apply the parking brake when

performing the following operations.

To select the unlocking linked with the

shift position:

1. Close all doors and turn the ignition

switch to the “ON” position.

2. Shift the selector lever to the “P” posi-

tion.

3. Within 10 seconds of turning the igni-

tion switch to the “ON” position, press

and hold the driver’s side power door

lock switch in the unlock position for

5 seconds and then release.

The doors will be locked and unlocked

to indicate that the function is set.

To cancel the function, do the above op-

eration again.

To select the unlocking linked with the

ignition switch:

1. Close all doors and turn the ignition

switch to the “ON” position.

2. Shift the selector lever from “P” to the

“N” position.

3. Within 10 seconds of turning the igni-

tion switch to the “ON” position, press

and hold the driver’s side power door

lock switch in the unlock position for

5 seconds and then release.

The doors will be locked and unlocked

to indicate that the function is set.

To cancel the function, do the above op-

eration again.

06 06.07

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY12005

The windows can be operated with the

switch on each side door.

The power windows work when the ignition

switch is in the “ON” position.

Key off operation: If both front doors are

closed, all the power windows work for 43

seconds even after the ignition switch is

turned off. It stops working when either

front door is opened.

The indicator light (“AUTO”) on the switch

tells you the switch can be operated.

OPERATING THE DRIVER’S WINDOW

Use the switch on the driver’s door.

Normal operation: The window moves as

long as you hold the switch.

To open: Lightly push down the switch.

To close: Lightly pull up the switch. CY12006

Automatic operation: Push the switch

completely down or pull it completely up,

and then release it. The window will fully

open or close. To stop the window part-

way, lightly move the switch in the oppo-

site direction and then release it.

Jam protection function: During automat-

ic closing operation or key off closing op-

eration, the window stops and opens half

way if something gets caught between the

window and window frame.

If the window receives a strong impact,

this function may work even if nothing is

caught.

06 06.07

Power windows

28 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

If the battery is disconnected or run

down, the power window may not operate

automatically and the jam protection func-

tion will not function correctly after you

reconnect, replace or recharge the battery.

In any of these cases, you should normal-

ize the power window.

To normalize the power window:

1. Push down the power window switch

and lower the window halfway.

2. Pull up the switch until the window

closes and hold the switch for a sec-

ond.

Make sure that the window opens and

closes automatically. If the power window

cannot be operated properly, have it

checked by your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

Never try jamming any part of your

body to activate the jam protection

function intentionally, as it could re-

sult in death or serious injury.

The jam protection function may

not work if something gets caught

just before the window is fully

closed.

CY12052

Window

lock

switch

CY12085

06 06.07

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

OPERATING THE PASSENGERS’

WINDOWS

Use the switch on each passenger’s

door or the switches on the driver’s

door that control each passenger’s win-

dow.

The window moves as long as you hold

the switch.

To open: Push down the switch.

To close: Pull up the switch.

If you push in the window lock switch on

the driver’s door, the passengers’ windows

cannot be operated.

CAUTION

To avoid death or serious personal

injury, you must do the following.

Before you close the power win-

dows, always make sure there is

nobody around the power windows.

You must also make sure the

heads, hands and other parts of the

bodies of all occupants are kept

completely inside the vehicle. If

someone’s neck, head or hands get

caught in a closing window, it

could result in death or serious in-

jury. When anyone closes the power

windows, make sure he or she op-

erates the windows safely.

When small children are in the ve-

hicle, never let them use the power

window switches without supervi-

sion. Use the window lock switch to

prevent them from making unex-

pected use of the switches.

Be sure to remove the ignition key

when you leave your vehicle.

Never leave anyone (particularly a

small child) alone in your vehicle,

especially with the ignition key still

inserted. Otherwise, he/she could

use the power window switches and

get trapped in a window. Unat-

tended person (particularly a small

child) can be involved in a serious

accident.

06 06.07

30 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY12036

The back window can be operated with

the switch on the instrument panel or

the key operation in the back door key-

hole.

The power back window works when the

ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

You can open the back window when the

back window wiper is working. At that

time, the wiper stops working until the

window is closed again.

If the back window is not fully closed, the

back window wiper, washer and defogger

will not work. (See “Back window wiper

and washer” on page 141 and “Back

window and outside rear view mirror

defoggers” on page 142 in Section 1−5.)

If the battery is disconnected or run

down, the power back window may not

operate automatically and the jam protec-

tion function will not function correctly af-

ter you reconnect, replace or recharge the

battery. In any of these cases, you should

normalize the power back window with the

power back window switch.

To normalize the power back window:

1. Push the “” (down) switch and lower

the window halfway.

2. Push the “” (up) switch until the win-

dow closes and hold the switch for a

second.

Make sure that the window opens and

closes automatically. If the power back

window cannot be operated properly, have

it checked by your Toyota dealer.

OPERATING FROM INSIDE

The ignition key must be in the “ON” posi-

tion.

Normal operation: To open or close the

back window, quickly push and release the

“” (down) or “” (up) switch.

Automatic operation: To open or close

the back window, push and hold the “”

(down) or “” (up) switch. The window

will fully open or close. To stop the win-

dow partway, push the switch on either

the “” (down) or “” (up) side briefly.

Key off operation: If both front doors are

closed, it works for 43 seconds even after

the ignition switch is turned off. It stops

working when either front door is opened.

Jam protection function: During automat-

ic closing operation or key off closing op-

eration, the window stops and opens half

way if something gets caught between the

window and window frame.

If the window receives a strong impact,

this function may work even if nothing is

caught.

CAUTION

Never try jamming any part of your

body to activate the jam protection

function intentionally, as it could re-

sult in death or serious injury.

The jam protection function may

not work if something gets caught

just before the window is fully

closed.

06 06.07

Power back window

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY12008

If you push in the window lock switch on

the driver’s door, the back window cannot

be operated.

CY12086

OPERATING FROM OUTSIDE

The back window can be opened and

closed with the key operation in the back

door keyhole.

To open: Turn the key fully counterclock-

wise and hold it.

After the door is unlocked, the window

begins to open. To stop the window part-

way, release the key.

To close: Turn the key fully clockwise and

hold it.

After the door is locked, the window be-

gins to close. To stop the window partway,

release the key.

This door key linked function can be dis-

abled. For details, contact your Toyota

dealer.

Jam protection function: During closing

operation, the window stops and opens

half way if something gets caught between

the window and window frame.

If the window receives a strong impact,

this function may work even if nothing is

caught.

06 06.07

32 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CAUTION

To avoid death or serious personal

injury, you must do the following.

Before you close the power back

window, always make sure there is

nobody around the power back win-

dow. You must also make sure the

heads, hands and other parts of the

bodies of all occupants are kept

completely inside the vehicle. If

someone’s neck, head or hands get

caught in a closing window, it

could result in death or serious in-

jury. When anyone closes the power

back window, make sure he or she

operates the window safely.

When small children are in the ve-

hicle, never let them use the power

back window switch without super-

vision. Use the window lock switch

to prevent them from making unex-

pected use of the switch.

Be sure to remove the ignition key

when you leave your vehicle.

Never leave anyone (particularly a

small child) alone in your vehicle,

especially with the ignition key still

inserted. Otherwise, he/she could

use the power back window switch

and get trapped in a window. Unat-

tended person (particularly a small

child) can be involved in a serious

accident.

Keep the back window closed while

driving. This not only keeps the

luggage from being thrown out but

also prevents exhaust gases from

entering the vehicle.

Never try jamming any part of your

body to activate the jam protection

function intentionally, as it could re-

sult in death or serious injury.

The jam protection function may

not work if something gets caught

just before the window is fully

closed.

To open the back window with the wire-

less remote control transmitter, see

“—Opening back window” on page 18 in

this Section.

CY12069

To open the back door, push up the

back door opener.

The back door can be opened when the

vehicle is stopped.

If the back door opener does not operate

except when the battery is disconnected

or run down, contact your Toyota dealer.

If the battery is disconnected or run

down, the back door does not open after

you reconnect, replace or recharge the

battery. In any of these cases, you should

normalize the back door.

06 06.07

Back door

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

To normalize the back door, unlock it with

the key, remote control transmitter or pow-

er door lock switch, see “—Locking and

unlocking doors” on page 16 and “Side

doors” on page 22 in this Section.

Make sure that the back door opens. If

the back door cannot be opened properly,

have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

The back door can be locked or unlocked

in the following ways.

All the side doors and back door lock

and unlock simultaneously with the

back door. Insert the key into the key-

hole, turn it clockwise to lock and turn

it counterclockwise to unlock.

Operate the power door lock switch.

(See “Side doors” on page 22 in this

Section.)

Operate the wireless remote control.

(See “—Locking and unlocking doors”

on page 16 in this Section.)

All the side doors and back door are

locked and unlocked simultaneously

with the driver’s door. (See “Side

doors” on page 22 in this Section.)

If the battery terminal is disconnected and

reconnected, the back door will be auto-

matically locked. Be careful not to lock

your keys in the vehicle.

When all the side doors and back door

are unlocked simultaneously with a key,

the interior light, luggage compartment

light, ignition switch light and running

board lights (on some models) will come

on and remain on for about 15 seconds

before fading out. (For details, see “Interi-

or light” on page 136, “Luggage compart-

ment light” on page 138, “Ignition switch

light” on page 139 and “Running board

lights” on page 140 in Section 1−5.)

The back window can be opened and

closed with the key operation in the back

door keyhole. (For details, see “Power

back window” on page 30 in this Section.)

CY12009

When closing the back door, the inside

strap can be used to make the reach

easier.

To close the back door, lower it and press

down on it. After closing the back door,

try pulling it up to make sure it is secure-

ly closed.

Back door closer: When the back door

has not been fully closed, it is automati-

cally closed completely.

See “—Stowage precautions” on page 351

in Section 2 for precautions when loading

luggage.

06 06.07

34 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CAUTION

Keep the back window and back

door closed while driving. This not

only keeps the luggage from being

thrown out but also prevents ex-

haust gases from entering the ve-

hicle.

Careful attention is needed so as

not to get your fingers trapped as

the back door automatically closes

when it has not been fully closed.

Never allow a child to operate the

back door.

NOTICE



To avoid damage to the back door

dampers, do not apply any force,

paint or let any other foreign matter

on them.



Do not apply excessive force when

the back door closer is operating.

Otherwise, the back door closer

may become defective.

CY12053

To open the hood:

1. Pull the hood lock release lever. The

hood will spring up slightly.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure that the hood

is closed and securely locked. Other-

wise, the hood may open unexpected-

ly while driving and an accident may

occur.

CY12087

2. In front of the vehicle, pull up the

auxiliary catch lever and lift the

hood.

Before closing the hood, check to see that

you have not forgotten any tools, rags,

etc. Then lower the hood and make sure

it locks into place. If necessary, press

down gently on the front edge to lock it.

06 06.07

Hood

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY12054

To deter vehicle theft, the system is

designed to sound an alarm if any of

the side doors, back door or hood is

forcibly unlocked or opened or the bat-

tery terminal is disconnected and then

reconnected when the vehicle is locked.

The alarm blows the horn intermittently

and flashes the headlights, tail lights and

turn signal lights, and turns on the interior

and luggage compartment lights.

CY12074

SETTING THE SYSTEM

1. Turn the ignition key to the “LOCK”

position and remove it.

The indicator light will start flashing when

the key is removed from the ignition

switch. (See “Engine immobilizer system”

on page 14 in this Section for details.)

2. Have all passengers get out of the

vehicle.

3. Close and lock all the side doors, back

door and hood.

The indicator light will remain on when all

the side doors, back door and hood are

closed and locked.

The system will automatically be set after

30 seconds. When the system is set, the

indicator light will start flashing again.

4. After making sure the indicator light

starts flashing, you may leave the ve-

hicle.

Never leave anyone in the vehicle when

you set the system, because unlocking

from the inside will activate the system.

CANCELING THE SYSTEM

The system will cancel under the any of

the following conditions:

Any of the side doors, back door or

hood is opened.

Any of the side doors or the back door

is unlocked.

The key is inserted into the ignition.

The battery terminal is reconnected.

06 06.07

Theft deterrent system

36 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

WHEN THE SYSTEM IS SET

Activating the system

The system will sound the alarm under

the following conditions:

If any of the side doors is unlocked or

opened without the key or wireless re-

mote control transmitter, or if the back

door or hood is forcibly opened.

If the battery terminal is disconnected

and then reconnected.

If the ignition is hotwired.

The indicator light will come on when the

system is activated.

If the alarm has been activated and the

key is not in the ignition switch, all the

side doors and back door will re−lock au-

tomatically.

After one minute, the alarm will automati-

cally stop and the indicator light will starts

flashing again.

Reactivating the alarm

Once set, the system automatically resets

the alarm after the alarm stops.

The alarm will activate again under the

same circumstances described in

“Activating the system”.

Stopping the alarm

The alarm will be stopped by the following

these ways:

Unlock any of the side doors or the

back door with the key or wireless re-

mote control transmitter.

Turn the ignition key from the “LOCK”

to “ON” position.

These ways cancel the system at the

same time.

If the battery becomes discharged due

to the vehicle being unused for a long

time, etc., when the battery is recharged

or replaced, the system will give the

alarm. If this happens, immediately unlock

any of the side doors or the back door

with the key or the wireless remote con-

trol transmitter, and the alarm will stop.

TESTING THE SYSTEM

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the system as described above.

The side doors and back door should

be locked with the key or wireless re-

mote control transmitter. Be sure to

wait until the indicator light goes off or

starts flashing.

3. Unlock any side door from the inside.

The system should activate the alarm.

4. Stop the alarm as described above.

5. Repeat this operation for the other

doors and hood. When testing the

hood, also check that the system is

activated when the battery terminal is

disconnected and then reconnected.

If the system does not work properly,

have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

06 06.07

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY12081

This indicates that the fuel filler door

is on the left side of your vehicle.

CY12055

1. To open the fuel filler door, pull the

lever.

When refueling, turn off the engine.

CAUTION

Do not smoke, cause sparks or al-

low open flames when refueling.

The fumes are flammable.

When opening the cap, do not re-

move the cap quickly. In hot weath-

er, fuel under pressure could cause

injury by spraying out of the filler

neck if the cap is suddenly re-

moved.

CY12060

2. To remove the fuel tank cap, turn

the cap counterclockwise by 90 de-

grees (to the pressure point 1), and

then turn it an additional 30 degrees

(to point 2). Pause slightly before

removing it.

It is not unusual to hear a slight swoosh

when the cap is opened.

06 06.07

Fuel tank cap

38 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY12056

3. The removed cap can be stored on

the back side of the fuel filler door.

Position the cap so that the hooks point

to the left and right or up and down, and

set it in the receptacle on the back side

of the door.

When installing the cap, turn the cap

clockwise until you hear a click. When

you hear the click, the cap is fully

closed.

If the cap is not installed securely, the

malfunction indicator lamp comes on.

Make sure the cap is tightened securely.

The indicator lamp goes off after driving

several times. If the indicator lamp does

not go off, contact your Toyota dealer as

soon as possible.

CAUTION

Make sure the cap is installed se-

curely to prevent fuel spillage in

the event of an accident.

Use only a genuine Toyota fuel tank

cap for replacement. It is designed

to regulate fuel tank pressure.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the cap, apply

force only in the turning direction to

the cap. Do not pull or pry it.

06 06.07

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY12016

Sliding operation

CY12017

Tilting operation

To operate the moon roof, use the

switch beside the personal lights.

The moon roof works when the ignition

switch is in the “ON” position.

The sun shade can be opened or closed

by hand.

Sliding operation—

To open: Push the switch on the “SLIDE

OPEN” side.

The roof will fully open automatically. To

stop the roof partway, push the switch on

either the “SLIDE OPEN” or “TILT UP”

side quickly.

When you quickly push and release the

switch, the moon roof will open while the

switch is being pushed and stop when

released.

The sun shade will be opened together

with the roof.

When the moon roof is opened fully, the

deflector will raise to reduce the entering

of the strong wind. The angle of the de-

flector will be adjusted according to the

vehicle speed.

To close: Push the switch on the “TILT

UP” side.

The roof will fully close automatically. To

stop the roof partway, push the switch on

either the “SLIDE OPEN” or “TILT UP”

side quickly.

When you quickly push and release the

switch, the moon roof will close while the

switch is being pushed and stop when

released.

Tilting operation—

To tilt up: Push the switch on the “TILT

UP” side.

The roof will fully tilt up automatically. To

stop the roof partway, push the switch on

either the “SLIDE OPEN” or “TILT UP”

side quickly.

When you quickly push and release the

switch, the moon roof will tilt up while the

switch is being pushed and stop when

released.

To tilt down: Push the switch on the

“SLIDE OPEN” side.

The roof will fully tilt down automatically.

To stop the roof partway, push the switch

on either the “SLIDE OPEN” or “TILT UP”

side quickly.

When you quickly push and release the

switch, the moon roof will tilt down while

the switch is being pushed and stop when

released.

06 06.07

Electric moon roof

40 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Key off operation: If both front doors are

closed, it works for 43 seconds even after

the ignition switch is turned off. It stops

working when either front door is opened.

Jam protection function:

If something gets caught between the

moon roof and frame during slide clos-

ing operation, the moon roof stops and

opens half way, and the deflector stops

and raises fully.

If something gets caught between the

moon roof and frame during tilting

down operation, the moon roof stops

and opens fully.

If the moon roof receives a strong impact,

this function may work even if nothing is

caught.

If the battery is disconnected or run

down, the moon roof may not operate

automatically and the jam protection func-

tion will not function correctly after you

reconnect, replace or recharge the battery.

In any of these cases, you should normal-

ize the moon roof.

To normalize the moon roof, push and

hold the switch on the “TILT UP” side until

the moon roof tilts all the way up and

then tilts down a little automatically.

Make sure that the moon roof opens and

closes automatically. If the moon roof can-

not be operated properly, have it checked

by your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

To avoid death or serious personal

injury, you must do the following.

While the vehicle is moving, always

keep the heads, hands and other

parts of the bodies of all occupants

away from the roof opening. Other-

wise, they could be seriously in-

jured if the vehicle stops suddenly

or if the vehicle is involved in an

accident.

Before you close the moon roof,

always make sure there is nobody

around the moon roof. You must

also make sure nobody places his

or her head, hands and other parts

of the body in the roof opening. If

someone’s neck, head or hands get

caught in the closing roof, it could

result in death or serious injury.

When anyone closes the moon roof,

first make sure it is safe to do so.

Be sure to remove the ignition key

when you leave your vehicle.

Never leave anyone (particularly a

small child) alone in your vehicle,

especially with the ignition key still

inserted. Otherwise, he/she could

use the moon roof switch and get

trapped in the roof opening. Unat-

tended person (particularly a small

child) can be involved in a serious

accident.

Never sit on top of the vehicle

around the roof opening.

Never try jamming any part of your

body to activate the jam protection

function intentionally, as it could re-

sult in death or serious injury.

The jam protection function may

not work if something gets caught

just before the moon roof is fully

closed.

06 06.07

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND

CONTROLS

Occupant restraint systems

Seats 42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front seats 42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Driving position memory system 48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear seats 50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Head restraints 62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Armrest 63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Seat heaters 63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Seat belts 64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SRS airbags 74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off switch 95. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Child restraint 96. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

06 06.08

SECTION

−

42 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

While the vehicle is being driven, all ve-

hicle occupants should have the seatback

upright, sit well back in the seat and prop-

erly wear the seat belts provided.

CAUTION

Do not drive the vehicle unless the

occupants are properly seated. Do

not allow any passengers to sit on

top of a folded−down seatback, or

in the luggage compartment or car-

go area. Persons not properly

seated and/or not properly re-

strained by seat belts can be killed

or severely injured in the event of

emergency braking or a collision.

During driving, do not allow any

passengers to stand up or move

around between seats. Otherwise,

death or severe injuries can occur

in the event of emergency braking

or a collision.

Driver seat

CAUTION

The SRS driver airbag deploys with

considerable force, and can cause

death or serious injury especially if

the driver is very close to the airbag.

The National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration (“NHTSA”) advises:

Since the risk zone for driver airbag

is the first 50—75 mm (2—3 in.) of

inflation, placing yourself 250 mm (10

in.) from your driver airbag provides

you with a clear margin of safety.

This distance is measured from the

center of the steering wheel to your

breastbone. If you sit less than 250

mm (10 in.) away now, you can

change your driving position in sever-

al ways:

Move your seat to the rear as far

as you can while still reaching the

pedals comfortably.

Slightly recline the back of the

seat. Although vehicle designs vary,

many drivers can achieve the 250

mm (10 in.) distance, even with the

driver seat all the way forward, sim-

ply by reclining the back of the

seat somewhat. If reclining the back

of your seat makes it hard to see

the road, raise yourself by using a

firm, non−slippery cushion, or raise

the seat if your vehicle has that

feature.

If your steering wheel is adjustable,

tilt it downward. This points the air-

bag toward your chest instead of

your head and neck.

The seat should be adjusted as rec-

ommended by NHTSA above, while

still maintaining control of the foot

pedals, steering wheel, and your view

of the instrument panel controls.

06 06.08

Seats Front seats—

—Front seat precautions

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Front passenger seat

CAUTION

The SRS front passenger airbag also

deploys with considerable force, and

can cause death or serious injury es-

pecially if the front passenger is very

close to the airbag. The front passen-

ger seat should be as far from the

airbag as possible with the seatback

adjusted, so the front passenger sits

upright.

Front seats (with SRS side airbags)

CAUTION

The SRS side airbags are installed in

the driver and front passenger seats.

Observe the following precautions.

Do not lean against the front door

when the vehicle is in use, since

the side airbag inflates with consid-

erable speed and force. Otherwise,

you may be killed or seriously in-

jured.

Do not use seat accessories which

cover the area where the side air-

bags inflate. Such accessories may

prevent the side airbags from acti-

vating correctly, causing death or

serious injury.

Do not modify or replace the seats

or upholstery of the seats with side

airbags. Such change may prevent

the side airbag system from activat-

ing correctly, disable the system or

cause the side airbags to inflate ac-

cidentally, resulting in death or seri-

ous injury.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the seat while the

vehicle is moving as the seat may

unexpectedly move and cause the

driver to lose control of the vehicle.

Be careful that the seat does not

hit a passenger or luggage.

After adjusting the seat position, re-

lease the lever and try sliding the

seat forward and backward to make

sure it is locked in position.

After adjusting the seatback, push

your body back against the seat to

make sure the seat is locked in

position.

Do not put objects under the seats.

Otherwise, the objects may interfere

with the seat−lock mechanism or

unexpectedly push up the seat posi-

tion adjusting lever and the seat

may suddenly move, causing the

driver to lose control of the vehicle.

06 06.08

—Seat adjustment precautions

44 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

While adjusting the seat, do not put

your hands under the seat or near

the moving parts. Otherwise, your

hands or fingers may be caught and

injured.

CY13281

1. SEAT POSITION ADJUSTING LEVER

Hold the center of the lever and pull it

up. Then slide the seat to the desired

position with slight body pressure and

release the lever.

2. SEAT CUSHION ANGLE ADJUSTING

KNOB (driver’s seat only)

To change the angle of the seat cush-

ion on the front side, turn the knob

either way.

3. SEAT HEIGHT ADJUSTING LEVER

(driver’s seat only)

To change the height of the seat, pull

up or push down the lever.

4. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTING

LEVER

Lean forward and pull the lever up.

Then lean back to the desired angle

and release the lever.

06 06.08

—Adjusting front seats

(manual seat)

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CAUTION

Avoid reclining the seatback any

more than needed. The seat belts pro-

vide maximum protection in a frontal

or rear collision when the driver and

the front passenger are sitting up

straight and well back in the seats. If

you are reclined, the lap belt may

slide past your hips and apply re-

straint forces directly to the abdomen

or your neck may contact the shoul-

der belt. In the event of a frontal

collision, the more the seat is re-

clined, the greater the risk of death

or serious injury.

5. SEAT LUMBAR SUPPORT

ADJUSTING SWITCH (driver’s seat

only)

Push the control switch on either side.

The amount of lumbar support will change

while the switch is pushed.

CY13001

1. DRIVER’S SEAT: SEAT POSITION,

SEAT CUSHION ANGLE AND SEAT

HEIGHT ADJUSTING SWITCH

PASSENGER’S SEAT: SEAT POSITION

ADJUSTING SWITCH

Move the control switch in the desired

direction.

Releasing the switch will stop the seat at

that position.

Do not place anything under the front

seats, as this might interfere with the seat

movement.

2. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTING

SWITCH

Move the control switch in the desired

direction.

Releasing the switch will stop the seat-

back at that position.

06 06.08

—Adjusting front seats (power

seat)

46 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CAUTION

Avoid reclining the seatback any

more than needed. The seat belts pro-

vide maximum protection in a frontal

or rear collision when the driver and

the front passenger are sitting up

straight and well back in the seats. If

you are reclined, the lap belt may

slide past your hips and apply re-

straint forces directly to the abdomen

or your neck may contact the shoul-

der belt. In the event of a frontal

collision, the more the seat is re-

clined, the greater the risk of death

or serious injury.

3. SEAT LUMBAR SUPPORT

ADJUSTING SWITCH (driver’s seat

only)

Push the control switch on either side.

The amount of lumbar support will change

while the switch is pushed.

CY13282

1. Remove the head restraint. Hold the

center of the lever and pull it up.

Then slide the seat further forward

than the front−most lock position.

CY13283

2. Pull the seatback angle adjusting le-

ver to unlock and push down the

seatback.

When returning the seatback upright, be

careful not to make yourself hit by the

seatback which will bound with consid-

erable spring force.

After returning the seat to its original

position, be certain to replace the head

restraint.

06 06.08

—Flattening seatbacks

(manual seat)

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CAUTION

Do not allow passengers to ride on

the flattened seat while driving; use

the seat in the normal position.

After putting back the seat, try

pushing the seat and seatback for-

ward and rearward to make sure it

is secured in place. Be certain to

replace the head restraint.

CY13135

1. Remove the head restraint. Move the

seat position adjusting switch for-

ward to slide the seat further for-

ward than the front−most position.

CY13136

2. Move the seatback angle adjusting

switch backward to flatten the seat-

back.

After returning the seat to its original

position, be certain to replace the head

restraint.

06 06.08

—Flattening seatbacks

(power seat)

48 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CAUTION

Do not allow passengers to ride on

the flattened seat while driving; use

the seat in the normal position.

After putting back the seat, try

pushing the seat and seatback for-

ward and rearward to make sure it

is secured in place. Be certain to

replace the head restraint.

This system can memorize the position

of the driver’s seat and recall it at the

touch of a button.

Buttons “1” and “2” can memorize two

separate positions. CY13300

SETTING THE DRIVING POSITION

The ignition key must be in the “ON” posi-

tion and the selector lever is in the “P”

position.

1. Adjust the driver’s seat to the de-

sired position.

2. While pushing the “SET” button,

push button “1” or “2” until a beep

is heard.

The system can memorize up to 2 posi-

tions by repeating the above steps. If step

2 is performed when both buttons “1” and

“2” are memorized, the previous position

will be erased and a new position will be

set.

06 06.08

Driving position memory

system (on some models)

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

To make only slight changes to an already

memorized position, the easiest way is to

first activate the memorized position, then

make the desired changes and perform

step 2 above.

CY13301

RECALLING THE MEMORIZED POSITION

When you push button “1” or “2”, a

beep will sound and the driving posi-

tion will be automatically adjusted to

the position recorded for that button.

The memorized position can be recalled

under the following conditions:

The ignition key is in the “ON” position

and the selector lever is in the “P”

position.

The ignition key is turned to the

“LOCK” position or the key is not in

the ignition switch, and less than 30

seconds have passed since opening

the driver’s door.

To stop the operation, push any driving

position memory button.

To reactivate the system, push the button

“1” or “2” again.

If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected,

the memory will be erased and the posi-

tions will have to be set again.

CAUTION

Do not start the vehicle while the

adjustments are being made.

Take care not to select the wrong

button, or the seat could strike the

rear passenger or hit your body

against the steering wheel. If this

happens, you can stop the move-

ment by pressing another driving

position memory switch.

06 06.08

50 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY13107

BEFORE FOLDING DOWN REAR SEAT

Stow the rear center seat belt buckle as

shown in the illustration.

This prevents the seat belt buckle from

falling out when you fold the seatback.

NOTICE

The seat belt buckle must be stowed

before you fold the seatback.

CY13163

If you are using a trash holder, lower

it.

CY13093

1. Lower the head restraint to the lowe-

st position.

06 06.08

Rear seats—

—Folding down rear seats

(vehicles without third seats)

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY13131

2. Swing the bottom cushion up by

pulling the lock release strap.

Each bottom cushion can be swung up

separately.

CY13132

3. Push the lock release button and

fold down the seatback.

This will enlarge the luggage compartment

as far as the raised seat cushion. See

“—Stowage precautions” on page 351 in

Section 2 for precautions when loading

luggage.

Each seatback can be folded separately.

CY13082

WHEN RETURNING THE SEATBACK

If you cannot raise the seatback because

of the locked seat belt, do not try to force

it. Release the lock of the seat belt in the

following way.

1. Push in the lower front edge of the

seatback to slacken the seat belt.

2. Let the seat belt retract a little.

06 06.08

52 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CAUTION

When returning seats to their original

position, observe the following pre-

cautions in order to prevent death or

serious injury in a collision or sud-

den stop:

Make sure the seatback is securely

locked by pushing forward and rear-

ward on the top of the seatback.

Failure to do so will prevent the

seat belt from operating properly.

Make sure the seat belts are not

twisted or caught in the seatback

and are arranged in their proper

position and are ready to use.

Make sure the bottom cushion is

securely locked by trying to pull up

the edge of the cushion near the

lock release straps.

Make sure to arrange the buckles of

the seat belts in their proper posi-

tion and be ready to use.

CAUTION

Adjustment should not be made

while the vehicle is moving.

When adjusting the seat, be careful

not to hit the seat against a pas-

senger or luggage.

After adjusting the seatback, push

back your body to make sure it is

locked in position.

When returning seats to their origi-

nal position, observe the following

precautions in order to prevent per-

sonal injury in a collision or sud-

den stop:

Make sure the seat is securely

locked by pushing forward and rear-

ward on the top of the seatback or

by trying to pull up the edge of the

bottom cushion. Failure to do so

will prevent the seat belt from oper-

ating properly.

Make sure the seat belts are not

twisted or caught under the seat

and are arranged in their proper

position and are ready to use.

The third seats have a maximum

capacity of two belted occupants

who do not exceed 150 cm (59 in.)

in height. Exceeding these limits

can result in increased risk of seri-

ous injuries or death.

Folding the seats up will enlarge the

luggage compartment. See “—Stowage

precautions” on page 351 in Section 2 for

precautions when loading luggage.

06 06.08

—Rear seat precautions

(vehicles with third seats)

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY13199

Second seats

CY13204

Third seats

SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTING LEVER

Lean forward and pull the lock release

lever. Then lean back to the desired

angle and release the lever.

CAUTION

Avoid reclining the seatback any

more than needed. The seat belts pro-

vide maximum protection in a frontal

or rear collision when the passengers

are sitting up straight and well back

in the seats. If you are reclined, the

lap belt may slide past your hips and

apply restraint forces directly to the

abdomen. In the event of a frontal

collision, the more the seat is re-

clined, the greater the risk of death

or serious injury.

CY13200

BEFORE TUMBLING SECOND SEATS

Stow the second seat belt buckles as

shown in the illustration.

This prevents the buckles from falling out

when you tumble the second seat.

NOTICE

The seat belt buckles must be stowed

before you tumble the second seat.

06 06.08

—Adjusting rear seats

(vehicles with third seats) —Tumbling second seats

54 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY13201

TUMBLING SECOND SEATS

Lower the head restraints to the lowest

position. Fold down the seatback while

pulling the seatback angle adjusting le-

ver, then swing the whole seat up and

forward until they are locked.

Tumbling the second seats will enlarge the

floor space for third seat entry. It will also

enlarge the luggage compartment when

the third seats are not used. See

“—Stowage precautions” on page 351 in

Section 2 for precautions when loading

luggage.

CY13202

WHEN RETURNING SECOND SEATS

Push the knob to unlock the seat,

swing the whole seat down and swing

the seatback up.

CY13203

If you cannot raise the seatback because

of the locked seat belt, do not try to force

it. Release the lock of the seat belt in the

following way.

1. Push in the lower front edge of the

seatback to slacken the seat belt.

2. Let the seat belt retract a little.

06 06.08

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CAUTION

When tumbling seats or returning

seats to their original positions, ob-

serve the following to prevent death

or serious injury:

Do not tumble or return the seat

while the vehicle is moving.

Make sure people or luggage are

clear of the seat. Then, hold the

seat and slowly move it. Otherwise,

people may be injured or luggage

may be damaged, if the seat hits

them.

Be careful not to get your hands or

feet pinched in the seat.

To prevent death or serious injury in

a collision or sudden stop:

Do not sit on or place anything on

the folded seatback or tumbled seat

while driving.

Make sure the seat is securely

locked by pushing forward and rear-

ward on the top of the seatback or

by trying to pull up the edge of the

bottom cushion. Failure to do so

will prevent the seat belt from oper-

ating properly.

Make sure the seat belts are not

twisted or caught under the seat

and are arranged in their proper

position and are ready to use.

CY13248

BEFORE FOLDING UP THIRD SEATS

1. Stow the third seat belt buckles as

shown in the illustration.

This prevents the buckles from falling out

when you fold up the third seats.

NOTICE

The seat belt buckles must be stowed

before you fold up the third seats.

06 06.08

—Folding up third seats

56 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY13230

2. Make sure the shoulder belt passes

through the hanger.

This prevents the shoulder belt from being

damaged.

CAUTION

The seat belt must be removed from

the hanger when the seat belt is in

use.

CY13206

FOLDING UP THIRD SEATS

1. Lower the head restraint to the low-

est position. Fold down the seatback

while pushing the seatback angle ad-

justing lever.

Folding up the third seats will enlarge the

luggage compartment. See “—Stowage

precautions” on page 351 in Section 2 for

precautions when loading luggage.

CY13207

2. Unlock the seat leg by pulling the

handle behind the seat, and swing

the whole seat up and sideward.

06 06.08

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY13255

3. Stow the seat leg in the back of the

seat cushion. Take the holding strap

out of its holder, and attach the

strap to the assist grip. Tighten the

strap by pulling the end and fix it

with Velcro.

CAUTION

When folding up the third seats, fix

the seats securely by adjusting the

length of the holding strap. Failure to

do so may cause an unexpected inju-

ry in the event of emergency braking

or collision.

CY13256

4. Remove the seat anchor covers from

the back of the seat cushion, and

install them over the seat anchors.

CAUTION

Be sure to apply the covers on the

seat anchors, or you may get burned

when they become hot.

CY13257

When returning the third seat to its origi-

nal position, stow the holding strap in the

holder in the direction shown above. Then

do the above procedures in the reverse

order.

06 06.08

58 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CAUTION

When folding up seats or returning

seats to their original positions, ob-

serve the following to prevent death

or serious injury:

Do not fold up or return the seat

while the vehicle is moving.

Be careful not to hit the seat

against a person or drop it on your-

self.

To prevent death or serious injury in

a collision or sudden stop:

Do not sit on or place anything on

the folded seatback while driving.

Make sure the seat is securely

locked by pushing forward and rear-

ward on the top of the seatback or

by trying to pull up the edge of the

bottom cushion. Failure to do so

will prevent the seat belt from oper-

ating properly.

Make sure the seat belts are not

twisted or caught under the seat

and are arranged in their proper

position and are ready to use.

CY13248

BEFORE REMOVING THIRD SEATS

1. Stow the third seat belt buckles as

shown in the illustration.

This prevents the buckles from falling out

when you remove the third seats.

NOTICE

The seat belt buckles must be stowed

before you remove the third seats.

CY13230

2. Make sure the shoulder belt passes

through the hanger.

This prevents the shoulder belt from being

damaged.

CAUTION

The seat belt must be removed from

the hanger when the seat belt is in

use.

06 06.08

—Removing third seats

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY13206

REMOVING THIRD SEATS

1. Lower the head restraint to the low-

est position. Fold down the seatback

while pushing the seatback angle ad-

justing lever.

CY13210

2. Unlock the seat leg by pulling the

handle behind the seat, and lift the

whole seat up. Retract the seat leg

into the back of the seat cushion.

Then, place the seat on the floor.

CY13211

3. Remove the cover and push the seat

lock release lever outward to unlock

the seat lock, then pull up the whole

seat and remove it. After removing

the seat, reinstall the cover.

Removing the third seats will enlarge the

luggage compartment. See “—Stowage

precautions” on page 351 in Section 2 for

precautions when loading luggage.

NOTICE

Avoid putting heavy loads on the re-

moved seat. The metallic tips of the

seat leg may be damaged and the

seat cannot be reinstalled.

06 06.08

60 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY13258

4. Remove the seat anchor covers from

the back of the seat cushion, and

install them over the seat anchors.

CAUTION

Be sure to apply the covers on the

seat anchors, or you may get burned

when they become hot.

CY13212

REINSTALLING THIRD SEATS

1. Remove the seat anchor covers from

the floor and install them in the

back of the seat cushion. Hold the

seat and engage the seat striker to

the seat lock, then place the seat on

the floor. Press down the seatback

to securely lock the seat to the

body.

06 06.08

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY13213

2. Pull out the seat leg from the back

of the seat cushion and lock it on

the anchor. Reinstall the cover.

CY13214

3. Raise the seatback while pushing

down the seatback angle adjusting

lever.

CAUTION

When removing or reinstalling the

seat, observe the following to prevent

death or serious injury:

Do not fold or remove the seat

while the vehicle is moving.

Be careful not to get your hands or

feet pinched in the seat.

Be careful not to hit the removed

seat against a person or drop it on

yourself.

When reinstalling the seat, be care-

ful not to hit the seat against your-

self or the vehicle.

To prevent death or serious injury in

a collision or sudden stop:

Do not sit on or place anything on

the folded seatback while driving.

Do not leave the removed seat un-

secured in the vehicle.

Do not try to sit on or place any-

thing on the removed seat.

Reinstall each seat in its original

position. Failure to do so will pre-

vent third seat occupants from us-

ing seat belts properly.

Make sure the seat is securely

locked by pushing forward and rear-

ward on the top of the seatback or

by trying to pull up the edge of the

bottom cushion. Failure to do so

will prevent the seat belt from oper-

ating properly.

Make sure the seat belts are not

twisted or caught under the seat

and are arranged in their proper

position and are ready to use.

06 06.08

62 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY13109

Front seats

CY13110

Rear seats—vehicles without third seats

CY13238

Second seats—vehicles with third seats

CY13239

Third seats

For your safety and comfort, adjust the

head restraint before driving.

To raise: Pull it up.

To lower: Push it down while pressing the

lock release button.

Front head restraints—You can also move

the head restraint forward or backward. If

such adjustment is desired, pull or push

the base of the head restraint.

Rear head restraints (vehicles without

third seats) and a second center head

restraint (vehicles with third seats)—When

an occupant sits on the rear seat (ve-

hicles without third seats) or second cen-

ter seat (vehicles with third seats), always

pull up the rear head restraint to the lock

position.

The head restraint is most effective when

it is close to your head. Therefore, using

a cushion on the seatback is not recom-

mended.

06 06.08

Head restraints

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CAUTION

Adjust the center of the head re-

straint so that it is closest to the

top of your ears.

After adjusting the head restraint,

make sure it is locked in position.

Do not drive with the head re-

straints removed.

CY13137

To use the armrest, pull it out as

shown above.

This armrest is equipped with cup holders

and tray. (For details, see “Rear cup

holders and tray” on page 318 or “Rear

cup holders” on page 320 in Section

1−10.)

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the armrest,

avoid putting heavy loads on it.

CY13193

To turn on the seat heater, move the

dial forward (“L” dial for the left front

seat and “R” dial for the right front

seat). At this time, the indicator light

will illuminate to indicate the seat heat-

er is operating.

To turn off the seat heater, move the

dial backward until it stops.

Move the dial forward or backward to ad-

just to the desired temperature. When the

seat heater is not in use, move the dial

fully backward.

The key must be in the “ON” position.

06 06.08

Armrest Seat heaters

64 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CAUTION

Occupants must use caution when op-

erating the seat heater because it

may make them feel too hot or cause

burns at low temperatures (erythema,

varicella). Use extra caution for;

Babies, small children, elderly per-

sons, sick persons or persons with

physical disabilities

Persons who have sensitive skin

Persons who are exhausted

Persons who have taken alcohol or

drugs which induce sleep (sleeping

drug, cold remedy, etc.)

To prevent the seat overheating, do

not use the seat heater with a blan-

ket, cushion, or other insulating ob-

jects which cover the seat.

NOTICE



Do not put unevenly weighed ob-

jects on the seat and do not stick

sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.)

into the seat.



When cleaning the seats, do not

use organic substances (paint thin-

ner, benzine, alcohol, gasoline,

etc.). They may damage the heater

and seat surface.



To prevent the battery from being

discharged, turn the system off

when the engine is not running.

Toyota strongly urges that the driver and

passengers in the vehicle be properly re-

strained at all times with the seat belts

provided. Failure to do so could increase

the chance of injury and/or the severity of

injury in accidents.

The seat belts provided for your vehicle

are designed for people of adult size,

large enough to properly wear them.

Child. Use a child restraint system ap-

propriate for the child until the child be-

comes large enough to properly wear the

vehicle’s seat belts. See “Child restraint”

on page 96 in this Section for details.

If a child is too large for a child restraint

system, the child should sit in the rear

seat and must be restrained using the

vehicle’s seat belt. According to accident

statistics, the child is safer when properly

restrained in the rear seat than in the

front seat.

If a child must sit in the front seat, the

seat belts should be worn properly. If an

accident occurs and the seat belts are not

worn properly, the force of the rapid infla-

tion of the airbag may cause death or

serious injury to the child.

06 06.08

Seat belts—

—Seat belt precautions

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Do not allow any children to stand up or

kneel on either rear or front seats. An

unrestrained child could suffer serious in-

jury or death during emergency braking or

a collision. Also, do not let the child sit

on your lap. Holding a child in your arms

does not provide sufficient restraint.

Pregnant woman. Toyota recommends the

use of a seat belt. Ask your doctor for

specific recommendations. The lap belt

should be worn securely and as low as

possible over the hips and not on the

waist.

Injured person. Toyota recommends the

use of a seat belt. Depending on the inju-

ry, first check with your doctor for specific

recommendation.

CAUTION

Persons should ride in their seats

properly wearing their seat belts

whenever the vehicle is moving.

Otherwise, they are much more likely

to suffer serious injury or death in

the event of sudden braking or a col-

lision.

When using the seat belts, observe

the following:

Use the belt for only one person at

a time. Do not use a single belt for

two or more people—even children.

Avoid reclining the seatback any

more than needed. The seat belts

provide maximum protection in a

frontal or rear collision when the

driver and the front passenger are

sitting up straight and well back in

the seats. If you are reclined, the

lap belt may slide past your hips

and apply restraint forces directly

to the abdomen or your neck may

contact the shoulder belt. In the

event of a frontal collision, the

more the seat is reclined, the great-

er the risk of death or serious inju-

ry.

Be careful not to damage the belt

webbing or hardware. Take care that

they do not get caught or pinched

in the seat or side doors.

Inspect the belt system periodically.

Check for cuts, fraying, and loose

parts. Damaged parts should be re-

placed. Do not disassemble or

modify the system.

Keep the belts clean and dry. If

they need cleaning, use a mild soap

solution or lukewarm water. Never

use bleach, dye, or abrasive clean-

ers, or allow them to come into

contact with the belts—they may

severely weaken the belts. (See

“Cleaning the interior” on page 401

in Section 5.)

Replace the belt assembly (includ-

ing bolts) if it has been used in a

severe impact. The entire assembly

should be replaced even if damage

is not obvious.

06 06.08

66 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY13231

Tab

Buckle

Adjust the seat as needed and sit up

straight and well back in the seat. To

fasten your belt, pull it out of the re-

tractor and insert the tab into the

buckle.

You will hear a click when the tab locks

into the buckle.

The seat belt length automatically adjusts

to your size and the seat position.

The retractor will lock the belt during a

sudden stop or on impact. It also may

lock if you lean forward too quickly. A

slow, easy motion will allow the belt to

extend, and you can move around freely.

When a passenger’s shoulder belt is com-

pletely extended and is then retracted

even slightly, the belt is locked in that

position and cannot be extended. This fea-

ture is used to hold the child restraint

system securely. (For details, see “Child

restraint” on page 96 in this Section.) To

free the belt again, fully retract the belt

and then pull the belt out once more.

If the seat belt cannot be pulled out of the

retractor, firmly pull the belt and release

it. You will then be able to smoothly pull

the belt out of the retractor.

CAUTION

After inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and

that the belt is not twisted.

Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in

the buckle as this may prevent you

from properly latching the tab and

buckle.

If the seat belt does not function

normally, immediately contact your

Toyota dealer. Do not use the seat

until the seat belt is fixed, because

it cannot protect an adult occupant

or your child from death or serious

injury.

CY13057

Take up

slack

Too h igh

Keep as low on

hips as possible

Adjust the position of the lap and

shoulder belts.

Position the lap belt as low as possible

on your hips—not on your waist, then ad-

just it to a snug fit by pulling the shoulder

portion upward through the latch plate.

06 06.08

—Fastening front and rear

seat belts

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CAUTION

Both high−positioned lap belts and

loose−fitting belts could cause

death or serious injuries due to

sliding under the lap belt during a

collision or other unintended event.

Keep the lap belt positioned as low

on hips as possible.

Do not place the shoulder belt un-

der your arm.

CY13007

Seat belts with an adjustable shoulder

anchor—

Adjust the shoulder anchor position to

your size.

To raise: Slide the anchor up.

To lower: Push in the lock release button

and slide the anchor down.

After adjustment make sure the anchor is

locked in position.

CAUTION

Always make sure the shoulder belt

is positioned across the center of

your shoulder. The belt should be

kept away from your neck, but not

falling off your shoulder. Failure to

do so could reduce the amount of

protection in an accident and cause

death or serious injuries in a colli-

sion.

06 06.08

68 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY13164

To release the belt, press the buckle

release button and allow the belt to

retract.

If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull

it out and check for kinks or twists. Then

make sure it remains untwisted as it re-

tracts.

CY13107

Rear center seat—vehicles without third

seats

CY13200

Second seats—vehicles with third seats

CY13249

Third seats

The rear seat belt buckles can be

stowed when not in use.

Seat belt buckle must be stowed before

you fold the seatback. (See “—Folding

down rear seats” on page 50, “—Tumbling

second seats” on page 53, “—Folding up

third seats” on page 55 or “—Removing

third seats” on page 58 in this Section.)

06 06.08

—Stowing rear seat belt

buckles

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

If your seat belts cannot be fastened se-

curely because they are not long enough,

a personalized seat belt extender is avail-

able from your Toyota dealer free of

charge.

Please contact your local Toyota dealer to

order the proper required length for the

extender. Bring the heaviest coat you ex-

pect to wear for proper measurement and

selection of length. Additional ordering in-

formation is available at your Toyota deal-

er.

CAUTION

When using the seat belt extender,

observe the following precautions.

Failure to follow these instructions

could reduce the effectiveness of the

seat belt restraint system in case of

an accident, increasing the chance of

death or serious injury.

Remember that the extender pro-

vided for you may not be safe when

used on a different vehicle, for

another person, or at a different

seating position than the one origi-

nally intended.

CY13241

If the seat belt extender has been

connected to the driver’s seat belt

buckle without wearing the seat belt

when using the extender in the

driver’s seat, the SRS driver’s air-

bag system will judge that the driv-

er wears the seat belt even if not

wearing it. In this case, the driver’s

airbag may not activate correctly,

causing death or serious injury in

the event of collision. Be sure to

wear the seat belt with the seat belt

extender.

Make sure the front passenger oc-

cupant classification indicator light

indicates “ON” when using the seat

belt extender for the front passen-

ger seat. If the indicator light indi-

cates “OFF”, disconnect the extend-

er tongue from the seat belt buckle,

then reconnect the seat belt. Recon-

nect the seat belt extender after

making sure the indicator light indi-

cates “ON”. If you use the seat belt

extender while the indicator light

indicates “OFF”, the front passen-

ger airbag and side airbag on the

front passenger side may not acti-

vate correctly, which could cause

death or serious injury in the event

of collision.

Be sure to wear the seat belt with-

out the seat belt extender if you

can fasten the seat belt without the

extender.

06 06.08

—Seat belt extender

70 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Do not use the seat belt extender

when installing a child restraint

system on the front or rear passen-

ger seat. If installing a child re-

straint system with the seat belt

extender connected to the seat belt,

the seat belt will not securely hold

the child restraint system, which

could cause death or serious injury

to the child or other passengers in

the event of collision.

CY13166

To connect the extender to the seat

belt, insert the tab into the seat belt

buckle so that the “PRESS” signs on

the buckle release buttons of the ex-

tender and the seat belt are both facing

outward as shown.

You will hear a click when the tab locks

into the buckle.

When releasing the seat belt, press on

the buckle release button on the extender,

not on the seat belt. This helps prevent

damage to the vehicle interior and extend-

er itself.

As far as the seat belt extender on the

front passenger side is concerned, do not

fail to disconnect the extender from the

seat belt after the above operation in or-

der to activate the front passenger airbag

correctly when getting into the vehicle

next time.

When not in use, remove the extender

and store in the vehicle for future use.

CAUTION

After inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and

that the lap and shoulder portions

of the belt and the seat belt extend-

er are not twisted.

Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in

the buckle as this may prevent you

from properly latching the tab and

buckle.

If the seat belt does not function

normally, immediately contact your

Toyota dealer. Do not use the seat

until the seat belt is fixed, because

it cannot protect an adult occupant

or your child from death or serious

injury.

06 06.08

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY13018

The driver and front passenger seat

belt pretensioners are designed to be

activated in response to a severe fron-

tal impact. On vehicles equipped with

curtain shield airbags, the pretensioners

are also activated during vehicle rol-

lover.

When the sensor detects a severe frontal

impact or a vehicle rollover, the front seat

belts are quickly drawn back by the re-

tractors so that the belts snugly restrain

the occupants.

The seat belt pretensioner will not activate

if no passenger is detected in the front

passenger seat by the front passenger

occupant classification system. However,

the front passenger’s seat belt

pretensioner may activate if luggage is put

on the seat, or the seat belt is buckled up

regardless of the presence of an occupant

in the seat. (As for the front passenger

occupant classification system, see

“—Front passenger occupant classification

system” on page 91 in this Section.)

The seat belt pretensioners and SRS air-

bags may not operate together in all colli-

sions.

CY13294

The seat belt pretensioners will not oper-

ate in a vehicle rollover if the “RSCA

OFF” indicator light is on. For details, see

“Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off

switch” on page 95 in this Section.

06 06.08

—Seat belt pretensioners

72 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY13293

The seat belt pretensioner system con-

sists mainly of the following components

and their locations are shown in the il-

lustration.

1. Front airbag sensors

2. SRS warning light

3. Front passenger occupant classification

indicator light

4. Front passenger occupant classification

system (ECU and sensors)

5. Seat belt pretensioner assemblies

6. Front passenger’s seat belt buckle

switch

7. Airbag sensor assembly

The seat belt pretensioners are controlled

by the airbag sensor assembly. The airbag

sensor assembly consists of a safing sen-

sor and airbag sensor.

When the seat belt pretensioners are acti-

vated, an operating noise may be heard

and a small amount of non−toxic gas may

be released. This does not indicate that

a fire is occurring. This gas is normally

harmless.

Once the seat belt pretensioners have

been activated, the seat belt retractors

remain locked.

CAUTION

Do not modify, remove, strike or

open the seat belt pretensioner as-

semblies, airbag sensor or sur-

rounding area or wiring. Failure to

follow these instructions may pre-

vent the seat belt pretensioners

from activating correctly, cause sud-

den operation of the system or dis-

able the system, which could result

in death or serious injury. Consult

your Toyota dealer about any repair

and modification.

Do not modify or change the sus-

pension system. Such changes may

cause the curtain shield airbags to

inflate accidentally, which could re-

sult in death or serious injury. Con-

sult your Toyota dealer about any

repair and modification.

Do not use tires or wheels other

than the manufacture’s recom-

mended size. Such a use may cause

the curtain shield airbags and seat

belt pretensioners to inflate acci-

dentally, which could result in death

or serious injury. For details, see

“Checking and replacing tires” on

page 427 in Section 7−2.

Do not place luggage heavier than

specified on the roof luggage carri-

er. Such luggage may cause the

curtain shield airbags and seat belt

pretensioners to inflate accidentally,

which could result in death or seri-

ous injury. For details, see “Roof

luggage carrier” on page 324 in

Section 1−10.

06 06.08

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the following

changes without consulting your

Toyota dealer. Such changes can

interfere with proper operation of the

seat belt pretensioners in some

cases.



Installation of electronic devices

such as a mobile two−way radio,

cassette tape player or compact

disc player



Repairs on or near the front seat

belt retractor assemblies



Modification of the front end struc-

ture



Attachment of a grille guard (bull

bar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,

winches or any other equipment to

the front end



Repairs made on or near the front

fenders, front end structure or con-

sole

CY13295

This indicator comes on when the igni-

tion key is turned to the “ON” position.

It goes off after about 6 seconds. This

means the seat belt pretensioners are

operating properly.

This warning light system monitors the

airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-

sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen-

sors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driv-

er’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt

buckle switch, front passenger occupant

classification system and indicator light,

front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch,

seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflat-

ors, “RSCA OFF” indicator light, intercon-

necting wiring and power sources. (For

details, see “Service reminder indicators

and warning buzzers” on page 147 in Sec-

tion 1−6.)

If any of the following conditions occurs,

this indicates a malfunction of the airbags

or seat belt pretensioners. Contact your

Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

The light does not come on when the

ignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-

tion or remains on for more than 6

seconds or flashes.

The light comes on or starts flashing

while driving.

If any seat belt does not retract or can

not be pulled out due to a malfunction

or activation of the relevant seat belt

pretensioner.

The seat belt pretensioner assembly or

surrounding area has been damaged.

06 06.08

74 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

The SRS warning light will come on and

front passenger occupant classification in-

dicator light will indicate “OFF” if there is

a malfunction in the front passenger occu-

pant classification system.

CY13064

In the following cases, contact your Toyota

dealer as soon as possible:

The front of the vehicle (shaded in the

illustration) was involved in an accident

that was not severe enough to cause

the seat belt pretensioners to operate.

Either seat belt pretensioner assembly

or surrounding area is scratched,

cracked, or otherwise damaged.

CY13019

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-

tem) front airbags are designed to pro-

vide further protection for the driver

and front passenger in addition to the

primary safety protection provided by

the seat belts.

Your vehicle is equipped with “ADVANCED

AIRBAGS” designed based on US motor

vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The

airbag system controls airbag deployment

power for the driver and front passenger.

The driver airbag system consists of the

driver seat’s position sensor etc. The front

passenger’s airbag system consists of the

front passenger occupant classification

sensor etc.

06 06.08

SRS airbags—

—SRS driver airbag and front

passenger airbag

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

In response to a severe frontal impact,

the SRS front airbags work with the seat

belts to help reduce injury by inflating.

The SRS front airbags help reduce injuries

mainly to the driver’s or front passenger’s

head or chest caused by hitting the ve-

hicle interior.

The SRS front passenger airbag will not

activate if there is no passenger sitting in

the front passenger seat. However, the

front passenger airbag may deploy if lug-

gage is put in the seat, or the seat belt

is buckled up, regardless of the presence

of an occupant in the seat. (As for the

front passenger occupant classification

system, see “—Front passenger occupant

classification system” on page 91 in this

Section.)

Always wear your seat belt properly.

CAUTION

The SRS front airbag system is de-

signed only as a supplement to the

primary protection of the driver and

front passenger seat belt systems.

The driver and front passenger can

be killed or seriously injured by the

inflating airbags if they do not wear

the available seat belts properly.

During sudden braking just before

a collision, an unrestrained driver

or front passenger can move for-

ward into direct contact with or

close proximity to the airbag which

may then deploy during the colli-

sion. To ensure maximum protection

in an accident, the driver and all

passengers in the vehicle must

wear their seat belts properly. Wear-

ing a seat belt properly during an

accident reduces the chances of

death or serious injury or being

thrown out of the vehicle. For in-

structions and precautions concern-

ing the seat belt system, see “Seat

belts” on page 64 in this Section.

Improperly seated and/or restrained

infants and children can be killed

or seriously injured by the deploy-

ing airbags. An infant or child who

is too small to use a seat belt

should be properly secured using a

child restraint system. Toyota

strongly recommends that all in-

fants and children be placed in the

rear seat of the vehicle and proper-

ly restrained. The rear seat is the

safest for infants and children. For

instructions concerning the installa-

tion of a child restraint system, see

“Child restraint” on page 96 in this

Section.

06 06.08

76 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

The SRS front airbags are designed to

deploy in severe (usually frontal) colli-

sions where the magnitude and duration

of the forward deceleration of the ve-

hicle exceeds the designed threshold

level.

The SRS front airbags will deploy if the

severity of the impact is above the de-

signed threshold level, comparable to an

approximate 25 km/h (15 mph) collision

when the vehicle has the impact straight

into a fixed barrier that does not move or

deform.

However, this threshold velocity will be

considerably higher if the vehicle strikes

an object, such as a parked vehicle or

sign pole, which can move or deform on

impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an

underride collision (e.g. a collision in

which the front of the vehicle “underrides”,

or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.).

It is possible that in some collisions

where the forward deceleration of the ve-

hicle is very close to the designed thresh-

old level, the SRS front airbags and the

seat belt pretensioners may not activate

together.

Always wear your seat belts properly.

CY13309

Collision from the rear

Collision from the side

Vehicle rollover

The SRS front airbags are not generally

designed to inflate if the vehicle is in-

volved in a side or rear collision, if it

rolls over, or if it is involved in a low−

speed frontal collision. But, whenever a

collision of any type causes sufficient

forward deceleration of the vehicle, de-

ployment of the SRS front airbags may

occur.

CY13232

Hitting a curb, edge

of pavement or

hard surface

Falling into or

jumping over

a deep hole

Landing hard or vehicle falling

The SRS front airbags may also deploy

if a serious impact occurs to the under-

side of your vehicle. Some examples

are shown in the illustration.

06 06.08

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY13280

The SRS front airbag system consists

mainly of the following components, and

their locations are shown in the illustra-

tion.

1. Front airbag sensors

2. SRS warning light

3. Front passenger occupant classification

indicator light

4. Airbag module for front passenger

(airbag and inflator)

5. Front passenger occupant classification

system (ECU and sensors)

6. Front passenger’s seat belt buckle

switch

7. Driver’s seat belt buckle switch

8. Driver’s seat position sensor

9. Airbag sensor assembly

10. Airbag module for driver

(airbag and inflator)

The airbag sensor assembly consists of a

safing sensor and airbag sensor.

The front airbag sensors constantly moni-

tor the forward deceleration of the vehicle.

If an impact results in a forward decelera-

tion beyond the designed threshold level,

the system triggers the airbag inflators. At

this time a chemical reaction in the infla-

tors very quickly fills the airbags with

non−toxic gas to help restrain the forward

motion of the occupants. The front airbags

then quickly deflate, so that there is no

obstruction of the driver’s vision should it

be necessary to continue driving.

When the airbags inflate, they produce a

loud noise and release some smoke and

residue along with non−toxic gas. This

does not indicate a fire. This smoke may

remain inside the vehicle for some time,

and may cause some minor irritation to

the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to

wash off any residue as soon as possible

to prevent any potential skin irritation with

soap and water. If you can safely exit

from the vehicle, you should do so imme-

diately.

Deployment of the airbags happens in a

fraction of a second, so the airbags must

inflate with considerable force. While the

system is designed to reduce serious inju-

ries, primarily to the head and chest, it

may also cause other, less severe injuries

to the face, chest, arms and hands. These

are usually in the nature of minor burns

or abrasions and swelling, but the force of

a deploying airbag can cause more seri-

ous injuries, especially if an occupant’s

hands, arms, chest or head is in close

proximity to the airbag module at the time

of deployment. This is why it is important

for the occupant to: avoid placing any

object or part of the body between the

occupant and the airbag module; sit

straight and well back into the seat; wear

the available seat belt properly; and sit as

far as possible from the airbag module,

while still maintaining control of the ve-

hicle.

Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel

hub, airbag cover and inflator) may be hot

for several minutes after deployment, so

do not touch! The airbags inflate only

once. The windshield may be damaged by

absorbing some of the force of the inflat-

ing airbag.

06 06.08

78 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CAUTION

The driver or front passenger who is

too close to the steering wheel or

dashboard during airbag deployment

can be killed or seriously injured.

Toyota strongly recommends that:

The driver sit as far back as pos-

sible from the steering wheel while

still maintaining control of the ve-

hicle.

The front passenger sit as far back

as possible from the dashboard.

All vehicle occupants be properly

restrained using the available seat

belts.

For instructions and precautions con-

cerning the seating position, see

“—Front seat precautions” on page

42 in this Section.

CY13020

Do not sit on the edge of the seat

or lean against the dashboard when

the vehicle is in use, since the

front passenger airbag could inflate

with considerable speed and force.

Anyone who is up against, or very

close to, an airbag when it inflates,

can be killed or seriously injured.

Sit up straight and well back in the

seat, and always use your seat belt

properly.

CY13275

Toyota strongly recommends that all

infants and children be placed in

the rear seat of the vehicle and be

properly restrained.

Do not hold a child on your lap or

in your arms. Use a child restraint

system in the rear seat. For instruc-

tions concerning the installation of

a child restraint system, see “Child

restraint” on page 96 in this Sec-

tion.

06 06.08

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY13114

Do not put anything or any part of

your body on or in front of the

dashboard or steering wheel pad

that houses the front airbag sys-

tem. They might restrict inflation or

cause death or serious injury as

they are projected rearward by the

force of the deploying airbags. Like-

wise, the driver and front passenger

should not hold objects in their

arms or on their knees.

Do not modify or remove any wir-

ing. Do not modify, remove, strike

or open any components such as

the steering wheel pad, steering

wheel, column cover, dashboard

near the front passenger airbag,

front passenger airbag or airbag

sensor assembly. Doing so may pre-

vent the front airbag system from

activating correctly, cause sudden

activation of the system or disable

the system, which could result in

death or serious injury.

Failure to follow these instructions

can result in death or serious injury.

Consult your Toyota dealer about any

repair and modification.

If you wish to modify your vehicle for

a person with physical disability, con-

sult your Toyota dealer. It may dan-

gerously interfere with the SRS front

airbags operation.

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the following

changes without consulting your

Toyota dealer. Such changes can in-

terfere with proper operation of the

SRS front airbag system in some

cases.



Installation of electronic devices

such as a mobile two−way radio,

cassette tape player or compact

disc player



Modification of the suspension sys-

tem



Modification of the front end struc-

ture



Attachment of a grille guard (bull

bar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,

winches or any other equipment to

the front end



Repairs made on or near the front

fenders, front end structure, con-

sole, steering column, steering

wheel or dashboard near the front

passenger airbag

06 06.08

80 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY13295

This indicator comes on when the igni-

tion key is turned to the “ON” position.

It goes off after about 6 seconds. This

means the SRS front airbags are oper-

ating properly.

This warning light system monitors the

airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-

sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen-

sors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driv-

er’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt

buckle switch, front passenger occupant

classification system and indicator light,

front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch,

seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflat-

ors, “RSCA OFF” indicator light, intercon-

necting wiring and power sources. (For

details, see “Service reminder indicators

and warning buzzers” on page 147 in Sec-

tion 1−6.)

If any of the following conditions occurs,

this indicates a malfunction of the airbags

or seat belt pretensioners. Contact your

Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

The light does not come on when the

ignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-

tion or remains on for more than 6

seconds or flashes.

The light comes on or starts flashing

while driving.

The SRS warning light will come on and

front passenger occupant classification in-

dicator light will indicate “OFF” if there is

a malfunction in the front passenger occu-

pant classification system.

CY13065

In the following cases, contact your Toyota

dealer as soon as possible:

The SRS front airbags have been in-

flated.

The front of the vehicle (shaded in the

illustration) was involved in an accident

that was not severe enough to cause

the SRS front airbags to inflate.

The pad section of the steering wheel

or dashboard (shaded in the illustra-

tion) is scratched, cracked, or other-

wise damaged.

06 06.08

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

NOTICE

Do not disconnect the battery cables

before contacting your Toyota dealer.

CY13073

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-

tem) side airbags and curtain shield air-

bags are designed to provide further

protection for the driver, front passen-

ger and rear seat passengers∗1/second

seat passengers∗2 in addition to the pri-

mary safety protection provided by the

seat belts.

∗1: Without third seats

∗2: With third seats

In response to a severe side impact, the

SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbags

in the impacted side work with the seat

belts to help reduce injury by inflating.

The SRS side airbags help reduce injuries

mainly to the driver’s or front passenger’s

chest. The SRS curtain shield airbags

help reduce injuries mainly to the driver’s,

front passenger’s or rear/second passen-

ger’s head and help prevent them from

being thrown out of the vehicle.

The SRS side airbag on the passenger

seat will not activate if there is no pas-

senger sitting in the front passenger seat.

However, the side airbag on the passen-

ger seat may deploy if luggage is put in

the seat, or the seat belt is buckled up

regardless of the presence of the occu-

pant in the seat. (As for the front passen-

ger occupant classification system, see

“—Front passenger occupant classification

system” on page 91 in this Section.)

The SRS curtain shield airbag on the pas-

senger side are activated even with no

passenger in the front seat or rear/second

outside seat.

06 06.08

—SRS side airbags and

curtain shield airbags

82 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Roll sensing function:

In response to a vehicle rollover, the cur-

tain shield airbags on both sides work

with the seat belts to help reduce injury

by inflating. The curtain shield airbags

help reduce injuries mainly to the driver’s,

front passenger’s or rear/second passen-

ger’s head and help prevent them from

being thrown out of the vehicle. (This

function can be turned off if inflation is

not desired. See “Roll sensing of curtain

shield airbags off switch” on page 95 in

this Section.)

The SRS curtain shield airbags may acti-

vate even when the side airbags are not

activated.

Always wear your seat belt properly.

CAUTION

The SRS side airbag and curtain

shield airbag system is designed

only as a supplement to the

primary protection of the driver,

front passenger and rear/second

passenger seat belt systems. To

ensure maximum protection in an

accident, the driver and all passen-

gers in the vehicle must wear their

seat belts properly. Wearing a seat

belt properly during an accident

reduces the chances of death or

serious injury or being thrown out

of the vehicle. For instructions and

precautions concerning the seat

belt system, see “Seat belts” on

page 64 in this Section.

Do not allow anyone to lean his/her

head or any part of his/her body

against the door or the area of the

seat, front pillar, rear pillar or roof

side rail from which the SRS side

airbag and curtain shield airbag

deploy even if he/she is a child

seated in the child restraint system.

It is dangerous if the SRS side air-

bag and curtain shield airbag in-

flate, and the impact of the deploy-

ing airbag could cause death or se-

rious injury to the occupant.

06 06.08

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Improperly seated and/or restrained

infants and children can be killed

or seriously injured by the deploy-

ing airbags. An infant or child who

is too small to use a seat belt

should be properly secured using a

child restraint system. Toyota

strongly recommends that all in-

fants and children be placed in the

rear seats of the vehicle and prop-

erly restrained. The rear seats are

the safest for infants and children.

For instructions concerning the

installation of a child restraint sys-

tem, see “Child restraint” on page

96 in this Section.

CY13071

The SRS side airbags may not activate

if the vehicle is subjected to a collision

from the side at certain angles, or a

collision to the side of the vehicle body

other than the passenger compartment

as shown in the illustration.

The SRS side airbags are designed to

inflate when the passenger compartment

area suffers a severe impact from the

side.

Always wear your seat belts properly.

CY13310

Collision from the rear

Collision from the front

Vehicle rollover

The SRS side airbags are not generally

designed to inflate if the vehicle is in-

volved in a front or rear collision, if it

rolls over, or if it is involved in a low−

speed side collision.

06 06.08

84 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY13071

The curtain shield airbags may not acti-

vate if the vehicle is subjected to a

collision from the side at certain

angles, or a collision to the side of the

vehicle body other than the passenger

compartment as shown in the illustra-

tion.

The curtain shield airbags are designed to

inflate when the passenger compartment

area suffers a severe impact from the

side or vehicle rollover.

Always wear your seat belts properly.

CY13311

The angle of

vehicle tip−up

is marginal

Skidding vehicle

hitting a curb

stone

The curtain shield airbags may inflate

if the angle of vehicle tip−up is margin-

al or if the skidding vehicle’s tires hit

a curb stone laterally as shown in the

illustration.

CY13229

Collision from

the front Collision from

the rear

Pitch end over end

The curtain shield airbags are not gen-

erally designed to inflate if the vehicle

is involved in a front or rear collision,

if it pitches end over end, or if it is

involved in a low−speed side collision.

06 06.08

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY13232

Hitting a curb, edge

of pavement or

hard surface

Falling into or

jumping over

a deep hole

Landing hard or vehicle falling

The SRS side and curtain shield airbags

may deploy if a serious impact occurs

to the underside of your vehicle. Some

examples are shown in the illustration.

CY13278

The SRS side airbag and curtain shield

airbag system consists mainly of the fol-

lowing components, and their locations are

shown in the illustration.

1. SRS warning light

2. Front passenger occupant classification

indicator light

3. Curtain shield airbag modules

(airbag and inflator)

4. Front passenger occupant classification

system (ECU and sensors)

5. Side airbag modules

(airbag and inflator)

6. Curtain shield airbag sensors

7. Side and curtain shield airbag sensors

8. Front passenger’s seat belt buckle

switch

9. Airbag sensor assembly

The SRS side airbag and curtain shield

airbag system is controlled by the airbag

sensor assembly. The airbag sensor as-

sembly consists of a safing sensor and

airbag sensor.

In a severe side impact, the side and

curtain shield airbag sensor and/or the

curtain shield airbag sensor trigger(s) the

side airbag inflators and/or the curtain

shield airbag inflators. At this time a

chemical reaction in the inflators quickly

fills the airbags with non−toxic gas to help

restrain the lateral motion of the occu-

pants.

In a vehicle rollover, the airbag sensor

assembly triggers the curtain shield airbag

inflator. At this time, a chemical reaction

in the inflators quickly fills the airbags

with non−toxic gas to help restrain the

lateral motion of the occupants.

06 06.08

86 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

When the airbags inflate, they produce a

fairly loud noise and release some smoke

and residue along with non−toxic gas. This

does not indicate a fire. This smoke may

remain inside the vehicle for some time,

and may cause some minor irritation to

the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to

wash off any residue as soon as possible

to prevent any potential skin irritation with

soap and water. If you can safely exit

from the vehicle, you should do so imme-

diately.

Deployment of the airbags happens in a

fraction of a second, so the airbags must

inflate with considerable force. While the

system is designed to reduce serious inju-

ries, it may also cause minor burns or

abrasions and swelling.

Front seats as well as parts of the front

and rear pillars, front, center and rear

garnish and roof interior may be hot for

several minutes, but the airbags them-

selves will not be hot. The airbags are

designed to inflate only once.

CAUTION

SRS side airbags and curtain shield

airbags inflate with considerable

force. To reduce the possibility of

death or serious injury when they in-

flate, the driver, front passenger and

rear/second passengers must:

Wear their seat belts properly.

Remain properly seated with their

backs upright and against the seats

at all times.

Improper sitting and wearing of the

seat belts may not retain you inside

the vehicle.

CY13023

Do not allow anyone to lean against

the door when the vehicle is in use,

since the side airbag and curtain

shield airbag could inflate with con-

siderable speed and force. Other-

wise, he/she may be killed or seri-

ously injured. Special care should

be taken especially when you have

a small child in the vehicle.

Sit up straight and well back in the

seat, distributing your weight evenly

in the seat. Do not apply excessive

weight to the outer side of the

seats with a side airbag, and to the

front pillar, rear pillar and roof side

rail with a curtain shield airbag.

06 06.08

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY13294

Make sure the “RSCA OFF” indica-

tor light is off. The curtain shield

airbags will not inflate in a vehicle

rollover if this indicator light is on

and you may be killed or seriously

injured. For details, see “Roll sens-

ing of curtain shield airbags off

switch” on page 95 in this Section.

CY13026

Do not allow anyone to get his/her

head closer to the area where the

side airbag and curtain shield air-

bag inflate, since these airbags

could inflate with considerable

speed and force. Otherwise, he/she

may be killed or seriously injured.

Special care should be taken espe-

cially when you have a small child

in the vehicle.

CY13024

Do not allow anyone to kneel on

the passenger seat, facing the pas-

senger’s side door, since the side

airbag and curtain shield airbag

could inflate with considerable

speed and force. Otherwise, he/she

may be killed or seriously injured.

Special care should be taken espe-

cially when you have a small child

in the vehicle.

06 06.08

88 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY13233

Do not allow anyone to get his/her

head or hands out of windows

since the curtain shield airbags

could inflate with considerable

speed and force. Otherwise, he/she

may be killed or seriously injured.

Special care should be taken espe-

cially when you have a small child

in the vehicle.

CY13069

Do not attach a cup holder or any

other device or object on or around

the door. When the side airbag in-

flates, the cup holder or any other

device or object will be thrown with

great force or the side airbag may

not activate correctly, resulting in

death or serious injury. Likewise,

the driver and front passenger

should not hold objects in their

arms or on their knees.

CY13234

Do not attach a microphone or any

other device or object near the area

where the curtain shield airbags ac-

tivate such as on the windshield

glass, side door glass, front, center

and roof side garnish, roof interior

or assist grips. When the curtain

shield airbags inflate, the micro-

phone or other device or object will

be thrown away with great force or

the curtain shield airbags may not

activate correctly, resulting in death

or serious injury.

06 06.08

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Do not hook a hanger, heavy or

sharp pointed objects on the coat

hook. If the curtain shield airbag

inflates, those items will be thrown

away with great force or the curtain

shield airbag may not activate cor-

rectly, resulting in death or serious

injury. When you hang clothes,

hang them on the coat hook direct-

ly.

Do not use seat accessories which

cover the parts where the side air-

bags inflate. Such accessories may

prevent the side airbags from acti-

vating correctly, causing death or

serious injury.

Do not modify or replace the seats

or upholstery of the seats with side

airbags. Such changes may prevent

the side airbag system from activat-

ing correctly, disable the system or

cause the side airbags to inflate ac-

cidentally, resulting in death or seri-

ous injury.

Do not disassemble or repair the

front pillars and roof side rail con-

taining the curtain shield airbags.

Such changes may disable the sys-

tem or cause the curtain shield air-

bags to inflate accidentally, result-

ing in death or serious injury.

Do not modify or change the sus-

pension system. Such changes may

cause the curtain shield airbags to

inflate accidentally, which could re-

sult in death or serious injury.

Do not use tires or wheels other

than the manufacturer’s recom-

mended size. Such a use may cause

the curtain shield airbags to inflate

accidentally, which could result in

death or serious injury. For details,

see “Checking and replacing tires”

on page 427 in Section 7−2.

Do not place luggage heavier than

specified on the roof luggage carri-

er. Such luggage may cause the

curtain shield airbags to inflate ac-

cidentally, which could result in

death or serious injury. For details,

see “Roof luggage carrier” on page

324 in Section 1−10.

Failure to follow these instructions

can result in death or serious injury.

Consult your Toyota dealer about any

repair and modification.

If you wish to modify your vehicle for

a person with physical disability, con-

sult your Toyota dealer. It may dan-

gerously interfere with the SRS side

airbags and curtain shield airbags op-

eration.

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the following

changes without consulting your

Toyota dealer. Such changes can

interfere with proper operation of the

SRS side airbag and curtain shield

airbag system in some cases.



Installation of electronic devices

such as a mobile two−way radio,

cassette tape player or compact

disc player



Modification of the side structure of

the passenger compartment



Repairs made on or near the con-

sole or front seat

06 06.08

90 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY13295

This indicator comes on when the igni-

tion key is turned to the “ON” position.

It goes off after about 6 seconds. This

means the SRS side airbags and curtain

shield airbags are operating properly.

This warning light system monitors the

airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-

sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen-

sors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driv-

er’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt

buckle switch, front passenger occupant

classification system and indicator light,

front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch,

seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflat-

ors, “RSCA OFF” indicator light, intercon-

necting wiring and power sources. (For

details, see “Service reminder indicators

and warning buzzers” on page 147 in Sec-

tion 1−6.)

If any of the following conditions occurs,

this indicates a malfunction of the airbags

or seat belt pretensioners. Contact your

Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

The light does not come on when the

ignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-

tion or remains on for more than 6

seconds or flashes.

The light comes on or starts flashing

while driving.

The SRS warning light will come on and

front passenger occupant classification in-

dicator light will indicate “OFF” if there is

a malfunction in the front passenger occu-

pant classification system.

CY13235

06 06.08

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

In the following cases, contact your Toyota

dealer as soon as possible:

Any of the SRS side airbags and cur-

tain shield airbags have been inflated.

The portion of the doors (shaded in the

illustration) was involved in an accident

that was not severe enough to cause

the SRS side airbags and curtain

shield airbags to inflate.

The surface of the seats with the side

airbag (shaded in the illustration) is

scratched, cracked, or otherwise dam-

aged.

The portion of the front, center and

rear garnish, and roof interior contain-

ing the curtain shield airbags inside

(shaded in the illustration) is scratched,

cracked, or otherwise damaged.

NOTICE

Do not disconnect the battery cables

before contacting your Toyota dealer.

Your vehicle is equipped with a front

passenger occupant classification sys-

tem. This system detects the conditions

1—4 in the table on page 93 and based

on these conditions activates or deacti-

vates the following systems;

Front passenger airbag

Side airbag on the front passenger

seat

Front passenger’s seat belt pretension-

The system monitors the weight and

load on the front passenger seat, and

the seat belt buckle switch to determine

conditions 1—4.

In order for the system to detect the

conditions correctly, do not do any of

the following:

Apply a heavy load to the front pas-

senger seat.

Attach a commercial seatback table,

etc. to the front passenger seatback.

Put weight on the front passenger seat

by putting your hands or feet on the

seatback from the rear passenger seat.

CY13267

The front passenger occupant classifi-

cation indicator light indicates the ac-

tuation of the front passenger airbag,

side airbag on the front passenger seat

and front passenger’s seat belt preten-

sioner.

The indicator light will indicate “OFF”

when the ignition switch is in the “ON”

position with the condition 2 in the table

shown below.

06 06.08

—Front passenger occupant

classification system

92 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

If the front passenger occupant classifica-

tion system determines that a person of

adult size sits in the front passenger seat

but the “OFF” indicator is illuminated, one

of the following is likely to have occurred:

A rear passenger lifts the front passen-

ger seat cushion with their legs.

Objects are placed under the front pas-

senger seat.

The front passenger seatback is in

contact with the rear/second seat.

To ensure the system correctly detects an

adult sitting in the front passenger seat,

make sure the above do not occur.

Make sure that the “ON” indicator is illu-

minated when an adult is seated in the

front passenger seat. If the “OFF” indica-

tor is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit

up straight, well back in the seat, and

with the seat belt worn correctly. If the

“OFF” indicator still remains illuminated,

either ask the passenger to move to the

rear seat, or if that is not possible, move

the front passenger seat fully rearward.

The front passenger occupant classifi-

cation indicator light will indicate “ON”

and “OFF” when the ignition key is

turned to the “ON” position. After

about four seconds, it will go off. After

that, the front passenger occupant clas-

sification system operates and judges

whether to indicate “ON” or “OFF”. CY13299

The SRS warning light will come on

and front passenger occupant classifi-

cation indicator light will indicate

“OFF” if there is a malfunction in the

front passenger occupant classification

system.

06 06.08

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system

Indicator/warning light Devices

Condition detected by

the front passenger

occupant classification

system

Front

passenger

occupant

classification

indicator light

SRS warning

light

Front

passenger’s

seat belt

reminder light

Front

passenger

airbag

Side airbag

on the front

passenger

seat

Curtain shield

airbag in the

front

passenger

side

Front

passenger’s

seat belt

pretensioner

1. Adult∗1“ON” Off Flashing∗4Activated

2. Child∗2 or child

restraint system∗3“OFF” Off Flashing∗4Deactivated Activated

3. Unoccupied Not

illuminated Off Off Deactivated Activated Deactivated

4. There is a

malfunction in the

system “OFF” On Off Deactivated Activated

∗1: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may

recognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.

∗2: When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her

as an adult depending on his/her physique or posture.

∗3: Never install a rear−facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward−facing child restraint system should only be

installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (See “Child restraint” on page 96 in this Section as for installing the

child restraint system.)

∗4: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.

06 06.08

94 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CAUTION

To avoid potential death or serious

injury when the front passenger occu-

pant classification system does not

detect the conditions correctly, ob-

serve the following.

Make sure the front passenger oc-

cupant classification indicator light

indicates “ON” when using the seat

belt extender for the front passen-

ger seat. If the indicator light indi-

cates “OFF”, disconnect the extend-

er tongue from the seat belt buckle,

then reconnect the seat belt. Recon-

nect the seat belt extender after

making sure the indicator light indi-

cates “ON”. If you use the seat belt

extender while the indicator light

indicates “OFF”, the front passen-

ger airbag and side airbag on the

front passenger side may not acti-

vate correctly, which could cause

death or serious injury in the event

of collision.

Do not recline the front passenger

seatback so far that it touches a

second seat. This may cause the

“OFF” indicator to be illuminated,

which indicates that the passen-

ger’s airbags will not deploy in the

event of a severe accident. If the

seatback touches the rear/second

seat, return the seatback to a posi-

tion where it does not touches the

rear/second seat.

Keep the front passenger seatback

as upright as possible when the ve-

hicle is moving. Reclining the seat-

back excessively may lessen the ef-

fectiveness of the seat belt system.

If an adult sits in the front passen-

ger seat, the occupant classification

indicator light should indicate “ON”.

If the “OFF” indicator is illumina-

ted, ask the passenger to sit up

straight, well back in the seat, feet

on the floor, and with the seat belt

worn correctly. If the “OFF” indica-

tor still remains illuminated, either

ask the passenger to move to the

rear/second seat, or if that is not

possible, move the front passenger

seat fully rearward.

Wear the seat belt properly.

Make sure the front passenger’s

seat belt tab has not been left in-

serted into the buckle before some-

one sits in the front passenger

seat.

Do not apply a heavy load to the

front passenger seat.

Do not put weight on the front pas-

senger seat by putting your hands

or feet on the front passenger seat

seatback from the rear/second pas-

senger seat.

Do not let a rear/second passenger

lift the front passenger seat with

their feet or press on the seatback

with their legs.

Do not put objects under the front

passenger seat.

Child restraint systems installed on

the rear/second seat should not

contact the front seatbacks.

06 06.08

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

When it is unavoidable to install the

forward−facing child restraint sys-

tem on the front passenger seat,

install the child restraint system on

the front passenger seat in the

proper order. (As for the installation

order, see “—Installation with seat

belt” on page 99 in this Section.)

Do not remove the front seats.

Do not kick the front passenger

seat or subject it to severe impact.

Otherwise, the SRS warning light

may come on to indicate a malfunc-

tion of the detection system. In this

case, contact your Toyota dealer im-

mediately.

The front passenger occupant classifica-

tion indicator light may indicate “ON” (the

front passenger airbag and side airbag on

the front passenger seat may deploy)

even if observing the above cautions,

when a child sits in, or a forward−facing

child restraint system is installed on the

front passenger seat. Refer to all the cau-

tions in “SRS airbags” on page 74 and

“Child restraint” on page 96 in this Sec-

tion.

CY13302

The roll sensing of curtain shield air-

bags off switch (“RSCA OFF” switch)

can turn off the curtain shield airbags

and seat belt pretensioners in a vehicle

rollover. This switch should only be

used if inflation is not desired (such as

extreme off−road driving).

When you push the “RSCA OFF” switch

for a few seconds with the ignition switch

on, the “RSCA OFF” indicator light comes

on and the roll sensing function is turned

off. When you push the switch again, the

indicator light goes off and the roll sens-

ing function is turned on. (For details

about the roll sensing function, see

“—SRS side airbags and curtain shield

airbags” on page 81 in this Section.)

In a severe side impact, the curtain shield

airbags on impacted side will inflate even

if the roll sensing function is turned off.

(For details about the curtain shield air-

bags, see “—SRS side airbags and curtain

shield airbags” on page 81 in this Sec-

tion.)

In a severe frontal impact, the seat belt

pretensioners will work even if the roll

sensing function is turned off. (For details

about the seat belt pretensioners, see

“—Seat belt pretensioners” on page 71 in

this Section.)

If the ignition switch is turned to “ACC” or

“LOCK” with the roll sensing function off

and then the ignition switch is turned back

to “ON”, the roll sensing function will turn

back on automatically.

06 06.08

Roll sensing of curtain shield

airbags off switch

96 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CAUTION

Before normal driving, make sure

the “RSCA OFF” indicator light is

off.

When the roll sensing function is

turned off (and the “RSCA OFF”

indicator light is on), the curtain

shield airbags and seat belt preten-

sioners will not work in a vehicle

rollover. Turning off the curtain

shield airbags and seat belt preten-

sioners reduces occupant protection

which your vehicle safety systems

can provide in accidents and in-

crease the likelihood of death or

serious injuries.

Toyota strongly urges the use of ap-

propriate child restraint systems for

children.

The laws of all 50 states in the U.S.A.

and Canada now require the use of a

child restraint system.

Your vehicle conforms to SAE J1819.

If a child is too large for a child restraint

system, the child should sit in the rear

seat and must be restrained using the

vehicle’s seat belt. See “Seat belts” on

page 64 in this Section for details.

CAUTION

For effective protection in automo-

bile accidents and sudden stops, a

child must be properly restrained,

using a seat belt or child restraint

system depending on the age and

size of the child. Holding a child in

your arms is not a substitute for a

child restraint system. In an acci-

dent, the child can be crushed

against the windshield, or between

you and the vehicle’s interior.

Toyota strongly urges use of a

proper child restraint system which

conforms to the size of the child,

and is installed on the rear seat.

According to accident statistics, the

child is safer when properly re-

strained in the rear seat than in the

front seat.

Never install a rear−facing child re-

straint system on the front passen-

ger seat even if the front passenger

occupant classification indicator

light indicates “OFF”. In the event

of an accident, the impact of the

rapid inflation of the front passen-

ger airbag could cause death or se-

rious injury to the child if the rear−

facing child restraint system is

installed on the front passenger

seat.

06 06.08

Child restraint—

—Child restraint precautions

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

A forward−facing child restraint sys-

tem should be allowed to be

installed on the front passenger

seat only when it is unavoidable.

Always move the seat as far back

as possible even if the front pas-

senger occupant classification indi-

cator light indicates “OFF”, because

the front passenger airbag could in-

flate with considerable speed and

force. Otherwise, the child may be

killed or seriously injured.

On vehicles with side airbags and

curtain shield airbags, do not allow

the child to lean his/her head or

any part of his/her body against the

door or the area of the seat, front

or rear pillar or roof side rail from

which the side airbags or curtain

shield airbags deploy even if the

child is seated in the child restraint

system. It is dangerous if the side

airbag and/or curtain shield airbag

inflate, and the impact could cause

death or serious injury to the child.

Do not use the seat belt extender

when installing a child restraint

system on the front or rear passen-

ger seat. If installing a child re-

straint system with the seat belt

extender connected to the seat belt,

the seat belt will not securely hold

the child restraint system, which

could cause death or serious injury

to the child or other passengers in

the event of collision.

Make sure you have complied with

all installation instructions provided

by the child restraint manufacturer

and that the system is properly se-

cured. If it is not secured properly,

it may cause death or serious injury

to the child in the event of a sud-

den stop or accident.

A child restraint system for a small

child or baby must itself be properly

restrained on the seat with the lap por-

tion of the lap/shoulder belt. You must

carefully consult the manufacturer’s

instructions which accompany the child

restraint system.

To provide proper restraint, use a child

restraint system following the manufactur-

er’s instructions about the appropriate age

and size of the child for the child restraint

system.

Install the child restraint system correctly

following the instructions provided by its

manufacturer. General directions are also

provided under the following illustrations.

The child restraint system should be

installed on the rear seat. According to

accident statistics, the child is safer when

properly restrained in the rear seat than

in the front seat.

When not using the child restraint system,

keep it secured with the seat belt or place

it somewhere other than the passenger

compartment. This will prevent it from in-

juring passengers in the event of a sud-

den stop or accident.

06 06.08

—Child restraint system

98 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Child restraint systems are classified into

the following 3 types depending on the

child’s age and size.

(A) Infant seat

(B) Convertible seat

Install the child restraint system following

the instructions provided by its manufac-

turer.

Your vehicle has anchor brackets for se-

curing the top strap of a child restraint

system.

For instructions about how to use the an-

chor bracket, see “—Using a top strap” on

page 109 in this Section.

The child restraint lower anchorages

approved for your vehicle may also be

used. See “—Installation with child

restraint lower anchorages” on page 114 in

this Section.

CY13138

(A) Infant seat

CY13139

(B) Convertible seat

CY13140

06 06.08

—Types of child restraint

system

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY13141

(A) INFANT SEAT INSTALLATION

An infant seat must be used in rear−

facing position only.

CY13034

CAUTION

Never install a rear−facing child re-

straint system on the front passen-

ger seat even if the front passenger

occupant classification indicator

light indicates “OFF”. In the event

of an accident, the impact of the

rapid inflation of the front passen-

ger airbag could cause death or se-

rious injury to the child if the rear−

facing child restraint system is

installed on the front passenger

seat.

CY13035

Do not install a child restraint sys-

tem on the second (or third) seat if

it interferes with the lock mecha-

nism of the front (or second) seats.

Otherwise, the child or front (or

second) seat occupant(s) may be

killed or seriously injured in case

of sudden braking or a collision.

If the driver’s seat position does

not allow sufficient space for safe

installation, install the child re-

straint system on the rear right

seat.

06 06.08

—Installation with seat belt

100 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY13167

1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through

or around the infant seat following the

instructions provided by its manufactur-

er and insert the tab into the buckle

taking care not to twist the belt. Keep

the lap portion of the belt tight.

CAUTION

After inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and

that the lap and shoulder portions

of the belt are not twisted.

Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in

the buckle as this may prevent your

child from properly latching the tab

and buckle.

If the seat belt does not function

normally, it cannot protect your

child from death or serious injury.

Contact your Toyota dealer immedi-

ately. Do not install the child

restraint system on the seat until

the seat belt is fixed.

CY13157

2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it

in the lock mode. When the belt is

then retracted even slightly, it cannot

be extended.

To hold the infant seat securely, make

sure the belt is in the lock mode before

letting the belt retract.

06 06.08

101

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY13158

3. While pressing the infant seat firmly

against the seat cushion and seatback,

let the shoulder belt retract as far as

it will go to hold the infant seat secure-

ly.

CY13159

CAUTION

Push and pull the child restraint sys-

tem in different directions to be sure

it is secure. Follow all the installation

instructions provided by its manufac-

turer.

CY13116

4. To remove the infant seat, press the

buckle release button and allow the

belt to retract completely. The belt will

move freely again and be ready to

work for an adult or older child passen-

ger.

06 06.08

102 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY13142

(B) CONVERTIBLE SEAT INSTALLATION

A convertible seat must be used in for-

ward−facing or rear−facing position de-

pending on the age and size of the

child. When installing, follow the

manufacturer’s instructions about the

applicable age and size of the child as

well as directions for installing the

child restraint system.

Install the child restraint system on the

front passenger seat only when it is un-

avoidable. Your vehicle is equipped with a

front passenger occupant classification

system. In order to activate the occupant

classification system correctly, install the

forward−facing child restraint system on

the front passenger seat in the following

order:

1. Turn the ignition key to the “ON” posi-

tion.

2. Move the front passenger seat to the

rearward position.

3. Put the child restraint system on the

front passenger seat without putting

your weight on the front passenger

seat.

4. Insert the seat belt tab into the seat

belt buckle.

5. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it

in the lock mode. When the belt is

then retracted even slightly, it cannot

be extended. To hold the seat securely,

make sure the belt is in the lock mode

before letting the belt retract.

6. While pressing the convertible seat

firmly against the seat cushion and

seatback, let the shoulder belt retract

as far as it will go to hold the convert-

ible seat securely.

CAUTION

Push and pull the child restraint sys-

tem in different directions to be sure

it is secure. Follow all the installation

instructions provided by its manufac-

turer.

7. Put a child on the child restraint sys-

tem and secure the child, complying

with the instructions provided by the

child restraint system manufacturer.

06 06.08

103

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

The occupant classification indicator light

should indicate “OFF” when the ignition

key is “ON” and the child is in the child

restraint system after following these pro-

cedures. The “OFF” indicator indicates the

SRS front passenger airbag and side air-

bag on the passenger side will not deploy.

If the indicator light indicates “ON”, re-

move the child restraint system and rein-

stall it with the ignition key in the “ACC”

or “LOCK” position. If the indicator light

still indicates “ON” when the ignition key

is turned to the “ON” position, then the

SRS front passenger airbag and side air-

bag on the passenger side may deploy in

an accident. Do not drive the vehicle in

this condition. Remove the child restraint

system and contact your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

Never install a rear−facing child re-

straint system on the front passen-

ger seat. A forward−facing child re-

straint system should only be

installed on the front passenger

seat when unavoidable. If you must

install the child restraint system on

the front passenger seat, put the

seat in its most rearward position,

and install the forward−facing child

restraint system in the proper or-

der. Otherwise, the front passenger

occupant classification system can

not detect the presence of the child

restraint system and the front pas-

senger airbag and side airbag on

the front passenger seat could

deploy.

CY13055

CAUTION

Never install a rear−facing child re-

straint system on the front passen-

ger seat even if the front passenger

occupant classification indicator

light indicates “OFF”. In the event

of an accident, the impact of the

rapid inflation of the front passen-

ger airbag could cause death or se-

rious injury to the child if the rear−

facing child restraint system is

installed on the front passenger

seat.

06 06.08

104 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY13043

Move seat

fully back

A forward−facing child restraint sys-

tem should be allowed to be

installed on the front passenger

seat only when it is unavoidable.

Always move the seat as far back

as possible even if the front pas-

senger occupant classification indi-

cator light indicates “OFF”, because

the front passenger airbag could in-

flate with considerable speed and

force. Otherwise, the child may be

killed or seriously injured.

On vehicles with side airbags and

curtain shield airbags, do not allow

the child to lean his/her head or

any part of his/her body against the

door or the area of the seat, front

or rear pillar or roof side rail from

which the side airbags or curtain

shield airbags deploy even if the

child is seated in the child restraint

system. It is dangerous if the side

airbag and/or curtain shield airbag

inflate, and the impact could cause

death or serious injury to the child.

CY13044

Do not install a child restraint sys-

tem on the second (or third) seat if

it interferes with the lock mecha-

nism of the front (or second) seats.

Otherwise, the child or front (or

second) seat occupant(s) may be

killed or seriously injured in case

of sudden braking or a collision.

If the driver’s seat position does

not allow sufficient space for safe

installation, install the child re-

straint system on the rear right

seat.

06 06.08

105

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY13117

1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through

or around the convertible seat following

the instructions provided by its

manufacturer and insert the tab into

the buckle taking care not to twist the

belt. Keep the lap portion of the belt

tight.

CAUTION

After inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and

that the lap and shoulder portions

of the belt are not twisted.

Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in

the buckle as this may prevent your

child from properly latching the tab

and buckle.

If the seat belt does not function

normally, it cannot protect your

child from death or serious injury.

Contact your Toyota dealer immedi-

ately. Do not install the child

restraint system on the seat until

the seat belt is fixed.

CY13144

2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it

in the lock mode. When the belt is

then retracted even slightly, it cannot

be extended.

To hold the convertible seat securely,

make sure the belt is in the lock mode

before letting the belt retract.

06 06.08

106 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY13145

3. While pressing the convertible seat

firmly against the seat cushion and

seatback, let the shoulder belt retract

as far as it will go to hold the convert-

ible seat securely.

CY13146

CAUTION

Push and pull the child restraint sys-

tem in different directions to be sure

it is secure. Follow all the installation

instructions provided by its manufac-

turer.

CY13118

4. To remove the convertible seat, press

the buckle release button and allow the

belt to retract completely. The belt will

move freely again and be ready to

work for an adult or older child passen-

ger.

06 06.08

107

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY13147

A booster seat must be used in for-

ward−facing position only.

CY13051

Move seat

fully back

CAUTION

A forward−facing child restraint sys-

tem should be allowed to be

installed on the front passenger

seat only when it is unavoidable.

Always move the seat as far back

as possible even if the front pas-

senger occupant classification indi-

cator light indicates “OFF”, because

the front passenger airbag could in-

flate with considerable speed and

force. Otherwise, the child may be

killed or seriously injured.

On vehicles with side airbags and

curtain shield airbags, do not allow

the child to lean his/her head or

any part of his/her body against the

door or the area of the seat, front

or rear pillar or roof side rail from

which the side airbags or curtain

shield airbags deploy even if the

child is seated in the child restraint

system. It is dangerous if the side

airbag and/or curtain shield airbag

inflate, and the impact could cause

death or serious injury to the child.

06 06.08

108 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY13119

1. Sit the child on a booster seat. Run

the lap and shoulder belt through or

around the booster seat and across the

child following the instructions provided

by its manufacturer and insert the tab

into the buckle taking care not to twist

the belt.

Make sure the shoulder belt is correctly

across the child’s shoulder and that the

lap belt is positioned as low as possible

on the child’s hips. See “Seat belts” on

page 64 in this Section for details.

CAUTION

Always make sure the shoulder belt

is positioned across the center of

child’s shoulder. The belt should be

kept away from child’s neck, but

not falling off child’s shoulder.

Otherwise, the child may be killed

or seriously injured in case of sud-

den braking or a collision.

Both high−positioned lap belts and

loose−fitting belts could cause

death or serious injuries due to

sliding under the lap belt during a

collision or other unintended event.

Keep the lap belt positioned as low

on a child’s hips as possible.

For child’s safety, do not place the

shoulder belt under child’s arm.

After inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and

that the lap and shoulder portions

of the belt are not twisted.

Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in

the buckle as this may prevent your

child from properly latching the tab

and buckle.

If the seat belt does not function

normally, it cannot protect your

child from death or serious injury.

Contact your Toyota dealer immedi-

ately. Do not install the child

restraint system on the seat until

the seat belt is fixed.

06 06.08

109

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY13118

2. To remove the booster seat, press the

buckle release button and allow the

belt to retract.

CY13306

Follow the procedure below for a child

restraint system that requires the use

of a top strap.

CY13307

Symbol

Anchor brackets

Use the anchor brackets behind the rear

seatbacks to attach the top strap.

Anchor brackets are installed for each

rear seating position.

This symbol indicates the locations of the

anchor brackets.

06 06.08

—Using a top strap

(vehicles without third seats)

110 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY13096

TO USE THE ANCHOR BRACKET:

1. Remove the head restraint.

CY13188

2. Raise the anchor bracket.

CY13152

3. Fix the child restraint system with

the seat belt.

Latch the hook onto the anchor

bracket and tighten the top strap.

The anchor bracket is only designed to

secure the top strap. Do not use the

anchor bracket for any other purpose.

For instructions to install the child re-

straint system, see “Child restraint” on

page 96 in this Section.

06 06.08

111

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CAUTION

Make sure the top strap is securely

latched, and check that the child re-

straint system is secure by pushing

and pulling it in different directions.

Follow all the installation instructions

provided by its manufacturer. CY13099

4. Replace the head restraint.

CY13153

Lower the anchor bracket when it is not

in use.

06 06.08

112 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY13308

Follow the procedure below for a child

restraint system that requires the use

of a top strap.

CY13242

Anchor brackets

Symbol

Use the anchor brackets behind the sec-

ond seatbacks to attach the top strap.

Anchor brackets are installed for each

second seat.

This symbol indicates the locations of the

anchor brackets.

CY13219

TO USE THE ANCHOR BRACKET:

1. Remove the head restraint.

06 06.08

—Using a top strap

(vehicles with third seats)

113

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY13220

2. Open the anchor bracket cover.

CY13221

3. Fix the child restraint system with

the seat belt.

Latch the hook onto the anchor

bracket and tighten the top strap.

The anchor bracket is only designed to

secure the top strap. Do not use the

anchor bracket for any other purpose.

For instructions to install the child re-

straint system, see “Child restraint” on

page 96 in this Section.

CAUTION

Make sure the top strap is securely

latched, and check that the child re-

straint system is secure by pushing

and pulling it in different directions.

Follow all the installation instructions

provided by its manufacturer.

06 06.08

114 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY13222

4. Replace the head restraint.

Close the anchor bracket cover when the

anchor bracket is not used.

CY13175

Lower anchorages for the child restraint

systems complying with the FMVSS225

or CMVSS210.2 specifications are

installed in the rear seats.

The anchorages are installed in the gap

between the seat cushion and seatback of

both outside rear seats.

Child restraint systems complying with the

FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specification

can be fixed to these anchorages. In this

case, it is not necessary to fix the child

restraint system with a seat belt on the

vehicle.

CY13262

Canada only

Type A

06 06.08

—Installation with child

restraint lower anchorages

(vehicles without third seats)

115

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY13263

Canada only

Type B

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM

INSTALLATION

1. Widen the gap between the seat

cushion and seatback slightly and

confirm the position of the lower an-

chorages near the button on the

seatback.

2. Type A—Latch the hooks of lower

straps onto the anchorages and

tighten the lower straps.

Type B—Latch the buckles onto the

anchorages.

For owners in Canada—The symbol on

a child restraint system indicates the pres-

ence of a lower connector system.

If your child restraint system has a top

strap, it should be anchored. (For the

installation of the top strap, see “—Using

a top strap” on page 109 in this Section.)

For installation details, refer to the instruc-

tion manual equipped with each product.

CAUTION

When using the lower anchorages

for the child restraint system, be

sure that there are no irregular ob-

jects around the anchorages or that

the seat belt is not caught.

Push and pull the child restraint

system in different directions to be

sure it is secure. Follow all the

installation instructions provided by

its manufacturer.

Do not install a child restraint sys-

tem on the rear seat if it interferes

with the lock mechanism of the

front seats. Otherwise, the child or

front seat occupant(s) may be killed

or seriously injured in case of sud-

den braking or a collision.

06 06.08

116 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY13223

Lower anchorages for the child restraint

systems complying with the FMVSS225

or CMVSS210.2 specifications are

installed in the second seats.

The anchorages are installed in the seat

cushion of the right side seating position

and between the center and left side seat-

ing position.

Child restraint systems complying with the

FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specification

can be fixed to these anchorages. In this

case, it is not necessary to fix the child

restraint system with a seat belt on the

vehicle.

CY13289

1st lock

position

5th lock

position

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM

INSTALLATION

1. Fold down the seatback. Make sure

the rear seat legs are relocked into

place (folding down the seatback will

disengage them) by pushing down-

ward on the back of the seat. Adjust

the seatback to the 1st lock position

(most upright position) and then to

the 5th lock position.

Make sure the seat and seatback is

locked securely.

CY13291

2. Take off the cover on the seat cush-

ion.

06 06.08

—Installation with child

restraint lower anchorages

(vehicles with third seats)

117

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY13285

Canada only

Type A

CY13286

Canada only

Type B

3. Widen the slits of the seat cushion

slightly and confirm the position of

the lower anchorages near the but-

ton on the seatback.

4. Type A—Latch the hooks of lower

straps onto the anchorages and

tighten the lower straps.

Type B—Latch the buckles onto the

anchorages.

For owners in Canada—The symbol on

a child restraint system indicates the pres-

ence of a lower connector system.

If your child restraint system has a top

strap, it should be anchored. (For the

installation of the top strap, see “—Using

a top strap” on page 112 in this Section.)

For installation details, refer to the instruc-

tion manual equipped with each product.

06 06.08

118 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CAUTION

When using the lower anchorages

for the child restraint system, be

sure that there are no irregular ob-

jects around the anchorages or that

the seat belt is not caught.

Push and pull the child restraint

system in different directions to be

sure it is secure. Follow all the

installation instructions provided by

its manufacturer.

After securing the child restraint

system, never recline the seat.

Do not install a child restraint sys-

tem on the second seat if it inter-

feres with the lock mechanism of

the front seats. Otherwise, the child

or front seat occupant(s) may be

killed or seriously injured in case

of sudden braking or a collision.

CY13227

When using the left side lower an-

chorages for the child restraint sys-

tem, do not sit in the center seat.

The performance of the center seat

belt cannot be brought out suffi-

ciently because the belt may be

high−positioned or the seat belt

may be loose−fitting, posing the

risk of serious injury in the case of

collision.

06 06.08

119

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND

CONTROLS

Steering wheel and Mirrors

Tilt steering wheel 120. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tilt and telescopic steering wheel 120. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Outside rear view mirrors 121. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Anti−glare inside rear view mirror 123. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Auto anti−glare inside rear view mirror 124. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear side−view mirrors 125. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sun visors 125. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

06 06.07

SECTION

−

120 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY13305

To change the steering wheel angle,

hold the steering wheel, pull the lock

release lever toward you, tilt the steer-

ing wheel to the desired angle and re-

lease the lever.

When the steering wheel is in a low posi-

tion, it will spring up as you release the

lock release lever.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the steering wheel

while the vehicle is moving. Doing

so may cause the driver to mishan-

dle the vehicle and an accident may

occur resulting in death or serious

injuries.

After adjusting the steering wheel,

try moving it up and down to make

sure it is locked in position.

CY13303

ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING WHEEL

TILT

To change the steering wheel angle,

hold the steering wheel, pull the lock

release lever toward you, tilt the steer-

ing wheel to the desired angle and re-

lease the lever.

When the steering wheel is in a low posi-

tion, it will spring up as you release the

lock release lever.

06 06.07

Tilt steering wheel Tilt and telescopic steering

wheel

121

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY13304

ADJUSTMENT OF TELESCOPIC

STEERING COLUMN

To change the steering wheel length,

push down the lock release lever, set

the steering wheel to the desired length

and return the lever to its original posi-

tion.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the steering wheel

while the vehicle is moving. Doing

so may cause the driver to mishan-

dle the vehicle and an accident may

occur resulting in death or serious

injuries.

After adjusting the steering wheel,

try moving it up and down or for-

ward and rearward to make sure it

is locked in position.

CY13009

Adjust the mirror so that you can just

see the side of your vehicle in the mir-

ror.

Be careful when judging the size or dis-

tance of any object seen in the outside

rear view mirror on the passenger’s side

because it is a convex mirror. Any object

seen in a convex mirror will look smaller

and farther away than when seen in a flat

mirror.

On some models, when you push the

back window defogger switch, the heater

panels in the outside rear view mirrors will

quickly clear the surface. (See “Back

window and outside rear view mirror

defoggers” on page 142 in Section 1−5.)

06 06.07

Outside rear view mirrors—

122 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

On some models, the outside rear view

mirrors are rain clearing mirrors that clear

the driver’s rear view when it rains. (For

details, see “Rain clearing mirrors” on

page 403 in Section 5.)

CAUTION

Do not adjust the mirror while the

vehicle is moving. Doing so may

cause the driver to mishandle the

vehicle and an accident may occur

resulting in death or serious inju-

ries.

On some models, since the mirror

surfaces can get hot, do not touch

them when the defogger switch is

on.

CY13010

To adjust a mirror, use the switches.

1. Master switch—To select the mirror to

be adjusted

Push the switch to “L” (left) or “R”

(right).

2. Control switch—To move the mirror

Push the switch in the desired direc-

tion.

Mirrors can be adjusted when the key is

in the “ACC” or “ON” position.

NOTICE

If ice should jam the mirror, do not

operate the control or scrape the mir-

ror face. Use a spray de−icer to free

the mirror.

06 06.07

—Power rear view mirror

control

123

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY13011

The rear view mirrors can be folded

backward for parking in compact areas.

To fold the rear view mirror, push back-

ward.

CAUTION

Do not drive with the mirrors folded

backward. Both the driver and pas-

senger side rear view mirrors must

be extended and properly adjusted

before driving.

CY13012

Adjust the mirror so that you can just

see the rear of your vehicle in the mir-

ror.

To reduce glare from the headlights of

the vehicle behind you during night

driving, operate the lever on the lower

edge of the mirror.

Daylight driving—Lever at position 1

The reflection in the mirror has greater

clarity at this position.

Night driving—Lever at position 2

Remember that by reducing glare you also

lose some rear view clarity.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the mirror while the

vehicle is moving. Doing so may

cause the driver to mishandle the ve-

hicle and an accident may occur re-

sulting in death or serious injuries.

06 06.07

—Folding rear view mirrors Anti−glare inside rear view

mirror

124 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY13312

Adjust the mirror so that you can just

see the rear of your vehicle in the mir-

ror.

This mirror is equipped with auto anti−

glare function. The function is designed

to reduce glare from the headlights of

the vehicle behind you during night

driving.

When the ignition key is inserted and

turned on, the inside rear view mirror al-

ways turns on in the automatic function

mode.

The indicator illuminates to show you that

the function is on.

In automatic function mode, if the mirror

detects light from the headlights of the

vehicle behind you, the mirror surface

darkens slightly to reduce the reflected

light.

To turn off and on the automatic function,

push the “ ” switch.

Adjust it before driving so that the rear

view is in the best condition.

When the inside air temperature is low, it

may take a little longer for the mirror to

darken in response to the detection of

headlights.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the mirror while the

vehicle is moving. Doing so may

cause the driver to mishandle the ve-

hicle and an accident may occur re-

sulting in death or serious injuries.

CY13313

To ensure correct functioning of anti−

glare mirror sensors located on both

sides of the mirror, do not touch or

cover the sensors with your finger or

a piece of cloth, etc.

06 06.07

Auto anti−glare inside rear

view mirror

125

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY13247

Rear side−view mirrors are useful as a

secondary means of checking the area

to the rear of the vehicle.

Carefully check the area to the rear of the

vehicle by either looking directly or using

both outside and inside rear view mirrors. CY13124

Type A

CY13125

Type B

06 06.07

Rear side−view mirrors Sun visors—

126 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

To block out glare, move the sun visor.

To block out glare from the front—Swing

down the main sun visor (position 1).

To block out glare from the side—Swing

down the main sun visor, remove it from

the hook and swing it to the lateral side

(position 2).

Type A—If glare comes from obliquely be-

hind you, extend the plate at the end of

the visor (to position 3).

Type B—If glare comes from obliquely be-

hind you, slide the main sun visor back-

ward (to position 3).

CY13126

To block the glare from the front when the

main sun visor is swung to the lateral

side, swing down the sub visor.

CAUTION

Type A—Do not extend the plate at

the end of the sun visor when the

visor is in the position 1. It can

cover the anti−glare inside rear

view mirror and obstruct the rear

view.

Type B—Slide the main sun visor

only when it is swung down to the

lateral side. It can cover the anti−

glare inside rear view mirror and

obstruct the rear view.

06 06.07

127

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY13160

Type A

CY13195

Type B

To use the vanity mirrors, swing down

the main sun visor and slide the cover.

Type A—

The vanity light comes on when you slide

the cover.

To prevent the battery being discharged,

the light will automatically turn off when

the key is removed for 30 minutes or

more.

06 06.07

—Vanity mirrors

128 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

06 06.07

129

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND

CONTROLS

Lights, Wipers and Defogger

Headlights and turn signals 130. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Emergency flashers 135. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Instrument panel light control 135. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front fog lights 136. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Interior light 136. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Personal lights 138. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Luggage compartment light 138. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Ignition switch light 139. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Running board lights 140. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Windshield wipers and washer 141. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Back window wiper and washer 141. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Back window and outside rear view mirror defoggers 142. . . . . . . . . . .

06 06.07

SECTION

−

130 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY14036

For the U.S.A.

CY14037

For Canada

HEADLIGHTS

To turn on the following lights: Twist

the headlight/turn signal lever knob.

Position 1—Parking, tail, license plate,

side marker and instrument panel lights

For Canada—The tail light indicator (green

light) on the instrument panel will tell you

that the tail lights are on.

Position 2—Headlights and all of the

above

For the U.S.A.—The headlight low beam

indicator light (green light) on the instru-

ment panel will tell you that the low

beams are on.

Position 3 (“AUTO”)—Headlights and/or all

of the lights in position 1

They automatically turn on or off depend-

ing on the darkness of the surroundings.

Manually twist the knob to the position 2

to turn on the headlights if they are need-

ed immediately when entering a dark tun-

nel, parking structure, etc.

CY14031

The automatic light control sensor is on

the top of the driver’s side instrument

panel.

Do not place anything on the instrument

panel, and/or do not affix anything on the

windshield to block this sensor.

The operating condition or sensitivity can

be changed. For details, contact your

Toyota dealer.

Automatic light cut off system

Position 1 or position 3 with the tail

lights on—

The lights automatically turn off when the

driver’s door is opened with the ignition

key in the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.

06 06.07

Headlights and turn signals

(with automatic light control

system)

131

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Position 2 or 3 with the headlights on—

The lights automatically turn off after 30

seconds when all the side doors and back

door are closed with the ignition key in

the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.

If the “LOCK” switch of the wireless re-

mote control transmitter is pushed twice

simultaneously, the lights automatically

turn off immediately.

The time before the headlights turn off

can be changed. For details, contact your

Toyota dealer.

If the driver’s door is kept open, the lights

automatically turn off after 30 minutes.

To turn them on again, turn the key to the

“ON” position or actuate the headlight

switch.

If you are going to park for over one

week, make sure the headlight switch is

off.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis-

charged, do not leave the lights on

for a long period when the engine is

not running.

Daytime running light (DRL) system (all

models sold in Canada and some mod-

els sold in U.S.A.)

The Daytime Running Light (DRL) system

can make it easier for others to see the

front of your vehicle during the day. The

DRL system can be helpful in many differ-

ent driving conditions, but they can be

especially helpful in the short periods after

dawn and before sunset.

The DRL system will make your front turn

signal lights come on when:

The ignition is on with the engine run-

ning.

The knob is in the “OFF” position,

position 1 or position 3 with the tail

lights on.

The parking brake is released.

To turn off the DRL system, twist the knob

to position 2 or position 3 with the head-

lights on, or turn the ignition switch off.

This DRL system can be disabled. For

details, contact your Toyota dealer.

CY14013

High−Low beams—For high beams, turn

the headlights on and push the lever away

from you (position 1). Pull the lever to-

ward you (position 2) for low beams.

The headlight high beam indicator light

(blue light) on the instrument panel will

tell you that the high beams are on.

Flashing the high beam headlights

(position 3)—Pull the lever all the way

back. The high beam headlights turn off

when you release the lever.

You can flash the high beam headlights

with the knob turned to “OFF”.

06 06.07

132 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY14014

TURN SIGNALS

To signal a turn, push the headlight/

turn signal lever up or down to position

The key must be in the “ON” position.

The lever automatically returns after you

make a turn, but you may have to return

it by hand after you change lanes.

To signal a lane change, move the lever

up or down to the pressure point (position

2) and hold it.

On some models, the front turn signal

lights are on during daytime running light

system is on. For details, see “Daytime

running light system”.

If the turn signal indicator lights (green

lights) on the instrument panel flash faster

than normal, a front or rear turn signal

bulb is burned out.

CY14038

For the U.S.A.

CY14039

For Canada

06 06.07

Headlights and turn signals

(without automatic light

control system)

133

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

HEADLIGHTS

To turn on the following lights: Twist

the headlight/turn signal lever knob.

Position 1—Parking, tail, license plate,

side marker and instrument panel lights

For Canada—The tail light indicator (green

light) on the instrument panel will tell you

that the tail lights are on.

Position 2—Headlights and all of the

above

For the U.S.A.—The headlight low beam

indicator light (green light) on the instru-

ment panel will tell you that the low

beams are on.

Automatic light cut off system

Position 1—

The lights automatically turn off when the

driver’s door is opened with the ignition

key in the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.

Position 2—

The lights automatically turn off after 30

seconds when all the side doors and back

door are closed with the ignition key in

the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.

If the “LOCK” switch of the wireless re-

mote control transmitter is pushed twice

simultaneously, the lights automatically

turn off immediately.

The time before the headlights turn off

can be changed. For details, contact your

Toyota dealer.

If the driver’s door is kept open, the lights

automatically turn off after 30 minutes.

To turn them on again, turn the key to the

“ON” position or actuate the headlight

switch.

If you are going to park for over one

week, make sure the headlight switch is

off.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis-

charged, do not leave the lights on

for a long period when the engine is

not running.

Daytime running light (DRL) system (all

models sold in Canada and some mod-

els sold in U.S.A.)

The Daytime Running Light (DRL) system

can make it easier for others to see the

front of your vehicle during the day. The

DRL system can be helpful in many differ-

ent driving conditions, but they can be

especially helpful in the short periods after

dawn and before sunset.

The DRL system will make your front turn

signal lights come on when:

The ignition is on with the engine run-

ning.

The knob is in the “OFF” position or

position 1.

The parking brake is released.

To turn off the DRL system, twist the knob

to position 2 or turn the ignition switch off.

This DRL system can be disabled. For

details, contact your Toyota dealer.

06 06.07

134 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY14016

High−Low beams—For high beams, turn

the headlights on and push the lever away

from you (position 1). Pull the lever to-

ward you (position 2) for low beams.

The headlight high beam indicator light

(blue light) on the instrument panel will

tell you that the high beams are on.

Flashing the high beam headlights

(position 3)—Pull the lever all the way

back. The high beam headlights turn off

when you release the lever.

You can flash the high beam headlights

with the knob turned to “OFF”.

CY14017

TURN SIGNALS

To signal a turn, push the headlight/

turn signal lever up or down to position

The key must be in the “ON” position.

The lever automatically returns after you

make a turn, but you may have to return

it by hand after you change lanes.

To signal a lane change, move the lever

up or down to the pressure point (position

2) and hold it.

On some models, the front turn signal

lights are on during daytime running light

system is on. For details, see “Daytime

running light system”.

If the turn signal indicator lights (green

lights) on the instrument panel flash faster

than normal, a front or rear turn signal

bulb is burned out.

06 06.07

135

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY14042

To turn on the emergency flashers,

push the switch.

All the turn signal lights will flash. To turn

them off, push the switch once again.

Turn on the emergency flashers to warn

other drivers if your vehicle must be

stopped where it might be a traffic hazard.

Always pull as far off the road as pos-

sible.

The turn signal light switch will not work

when the emergency flashers are operat-

ing.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis-

charged, do not leave the switch on

longer than necessary when the en-

gine is not running.

CY14043

To adjust the brightness of the instru-

ment panel lights, turn the dial.

06 06.07

Emergency flashers Instrument panel light control

136 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY14044

To turn on the front fog lights, twist

the band of the headlight and turn sig-

nal switch lever. They will come on

only when the headlights are on low

beam.

Front fog light indicator light on the instru-

ment panel will tell you that the front fog

lights are on.

CY14022

To turn on the interior light, slide the

switch.

The interior light switch has the following

positions:

“ON”—Keeps the light on all the time.

“OFF”—Turns the light off.

“DOOR”—Turns the light on when any of

the side doors and back door is opened.

The light goes off when all the side doors

and back door are closed.

ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM

Door linked operation—When the switch is

in the “DOOR” position and any of the

side doors and back door is opened, the

light will come on. After all the side doors

and back door are closed, the light re-

mains on for about 15 seconds before

fading out.

Ignition switch linked operation—When the

switch is in the “DOOR” position, and the

ignition switch is turned to “LOCK”, the

light will come on. The light remains on

for about 15 seconds before fading out.

However, in the following cases, the light

goes off immediately.

All the side doors and back door are

closed when the ignition key is in the

“ACC” or “ON” position.

All the side doors and back door are

closed and locked.

When any of the side doors and back

door is unlocked using either the key or

the wireless remote control transmitter, the

light will come on and remain on for about

15 seconds before fading out.

06 06.07

Front fog lights Interior light (without rear

seat entertainment system)

137

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

The following adjustments can be made in

this system. For details, contact your

Toyota dealer.

Cancelling the door key or the wireless

remote control transmitter linked opera-

tion

Changing the duration of lighting

To prevent the battery being discharged,

the lights will automatically turn off when

the key is removed and the door is left

opened with the switch at the “DOOR”

position for 30 minutes or more.

CY14045

The interior lights operate separately

with each outer lens.

To turn on the light, push the lens. To

turn the light off, push the lens once

again.

The interior light switch has the following

positions:

“OFF”—The lights are off unless you oper-

ate either outside switch.

“DOOR”—Turns the light on when any of

the side doors and back door is opened.

The light goes off when all the side doors

and back door are closed.

ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM

Door linked operation—When the switch is

in the “DOOR” position and any of the

side doors and back door is opened, the

light will come on. After all the side doors

and back door are closed, the light re-

mains on for about 15 seconds before

fading out.

Ignition switch linked operation—When the

switch is in the “DOOR” position, and the

ignition switch is turned to “LOCK”, the

light will come on. The light remains on

for about 15 seconds before fading out.

However, in the following cases, the light

goes off immediately.

All the side doors and back door are

closed when the ignition key is in the

“ACC” or “ON” position.

All the side doors and back door are

closed and locked.

When any of the side doors and back

door is unlocked using either the key or

the wireless remote control transmitter, the

light will come on and remain on for about

15 seconds before fading out.

06 06.07

Interior light (with rear seat

entertainment system)

138 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

The following adjustments can be made in

this system. For details, contact your

Toyota dealer.

Cancelling the door key or the wireless

remote control transmitter linked opera-

tion

Changing the duration of lighting

To prevent the battery being discharged,

the lights will automatically turn off when

the key is removed and the door is left

opened with the switch at the “DOOR”

position for 30 minutes or more.

CY14004

To turn on the personal lights, push the

lens. To turn the lights off, push the

lens once again.

CY14005

To turn on the luggage compartment

light, slide the switch.

The luggage compartment light switch has

the following positions:

“ON”—Keeps the light on all the time.

“OFF”—Turns the light off.

“DOOR”—Turns the light on when any of

the side doors and back door is opened.

The light goes off when all the side doors

and back door are closed.

06 06.07

Personal lights Luggage compartment light

139

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM

Door linked operation—When the switch is

in the “DOOR” position and any of the

side doors and back door is opened, the

light will come on. After all the side doors

and back door are closed, the light re-

mains on for about 15 seconds before

fading out.

Ignition switch linked operation—When the

switch is in the “DOOR” position, and the

ignition switch is turned to “LOCK”, the

light will come on. The light remains on

for about 15 seconds before fading out.

However, in the following cases, the light

goes off immediately.

All the side doors and back door are

closed when the ignition key is in the

“ACC” or “ON” position.

All the side doors and back door are

closed and locked.

When any of the side doors and back

door is unlocked using either the key or

the wireless remote control transmitter, the

light will come on and remain on for about

15 seconds before fading out.

The following adjustments can be made in

this system. For details, contact your

Toyota dealer.

Cancelling the door key or the wireless

remote control transmitter linked opera-

tion

Changing the duration of lighting

To prevent the battery being discharged,

the lights will automatically turn off when

the key is removed and the door is left

opened with the switch at the “DOOR”

position for 30 minutes or more.

CY14026

For easy access to the ignition switch,

the ignition switch light comes on when

any of the side doors and back door is

opened or when the ignition switch is

turned to the “LOCK” position.

The light remains on for about 15 seconds

after all the side doors and back door are

closed.

However, in the following cases, the light

goes off immediately.

All the side doors and back door are

closed when the ignition key is in the

“ACC” or “ON” position.

All the side doors and back door are

closed and locked.

06 06.07

Ignition switch light

140 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

When any of the side doors and back

door is unlocked using either the key or

the wireless remote control transmitter, the

light will come on and remain on for about

15 seconds before fading out.

The following adjustments can be made in

this system. For details, contact your

Toyota dealer.

Cancelling the door key or the wireless

remote control transmitter linked opera-

tion

Changing the duration of lighting

To prevent the battery being discharged,

the light will automatically turn off when

the key is removed and the door is left

opened for 30 minutes or more.

CY14027

Lighting the running boards and the

ground helps you easily to get in and

out of the vehicle in the night. The

lights come on when any of the side

doors is opened.

The lights remain on for about 15 seconds

after all the side doors are closed.

However, in the following cases, the light

go off immediately.

All the side doors and back door are

closed and locked.

The vehicle speed reaches 8 km/h (5

mph) or higher.

When any of the side doors and back

door is unlocked using either the key or

the wireless remote control transmitter, the

lights will come on and remain on for

about 15 seconds before fading out.

To prevent the battery being discharged,

the light will automatically turn off when

the key is removed and the door is left

opened for 30 minutes or more.

06 06.07

Running board lights

141

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY14040

To turn on the windshield wipers, move

the lever to the desired setting.

The key must be in the “ON” position.

Lever position Speed setting

Position 1 Intermittent

Position 2 Slow

Position 3 Fast

The “INT” band lets you adjust the wiping

time interval when the wiper lever is in

the intermittent position (position 1). Twist

the band upward to increase the time be-

tween sweeps, and downward to decrease

it.

To squirt washer fluid, pull the lever

toward you.

If the windshield wipers are off, they will

operate a couple of times after the washer

squirts.

For instructions on adding washer fluid,

see “Adding washer fluid” on page 437 in

Section 7−3.

In freezing weather, warm the windshield

with the defroster before using the washer.

This will help prevent the washer fluid

from freezing on your windshield, which

can block your vision.

NOTICE

Do not operate the wipers if the wind-

shield is dry. It may scratch the

glass.

CY14041

To turn on the back window wiper, twist

the lever knob upward.

The key must be in the “ON” position.

Lever position Speed setting

Position 1 Intermittent

Position 2 Normal

To squirt washer fluid on the back window,

twist the knob upward or downward as far

as it will go (position 3 or 4). The knob

automatically returns from these positions

after you release it. The back window wip-

er operates while the washer squirts.

For instructions on adding washer fluid,

see “Adding washer fluid” on page 437 in

Section 7−3.

06 06.07

Windshield wipers and washer Back window wiper and

washer

142 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

If the back window is not fully closed, the

back window wiper and washer will not

work. Make sure the back window is fully

closed when using the back window wiper

and washer.

NOTICE

Do not operate the back window wip-

er if the back window is dry. It may

scratch the glass.

CY14009

To defog or defrost the back window,

push the switch with the back window

closed.

The key must be in the “ON” position.

The thin heater wires on the inside of the

back window will quickly clear the surface.

An indicator light will illuminate to indicate

the defogger is operating.

On some models, heater panels in the

outside rear view mirrors will also quickly

clear the surfaces.

Push the switch once again to turn the

defoggers off.

The system will automatically shut off af-

ter the defoggers have operated about 15

minutes.

If the back window is not fully closed, the

back window defogger will not work. Make

sure the back window is fully closed when

using the back window defogger.

If the back window is opened while the

defogger is working, the defogger will au-

tomatically turn off. Even if the back win-

dow is fully closed after that, the defogger

will not automatically turn on.

Make sure you turn the defoggers off

when the surfaces are clear. Leaving the

defoggers on for a long time could cause

the battery to discharge, especially during

stop−and−go driving. The defoggers are

not designed for drying rain water or for

melting snow.

CAUTION

On some models, since the mirror

surfaces can get hot, do not touch

them when the defogger switch is on.

NOTICE

When cleaning the inside of the back

window, be careful not to scratch or

damage the heater wires or connec-

tors.

06 06.07

Back window and outside rear

view mirror defoggers

143

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND

CONTROLS

Gauges, Meters and Service reminder indicators

Fuel gauge 144. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Engine coolant temperature gauge 144. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tachometer 145. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Odometer and two trip meters 146. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers 147. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

06 06.07

SECTION

−

144 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY15001

Low fuel level

warning light

The gauge indicates the approximate

quantity of fuel remaining in the tank

when the ignition switch is on.

Nearly full—Needle at “F”

Nearly empty—Needle at “E”

It is a good idea to keep the tank over

1/4 full.

The needle moves when braking, acceler-

ating or making turns. This is caused by

the movement of the fuel in the tank.

If the fuel level approaches “E” or the low

fuel level warning light comes on, fill the

fuel tank as soon as possible.

On inclines or curves, due to the move-

ment of fuel in the tank, the fuel gauge

needle may fluctuate or the low fuel level

warning light may come on earlier than

usual.

If the fuel tank is completely empty, the

malfunction indicator lamp comes on. Fill

the fuel tank immediately.

The indicator lamp goes off after driving

several times. If the indicator lamp does

not go off, contact your Toyota dealer as

soon as possible.

CY15002

The gauge indicates the engine coolant

temperature when the ignition switch is

on. The engine operating temperature

will vary with changes in weather and

engine load.

If the needle moves into the red zone,

your engine is too hot. If your vehicle

overheats, stop your vehicle and allow the

engine to cool.

Your vehicle may overheat during severe

operating conditions, such as:

Driving up a long hill on a hot day.

Reducing speed or stopping after high

speed driving.

06 06.07

Fuel gauge Engine coolant temperature

gauge

145

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Idling for a long period with the air

conditioning on in stop−and−go traffic.

Towing a trailer.

NOTICE



Do not remove the thermostat in

the engine cooling system as this

may cause the engine to overheat.

The thermostat is designed to con-

trol the flow of coolant to keep the

temperature of the engine within

the specified operating range.



Do not continue driving with an

overheated engine. See “If your

vehicle overheats” on page 378 in

Section 4.

CY15003

The tachometer indicates engine speed

in thousands of rpm (revolutions per

minute). Use it while driving to select

correct shift points and to prevent en-

gine lugging and over−revving.

Driving with the engine running too fast

causes excessive engine wear and poor

fuel economy. Remember, in most cases

the slower the engine speed, the greater

the fuel economy.

NOTICE

Do not let the indicator needle get

into the red zone. This may cause

severe engine damage.

06 06.07

Tachometer

146 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY15009

This meter displays the odometer and

two trip meters.

1. Odometer—Shows the total distance

the vehicle has been driven.

2. Two trip meters—Show two different

distances independently driven since

the last time each trip meter was set

to zero.

You can use one trip meter to calculate

the fuel economy and the other to

measure the distance on each trip. All

trip meter data is cancelled if the elec-

trical power source is disconnected.

3. Trip meter reset knob—Resets the two

trip meters to zero, and also change

the meter display.

To change the meter display, quickly

push and release the knob. The meter

display changes in the order from the

odometer to trip meter A to trip meter

B, then back to the odometer each

time you push.

To reset the trip meter A to zero, dis-

play the meter A reading, then push

and hold the knob until the meter is

set to zero. The same process can be

applied for resetting the trip meter B.

06 06.07

Odometer and two trip meters

147

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

If the indicator or buzzer comes on... Do this.

(a)

(indicator and buzzer)

If parking brake is off, stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

(b)

(indicator and buzzer)

Fasten driver’s seat belt.

(d) Stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

(e) Stop and check.

(f) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

(g) Low fuel level warning light Fill up tank.

06 06.07

Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers

148 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

If the indicator or buzzer comes on... Do this.

(h) Replace engine oil.

(i) or Take vehicle to Toyota dealer. If brake system warning light is also on, stop

immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

(j) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

(k) Close all side doors and back door.

(l) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer immediately.

(m) Stop and check.

(n) Adjust tire pressure. If the light remains, contact Toyota dealer.

06 06.07

149

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

If the indicator or buzzer comes on... Do this.

(o) Add washer fluid.

(p) Key reminder buzzer Remove key.

06 06.07

150 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

(a) Brake System Warning Light and

Buzzer

This light comes on in the following cases

when the ignition key is in the “ON” posi-

tion.

When the parking brake is applied...

This light comes on for a few seconds

when the ignition key is turned to the

“ON” position even after the parking brake

is released.

When the brake fluid level is low...

CAUTION

It is dangerous to continue driving

normally when the brake fluid level is

low.

When the hydraulic brake booster

fails...

If the hydraulic booster causes a problem

resulting in poor braking performance, the

warning light comes on and buzzer sounds

continuously.

Have your vehicle checked at your

Toyota dealer in the following cases:

The light does not come on even if the

parking brake is applied when the igni-

tion key is in the “ON” position.

The light does not come on even if the

ignition key is turned on with the park-

ing brake released.

A warning light turning on briefly during

operation does not indicate a problem.

CAUTION

If any of the following conditions oc-

curs, immediately stop your vehicle at

a safe place and contact your Toyota

dealer.

The light does not turn off even

after the parking brake is released

while the engine is running.

The warning buzzer comes on to-

gether with the warning light.

In either case, this can indicate that

the brakes may not work properly

and your stopping distance will be-

come longer. Depress the brake

pedal firmly and bring the vehicle

to an immediate stop.

The brake system warning light re-

mains on together with the “ABS”

warning light.

In this case, not only the anti−lock

brake system will fail but also the

vehicle will become extremely un-

stable during braking.

Any of the following conditions may oc-

cur, but do not indicate the malfunc-

tion:

The light may stay on for about 60

seconds after the ignition key is turned

to the “ON” position. It is normal if it

turns off after a while.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly

may turn on the warning light and

buzzer. It is normal if the light turns off

and the buzzer stops sounding after a

few seconds.

You may hear a small sound in the

engine compartment after the engine is

started or the brake pedal is depressed

repeatedly. This is a pump pulsating

sound of the brake system, and it is

not a malfunction.

06 06.07

151

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

(b) Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder Light

and Buzzer

The light and buzzer act as a reminder to

buckle up the driver’s seat belt.

Once the ignition key is turned to “ON” or

“START”, the reminder light flashes and

buzzer come on if the driver’s seat belt

is not fastened. Unless the driver fastens

the belt, the light continues flashing and

the buzzer sounds for about 4 to 8 se-

conds.

Reminder Light

The light acts as a reminder to have the

front passenger buckle up the seat belt.

Once the ignition key is turned to “ON” or

“START”, the reminder light flashes if a

passenger sits in the front passenger seat

and does not fasten the seat belt.

If luggage or other load is placed on the

front passenger seat, depending on its

weight, the reminder light may flash.

(d) Charging System Warning Light

This warning light comes on when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON” posi-

tion, and goes off when the engine is

started.

When there are problems in the charging

system while the engine is running, the

warning light comes on.

NOTICE

When the charging system warning

light comes on while the engine is

running, malfunctions such as the en-

gine drive belt being broken may have

occurred. If the warning light comes

on, immediately stop the vehicle in a

safe place and contact your Toyota

dealer.

(e) Low Engine Oil Pressure Warning

Light

This light warns that the engine oil pres-

sure is too low.

If it flickers or stays on while you are

driving, pull off the road to a safe place

and stop the engine immediately. Call a

Toyota dealer or qualified repair shop for

assistance.

The light may occasionally flicker when

the engine is idling or it may come on

briefly after a hard stop. There is no

cause for concern if it then goes out when

the engine is accelerated slightly.

The light may come on when the oil level

is extremely low. It is not designed to

indicate low oil level, and the oil level

must be checked using the level dipstick.

NOTICE

Do not drive the vehicle with the

warning light on—even for one block.

It may ruin the engine.

06 06.07

152 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

(f) Malfunction Indicator Lamp

This lamp comes on when the ignition

key is turned to the “ON” position and

goes off after the engine starts. This

means that the warning light system is

operating properly.

If the lamp remains on, or the lamp

comes on while driving, first check the

followings.

Empty fuel tank

If the fuel tank is empty, refuel immedi-

ately.

Loose fuel tank cap

If the fuel tank cap is loose, securely

tighten it.

These cases are temporary malfunctions.

The malfunction indicator lamp will go off

after taking several driving trips.

If the lamp does not go off even after

several trips, contact your Toyota dealer

as soon as possible.

If the fuel tank is not empty or the fuel

tank cap is not loose...

There is a problem somewhere in the

engine, emission control system, elec-

tronic throttle control system, automatic

transmission electrical system or warn-

ing light system itself.

Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as

possible to service the vehicle.

If engine speed does not increase when

the accelerator pedal is depressed, there

may be a problem somewhere in the elec-

tronic throttle control system.

At this time, vibration may occur. Howev-

er, if you depress the accelerator pedal

more firmly and slowly, you can drive your

vehicle at low speeds. Have your vehicle

checked by your Toyota dealer as soon as

possible.

Even if the abnormality of the electronic

throttle control system is corrected during

low speed driving, the system may not be

recovered until the engine is stopped and

the ignition key is turned to the “ACC” or

“LOCK” position.

CAUTION

Be especially careful to prevent erro-

neous pedal operation.

Emissions inspection and maintenance

(I/M) programs

Your vehicle may not pass a state

emission inspection if the malfunction

indicator lamp remains on. Contact your

Toyota dealer to check your vehicle’s

emission control system and OBD

(On−Board Diagnostics) system before

taking your vehicle for the inspection.

For details, see “Emissions Inspection and

Maintenance (I/M) programs” on page 410

in Section 6.

(g) Low Fuel Level Warning Light

This light comes on when the fuel level

in the tank becomes nearly empty. Fill up

the tank as soon as possible.

On inclines or curves, due to the move-

ment of fuel in the tank, the low fuel level

warning light may come on earlier than

usual.

06 06.07

153

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

(h) Engine Oil Replacement Reminder

Light (for vehicles sold in U.S.A.)

This light acts as a reminder to replace

the engine oil.

This light will come on when the ignition

key is turned to “ON” and will go off after

about a few seconds.

When you drive for about 7200 km (4500

miles) after the engine oil replacement,

this light illuminates for about 3 seconds

and then flashes for about 12 seconds

with the ignition key turned to the “ON”

position. If you continue driving without

the engine oil replacement, and if the driv-

ing range exceeds 8000 km (5000 miles),

the light will come on after the ignition

key is turned to the “ON” position. The

light will remain on thereafter.

If the light is flashing, we recommend that

you replace the engine oil at an early

opportunity depending on the driving and

road condition. If the light comes on, re-

place it as soon as possible.

You need to reset the light after the en-

gine oil replacement. Reset the light by

following the procedure below:

1. Turn the ignition key to the “ACC” or

“LOCK” position with the odometer

reading shown. (For details, see

“Odometer and two trip meters” on

page 146 in this Section.)

2. Turn the ignition key to the “ON” posi-

tion while holding down the trip meter

reset button.

Hold down the button until the light goes

off. Before the light goes off, it illuminates

for 3 seconds, flashes for 2 seconds and

illuminates for 1 second.

If the system fails to reset, the light will

remain flashing.

(i) “ABS” Warning Light

The light comes on when the ignition key

is turned to the “ON” position. If the anti−

lock brake system and the brake assist

system work properly, the light turns off

after a few seconds. Thereafter, if either

of the systems malfunctions, the light

comes on again.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (and

the brake system warning light is off), the

following systems do not operate, but the

brake system still operates conventionally.

Anti−lock brake system

Brake assist system

Traction control system

(two−wheel drive models)

Active traction control system

(four−wheel drive models)

“AUTO LSD” system

(two−wheel drive models)

Vehicle stability control system

Downhill assist control system

(four−wheel drive models)

Hill−start assist control system

When the “ABS” warning light is on (and

the brake system warning light is off), the

anti−lock brake system does not operate,

so that the wheels will lock up during a

sudden braking or braking on slippery

road surfaces.

06 06.07

154 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

If either of the following conditions oc-

curs, this indicates a malfunction some-

where in the components monitored by

the warning light system. Contact your

Toyota dealer as soon as possible to

service the vehicle.

The light does not come on when the

ignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-

tion, or remains on.

The light comes on while you are dri-

ving.

A warning light turning on briefly during

operation does not indicate a problem.

CAUTION

If the “ABS” warning light remains on

together with the brake system warn-

ing light, immediately stop your ve-

hicle at a safe place and contact your

Toyota dealer.

In this case, not only the anti−lock

brake system will fail but also the

vehicle will become extremely unsta-

ble during braking.

Either of the following conditions may

occur, but do not indicate a malfunc-

tion:

The light may stay on for about 60

seconds after the ignition key is turned

to the “ON” position. It is normal if it

turns off after a while.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly

may turn on the light. It is normal if it

turns off after a few seconds.

(j) “VSC TRAC” Warning Light

The light warns that there is a problem

somewhere in the following.

Vehicle stability control system

Traction control system

(two−wheel drive models)

Active traction control system

(four−wheel drive models)

“AUTO LSD” system

(two−wheel drive models)

Downhill assist control system

(four−wheel drive models)

Hill−start assist control system

The light will come on when the ignition

key turned to “ON”, and will go off after

a few seconds.

It is not a malfunction that the warning

light may stay on for 60 seconds after the

ignition key is turned to the “ON” position.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly

may turn on the lights. It is normal if they

go out after a few seconds.

If the light comes on while driving, the

above mentioned systems do not work.

However, as conventional braking operates

when applied, there is no problem to con-

tinue your driving.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota

dealer:

The warning light does not come on

after the ignition key is turned to “ON”.

The warning light remains on after the

ignition key is turned to “ON”.

The warning light comes on while driv-

ing.

When the brake fluid level is too low, the

above mentioned systems will not operate

and the warning light comes on.

(k) Open Door Warning Light

This light remains on until all the side

doors and back door are completely

closed.

06 06.07

155

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

(l) SRS Warning Light

This indicator comes on when the igni-

tion key is turned to the “ON” position.

It goes off after about 6 seconds. This

means the SRS airbags and seat belt

pretensioners are operating properly.

This warning light system monitors the

airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-

sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen-

sors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driv-

er’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt

buckle switch, front passenger occupant

classification system and indicator light,

front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch,

seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflat-

ors, “RSCA OFF” indicator light, intercon-

necting wiring and power sources.

If any of the following conditions occurs,

this indicates a malfunction of the airbags

or seat belt pretensioners. Contact your

Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

The light does not come on when the

ignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-

tion or remains on for more than 6

seconds or flashes.

The light comes on or starts flashing

while driving.

The SRS warning light will come on and

front passenger occupant classification in-

dicator light will indicate “OFF” if there is

a malfunction in the front passenger occu-

pant classification system.

(m) Automatic Transmission Fluid

Temperature Warning Light

(four−wheel drive models)

This light warns that the automatic trans-

mission fluid temperature is too high.

If this light comes on while you are driv-

ing, slow down and pull off the road. Stop

the vehicle at a safe place and put the

selector lever in “P”. With the engine id-

ling, wait until the light goes off. If the

light goes off, you may start the vehicle

again. If the light does not go off, call a

Toyota dealer or qualified repair shop for

assistance.

NOTICE

Continued driving with the warning

light on may damage the automatic

transmission.

(n) Tire Pressure Warning Light

This light warns that the tire pressure of

one or more of your tires (including the

spare tire) is low. The light comes on

when the ignition key is turned to the

“ON” position. It goes off after a few sec-

onds. This indicates that the tire pressure

warning system is functioning properly.

If the warning light comes on, stop your

vehicle in a safe place as soon as pos-

sible and check that the inflation pressure

of all tires (including the spare tire) is as

specified on the tire and loading informa-

tion label. (See “Checking tire inflation

pressure” on page 425 in Section 7−2.)

The light should go off a few minutes after

the tire pressure is adjusted.

If the warning light blinks, the tire pres-

sure warning system may be malfunction-

ing. Contact your Toyota dealer.

For details, see “Tire pressure warning

system” on page 190 in Section 1−7.

06 06.07

156 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

(o) Low Windshield Washer Fluid Level

Warning Light (for vehicles sold in

Canada)

The light warns that the windshield washer

fluid level is too low. Add washer fluid at

your earliest opportunity. (For instructions,

see “Adding washer fluid” on page 437 in

Section 7−3.)

(p) Key Reminder Buzzer

This buzzer acts as a reminder to remove

the key when you open the driver’s door

with the ignition key in the “ACC” or

“LOCK” position.

CHECKING SERVICE REMINDER

INDICATORS (except the low fuel level

warning light and low windshield

washer fluid level warning light)

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Open one of the side doors or back

door.

The open door warning light should

come on.

3. Close the door.

The open door warning light should go

off.

4. Turn the ignition key to “ON”, but do

not start the engine.

All the service reminder indicators ex-

cept the open door warning light should

come on.

The following service reminder indica-

tors go off after a few seconds:

Engine oil replacement reminder light

“ABS” warning light

“VSC TRAC” warning light

Tire pressure warning light

“RSCA OFF” indicator light

“AUTO LSD” indicator light

(two−wheel drive models)

“VSC OFF” indicator light

(four−wheel drive models)

Slip indicator light

Height control indicator lights

Downhill assist control system indicator

light (four−wheel drive models)

Height control “OFF” indicator light

The SRS warning light goes off after

about 6 seconds.

There may be the case that the “ABS”

warning light (brake assist system

warning light), “VSC TRAC” warning

light and “AUTO LSD” (two−wheel drive

models), “VSC OFF” (four−wheel drive

models) or slip indicator light stay on

for about 60 seconds after the ignition

key is turned to the “ON” position. It

is normal if they go out after a while.

If any service reminder indicator or warn-

ing buzzer does not function as described

above, have it checked by your Toyota

dealer as soon as possible.

06 06.07

157

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND

CONTROLS

Ignition switch, Transmission and Parking brake

Ignition switch 158. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Automatic transmission 159. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Four−wheel drive system 164. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Traction control system 170. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Active traction control system 172. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

“AUTO LSD” system 174. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Vehicle stability control system 177. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Downhill assist control system 179. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Hill−start assist control system 182. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear height control air suspension 184. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tire pressure warning system 190. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Parking brake 195. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cruise control 196. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

06 06.07

SECTION

−

158 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY16026

“START”—Starter motor on. The key

will return to the “ON” position when

released.

For starting tips, see page 355 in Section

“ON”—Engine on and all accessories

on.

This is the normal driving position.

“ACC”—Accessories such as the radio

operate, but the engine is off.

If you leave the key in the “ACC” or

“LOCK” position and open the driver’s

door, a buzzer will remind you to remove

the key.

“LOCK”—Engine is off and the steering

wheel is locked. The key can be re-

moved only at this position.

You must push in the key to turn it from

“ACC” to the “LOCK” position. The selec-

tor lever must be in the “P” position be-

fore pushing the key.

Once you remove the key, the engine im-

mobilizer system is automatically set. (See

“Engine immobilizer system” on page 14

in Section 1−2.)

When starting the engine, the key may

seem stuck at the “LOCK” position. To

free it, first be sure the key is pushed all

the way in, and then rock the steering

wheel slightly while turning the key gently.

Approximately five hours after the engine

is turned off, you may hear sound coming

from underneath the luggage compartment

for several minutes. This is normal opera-

tion and does not indicate a malfunction.

(See “Leak detection pump” on page x.)

It is not a malfunction if the needles on

all meters and gauges move slightly when

the key is turned to the “ACC”, “ON” or

“START” position.

NOTICE

Do not leave the key in the “ON”

position if the engine is not running.

The battery will discharge and the

ignition could be damaged.

06 06.07

Ignition switch

159

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Your automatic transmission has a shift

lock system to minimize the possibility of

incorrect operation. This means you can

only shift out of “P” position when the

brake pedal is depressed (with the ignition

switch in “ON” position).

(a) Selector lever

The shift position is also displayed on the

instrument cluster.

P: Parking, engine starting and key

removal

R: Reverse

N: Neutral

D: Normal driving

(shifting into overdrive possible)

4: Engine braking

(shifting into overdrive not possible)

3, 2: Stronger engine braking

L: Maximum engine braking

06 06.07

Automatic transmission

CY16055y

With the brake pedal depressed

(The ignition switch must be in

“ON” position.)

Shift normally.

160 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

(b) Normal driving

1. Start the engine as instructed in “How

to start the engine” on page 356 in

Section 3. The transmission must be in

“P” or “N”.

Vehicles with four−wheel drive control—

When the four−wheel drive control switch

knob is in “L4” (low−speed position, center

differential locked), the driving pattern se-

lector setting has no effect on gear shift

timing. (See “Four−wheel drive system

(full−time four−wheel drive models)” on

page 164 in this Section for information of

the four−wheel drive control.)

Vehicles with multi−mode control—

When the multi−mode control switch knob

is in “L4” (low−speed position, four−wheel

drive, center differential locked), the driv-

ing pattern selector setting has no effect

on gear shift timing. (See “Four−wheel

drive system (multi−mode four−wheel drive

models)” on page 167 in this Section for

information of the multi−mode control.)

2. With your foot holding down the brake

pedal, shift the selector lever to “D”.

When the lever is in the “D” position, the

automatic transmission system will select

the most suitable gear for running condi-

tions such as normal cruising, hill climb-

ing, hard towing, etc.

Two−wheel drive models—

Always use the “D” position for better fuel

economy and quieter driving. If the engine

coolant temperature is low, the transmis-

sion will not shift into the overdrive gear

even in the “D” position.

Vehicles with four−wheel drive control—

Always use the “D” position for better fuel

economy and quieter driving. If the engine

coolant temperature is low or when the

four−wheel drive control switch knob is in

“L4” (low−speed position, center differential

locked), the transmission will not shift into

the overdrive gear even in the “D” posi-

tion. (See “Four−wheel drive system (full−

time four−wheel drive models)” on page

164 in this Section for information of the

four−wheel drive control.)

Vehicles with multi−mode control—

Always use the “D” position for better fuel

economy and quieter driving. If the engine

coolant temperature is low or when the

multi−mode control switch knob is in “L4”

(low−speed position, four−wheel drive,

center differential locked), the transmission

will not shift into the overdrive gear even

in the “D” position. (See “Four−wheel drive

system (multi−mode four−wheel drive

models)” on page 167 in this Section for

information of the multi−mode control.)

CAUTION

Never put your foot on the accelera-

tor pedal while shifting.

3. Release the parking brake and brake

pedal. Depress the accelerator pedal

slowly for smooth starting.

If the automatic locking operation linked

with the shift position is set, all the side

doors and back door are automatically

locked when the shift lever is moved out

of the “P” position with the engine running

and all the side doors and back door are

closed. For details, see “—Automatic door

locking and unlocking functions” on page

25 in Section 1−2.

06 06.07

161

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

To use engine braking, you can downshift

the transmission as follows:

Shift into the “4” position. The trans-

mission will downshift to fourth gear

and engine braking will be enabled.

Shift into the “3” position. The trans-

mission will downshift to third gear

when the vehicle speed drops down to

or lower than the following speed, and

stronger engine braking will be en-

abled.

Two−wheel drive models

4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine

133 km/h (83 mph)

4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine

139 km/h (86 mph)

Four−wheel drive models

4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine

Multi−mode control switch knob

at “H2” and “H4”

133 km/h (83 mph)

Multi−mode control switch knob

at “L4” 51 km/h (31 mph)

4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine

Four−wheel drive control switch

knob at “H4” 139 km/h (86 mph)

Four−wheel drive control switch

knob at “L4” 54 km/h (34 mph)

Shift into the “2” position. The trans-

mission will downshift to second gear

when the vehicle speed drops down to

or lower than the following speed, and

stronger engine braking will be en-

abled.

Two−wheel drive models

4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine

88 km/h (54 mph)

4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine

94 km/h (58 mph)

Four−wheel drive models

4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine

Multi−mode control switch knob

at “H2” and “H4”

88 km/h (54 mph)

Multi−mode control switch knob

at “L4” 34 km/h (21 mph)

4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine

Four−wheel drive control switch

knob at “H4” 94 km/h (58 mph)

Four−wheel drive control switch

knob at “L4” 36 km/h (22 mph)

Shift into the “L” position. The trans-

mission will downshift to first gear

when the vehicle speed drops down to

or lower than the following speed, and

maximum engine braking will be en-

abled.

Two−wheel drive models

4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine

42 km/h (26 mph)

4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine

40 km/h (25 mph)

Four−wheel drive models

4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine

Multi−mode control switch knob

at “H2” and “H4”

42 km/h (26 mph)

Multi−mode control switch knob

at “L4” 16 km/h (9 mph)

06 06.07

162 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine

Four−wheel drive control switch

knob at “H4” 40 km/h (25 mph)

Four−wheel drive control switch

knob at “L4” 15 km/h (9 mph)

When the cruise control is being used,

even if you downshift from “D” to “4”,

engine braking will not be enabled be-

cause the cruise control is not cancelled.

For ways to decrease the vehicle speed,

see “Cruise control” on page 196 in this

Section.

CAUTION

Be careful when downshifting on a

slippery surface. Abrupt shifting

could cause the vehicle to skid or

spin.

(d) Using “3”, “2” and “L” positions

The “3”, “2” and “L” positions are used for

strong engine braking as described pre-

viously.

With the selector lever in “3”, “2” or “L”,

you can start the vehicle in motion as

with the lever in “D”.

With the selector lever in “3” or “2”, the

vehicle will start in first gear and automat-

ically shift to third gear or second gear.

With the selector lever in “L”, the trans-

mission is engaged in first gear.

NOTICE



Be careful not to over−rev the en-

gine. Watch the tachometer to keep

engine rpm from going into the red

zone. The approximate maximum al-

lowable speed for each position is

given below for your reference:

Two−wheel drive models

4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine

“3” 146 km/h (90 mph). . . . . . .

“2” 100 km/h (62 mph). . . . . . .

“L” 58 km/h (36 mph). . . . . . . .

4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine

“3” 146 km/h (90 mph). . . . . . .

“2” 100 km/h (62 mph). . . . . . .

“L” 58 km/h (36 mph). . . . . . . .

06 06.07

163

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Four−wheel drive models

4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine

Multi−mode drive control

switch knob at “H2” or “H4”

“3” 146 km/h (90 mph). . . . .

“2” 100 km/h (62 mph). . . . .

“L” 58 km/h (36 mph). . . . . .

Multi−mode drive control

switch knob at “L4”

“3” 57 km/h (35 mph). . . . . .

“2” 39 km/h (24 mph). . . . . .

“L” 22 km/h (14 mph). . . . . .

4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine

Four−wheel drive control

switch knob at “H4”

“3” 146 km/h (90 mph). . . . .

“2” 100 km/h (62 mph). . . . .

“L” 58 km/h (36 mph). . . . . .

Four−wheel drive control

switch knob at “L4”

“3” 57 km/h (35 mph). . . . . .

“2” 39 km/h (24 mph). . . . . .

“L” 26 km/h (16 mph). . . . . .



Do not continue hill climbing or

hard towing for a long time in the

“3”, “2” or “L” position. This may

cause severe automatic transmis-

sion damage from overheating. To

prevent such damage, “4” position

should be used in hill climbing or

hard towing.

(e) Backing up

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. With the brake pedal held down with

your foot, shift the selector lever to the

“R” position.

NOTICE

Never shift into reverse while the ve-

hicle is moving.

Vehicles with rear view monitor system—

When the selector lever is shifted into “R”

position with the ignition switch in the

“ON” position, rear view monitor system

will activate. For instructions, see “Rear

view monitor system” on page 302 in Sec-

tion 1−10.

(f) Parking

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. With the brake pedal pressed down,

fully depress the parking brake pedal

to apply the parking brake securely.

3. With the brake pedal pressed down,

shift the selector lever to the “P” posi-

tion.

CAUTION

Never attempt to move the selector

lever into “P” position under any cir-

cumstances while the vehicle is mov-

ing. Serious mechanical damage and

loss of vehicle control may result.

If the automatic unlocking operation linked

with the shift position is set, all the side

doors and back door are automatically un-

locked when the selector lever is moved

to the “P” position with the ignition switch

is in the “ON” position. For details, see

“—Automatic door locking and unlocking

functions” on page 25 in Section 1−2.

06 06.07

164 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

(g) Good driving practice

If the transmission repeatedly shifts up

and down between fourth gear and

overdrive when climbing a gentle slope,

shift the selector lever to the “4” posi-

tion. Be sure to shift the selector lever

to the “D” position immediately after-

ward.

When towing a trailer, in order to main-

tain engine braking efficiency, do not

use “D” position.

CAUTION

Always keep your foot on the brake

pedal while stopped with the engine

running. This prevents the vehicle

from creeping.

NOTICE

Always use the brake pedal or the

parking brake to hold the vehicle on

an upgrade. Do not attempt to hold

the vehicle using the accelerator ped-

al, as this can cause the transmission

to overheat.

(h) If you cannot shift the selector le-

ver out of “P” position

If you cannot shift the selector lever from

the “P” position even though the brake

pedal is depressed, use the shift lock

override button. For instructions, see “If

you cannot shift automatic transmission

selector lever” on page 394 in Section 4. CY16060

Four−wheel drive control switch knob

CY16061

Center differential lock switch

06 06.07

Four−wheel drive system

(full−time four−wheel drive

models)—

(a) Four−wheel drive control

165

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Use the four−wheel drive control switch

knob and center differential lock switch

to select the transfer and center differ-

ential modes.

The “H4” and “L4” positions of the four−

wheel drive control switch knob provide

either lock or unlock mode of the center

differential depending on the center differ-

ential lock switch position.

Use the center differential lock system if

your wheels get stuck in a ditch, or when

you are driving on a slippery or bumpy

surface. When the center differential is

locked, the vehicle stability control system

is automatically turned off and the center

differential lock and “VSC OFF” indicator

lights come on because the function that

controls engine performance interferes

with the process of freeing your wheels.

NOTICE

As soon as the center differential lock

switch is turned on, the “VSC OFF”

indicator light comes on. After the

wheels are out of the ditch or off the

slippery or bumpy surface, turn the

center differential lock switch off.

Make sure that the center differential

lock indicator light and vehicle stabil-

ity control system off indicator light

turn off.

“H4” (high speed position, center differ-

ential unlocked): Four−wheel drive control

switch knob at “H4”, center differential

lock switch left out

Use this for normal driving on all types of

roads, from dry hard−surfaced roads to

wet, icy or snow−covered roads. This

position gives greater economy, quietest

ride, least wear and better vehicle control.

“H4” (high speed position, center differ-

ential locked): Four−wheel drive control

switch knob at “H4”, center differential

lock switch pushed in

Use this for greater traction when you

experience a loss of power, such as

wheel slipping, in the center differential

unlock mode.

“L4” (low speed position, center differ-

ential unlocked): Four−wheel drive control

switch knob at “L4”, center differential lock

switch left out

The “4LO” (low speed four−wheel drive)

indicator light comes on when the “L4”

mode is selected.

Use this for maximum power and traction.

Use this for climbing or descending steep

hills, off−road driving, and hard pulling in

sand or mud.

In this mode, the braking feeling that oc-

curs when the wheels are negotiating a

sharp corner is further reduced than in the

“L4” (low speed position, center differential

locked) mode.

“L4” (low speed position, center differ-

ential locked): Four−wheel drive control

switch knob at “L4”, center differential lock

switch pushed in

The “4LO” (low speed four−wheel drive)

indicator light comes on when the “L4”

mode is selected.

06 06.07

166 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Use this for maximum power and traction.

Use this for hard pulling in situations the

vehicle cannot negotiate even in the “L4”

(low speed position, center differential un-

locked) mode. Also, using this mode when

driving down steep off−road inclines will

help contribute to increased vehicle stabil-

ity.

The indicator light tells when the differen-

tial lock is engaged. Note that the differ-

ential is not still locked as long as the

indicator light remains off.

When the operation is not completed, the

indicator blinks. If the indicator light does

not go off when you push out the center

differential lock switch, drive straight

ahead while accelerating or decelerating,

or drive in reverse.

If the center differential lock system op-

eration is not completed within 5 seconds

while the cruise control system is set,

cancel the cruise control system. To can-

cel the cruise control system, see “Cruise

control” on page 196 in Section 1−7.

If the indicator blinks even if doing so,

contact your Toyota dealer as soon as

possible. There may be a trouble in the

center differential lock system.

See “(b) Shifting procedure” for further in-

structions.

SHIFTING BETWEEN “H4” (UNLOCKED)

AND “H4” (LOCKED)

To shift between unlock and lock

modes in “H4”, push the center differen-

tial lock switch.

SHIFTING BETWEEN “L4” (UNLOCKED)

AND “L4” (LOCKED)

To shift between unlock and lock

modes in “L4”, push the center differen-

tial lock switch.

SHIFTING BETWEEN “H4” AND “L4”

To shift from “H4” to “L4”, bring the

vehicle to a complete stop with the brake

pedal held down with your foot, shift the

automatic transmission selector lever into

“N” and push and turn the four−wheel

drive control switch knob fully clockwise.

To shift from “L4” to “H4”, bring the

vehicle to a complete stop with the brake

pedal held down with your foot, shift the

automatic transmission selector lever into

“N” and turn the four−wheel drive control

switch knob fully counterclockwise.

If the “4LO” (low speed four−wheel drive)

indicator light continues to blink when you

operate the four−wheel drive control

switch knob to the “H4” or “L4” position,

drive forward or backward in a short dis-

tance, then stop the vehicle completely,

shift the automatic transmission selector

lever securely into “N” and operate the

switch knob again.

If the indicator continues to blink even if

doing so, contact your Toyota dealer as

soon as possible. There may be a trouble

in the four−wheel drive system.

CAUTION

Never operate the four−wheel drive

control switch knob if the wheels are

slipping. Stop the slipping or spin-

ning before operating.

06 06.07

(b) Shifting procedure

167

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY16062

Multi−mode control switch knob

CY16061

Center differential lock switch

Use the multi−mode control switch

knob and center differential lock switch

to select the transfer and center differ-

ential modes.

The “H4” and “L4” positions of the multi−

mode control switch knob provide either

lock or unlock mode of the center differen-

tial depending on the center differential

lock switch position.

Use the center differential lock system if

your wheels get stuck in a ditch, or when

you are driving on a slippery or bumpy

surface. When the center differential is

locked, the vehicle stability control system

is automatically turned off and the center

differential lock and “VSC OFF” indicator

lights come on because the function that

controls engine performance interferes

with the process of freeing your wheels.

NOTICE

As soon as the center differential lock

switch is turned on, the “VSC OFF”

indicator light comes on. After the

wheels are out of the ditch or off the

slippery or bumpy surface, turn the

center differential lock switch off.

Make sure that the center differential

lock indicator light and vehicle stabil-

ity control system off indicator light

turn off.

06 06.07

Four−wheel drive system

(multi−mode four−wheel drive

models)—

(a) Multi−mode control

168 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

“H2” (high speed position, two−wheel

drive, center differential unlocked): Mul-

ti−mode control switch knob at “H2”, cen-

ter differential lock switch left out

Use this for normal driving on dry hard−

surfaced roads. This position gives greater

economy, quietest ride, least wear and

better vehicle control.

“H4” (high speed position, four−wheel

drive, center differential unlocked): Mul-

ti−mode control switch knob at “H4”, cen-

ter differential lock switch left out

The four−wheel drive indicator light comes

on when the “H4” mode is selected.

Use this for greater traction than two−

wheel drive. (When you experience a loss

of power, such as wheel slipping.) This

position provides greater traction than

two−wheel drive.

“H4” (high speed position, four−wheel

drive, center differential locked): Multi−

mode control switch knob at “H4”, center

differential lock switch pushed in

The four−wheel drive indicator light comes

on when the “H4” mode is selected.

Use this for greater traction when you

experience a loss of power, such as

wheel slipping, in the center differential

unlock mode.

“L4” (low speed position, four−wheel

drive, center differential unlocked): Mul-

ti−mode control switch knob at “L4”, cen-

ter differential lock switch left out

The four−wheel drive and “4LO” (low

speed four−wheel drive) indicator lights

come on when the “L4” mode is selected.

Use this for maximum power and traction.

Use this for climbing or descending steep

hills, off−road driving, and hard pulling in

sand or mud.

In this mode, the braking feeling that oc-

curs when the wheels are negotiating a

sharp corner is further reduced than in the

“L4” (low speed position, four−wheel drive,

center differential locked) mode.

“L4” (low speed position, four−wheel

drive, center differential locked): Multi−

mode control switch knob at “L4”, center

differential lock switch pushed in

The four−wheel drive and “4LO” (low

speed four−wheel drive) indicator lights

come on when the “L4” mode is selected.

Use this for maximum power and traction.

Use this for hard pulling in situations the

vehicle cannot negotiate even in the “L4”

(low speed position, four−wheel drive, cen-

ter differential unlocked) mode. Also, using

this mode when driving down steep off−

road inclines will help contribute to in-

creased vehicle stability.

The indicator light tells when the differen-

tial lock is engaged. Note that the differ-

ential is not still locked as long as the

indicator light remains off.

When the operation is not completed, the

indicator blinks. If the indicator light does

not go off when you push out the center

differential lock switch, drive straight

ahead while accelerating or decelerating,

or drive in reverse.

If the center differential lock system op-

eration is not completed within 5 seconds

while the cruise control system is set,

cancel the cruise control system. To can-

cel the cruise control system, see “Cruise

control” on page 196 in Section 1−7.

If the indicator blinks even if doing so,

contact your Toyota dealer as soon as

possible. There may be a trouble in the

center differential lock system.

See “(c) Shifting procedure” for further in-

structions.

06 06.07

169

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

The A.D.D. can be engaged or disen-

gaged by the shifting operations de-

scribed in “(c) Shifting procedure”.

You should drive in four−wheel drive for

at least 16 km (10 miles) each month.

This will assure that the front drive com-

ponents are lubricated.

SHIFTING BETWEEN “H2” AND “H4”

(UNLOCKED)

To shift from “H2” to “H4” (unlocked),

reduce the vehicle speed to less than 100

km/h (62 mph) and turn the multi−mode

control switch knob fully clockwise.

If the four−wheel drive indicator light con-

tinues to blink when you operate the mul-

ti−mode control switch knob from the “H2”

to the “H4” position, this reminds you that

the transfer mode is not securely in “H4”

mode. Drive straight ahead while acceler-

ating or decelerating.

If the four−wheel drive indicator light con-

tinues to blink and the buzzer sounds

when you operate the multi−mode control

switch knob from the “H2” to the “H4”

position, this reminds you that the transfer

mode is not in “H4” mode. Stop the ve-

hicle or reduce the vehicle speed to less

than 100 km/h (62 mph). Operate the

switch knob again.

To shift from “H4” (unlocked) to “H2”,

turn the multi−mode control switch knob

fully counterclockwise.

This can be done at any speed.

If the four−wheel drive indicator light con-

tinues to blink when you operate the mul-

ti−mode control switch knob from the “H4”

to the “H2” position, this reminds you that

the transfer mode is not securely in “H2”

mode. Drive straight ahead while acceler-

ating or decelerating, or drive forward or

backward in a short distance.

If the indicator light continues to blink

even if doing so, contact your Toyota

dealer as soon as possible. There may be

a trouble in the four−wheel drive system.

CAUTION

Never operate the multi−mode control

switch knob if the wheels are slip-

ping. Stop the slipping or spinning

before operating.

06 06.07

(b) A.D.D.

(automatic disconnecting

differential) (c) Shifting procedure

170 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

SHIFTING BETWEEN “H4” (UNLOCKED)

AND “H4” (LOCKED)

To shift between unlock and lock

modes in “H4”, push the center differen-

tial lock switch.

SHIFTING BETWEEN “L4” (UNLOCKED)

AND “L4” (LOCKED)

To shift between unlock and lock

modes in “L4”, push the center differen-

tial lock switch.

SHIFTING BETWEEN “H4” AND “L4”

To shift from “H4” to “L4”, bring the

vehicle to a complete stop with the brake

pedal held down with your foot, shift the

automatic transmission selector lever into

“N” and push and turn the multi−mode

control switch knob fully clockwise.

To shift from “L4” to “H4”, bring the

vehicle to a complete stop with the brake

pedal held down with your foot, shift the

automatic transmission selector lever into

“N” and turn the multi−mode control switch

knob counterclockwise.

If the “4LO” (low speed four−wheel drive)

indicator light continues to blink when you

operate the multi−mode control switch

knob to the “H4” or “L4” position, drive

forward or backward in a short distance,

then stop the vehicle completely, shift the

automatic transmission selector lever se-

curely into “N” and operate the switch

knob again.

If the indicator continues to blink even if

doing so, contact your Toyota dealer as

soon as possible. There may be a trouble

in the four−wheel drive system.

CAUTION

Never operate the multi−mode control

switch knob if the wheels are slip-

ping. Stop the slipping or spinning

before operating.

The traction control system automatical-

ly helps prevent the spinning of rear

wheels when the vehicle is started or

accelerated on slippery road surfaces.

When the ignition key is turned to “ON”,

the system automatically turns on.

CAUTION

Under certain slippery road condi-

tions, full traction of the vehicle and

power to the rear wheels cannot be

maintained, even though the traction

control system is in operation. Do not

drive the vehicle under any speed or

maneuvering conditions which may

cause the vehicle to lose traction

control. In situations where the road

surface is covered with ice or snow,

your vehicle should be fitted with

snow tires or tire chains. Always

drive at an appropriate and cautious

speed for the present road condi-

tions.

06 06.07

Traction control system

(two−wheel drive models)

171

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY16063

NORMAL DRIVING MODE

Leave the system on during ordinary

driving so that it can operate when

needed.

You may hear a sound in the engine

compartment for a few seconds when the

engine is started or just after the vehicle

begins to move. This means that the trac-

tion control system is in the self−check

mode, but does not indicate a malfunction.

When the traction control system is oper-

ating, the following conditions occur:

The system controls the spinning of the

rear wheels. At this time, the slip indi-

cator light blinks.

You may feel vibration or noise in your

vehicle, caused by operation of the

brakes. This indicates the system is

functioning properly.

The slip indicator light comes on for a few

seconds when the ignition key is turned

to “ON”. If the indicator light does not

come on when the ignition is turned on,

contact your Toyota dealer.

The brake actuator temperature increases

during continuous operation of the traction

control system, the “AUTO LSD” system,

the vehicle stability control system and

the hill−start assist control system such

as on slippery roads. If the brake actuator

temperature becomes too high while any

of the systems is operating, a buzzer will

start to sound intermittently to indicate

that the traction control system can no

longer operate. In this case, immediately

stop your vehicle at a safe place.

If the system continues to operate, the

buzzer sound changes from intermittent to

continuous. (The continuous buzzer

sounds for about 3 seconds.)

At the time the slip indicator light will

come on and the traction control system

temporarily stops operating in order to

protect the brake actuator. (Although the

traction control system does not operate,

there is no problem to continue your driv-

ing.) The system will be automatically re-

stored after a short time and the slip indi-

cator light goes out.

06 06.07

172 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY16064

“VSC TRAC” warning light

This light warns that there is a problem

somewhere in the following.

Traction control system

“AUTO LSD” system

Vehicle stability control system

Hill−start assist control system

When the system is normal and the igni-

tion key is turned to “ON”, the “VSC

TRAC” warning light will come on and will

go off after a few seconds.

It is not a malfunction that the warning

light may stay on for 60 seconds after the

ignition key is turned to “ON”.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly

may turn on the light. It is normal if it

goes out after a few seconds.

If the “VSC TRAC” warning light and slip

indicator light come on while driving, the

traction control system does not work.

However, as normal braking operates

when being applied, there is no problem

to continue your driving.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota

dealer:

The warning light does not come on

after the ignition key is turned to “ON”.

The warning light remains on after the

ignition key is turned to “ON”.

The warning light comes on while driv-

ing.

The active traction control system auto-

matically helps prevent the spinning of

4 wheels when the vehicle is started or

accelerated on slippery road surfaces.

When the ignition key is turned to “ON”,

the system automatically turns on.

CAUTION

Under certain slippery road condi-

tions, full traction of the vehicle and

power to the 4 wheels cannot be

maintained, even though the traction

control system is in operation. Do not

drive the vehicle under any speed or

maneuvering conditions which may

cause the vehicle to lose traction

control. In situations where the road

surface is covered with ice or snow,

your vehicle should be fitted with

snow tires or tire chains. Always

drive at an appropriate and cautious

speed for the present road condi-

tions.

06 06.07

Active traction control system

(four−wheel drive models)

173

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY16063

Leave the system on during the ordi-

nary driving so that it can operate

when needed.

You may hear a sound in the engine

compartment for a few seconds when the

engine is started or just after the vehicle

begins to move. This means that the ac-

tive traction control system is in the self−

check mode, but does not indicate a mal-

function.

When the active traction control system is

operating, the following conditions occur:

The system controls the spinning of the

4 wheels. At this time, the slip indica-

tor light blinks.

You may feel vibration or noise in your

vehicle, caused by operation of the

brakes. This indicates the system is

functioning properly.

The slip indicator light comes on for a few

seconds when the ignition key is turned

to “ON”. If the indicator light does not

come on when the ignition is turned on,

contact your Toyota dealer.

The brake actuator temperature increases

during continuous operation of the active

traction control system, the vehicle stabil-

ity control system, the downhill assist con-

trol system and the hill−start assist control

system such as on slippery roads. If the

brake actuator temperature becomes too

high while any of the systems is operat-

ing, a buzzer will start to sound intermit-

tently to indicate that the active traction

control system can no longer operate. In

this case, immediately stop your vehicle at

a safe place.

If the system continues to operate, the

buzzer sound changes from intermittent to

continuous. (The continuous buzzer

sounds for about 3 seconds.)

At the time, the slip indicator light will

come on and the active traction control

system temporarily stops operating in or-

der to protect the brake actuator. (Al-

though the active traction control system

does not operate, there is no problem to

continue your driving.) The system will be

automatically restored after a short time

and the slip indicator light goes out.

06 06.07

174 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY16064

“VSC TRAC” warning light

This light warns that there is a problem

somewhere in the following.

Active traction control system

Vehicle stability control system

Downhill assist control system

Hill−start assist control system

When the system is normal and the igni-

tion key is turned to “ON”, the warning

light will come on and will go off after a

few seconds.

It is not a malfunction that the “VSC

TRAC” warning light may stay on for 60

seconds after the ignition key is turned to

“ON”.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly

may turn on the light. It is normal if it

goes out after a few seconds.

If the “VSC TRAC” warning light and slip

indicator light come on while driving, the

active traction control system does not

work. However, as normal braking oper-

ates when being applied, there is no prob-

lem to continue your driving.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota

dealer:

The warning light does not come on

after the ignition key is turned to “ON”.

The warning light remains on after the

ignition key is turned to “ON”.

The warning light comes on while driv-

ing.

CY16070

The “AUTO LSD” system aids traction

by using the traction control system to

control engine performance and braking

when one of the rear wheels begins to

spin.

This system is used only when wheel

spinning occurs in a ditch or on a

rough surface.

This system is effective in case one of

the rear wheels is spinning.

06 06.07

“AUTO LSD” system

(two−wheel drive models)

175

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

NOTICE

Do not use the “AUTO LSD” system

in conditions other than the above. A

much greater steering effort and more

careful cornering control will be re-

quired.

CY16066

To turn on the system, push the “AUTO

LSD” switch when the vehicle is

stopped.

The “AUTO LSD” system is activated

when driving at a speed under 100

km/h (62 mph). At this time, the “AUTO

LSD” indicator light will come on.

To turn off the system, push the “AUTO

LSD” switch again.

If the engine is turned off while the

“AUTO LSD” indicator light is on and then

restarted, the indicator light will turn off

automatically.

CY16067

Make sure the “AUTO LSD” indicator light

comes on under the above condition when

you use the “AUTO LSD” system.

The slip indicator light blinks when the

system is controlling the spinning of the

rear wheels.

The “AUTO LSD” and slip indicator lights

come on for a few seconds when the

ignition key is turned to “ON”. If the indi-

cator lights does not come on when the

ignition key is turned to “ON”, contact

your Toyota dealer.

06 06.07

176 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

The brake actuator temperature increases

during continuous operation of the “AUTO

LSD” system, the traction control system

and the vehicle stability control system

such as on slippery roads. If the brake

actuator temperature becomes too high

while any of the systems is operating, a

buzzer will start to sound intermittently to

indicate that the “AUTO LSD” system can

no longer operate. In this case, immedi-

ately stop your vehicle at a safe place.

If the system continues to operate, the

buzzer sound changes from intermittent to

continuous. (The continuous buzzer

sounds for about 3 seconds.)

At the time the slip indicator light will

come on and the “AUTO LSD” system

temporarily stops operating in order to

protect the brake actuator. (Although the

“AUTO LSD” system does not operate, it

is no problem to continue driving.) The

system will be automatically restored after

a short time and the slip indicator light

goes off.

CY16064

“VSC TRAC” warning light

This light warns that there is a problem

somewhere in the following.

“AUTO LSD” system

Traction control system

Vehicle stability control system

When the system is normal and the igni-

tion key is turned to “ON”, the light will

come on and will go off after a few sec-

onds.

It is not a malfunction that the warning

light may stay on for 60 seconds after the

ignition key is turned to “ON”.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly

may turn on the light. It is normal if it

goes out after a few seconds.

If the “VSC TRAC” warning light and slip

indicator light comes on while driving, the

“AUTO LSD” system does not work. How-

ever, as the brakes operate normally when

applied, it is no problem to continue your

driving.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota

dealer:

The warning light does not come on

after the ignition key is turned to “ON”.

The warning light remains on after the

ignition key is turned to “ON”.

The warning light comes on while driv-

ing.

NOTICE

Do not drive with the “AUTO LSD”

switch continuously turned on.

06 06.07

177

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

The vehicle stability control system

helps provide integrated control of the

systems such as anti−lock brake sys-

tem, traction control, engine control,

etc. This system automatically controls

the output of the brakes or engine to

help prevent the vehicle from skidding

when cornering on a slippery road sur-

face or operating steering wheel abrupt-

ly.

The vehicle stability control system is acti-

vated when the vehicle speed is more

than 15 km/h (9 mph).

You may hear a sound in the engine

compartment for a few seconds when the

engine is started or just after the vehicle

begins to move. This means that the sys-

tem is in the self−check mode, but does

not indicate a malfunction.

CAUTION

Do not rely excessively on the ve-

hicle stability control system. Even

if the vehicle stability control sys-

tem is operating, you must always

drive carefully and attentively to

avoid serious injury. Reckless driv-

ing will result in an unexpected ac-

cident. If the slip indicator light

blinks and an alarm sounds, special

care should be taken while driving.

Only use tires of specified size. The

size, manufacturer, brand and tread

pattern for all 4 tires should be the

same. If you use the tires other

than specified, or different type or

size, the vehicle stability control

system may not function correctly.

When replacing the tires or wheels,

contact your Toyota dealer. (See

“Checking and replacing tires” on

page 427 in Section 7−2.)

CY16063

If the vehicle is going to skid during driv-

ing, the slip indicator light blinks and an

alarm sounds intermittently. Special care

should be taken while driving.

If the brake pedal is depressed while the

vehicle stability control system is active,

the brake pedal will become hard at an

earlier position than usual. However, the

brakes will respond to the pedal force if

depressed further.

The slip indicator light comes on for a few

seconds when the ignition key is turned

to “ON”. If the indicator light does not

come on when the ignition is turned on,

contact your Toyota dealer.

06 06.07

Vehicle stability control

system

178 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY16061

Four−wheel drive models only—

Pushing the center differential lock

switch automatically turns the vehicle

stability control system off. At this

time, the “VSC OFF” indicator comes

on with the center differential lock indi-

cator light.

The “VSC OFF” indicator light comes on

for a few seconds when the ignition key

is turned to “ON”. It will come on again

when you push the center differential lock

switch to turn off the system.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota

dealer:

The indicator light does not come on

when the ignition key is turned to

“ON”.

The indicator light remains on after the

ignition key is turned to “ON”.

The indicator light comes on when the

system is on while driving.

NOTICE

Make sure that the center differential

lock indicator light goes off before

normal driving.

CY16064

“VSC TRAC” warning light

This light warns that there is a problem

somewhere in the following.

Vehicle stability control system

Traction control system

(two−wheel drive models)

Active traction control system

(four−wheel drive models)

“AUTO LSD” system

(two−wheel drive models)

Downhill assist control system

(four−wheel drive models)

Hill−start assist control system

06 06.07

179

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

The light will come on when the ignition

key is turned to “ON”, and will go off after

about a few seconds.

The light may come on for 60 seconds

after the ignition key is turned to “ON”. It

is normal if they go out after a while.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly

may turn on the light. It is normal if they

go out after a few seconds.

If the “VSC TRAC” waning light and slip

indicator light come on while driving, the

vehicle stability control system does not

work. However, as normal braking oper-

ates when being applied, there is no prob-

lem to continue your driving.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota

dealer:

The warning light does not come on

after the ignition key is turned to “ON”.

The warning light remains on after the

ignition key is turned to “ON”.

The warning light comes on while driv-

ing.

The downhill assist control system is a

system that assists the deceleration of

the engine brake when you drive down

a steep hill. When you are driving down

a hill with the four−wheel drive control

switch knob (full−time four−wheel drive

models) or multi−mode control switch

knob (multi−mode four−wheel drive

models) in the “L4” position, push the

“DAC” switch to limit the vehicle’s ac-

celeration. If the vehicle is traveling at

a speed of 25 km/h (15 mph) or less,

you can descend at a constant speed.

CAUTION

Do not rely excessively on the down-

hill assist control system. It may not

be able to maintain a low speed over

road surfaces or off−road surfaces on

which sliding can easily occur, such

as extremely steep slopes or icy or

muddy roads.

TO ACTIVATE THE DOWNHILL ASSIST

CONTROL SYSTEM

1. Full−time four−wheel drive models—

Turn the four−wheel drive control

switch knob to the “L4” position.

The system will not operate if the four−

wheel drive control switch knob is in the

“H4” position.

Multi−mode four−wheel drive mod-

els—Turn the multi−mode control

switch knob to the “L4” position.

The system will not operate if the multi−

mode control switch knob is in the “H4”

position.

2. In order to make full use of the en-

gine brake, putting the transmission

in “L” or “2” is recommended.

The system will operate even if the trans-

mission selector lever is in “D”, “4”, “3”

or “N”. However, when it is in “L” or “2”

the engine brake can also be utilized en-

abling the system to operate more effec-

tively.

06 06.07

Downhill assist control system

(four−wheel drive models)

180 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY16020

3. Push the “DAC” switch to turn the

system on. The downhill assist con-

trol system indicator light on the in-

strument panel will come on.

Full−time four−wheel drive models—If the

downhill assist control system indicator

light flashes, the selector lever may be in

“N” or the four−wheel drive control switch

knob may be in the “H4” position.

If the indicator light does not come on

when the switch is pushed, contact your

Toyota dealer.

Multi−mode four−wheel drive models—If

the downhill assist control system indica-

tor light flashes, the selector lever may be

in “N” or the multi−mode control switch

knob may be in the “H2” or “H4” position.

If the indicator light does not come on

when the switch is pushed, contact your

Toyota dealer. CY16063

With the vehicle traveling at a speed of

25 km/h (15 mph) or less, release your

foot from the accelerator or brake pedal

to activate the system. The vehicle will

descend the hill at a low speed. While the

system is operating, the slip indicator light

on the instrument panel will flash and the

stop lights and high mounted stoplight will

be lit.

If you push the “DAC” switch to turn the

system off while it is in operation, the

system will stop operating gradually. The

downhill assist control system indicator

light will flash to alert the driver. To con-

tinue driving at a low speed, push the

“DAC” switch to turn the system on.

06 06.07

181

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

The slip indicator light and downhill assist

control system indicator light come on for

a few seconds when the ignition key is

turned to “ON”. If any of the indicator

lights does not come on when the ignition

is turned on, contact your Toyota dealer.

The brake actuator temperature increases

during continuous operation of the hill−

start assist control system, the active

traction control system and the vehicle

stability control system. If the brake ac-

tuator temperature becomes too high while

any of the systems is operating, a buzzer

will start to sound intermittently to indicate

that the downhill assist control system can

no longer operate. In this case, stop your

vehicle immediately at a safe place.

If the system continues to operate, the

buzzer sound changes from intermittent to

continuous. (The continuous buzzer

sounds for about 3 seconds.)

At this time, the slip indicator light will

come on, the downhill assist control sys-

tem indicator light flash and the downhill

assist control system stops operating tem-

porarily in order to protect the brake ac-

tuator. (Although the downhill assist con-

trol system does not operate, it is no

problem to continue your driving.) The

system will be automatically restored after

a short time and the slip indicator light

and the downhill assist control system in-

dicator light go out.

CY16064

If there is any abnormality in the sys-

tem, the “VSC TRAC” warning light will

come on. When the “DAC” switch is

pushed, the downhill assist control sys-

tem indicator light also flash.

If the “VSC TRAC” warning light comes

on, there may be an abnormality in any

of the following systems in addition to the

downhill assist control system.

Hill−start assist control system

Active traction control system

Vehicle stability control system

06 06.07

182 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

“VSC TRAC” warning light

When the system is normal and the igni-

tion key is turned to “ON”, the warning

light will come on and will go off after a

few seconds.

It is not a malfunction that the warning

light may stay on for 60 seconds after the

ignition key is turned to the “ON” position.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly

may turn on the light. It is normal if it

goes out after a few seconds.

If the warning light comes on while driv-

ing, the system does not work. However,

as normal braking operates when being

applied, it is no problem to continue your

driving.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota

dealer:

The warning light does not come on

after the ignition key is turned to “ON”.

The warning light remains on after the

ignition key is turned to “ON”.

The warning light comes on while driv-

ing.

The hill−start assist control system as-

sists you in starting to move up a

steep or slippery hill. When you start

to move up the hill slope, the system

helps to prevent the vehicle from roll-

ing backward in the interval while you

move your foot from the brake pedal to

the accelerator pedal.

CAUTION

Do not rely excessively on the hill−

start assist control system. The ve-

hicle may not be able to start

smoothly on road surfaces or off−

road surfaces such as extremely

steep slopes or icy roads, on which

sliding can occur very easily.

Do not use the hill−start assist con-

trol system to stop the vehicle. This

system is not designed as a func-

tion for stopping the vehicle on a

uphill slope.

The hill−start assist control system will

operate for 5 seconds maximally when

all of the following conditions apply.

When the transmission is in any of

positions “D”, “4”, “3”, “2” or “L”

When the brake pedal is not de-

pressed

The system is designed to operate when

the vehicle is starting on an uphill slope;

therefore, if the transmission is in “P” or

“N” it will not operate. It will not operate

either if the vehicle starts to move in

reverse on a slope with the transmission

in the “R”.

06 06.07

Hill−start assist control

system

183

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY16063

When the hill−start assist control system

is operating, the slip indicator light flashes

and an alarm sounds intermittently. At the

same time, the stop lights and high

mounted stoplight are lit.

The slip indicator light comes on for a few

seconds when the ignition key is turned

to “ON”. If the indicator light does not

come on when the ignition is turned on,

contact your Toyota dealer.

Keep in mind the following when driv-

ing.

The hill−start assist control system op-

erates for 5 seconds maximally. If both

the brake and accelerator pedals re-

main undepressed for longer than 5

seconds, the buzzer will sound at more

frequent intervals and the system will

gradually stop operating.

The hill−start assist control system is

not designed as a function for stopping

the vehicle on a uphill slope. When

stopping the vehicle, be sure to de-

press the brake pedal.

The brake actuator temperature increases

during continuous operation of the downhill

assist control system (four−wheel drive

models), the traction control system (two−

wheel drive models), the active traction

control system (four−wheel drive models),

the vehicle stability control system and

the “AUTO LSD” system (two−wheel drive

models) on such as slippery roads. If the

brake actuator temperature becomes too

high while any of the systems is operat-

ing, a buzzer will start to sound intermit-

tently to indicate that the hill−start assist

control system can no longer operate. In

this case, stop your vehicle immediately at

a safe place.

If the system continues to operate, the

buzzer sound changes from intermittent to

continuous. (The continuous buzzer

sounds for about 3 seconds.)

At this time, the slip indicator light will

come on and the hill−start assist control

system stops operating temporarily in or-

der to protect the brake actuator. (Al-

though the hill−start assist control system

does not operate, it is no problem to con-

tinue your driving.) The system will be

automatically restored after a short time

and the slip indicator light goes out.

06 06.07

184 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY16064

If there is any abnormality in the sys-

tem, the “VSC TRAC” warning light will

come on.

If the system malfunctions, the “VSC

TRAC” warning light will come on.

If the “VSC TRAC” warning light comes

on, there may be an abnormality in any

of the following systems in addition to the

hill−start assist control system.

Downhill assist control system

(four−wheel drive models)

Traction control system

(two−wheel drive models)

Active traction control system

(four−wheel drive models)

Vehicle stability control system

“AUTO LSD” system

(two−wheel drive models)

“VSC TRAC” warning light

When the system is normal and the igni-

tion key is turned to “ON”, the warning

light will come on and will go off after a

few seconds.

It is not a malfunction that the warning

light may stay on for 60 seconds after the

ignition key is turned to “ON”.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly

may turn on the light. It is normal if it

goes out after a few seconds.

If the warning light comes on while driv-

ing, the system does not work. However,

as normal braking operates when being

applied, it is no problem to continue your

driving.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota

dealer:

The warning light does not come on

after the ignition key is turned to “ON”.

The warning light remains on after the

ignition key is turned to “ON”.

The warning light comes on while driv-

ing.

CY16008

This rear height control air suspension

controls the vehicle height depending

on the vehicle driving conditions. Select

your desired height among the “HI”

(high), “N” (normal) and “LO” (low)

modes with the height select switch.

(a) Vehicle height modes

“N” (normal) mode—

The vehicle height in this mode is stan-

dard. Regardless of the number of occu-

pants or the luggage loading condition, the

vehicle height is always automatically ad-

justed to a fixed height in this mode while

the engine is running.

This mode is suitable for ordinary driving.

06 06.07

Rear height control air

suspension

185

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

“HI” (high) mode—

The vehicle height is about 40 mm (1.6

in.) higher at rear than the “N” mode

height.

This mode is suitable when driving on the

bumpy roads and through water.

However, when the vehicle speed exceeds

about 30 km/h (19 mph) or over in the

“HI” mode, the “N” mode is automatically

selected.

CAUTION

The “HI” mode should be used for

severe off−road driving condition

only. Because the vehicle’s center of

gravity is higher in this setting, the

vehicle may become unstable when

turning abruptly, resulting in accident.

“LO” (low) mode—

The vehicle height is about 20 mm (0.8

in.) lower at rear than the “N” mode

height.

This mode allows you easy access to the

vehicle (getting in and out) and easy load-

ing and unloading operation.

This mode is available when the vehicle

speed is under about 12 km/h (7 mph).

NOTICE

Use the “LO” mode when the vehicle

is stopped. Otherwise, when the ve-

hicle speed exceeds about 12 km/h (7

mph), “N” mode is selected automati-

cally. So be careful when you drive in

any place where the overhead height

is limited.

(b) Vehicle height mode changing con-

dition

To change the vehicle height, it is neces-

sary to meet the following conditions.

The engine should be running.

The height control “OFF” indicator light

should go off.

When selecting a mode, there is a ve-

hicle speed limit. Refer to the following

table.

Yes = The mode can be selected.

No = The mode cannot be selected.

“LO”

mode “N”

mode “HI”

mode

Under about

12 km/h

(7 mph) Yes Yes Yes

Under about

30 km/h

(19 mph) No Yes Yes

About

30 km/h

(19 mph) or

over

No Yes No

In the following cases, the rear height

control suspension will not operate.

The underbody of the vehicle has

touched the surface on bumpy roads.

The area around the rear suspension

is coated with ice.

06 06.07

186 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

If the vehicle is moved to its usual loca-

tion or the ice is removed and the height

select switch is pressed, the vehicle

height control cannot be operated. In this

case, turn off and restart the engine, then

push the control switches. CY16014

To change the mode, push the height

select switch on either side of “”

(higher) or “” (lower).

The height control indicator light indicates

which mode is selected. (See “(e) Height

control indicator light” described below.)

Selecting the “HI” mode—

Push the height select switch on the “”

side when the vehicle speed is under

about 30 km/h (19 mph).

To change the “N” mode to “HI”, push

the switch once.

To change the “LO” mode to “HI”, push

the switch twice. It takes about 30 sec-

onds until the “LO” mode changes to the

“HI” mode.

Selecting the “N” mode—

To change the “HI” mode to “N”, push

the height select switch on the “” side

once.

To change the “LO” mode to “N”, push

the height select switch on the “” side

once.

Selecting the “LO” mode—

Push the height select switch on the “”

side while the vehicle is stopped.

To change the “N” mode to “LO”, push

the switch once.

To change the “HI” mode to “LO”, push

the switch twice.

Even if the engine is stopped while the

vehicle height is being lowered, the opera-

tion continues for up to 25 seconds. If,

within this 25 seconds, any of the side

doors or the back door is opened, opera-

tion will continue for a further 15 seconds.

06 06.07

187

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

NOTICE



If the vehicle height is changed fre-

quently when the vehicle is heavily

loaded, the compressor may over-

heat, causing the vehicle height ad-

justment operation to stop.



Before you lower the vehicle height

with the height select switch, check

under the vehicle to make sure

nothing to damage the vehicle or

no one to be injured is there and

that the underbody of the vehicle

does not touch the ground.



After unloading, the height of a ve-

hicle equipped with the rear height

control air suspension becomes

slightly higher than the normal ve-

hicle height. Take sufficient care

where the overhead height is re-

stricted.



Do not select the “LO” mode in the

bumpy roads. If the underbody of

the vehicle touches the rugged road

surface, the vehicle may be dam-

aged.

CY16015

(d) Turning off the rear height control

air suspension

To turn off the rear height control air

suspension with the vehicle stopped,

push the “HEIGHT CONTROL OFF”

switch. The height control “OFF” indi-

cator light comes on and the vehicle

height is fixed in the same mode as the

height control switch is pushed.

This status is memorized in the system

even after the engine is stopped.

If you push the switch again, the height

control “OFF” indicator light goes out and

the rear height control air suspension is

turned on.

Even after the rear height control air sus-

pension is turned off with the “HEIGHT

CONTROL OFF” switch, if the vehicle

speed exceeds 30 km/h (19 mph), the

rear height control air suspension automat-

ically selects the “N” mode.

06 06.07

188 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CAUTION

If you drive through deep water over

about 700 mm (28 in.) in depth, put

the vehicle height in the “HI” mode

with the height select switch and then

turn off the rear height control air

suspension by pushing the “HEIGHT

CONTROL OFF” switch.

NOTICE



When jacking up or installing tire

chains, be sure to turn off the rear

height control air suspension by

pushing the “HEIGHT CONTROL

OFF” switch and stop the engine.

Otherwise, the vehicle height may

change because of the automatic

leveling function, resulting in an un-

expected accident.



If your vehicle must be towed, put

the vehicle height in the “N” mode

and turn off the rear height control

air suspension. Otherwise, the ve-

hicle height may change because of

the automatic leveling function, re-

sulting in an unexpected accident.



If your vehicle gets ditched, turn off

the rear height control air suspen-

sion with the “HEIGHT CONTROL

OFF” switch. Otherwise, the vehicle

height may change because of the

automatic leveling function resulting

in an unexpected accident.

CY16018

(e) Height control indicator lights

1. Height control indicator lights

2. Height control “OFF” indicator light

When the ignition switch is turned on, all

the indicator lights come on. The indicator

light showing the present mode only re-

mains on and all other lights go off after

a few seconds. This means the system

operates correctly.

06 06.07

189

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY16019

If you change the vehicle height mode,

the indicator lights change as follows:

When changing the vehicle height from

the “N” mode to “HI”:

1. The “N” mode indicator light goes off

and the “HI” mode indicator light blinks.

2. After the vehicle height control reaches

the “HI” mode, the “HI” mode indicator

light remains on.

If the underbody of the vehicle has

touched the surface on bumpy roads or

the area around the rear suspension is

coated with ice, the vehicle height cannot

be lowered with the height select switch.

The height control indicator lights change

as follows:

1. The present mode indicator light goes

off and the selected mode indicator

light blinks.

2. The selected mode indicator light goes

off. (The vehicle height does not

change.) The present mode indicator

light comes on again.

In this case, even if the vehicle is moved

to its usual location or the ice is removed

and the height select switch is pressed,

vehicle height control cannot be operated.

Turn off the engine once and then restart

it.

Height control “OFF” indicator light:

When the ignition switch is turned on, this

light comes on. If it goes out after a few

seconds, the rear height control air sus-

pension operates correctly. If you push the

“HEIGHT CONTROL OFF” switch, the rear

height control air suspension is turned off.

The height control “OFF” indicator light

comes on.

In the following cases, there is a problem

somewhere in the rear height control air

suspension. Although there is no problem

to continue normal driving, have the rear

height control air suspension checked by

your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

The height control “OFF” indicator light

does not come on when the ignition

switch is turned on.

The height control “OFF” indicator light

blinks.

(f) Parking and stopping tips

If you immediately stop the engine to park

the vehicle after off−road driving, the ve-

hicle height is lowered slightly as the ve-

hicle becomes cool. When parking, make

sure there is nothing that will be in con-

tact with the underbody of the vehicle.

When you start the engine, the vehicle

returns to the previous height.

If you park the vehicle for a long time,

the vehicle height may be gradually low-

ered. When parking for a long time, make

sure there is nothing that will be in con-

tact with the underbody of the vehicle.

When you start the engine, the vehicle

returns to the previous height.

If you stop the engine, the vehicle height

may change in accordance with the

change in the temperature. When you

start the engine, the vehicle returns to the

previous height.

06 06.07

190 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

(g) Rear height control failure warning

If there is a problem somewhere in the

rear height control air suspension, the “N”

mode is automatically selected. If this oc-

curs, the height control “OFF” indicator

light blinks and the vehicle height control

cannot be activated until the malfunction

is corrected. If this is the case, bring your

vehicle to your Toyota dealer as soon as

possible and have it checked.

The tire pressure warning system warns

you that the tire inflation pressure is

low.

The tire pressure warning system is not

a substitute for checking normal tire infla-

tion pressure. Check the tire inflation

pressure with a tire pressure gauge regu-

larly.

CAUTION

The warning system may not activate

immediately if blowout or sudden air

loss should occur.

CY16069

Type A

CY16068

Type B

06 06.07

Tire pressure warning system

191

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

The tire pressure warning light comes on

when the ignition key is turned to the

“ON” position and goes off after a few

seconds. This means the tire pressure

warning light is operating properly. If the

tire inflation pressure becomes low, the

light comes on again. In this case, adjust-

ing the tire inflation pressure will turn off

the light after a few minutes. If the light

blinks, the tire pressure warning system is

not working properly.

Indicator

status Meanings Do this

ON Tire inflation

pressure is

low

Adjust the tire

inflation

pressure

Blinking

Tire pressure

warning

system

malfunction

Have the

system

checked at

your Toyota

dealer

CAUTION

If the tire pressure warning light

comes on, be sure to observe the

following precautions. Failure to do

so could cause loss of vehicle control

and result in death or serious injury.

Stop your vehicle in a safe place as

soon as possible. Adjust the tire

inflation pressure immediately.

If the tire pressure waring light

comes on even after tire inflation

pressure adjustment, it is probable

that you have a flat tire. Check the

tires. If the tire is flat, change to

the spare tire and have the flat tire

repaired by the nearest Toyota deal-

er.

Avoid abrupt maneuvering and brak-

ing. If the vehicle tires deteriorate,

you could lose control of the steer-

ing wheel or the brakes.

The tire pressure warning light may turn

on due to natural causes such as natural

air leaks or tire inflation pressure changes

caused by temperature. In this case, ad-

justing the tire inflation pressure will turn

off the light after a few minutes.

The spare tire is also equipped with the

tire pressure warning valve and transmit-

ter. The tire pressure waning light will turn

on if the tire inflation pressure of the

spare tire is low. If a tire goes flat, even

though the flat tire is replaced with the

spare tire, the warning light does not turn

off. Replace the spare tire with the re-

paired tire and adjust the proper tire infla-

tion pressure. The tire pressure warning

light will turn off after a few minutes.

06 06.07

192 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CAUTION

Each tire, including the spare (if pro-

vided), should be checked monthly

when cold and inflated to the inflation

pressure recommended by the vehicle

manufacturer on the vehicle placard

or tire inflation pressure label (tire

and load information label). (If your

vehicle has tires of a different size

than the size indicated on the vehicle

placard or tire inflation pressure label

(tire and load information label), you

should determine the proper tire infla-

tion pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your ve-

hicle has been equipped with a tire

pressure monitoring system (TPMS−

tire pressure warning system) that il-

luminates a low tire pressure telltale

(tire pressure warning light) when one

or more of your tires is significantly

under−inflated. Accordingly, when the

low tire pressure telltale (tire pres-

sure warning light) illuminates, you

should stop and check your tires as

soon as possible, and inflate them to

the proper pressure. Driving on a sig-

nificantly under−inflated tire causes

the tire to overheat and can lead to

tire failure. Under−inflation also re-

duces fuel efficiency and tire tread

life, and may affect the vehicle’s han-

dling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS (tire pres-

sure warning system) is not a substi-

tute for proper tire maintenance, and

it is the driver’s responsibility to

maintain correct tire pressure, even if

under−inflation has not reached the

level to trigger illumination of the

TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire

pressure warning light).

NOTICE



Do not use liquid sealants for a flat

tire as tire pressure warning valve

and transmitter will be damaged.



When the tires must be repaired or

replaced, have them repaired or re-

placed by the nearest Toyota dealer

or an authorized tire dealer. The

tire pressure warning valves and

transmitters will be affected by the

installation or removal of tires.

06 06.07

193

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY16072

Type A

CY16071

Type B

IF THE TIRE PRESSURE WARNING

LIGHT BLINKS...

If the tire pressure warning light blinks

when the ignition key is turned to the

“ON” position, the tire pressure warn-

ing system is not working properly.

The system will be disabled in the follow-

ing conditions:

(When the condition becomes normal, the

system will work properly.)

If tires not equipped with tire pressure

warning valves and transmitters are

used.

If the ID code on the tire pressure

warning valves and transmitters is not

registered.

If electronic devices or facilities using

similar radio wave frequencies are

nearby.

If a radio set at similar frequencies is

in use in the vehicle.

If a window tint that affects the radio

wave signals is installed.

If there is a lot of snow or ice on the

vehicle, in particular around the wheels

or wheel housings.

If non−genuine Toyota wheels are used.

If tire chains are used.

If the spare tire is in a location subject

to poor radio wave signal reception.

If the tire inflation pressure is more

than 500 kPa (5 kgf/cm2 or bar, 70 psi)

or higher than the specified level.

If the tire pressure warning light continues

to blink when the ignition key is turned to

the “ON” position, have the system

checked by your Toyota dealer.

Even if you use genuine wheels, the tire

pressure warning system may not work

properly with some types of tires.

06 06.07

194 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful

interference, and (2) this device must

accept any interference received, includ-

ing interference that may cause unde-

sired operation.

NOTICE:

This equipment has been tested and

found to comply with the limits for a

Class B digital device, pursuant to Part

15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are

designed to provide reasonable protec-

tion against harmful interference in a

residential installation. This equipment

generates, uses and can radiate radio

frequency energy and, if not installed

and used in accordance with the instruc-

tions, may cause harmful interference to

radio communications. However, there is

no guarantee that interference will not

occur in a particular installation. If this

equipment does cause harmful interfer-

ence to radio or television reception,

which can be determined by turning the

equipment off and on, the user is en-

couraged to try to correct the interfer-

ence by one or more of the following

measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving an-

tenna.

Increase the separation between the

equipment and receiver.

Connect the equipment into an outlet

on a circuit different from that to

which the receiver is connected.

Consult the dealer or an experienced

radio/TV technician for help.

FCC WARNING:

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party respon-

sible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equip-

ment.

For vehicles sold in Canada

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept

any interference, including interference

that may cause undesired operation of

the device.

06 06.07

195

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

REPLACING TIRES AND WHEELS

When replacing the tires and wheels, be

sure to install tire pressure warning valves

and transmitters. ID codes on the tire

pressure warning valves and transmitters

are registered in the tire pressure warning

ECU. When replacing a tire pressure

warning valve and transmitter, it is neces-

sary to register the ID code of tire pres-

sure warning valve and transmitter. Have

the ID code registered by your Toyota

dealer.

If the ID code is not registered, the sys-

tem will not work properly. After about 1

hour, the tire pressure warning light blinks

to indicate a system malfunction.

NOTICE

When the tires or tire pressure warn-

ing valves and transmitters must be

replaced, have them replaced by your

Toyota dealer. The tire pressure warn-

ing valves and transmitters will be

affected by the installation or removal

of tires.

CY16007

When parking, firmly apply the parking

brake to avoid inadvertent creeping.

To set: Fully depress the parking brake

pedal. For better holding power, first de-

press the brake pedal and hold it while

setting the parking brake.

To release: Depress the parking brake

pedal once again.

To remind you that the parking brake is

set, the parking brake reminder light in

the instrument panel remains on until you

release the parking brake.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure the parking

brake is fully released and the park-

ing brake reminder light is off.

06 06.07

Parking brake

196 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

The cruise control is designed to main-

tain a set cruising speed without requir-

ing the driver to operate the accelera-

tor. Cruising speed can be set to any

speed above 40 km/h (25 mph).

Within the limits of the engine’s capabili-

ties, cruising speed can be maintained up

or down grades. However, changes in ve-

hicle speed may occur on steeper grades.

CAUTION

To help maintain maximum control

of your vehicle, do not use the

cruise control when driving in

heavy or varying traffic, or on slip-

pery (rainy, icy or snow−covered) or

winding roads.

Avoid vehicle speed increases when

driving downhill. If the vehicle

speed is too fast in relation to the

cruise control set speed, cancel the

cruise control then downshift the

transmission to use engine braking

to slow down.

CY16058

TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND OFF

To turn the cruise control on, press the

“ON−OFF” button. The “CRUISE” indicator

light on the instrument panel will come on

to indicate that the cruise control is opera-

tional. Pressing the “ON−OFF” button

again turns the system off.

When the system is turned off, cruising

speed must be reset when the cruise con-

trol is turned on again.

CAUTION

To avoid accidentally engaging the

cruise control, turn the system off

when it is not in use. Make sure the

“CRUISE” indicator light is off.

06 06.07

Cruise control

197

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY16059

SETTING THE CRUISING SPEED

The transmission must be in “D” or “4”

before you set the cruising speed.

Bring your vehicle to the desired speed,

push the lever down in the “− SET” direc-

tion and release it. This sets the vehicle

at that speed. If the speed is not satisfac-

tory, tap the lever up for a faster speed,

or tap it down for a slower speed. Each

tap changes the set speed by 1.6 km/h

(1.0 mph). You can now take your foot off

the accelerator pedal.

If you need acceleration—for example,

when passing—depress the accelerator

pedal enough for the vehicle to exceed

the set speed. When you release it, the

vehicle will return to the speed set prior

to the acceleration.

CANCELLING THE CRUISE CONTROL

The cruise control may be temporarily

cancelled by the driver or by the system

itself under certain circumstances. Tempo-

rary cancellation allows the set cruising

speed to remain in memory.

The cruise control can be temporarily can-

celled by doing the following:

Pulling the lever in the “CANCEL” di-

rection and releasing it

Depressing the brake pedal

Under certain circumstances, the cruise

control is temporarily cancelled:

When vehicle speed falls below 40

km/h (25 mph)

When vehicle stability control is acti-

vated

When vehicle speed drops 16 km/h (10

mph) below the set speed, the cruise con-

trol is cancelled and the set speed is

erased from memory.

The “CRUISE” indicator light remains on

to indicate that the system is still in op-

eration.

To turn the cruise control off, press the

“ON−OFF” button. Make sure the

“CRUISE” indicator light is off.

If the cruise control automatically cancels

out other than for the above cases, have

your vehicle checked by your Toyota deal-

er at the earliest opportunity.

RESUMING THE CRUISE CONTROL

If the cruise control is temporarily can-

celled, the cruising speed can be resumed

by pushing the lever up in the “+ RES”

direction.

Vehicle speed must be above 40 km/h (25

mph).

RESETTING TO A FASTER SPEED

Push the lever up in the “+ RES” direction

and hold it. Release the lever when the

desired speed is attained. While the lever

is held up, the vehicle will gradually gain

speed.

However, a faster way to reset is to ac-

celerate the vehicle and then push the

lever down in the “− SET” direction.

06 06.07

198 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

RESETTING TO A SLOWER SPEED

Push the lever down in the “− SET” direc-

tion and hold it. Release the lever when

the desired speed is attained. While the

lever is held down, the vehicle speed will

gradually decrease.

However, a faster way to reset is to de-

press the brake pedal and then push the

lever down in the “− SET” direction.

Even if you downshift from “D” to “4”, with

the cruise control on, engine braking will

not be enabled because the cruise control

is not cancelled. To decrease the vehicle

speed, reset to a slower speed with the

cruise control lever or depress the brake

pedal. If you use the brake pedal, cruise

control is cancelled.

CRUISE CONTROL FAILURE WARNING

If the “CRUISE” indicator light flashes

when using the cruise control, press the

“ON−OFF” button to turn the system off

and then press it again to turn it on.

If any of the following conditions then oc-

curs, there is some trouble in the cruise

control system.

The indicator light does not come on.

The indicator light flashes again.

The indicator light goes out after it

comes on.

If this is the case, contact your Toyota

dealer and have your vehicle inspected.

06 06.07

199

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND

CONTROLS

Audio system

Reference 200. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using your audio system 201. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Audio remote controls 229. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

AUX adapter 230. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear seat entertainment system 231. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Audio/video system operating hints 270. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

For vehicle equipped with Navigation system, please refer to the

separate “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

06 06.07

SECTION

−

200 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY17067

Type 1: AM·FM radio/compact disc player

(with compact disc changer controller)

CY17068

Type 2: AM·FM radio/compact disc player

with changer (with XM satellite radio∗

controller)

∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner

and service. Contact your Toyota deal-

er for details.

CY17074

Type 3: AM·FM radio/compact disc player

with changer (with XM satellite radio∗

controller)

∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner

and service. Contact your Toyota deal-

er for details.

06 06.07

Reference

201

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

This section describes some of the basic

features on Toyota audio systems. Some

information may not pertain to your sys-

tem.

Your audio system works when the ignition

key is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.

TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND OFF

Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio system

on and off.

Push “AM”, “FM1”, “FM2”, “FM”, “AM·SAT”∗

or “DISC·AUX” to turn on that function

without pushing “PWR·VOL”.

You can turn on the compact disc player

by inserting a compact disc.

You can turn off the compact disc player

by ejecting the compact disc. If the audio

system was previously off, then the entire

audio system will be turned off when you

eject the compact disc.

∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM

tuner and service. Contact your Toyota

dealer for details.

SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNCTIONS

Push “AM”, “FM1”, “FM2”, “FM”, “AM·SAT”∗

or “DISC·AUX” if the system is already on

but you want to switch from one function

to another.

∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM

tuner and service. Contact your Toyota

dealer for details.

LISTENING TO THE XM SATELLITE

RADIO BROADCAST∗ (type 2 and 3)

To listen to a satellite radio broadcast in

your vehicle, an additional genuine Toyota

satellite receiver and antenna (or equiva-

lents) must be purchased and installed. A

subscription to the XM satellite radio ser-

vice is also necessary.

How to subscribe to an XM satellite

radio

An XM satellite radio is a tuner designed

exclusively to receive broadcasts provided

under a separate subscription. Availability

is limited to the 48 contiguous states.

How to subscribe:

You must enter into a separate service

agreement with the XM radio in order to

receive satellite broadcast programming in

the vehicle. Additional activation and ser-

vice subscription fees apply that are not

included in the purchase price of the ve-

hicle and optional digital satellite tuner.

For complete information on subscription

rates and terms, or to subscribe to the

XM radio, visit XM on the web at

www.xmradio.com or call an XM’s Listen-

er Care at (800) 967−2346. The XM radio

is solely responsible for the quality, avail-

ability and content of the satellite radio

services provided, which are subject to

the terms and conditions of the XM radio

customer service agreement.

Customers should have their radio ID

ready; the radio ID can be found by tun-

ing to “channel 000” on the radio. For

details, see “Displaying the radio ID” be-

low.

All fees and programming are the respon-

sibility of the XM satellite radio and are

subject to change.

06 06.07

Using your audio system—

—Some basics

202 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Satellite tuner technology notice:

Toyota’s satellite radio tuners are awarded

Type Approval Certificates from XM Sat-

ellite Radio Inc. as proof of compatibility

with the services offered by the XM sat-

ellite radio.

Displaying the radio ID

Each XM tuner is identified with a unique

radio ID. You will need the radio ID when

activating XM service or when reporting

a problem.

If you select the “CH 000” using the

“TUNE” knob, the ID code of 8 alphanu-

meric characters appears. If you select

another channel, display of the ID code is

canceled. The channel (000) alternates the

display between the radio ID and the spe-

cific radio ID code.

∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM

tuner and service. Contact your Toyota

dealer for details.

TONE AND BALANCE

For details about your system’s tone and

balance controls, see the description of

your own system.

SRS 

Type 1 and 2 audio systems utilize SRS

FOCUS and SRS TruBass audio

enhancement technologies, under license

from SRS Labs, Inc., in all mode except

AM radio mode.

FOCUS, TruBass, SRS and symbol are

trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc.

FOCUS and TruBass technologies are

incorporated under license from SRS

Labs, Inc.

Tone

How good an audio program sounds to

you is largely determined by the mix of

the treble, midrange and bass levels. In

fact, different kinds of music and vocal

programs usually sound better with differ-

ent mixes of treble, midrange and bass.

Balance

A good balance of the left and right stereo

channels and of the front and rear sound

levels is also important.

Keep in mind that if you are listening to

a stereo recording or broadcast, changing

the right/left balance will increase the vol-

ume of one group of sounds while de-

creasing the volume of another.

YOUR RADIO ANTENNA

Your vehicle has an antenna printed on

the inside of the rear quarter window.

NOTICE

Putting a film (especially a conductive

or metallic film) on the rear quarter

window will noticeably reduce the

sensitivity of the radio.

06 06.07

203

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER (type 1)

When you insert a disc, gently push it in

with the label side up. The compact disc

player will play from track 1 through to

the end of the disc. Then it will play from

track 1 again.

The player is intended for use with 12 cm

(4.7 in.) discs only.

NOTICE

Never try to disassemble or oil any

part of the compact disc player. Do

not insert anything other than com-

pact discs into the slot.

YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER WITH

CHANGER (type 2 and 3)

When you insert a disc, push the “LOAD”

button and gently push the disc in with

the label side up. This compact disc play-

er can store up to six discs. The player

will play from track 1 through to the end

of the disc. Then it will play from track

1 of the next disc.

The player is intended for use with 12 cm

(4.7 in.) discs only.

CY17037

NOTICE



Do not stack up two discs for in-

sertion, or it will cause damage to

the compact disc player. Insert only

one compact disc into slot at a

time.



Never try to disassemble or oil any

part of the compact disc player. Do

not insert anything except a com-

pact disc into the slot.

06 06.07

204 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Details of specific buttons, controls and

features are described in the alphabetical

list that follows.

06 06.07

—Controls and features

Type 1

CY17064y

205

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)

These buttons are used to preset and

tune in radio stations.

To preset a station to a button: Tune in

the desired station. (See “TUNE·FILE” or

“SEEK/TRACK”.) Push and hold down the

button until you hear a beep—this will set

the station to the button. The preset but-

ton number will appear on the display.

To recall a preset station: Push the button

for the station you want. The preset but-

ton number and station frequency will ap-

pear on the display.

These systems can store one AM and two

FM stations for each button. (The display

will show “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” when you

push “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” button.)

(Eject button)

Push the compact disc eject button to

eject a compact disc.

(Reverse/Fast−forward button)

Push and hold “ ” (preset button 6) or

“” (preset button 5) to fast−forward or

reverse within a compact disc. When you

release the button, the compact disc play-

er will resume playing.

Push the “AM” button to turn on the radio

and select the AM band. “AM” will appear

on the display.

AUDIO CONT (Tone and sound balance

controls)

Each time you push the “AUDIO CONT”

knob, the mode changes. To adjust the

tone and balance, turn the knob.

BAS: Adjusts low−pitched tones. The dis-

play ranges from −5 to 5.

TRE: Adjusts high−pitched tones. The dis-

play ranges from −5 to 5.

FAD: Adjusts the sound balance between

the front and rear speakers. The display

ranges from F7 to R7.

BAL: Adjusts the sound balance between

the right and left speakers. The display

ranges from L7 to R7.

Switching over the Speed Automatic

Sound Levelizer (ASL) level

ASL: The Automatic Sound Levelizer can

be turned on by turning the knob. In addi-

tion, turning the knob allows you to select

from LOW, MID, and HIGH volume and

tone settings. The ASL system automati-

cally adjusts volume and tone in accor-

dance with the driving speed. This helps

ensure an optimal listening experience

even if noise levels rise while driving.

DISC·AUX (Compact disc)

Push the “DISC·AUX” button to play a

compact disc.

When the audio system is set to compact

disc operation, the display shows the

track number currently being played.

Vehicles with AUX adapter—

To switch between CD, DVD, and AUX

(external device) modes, press the

“DISC·AUX” button. The AUX mode is only

available when AUX adapter is connected

to the system. When the AUX adapter is

in use, “AUX” will appear on the display.

06 06.07

206 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Error messages

If the player malfunctions, your audio sys-

tem will display following error messages.

“WAIT”: The compact disc player unit

may be too hot. Allow the player to cool

down.

“ERROR 1”: The disc may be dirty, dam-

aged or inserted incorrectly (up−side

down). Clean the disc and re−insert it.

“NO DISC”: The compact disc changer of

the separate unit is empty. Insert a disc.

“ERROR 3”: There is a problem inside

the system. Eject the disc or magazine.

Set the disc or magazine again.

“ERROR 4”: Over−current. Ask your

Toyota dealer to inspect.

“CD OPEN”: The compact disc changer

lid of the separate unit is open. Close the

compact disc changer lid.

If “NO MUSIC” appears on the display,

it indicates that a disc with no MP3/WMA

data has been inserted. Remove the disc

from the player and insert an MP3/WMA

data disc.

If the malfunction still exists, take your

vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

 DISC 

With compact disc changer only—

Use these buttons to select a disc you

want to listen to.

Push “” (preset button 3) or “” (preset

button 4) until the number of the disc you

want to listen appears on the display.

FM1 FM2

Push the “FM1” or “FM2” button to turn on

the radio and select the FM band. “FM1”

or “FM2” will appear on the display. This

system allows you to set twelve FM sta-

tions, two for each of the preset button.

FOLDER (Folder up/down)

To skip up or down to a different folder:

Push either side of the “FOLDER” several

times until the number of the folder you

want to listen to appears on the display.

To jump to the first file in the current

folder:

Push and hold the “” side of the button

until you hear a beep.

When playing a disc featuring both audio

data (CD−DA) and MP3/WMA files, audio

data (CD−DA) is played.

PWR·VOL (Power and Volume)

Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio system

on and off. Turn “PWR·VOL” to adjust the

volume.

RAND (Random)

Compact disc player

There are two random features—you can

either listen to the tracks on one compact

disc in random order, or listen to the

tracks on all the compact discs in the

magazine in random order.

To play the tracks on one disc in random

order:

Quickly push and release “RAND” (preset

button 1). “ ” will appear on the

display and the player will perform the

tracks on the disc you are listening to in

random order. To turn off the random fea-

ture, push this button again.

06 06.07

207

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

With compact disc changer only—

To play all the tracks in the magazine in

random order:

Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)

until you hear a beep. “ ” will

appear on the display and the player will

perform all the tracks on all the discs in

the magazine in random order. To turn off

the random feature, push this button

again.

MP3/WMA player

There are two random playback features—

you can either listen to all of the files on

the compact discs in random order. You

can also listen to the files in a single

folder in random order.

To randomly play the files in a folder:

Quickly push and release “RAND” (preset

button 1). “ ” will appear on the

display.

To randomly play all of the files on the

compact disc:

Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)

until you hear a beep. “ ” will

appear on the display and the player will

play all of the files on the disc in random

order. To turn off the random playback

feature, push this button again.

RPT (Repeat)

Compact disc player

There are two repeat features—you can

either replay a disc track or a whole com-

pact disc.

Repeating a track:

Quickly push and release “RPT” (preset

button 2) while the track is playing.

“” will appear on the display. When

the track ends, it will automatically replay.

To turn off the repeat feature, push this

button again.

With compact disc changer only—

Repeating a disc:

Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)

until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-

pear on the display. The player will repeat

all the tracks on the disc you are listening

to. When the disc ends, the player will

automatically go back to the first track on

the disc and replay. To turn off the repeat

feature, push this button again.

MP3/WMA player

There are two repeat features—You can

repeat a signal file or an entire folder.

Repeating a file:

Quickly push and release “RPT” (preset

button 2) while the file is playing.

“” will appear on the display. When

the file ends, it will repeat automatically.

This process will be continued until you

push the button again to turn off the re-

peat feature.

Repeating a folder:

Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)

until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-

pear on the display. The player will repeat

all of the files in the folder. When the last

file in the folder ends, the folder will re-

peat from the beginning. To turn off the

repeat feature, push this button again.

06 06.07

208 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

SCAN

Radio

You can either scan all the frequencies on

a band or scan only the preset stations

for that band.

To scan the preset stations:

Push and hold the “SCAN” button until

you hear a beep. The radio will tune in

the next preset station up the band, stay

there for 5 seconds, and then move to the

next preset station. To stop scanning,

push this button again.

To scan all the frequencies:

Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-

ton. The radio will find the next station up

the station band, stay there for 5 seconds,

and then scan again to the next station.

To stop scanning, push this button again.

Compact disc player

There are two scan features—you can ei-

ther scan the tracks on a specific disc or

scan the first tracks of all the discs in the

magazine.

Scanning the tracks on a disc:

Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-

ton. “SCAN” will appear on the display

and the player will scan all the tracks on

the disc you are listening to. To stop

scanning, push this button again. If the

player scanned all the tracks on the disc,

it will stop scanning.

With compact disc changer only—

Scanning the first tracks of all the discs

in the magazine:

Push the “SCAN” button until you hear a

beep. “ ” will appear on the dis-

play and the player will scan the first

track on the next disc. To stop scanning,

push this button again. If the player has

scanned all the discs, it will stop scan-

ning.

MP3/WMA player

There are two scan features—you can ei-

ther scan the files in a folder on a specif-

ic disc or scan the first file of all the

folder.

Scanning the files on a folder:

Quickly push and release “SCAN”. “SCAN”

will appear on the display and the player

will scan all the files in the folder you are

listening to. To select a file, push the

“SCAN” again. After all the tracks on the

disc have been scanned in one pass, nor-

mal play resumes.

Scanning the first file of all the folders:

Push “SCAN” until you hear a beep.

“” will appear on the display and

the player will scan the first file of the

next folder. To select a folder, push the

“SCAN” again. After all the folders have

been scanned in one pass, normal play

resumes.

06 06.07

209

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

SEEK/TRACK (Seeking/Tracking up/

down)

Radio

In the seek mode, the radio finds and

plays the next station up or down the

station band.

To seek the next station, quickly push and

release “” or “” side of the “SEEK/

TRACK” button. Do this again to find the

station after that.

Compact disc player

Use this button to skip up or down to a

different track.

Push “” or “” side of the “SEEK/

TRACK” button until the number of the

track you want to listen to appears on the

display. If you want to return to the begin-

ning of the current track, quickly push the

down side of the button one time.

MP3/WMA player

To file up or down to a different file:

Push either side of the “TRACK” several

times until the file you want to listen to

appears on the display. If you want to

return to the beginning of the current file,

push the “” side of the button one time,

quickly.

To fast forward or reverse the disc:

If you want to fast forward or reverse the

disc, push and hold it until you hear a

beep. When you release the button, the

player will resume playing.

ST (Stereo reception) display

Your radio automatically changes to stereo

reception when a stereo broadcast is re-

ceived. “ST” appears on the display. If the

signal becomes weak, the radio reduces

the amount of channel separation to prev-

ent the weak signal from creating noise.

If the signal becomes extremely weak, the

radio switches from stereo to mono recep-

tion.

TEXT

Compact disc player

This button is used to change the display

for the compact disc that contains text

data.

To change the display, quickly push and

release the “TEXT” button while the com-

pact disc is playing. The display changes

in the order from the elapsed time to disc

title to track title, then back to the

elapsed time.

If this button is pushed while a compact

disc that does not contain text data is

playing, “NO TITLE” will appear on the

display.

If the entire disc or track title does not

appear on the display, push and hold the

button until you hear a beep. The rest of

the title will appear.

MP3/WMA player

This button is used to change the display

for the MP3/WMA file that contains text

data.

To change the display, quickly push and

release the “TEXT” button while the

MP3/WMA file is playing. The display

changes in the order from the elapsed

time to folder name to file name to album

title to track title to artist name, then back

to the elapsed time.

If this button is pushed while an

MP3/WMA file that does not contain text

data is playing, “NO TITLE” will appear on

the display.

If the entire text data is not displayed,

push and hold it until you hear a beep.

The rest of the text data will appear.

06 06.07

210 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

TUNE·FILE (Tuning and File up/down)

Radio

Turn the knob clockwise to step up the

frequency. Turn the knob counterclockwise

to step down the frequency.

MP3/WMA player

Turn the knob clockwise to file up. Turn

the knob counterclockwise to file down.

06 06.07

211

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Details of specific buttons, controls and

features are described in the alphabetical

list that follows.

06 06.07

Type 2

CY17077y

212 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)

These buttons are used to preset and

tune in radio stations.

To preset a station to a button: Tune in

the desired station. (See “TUNE·FILE” or

“SEEK/TRACK”.) Push and hold down the

button until you hear a beep—this will set

the station to the button. The preset but-

ton number will appear on the display.

To recall a preset station: Push the button

for the station you want. The preset but-

ton number and station frequency will ap-

pear on the display.

These systems can store one AM and two

FM stations for each button. (The display

will show “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” when you

push “AM·SAT”, “FM1” or “FM2” button.)

XM satellite radio∗—

These buttons are used to preset and

tune in radio channels.

To preset a channel to a button: Tune in

the desired channel. (See “TUNE·FILE” or

“SEEK/TRACK”.) Push and hold down the

button until you hear a beep—this will set

the channel to the button. The preset but-

ton number will appear on the display.

To recall a preset channel: Push the but-

ton for the channel you want. The preset

button number and channel number will

appear on the display.

This radio can store three XM channels

for each button. (The display will show

“SAT1”, “SAT2” or “SAT3” when you push

“AM·SAT” button.)

∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM

tuner and service. Contact your Toyota

dealer for details.

(Eject button)

This button is used to eject one or all

compact discs.

To eject the current compact disc, push

and release the compact disc eject button.

To eject a specific disc, push “” (preset

button 3) or “” (preset button 4) until the

number of the disc you want to eject is

displayed. Push and release the eject but-

ton.

To eject all discs at a time, press and

hold the eject button until you hear a

beep. The last compact disc played before

pushing the button will be ejected first. If

the ejected disc is not removed for a long

time, the eject function will be cancelled.

(Reverse/Fast−forward button)

Push and hold “ ” (preset button 6) or

“” (preset button 5) to fast−forward or

reverse within a compact disc. When you

release the button, the compact disc play-

er will resume playing.

AM·SAT (AM band and XM satellite ra-

dio∗)

Push the “AM·SAT” button to turn on the

radio and select the AM or XM band.

“AM”, “SAT1”, “SAT2” or “SAT3” will ap-

pear on the display.

Error messages

If the satellite radio tuner malfunctions,

your audio system will display following

error messages.

“ANTENNA”:

The XM antenna is not connected.

Check whether the XM antenna cable

is attached securely.

A short−circuit occurs in the antenna or

the surrounding antenna cable. See a

Toyota certified dealer.

06 06.07

213

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

“UPDATING”:

You have not subscribed to the XM

satellite radio. The radio is being up-

dated with the latest encryption code.

Contact the XM satellite radio for sub-

scription information. When a contact is

canceled, you can choose the “CH000”

and all free−to−air channels.

The premium channel you selected is

not authorized. Wait for about 2 sec-

onds until the radio returns to the pre-

vious channel or “CH001”. If it does

not change automatically, select anoth-

er channel. If you want to listen to the

premium channel, contact the XM sat-

ellite radio.

“NO SIGNAL”: The XM signal is too

weak at the current location. Wait until

your vehicle reaches a location with a

stronger signal.

“LOADING”: The unit is acquiring audio

or program information. Wait until the unit

has received the information.

“OFF AIR”: The channel you selected is

not broadcasting any programming. Select

another channel.

“−−−”: The channel you selected is no

longer available. Wait for about 2 seconds

until the radio returns to the previous

channel or “CH001”. If it does not change

automatically, select another channel.

The XM Listener Care Center is also

available on the phone, please call (800)

967−2346 during the following hours:

Monday—Saturday: 7 a.m.—1 a.m.

Sunday: 12 p.m.—12 a.m.

∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM

tuner and service. Contact your Toyota

dealer for details.

AUDIO CONT (Tone and sound balance

controls)

Each time you push the “AUDIO CONT”

knob, the mode changes. To adjust the

tone and balance, turn the knob.

BAS: Adjusts low−pitched tones. The dis-

play ranges from −5 to 5.

TRE: Adjusts high−pitched tones. The dis-

play ranges from −5 to 5.

FAD: Adjusts the sound balance between

the front and rear speakers. The display

ranges from F7 to R7.

BAL: Adjusts the sound balance between

the right and left speakers. The display

ranges from L7 to R7.

Switching over the Speed Automatic

Sound Levelizer (ASL) level

ASL: The Automatic Sound Levelizer can

be turned on by turning the knob. In addi-

tion, turning the knob allows you to select

from LOW, MID, and HIGH volume and

tone settings. The ASL system automati-

cally adjusts volume and tone in accor-

dance with the driving speed. This helps

ensure an optimal listening experience

even if noise levels rise while driving.

DISC·AUX (Compact disc)

Push the “DISC·AUX” button to play a

compact disc.

When the audio system is set to compact

disc operation, the display shows the

track, or track and disc number currently

being played.

Vehicles with AUX adapter—

To switch between CD, DVD, and AUX

(external device) modes, press the

“DISC·AUX” button. The AUX mode is only

available when AUX adapter is connected

to the system. When the AUX adapter is

in use, “AUX” will appear on the display.

06 06.07

214 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Error messages

If the player malfunctions, your audio sys-

tem will display following error messages.

“WAIT”: The compact disc player unit

may be too hot. Allow the player to cool

down.

“ERROR 1”: The disc may be dirty, dam-

aged or inserted incorrectly (up−side

down). Clean the disc and re−insert it.

“NO DISC”: The compact disc changer of

the separate unit is empty. Insert a disc.

“ERROR 3”: There is a problem inside

the system. Eject the disc or magazine.

Set the disc or magazine again.

“ERROR 4”: Over−current. Ask your

Toyota dealer to inspect.

“CD OPEN”: The compact disc changer

lid of the separate unit is open. Close the

compact disc changer lid.

If “NO MUSIC” appears on the display,

it indicates that a disc with no MP3/WMA

data has been inserted. Remove the disc

from the player and insert an MP3/WMA

data disc.

If the malfunction still exists, take your

vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

 DISC 

Use these buttons to select a disc you

want to listen to.

Push “” (preset button 3) or “” (preset

button 4) until the number of the disc you

want to listen appears on the display.

FM1 FM2

Push the “FM1” or “FM2” button to turn on

the radio and select the FM band. “FM1”

or “FM2” will appear on the display. This

system allows you to set twelve FM sta-

tions, two for each of the preset button.

FOLDER (Folder up/down)

To skip up or down to a different folder:

Push either side of the “FOLDER” several

times until the number of the folder you

want to listen to appears on the display.

To jump to the first file in the current

folder:

Push and hold the “” side of the button

until you hear a beep.

When playing a disc featuring both audio

data (CD−DA) and MP3/WMA files, audio

data (CD−DA) is played.

LOAD

This button is used to load the compact

discs in the compact disc player. This

player can store up to six discs.

To load one compact disc only, quickly

push and release the button, then insert

a compact disc. After the disc is loaded,

the shutter of the slot will close.

If no compact disc is inserted, the shutter

will close after 15 seconds.

To load multiple compact discs, push and

hold the button (until you hear a beep

when the audio system is on), then insert

the first compact disc. After the disc is

loaded, the shutter of the slot will close.

After a few seconds, the shutter will auto-

matically open again so the next disc can

be inserted. The same process can be

applied for loading the rest of the discs.

If the player is full of discs, “DISC FULL”

will appear on the display.

If no compact disc is inserted, the shutter

will close after 15 seconds.

06 06.07

215

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

PWR·VOL (Power and Volume)

Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio system

on and off. Turn “PWR·VOL” to adjust the

volume.

RAND (Random)

Compact disc player

There are two random features—you can

either listen to the tracks on one compact

disc in random order, or listen to the

tracks on all the compact discs in the

magazine in random order.

To play the tracks on one disc in random

order:

Quickly push and release “RAND” (preset

button 1). “ ” will appear on the

display and the player will perform the

tracks on the disc you are listening to in

random order. To turn off the random fea-

ture, push this button again.

To play all the tracks in the magazine in

random order:

Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)

until you hear a beep. “ ” will

appear on the display and the player will

perform all the tracks on all the discs in

the magazine in random order. To turn off

the random feature, push this button

again.

MP3/WMA player

There are two random playback features—

you can either listen to all of the files on

the compact discs in random order. You

can also listen to the files in a single

folder in random order.

To randomly play the files in a folder:

Quickly push and release “RAND” (preset

button 1). “ ” will appear on the

display.

To randomly play all of the files on the

compact disc:

Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)

until you hear a beep. “ ” will

appear on the display and the player will

play all of the files on the disc in random

order. To turn off the random playback

feature, push this button again.

RPT (Repeat)

Compact disc player

There are two repeat features—you can

either replay a disc track or a whole com-

pact disc.

Repeating a track:

Quickly push and release “RPT” (preset

button 2) while the track is playing.

“” will appear on the display. When

the track ends, it will automatically replay.

To turn off the repeat feature, push this

button again.

Repeating a disc:

Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)

until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-

pear on the display. The player will repeat

all the tracks on the disc you are listening

to. When the disc ends, the player will

automatically go back to the first track on

the disc and replay. To turn off the repeat

feature, push this button again.

06 06.07

216 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

MP3/WMA player

There are two repeat features—You can

repeat a signal file or an entire folder.

Repeating a file:

Quickly push and release “RPT” (preset

button 2) while the file is playing.

“” will appear on the display. When

the file ends, it will repeat automatically.

This process will be continued until you

push the button again to turn off the re-

peat feature.

Repeating a folder:

Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)

until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-

pear on the display. The player will repeat

all of the files in the folder. When the last

file in the folder ends, the folder will re-

peat from the beginning. To turn off the

repeat feature, push this button again.

SCAN

Radio

You can either scan all the frequencies on

a band or scan only the preset stations

for that band.

To scan the preset stations:

Push and hold the “SCAN” button until

you hear a beep. The radio will tune in

the next preset station up the band, stay

there for 5 seconds, and then move to the

next preset station. To stop scanning,

push this button again.

To scan all the frequencies:

Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-

ton. The radio will find the next station up

the station band, stay there for 5 seconds,

and then scan again to the next station.

To stop scanning, push this button again.

XM satellite radio∗—

You can either scan the currently selected

channel category or scan only the preset

channels for that band.

To scan the preset channels:

Push and hold the “SCAN” button until

you hear a beep. “SCAN” appears on the

display. The radio will tune in the next

preset channel up the band, stay there for

5 seconds, and then move to the next

preset channel. To stop scanning, push

this button again.

To scan the currently selected channel

category:

Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-

ton. “SCAN” appears on the display. The

radio will find the next channel in the

same channel category up the band, stay

there for 5 seconds, and then scan again.

To stop scanning, push this button again.

∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM

tuner and service. Contact your Toyota

dealer for details.

06 06.07

217

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Compact disc player

There are two scan features—you can ei-

ther scan the tracks on a specific disc or

scan the first tracks of all the discs in the

magazine.

Scanning the tracks on a disc:

Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-

ton. “SCAN” will appear on the display

and the player will scan all the tracks on

the disc you are listening to. To stop

scanning, push this button again. If the

player scanned all the tracks on the disc,

it will stop scanning.

Scanning the first tracks of all the discs

in the magazine:

Push the “SCAN” button until you hear a

beep. “ ” will appear on the dis-

play and the player will scan the first

track on the next disc. To stop scanning,

push this button again. If the player has

scanned all the discs, it will stop scan-

ning.

MP3/WMA player

There are two scan features—you can ei-

ther scan the files in a folder on a specif-

ic disc or scan the first file of all the

folder.

Scanning the files on a folder:

Quickly push and release “SCAN”. “SCAN”

will appear on the display and the player

will scan all the files in the folder you are

listening to. To select a file, push the

“SCAN” again. After all the tracks on the

disc have been scanned in one pass, nor-

mal play resumes.

Scanning the first file of all the folders:

Push “SCAN” until you hear a beep.

“” will appear on the display and

the player will scan the first file of the

next folder. To select a folder, push the

“SCAN” again. After all the folders have

been scanned in one pass, normal play

resumes.

SEEK/TRACK (Seeking/Tracking up/

down)

Radio

In the seek mode, the radio finds and

plays the next station up or down the

station band.

To seek the next station, quickly push and

release “” or “” side of the “SEEK/

TRACK” button. Do this again to find the

station after that.

XM satellite radio∗—

To select the next channel within the cur-

rent channel category, push the “” or

“” side of the “SEEK/TRACK” button.

Repeat until a desired channel is found.

∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM

tuner and service. Contact your Toyota

dealer for details.

06 06.07

218 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Compact disc player

Use this button to skip up or down to a

different track.

Push “” or “” side of the “SEEK/

TRACK” button until the number of the

track you want to listen to appears on the

display. If you want to return to the begin-

ning of the current track, quickly push the

down side of the button one time.

MP3/WMA player

To file up or down to a different file:

Push either side of the “TRACK” several

times until the file you want to listen to

appears on the display. If you want to

return to the beginning of the current file,

push the “” side of the button one time,

quickly.

To fast forward or reverse the disc:

If you want to fast forward or reverse the

disc, push and hold it until you hear a

beep. When you release the button, the

player will resume playing.

ST (Stereo reception) display

Your radio automatically changes to stereo

reception when a stereo broadcast is re-

ceived. “ST” appears on the display. If the

signal becomes weak, the radio reduces

the amount of channel separation to prev-

ent the weak signal from creating noise.

If the signal becomes extremely weak, the

radio switches from stereo to mono recep-

tion.

TEXT

XM satellite radio∗1—

When you push the “TEXT” button, the

display changes as follows:

CH NAME → TITLE (SONG/PROGRAM

TITLE) → NAME (ARTIST NAME/FEA-

TURE) → CH NUMBER → CH NAME

Up to 10 alphanumeric characters can be

displayed. (Some information will not be

fully displayed.)

The message display will be canceled if

any button that affects the display is

pushed.

If there is no song/program title or artist

name/feature associated with the channel

at that time, “−−−−−” will appear on the

display.

This XM tuner supports “Audio Services”

(Music and Talk) of only XM satellite ra-

dio and “Text Information”∗2 linked to the

respective audio services.

∗1: Use of satellite radio requires XM

tuner and service. Contact your Toyota

dealer for details.

∗2: Text Information includes, Channel

Name, (Artist) Name, (Song) Title and

Category Name.

Compact disc player

This button is used to change the display

for the compact disc that contains text

data.

To change the display, quickly push and

release the “TEXT” button while the com-

pact disc is playing. The display changes

in the order from the elapsed time to disc

title to track title, then back to the

elapsed time.

If this button is pushed while a compact

disc that does not contain text data is

playing, “NO TITLE” will appear on the

display.

If the entire disc or track title does not

appear on the display, push and hold the

button until you hear a beep. The rest of

the title will appear.

06 06.07

219

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

MP3/WMA player

This button is used to change the display

for the MP3/WMA file that contains text

data.

To change the display, quickly push and

release the “TEXT” button while the

MP3/WMA file is playing. The display

changes in the order from the elapsed

time to folder name to file name to album

title to track title to artist name, then back

to the elapsed time.

If this button is pushed while an

MP3/WMA file that does not contain text

data is playing, “NO TITLE” will appear on

the display.

If the entire text data is not displayed,

push and hold it until you hear a beep.

The rest of the text data will appear.

TUNE·FILE (Tuning and File up/down)

Radio

Turn the knob clockwise to step up the

frequency. Turn the knob counterclockwise

to step down the frequency.

XM satellite radio∗—

Turn the “TUNE·FILE” knob clockwise to

step up the channel. Turn the knob coun-

terclockwise to step down the channel.

∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM

tuner and service. Contact your Toyota

dealer for details.

MP3/WMA player

Turn the knob clockwise to file up. Turn

the knob counterclockwise to file down.

TYPE

XM satellite radio∗—

When you push the “” or “” side of

the “TYPE” button while receiving a XM

channel, the current channel category ap-

pears on the display.

When the channel category appears, push

either “” or “” side of the “TYPE” but-

ton to switch to the next or previous cate-

gory.

∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM

tuner and service. Contact your Toyota

dealer for details.

06 06.07

220 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Details of specific buttons, controls and

features are described in the alphabetical

list that follows.

06 06.07

Type 3

CY17066y

221

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)

These buttons are used to preset and

tune in radio stations.

To preset a station to a button: Tune in

the desired station. (See “TUNE·FILE” or

“SEEK/TRACK”.) Push and hold down the

button until you hear a beep—this will set

the station to the button. The preset but-

ton number will appear on the display.

To recall a preset station: Push the button

for the station you want. The preset but-

ton number and station frequency will ap-

pear on the display.

These systems can store one AM and two

FM stations for each button. (The display

will show “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” when you

push “AM·SAT” or “FM” button.)

XM satellite radio∗—

These buttons are used to preset and

tune in radio channels.

To preset a channel to a button: Tune in

the desired channel. (See “TUNE·FILE” or

“SEEK/TRACK”.) Push and hold down the

button until you hear a beep—this will set

the channel to the button. The preset but-

ton number will appear on the display.

To recall a preset channel: Push the but-

ton for the channel you want. The preset

button number and channel number will

appear on the display.

This radio can store three XM channels

for each button. (The display will show

“SAT1”, “SAT2” or “SAT3” when you push

“AM·SAT” button.)

∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM

tuner and service. Contact your Toyota

dealer for details.

(Eject button)

This button is used to eject one or all

compact discs.

To eject the current compact disc, push

and release the compact disc eject button.

To eject a specific disc, push “” (preset

button 3) or “” (preset button 4) until the

number of the disc you want to eject is

displayed. Push and release the eject but-

ton.

To eject all discs at a time, press and

hold the eject button until you hear a

beep. The last compact disc played before

pushing the button will be ejected first. If

the ejected disc is not removed for a long

time, the eject function will be cancelled.

(Reverse/Fast−forward button)

Push and hold “ ” (preset button 6) or

“” (preset button 5) to fast−forward or

reverse within a compact disc. When you

release the button, the compact disc play-

er will resume playing.

AM·SAT (AM band and XM satellite ra-

dio∗)

Push the “AM·SAT” button to turn on the

radio and select the AM or XM band.

“AM”, “SAT1”, “SAT2” or “SAT3” will ap-

pear on the display.

Error messages

If the satellite radio tuner malfunctions,

your audio system will display following

error messages.

“ANTENNA”:

The XM antenna is not connected.

Check whether the XM antenna cable

is attached securely.

A short−circuit occurs in the antenna or

the surrounding antenna cable. See a

Toyota certified dealer.

06 06.07

222 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

“UPDATING”:

You have not subscribed to the XM

satellite radio. The radio is being up-

dated with the latest encryption code.

Contact the XM satellite radio for sub-

scription information. When a contact is

canceled, you can choose the “CH000”

and all free−to−air channels.

The premium channel you selected is

not authorized. Wait for about 2 sec-

onds until the radio returns to the pre-

vious channel or “CH001”. If it does

not change automatically, select anoth-

er channel. If you want to listen to the

premium channel, contact the XM sat-

ellite radio.

“NO SIGNAL”: The XM signal is too

weak at the current location. Wait until

your vehicle reaches a location with a

stronger signal.

“LOADING”: The unit is acquiring audio

or program information. Wait until the unit

has received the information.

“OFF AIR”: The channel you selected is

not broadcasting any programming. Select

another channel.

“−−−”: The channel you selected is no

longer available. Wait for about 2 seconds

until the radio returns to the previous

channel or “CH001”. If it does not change

automatically, select another channel.

The XM Listener Care Center is also

available on the phone, please call (800)

967−2346 during the following hours:

Monday—Saturday: 7 a.m.—1 a.m.

Sunday: 12 p.m.—12 a.m.

∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM

tuner and service. Contact your Toyota

dealer for details.

AUDIO CONTROL (Tone and sound bal-

ance controls)

Each time you push the “AUDIO

CONTROL” knob, the mode changes. To

adjust the tone and balance or turn the

rear seat entertainment system on/off, turn

the knob.

BAS: Adjusts low−pitched tones. The dis-

play ranges from −5 to 5.

MID: Adjusts mid−pitched tones. The dis-

play ranges from −5 to 5.

TRE: Adjusts high−pitched tones. The dis-

play ranges from −5 to 5.

FAD: Adjusts the sound balance between

the front and rear speakers. The display

ranges from F7 to R7.

BAL: Adjusts the sound balance between

the right and left speakers. The display

ranges from L7 to R7.

Switching over the Automatic Sound Le-

velizer (ASL) ON/OFF

ASL: The Automatic Sound Levelizer can

be turned on by turning the knob. The

ASL system automatically adjusts volume

and tone in accordance with ambient noise

levels. This helps ensure an optimal lis-

tening experience even when road, wind

or other ambient noise levels rise.

RSE: Vehicles with a rear seat

entertainment system—See “Rear seat

entertainment system” on page 231 in this

Section.

DISC·AUX (Compact disc)

Push the “DISC·AUX” button to play a

compact disc.

When the audio system is set to compact

disc operation, the display shows the

track, or track and disc number currently

being played.

06 06.07

223

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Vehicles with rear seat entertainment sys-

tem—

The “DISC·AUX” button may also be used

to operate the DVD player when a disc is

in the DVD player. Pressing the

“DISC·AUX” button allows you to switch

between the CD player and the DVD play-

er. When the DVD player is in operation,

“RSE DVD” appears on the display.

Vehicles with AUX adapter—

To switch between CD, DVD, and AUX

(external device) modes, press the

“DISC·AUX” button. The AUX mode is only

available when AUX adapter is connected

to the system. When the AUX adapter is

in use, “AUX” will appear on the display.

Error messages

If the player malfunctions, your audio sys-

tem will display following error messages.

“WAIT”: The compact disc player unit

may be too hot. Allow the player to cool

down.

“ERROR 1”: The disc may be dirty, dam-

aged or inserted incorrectly (up−side

down). Clean the disc and re−insert it.

“NO DISC”: The compact disc changer of

the separate unit is empty. Insert a disc.

“ERROR 3”: There is a problem inside

the system. Eject the disc or magazine.

Set the disc or magazine again.

“ERROR 4”: Over−current. Ask your

Toyota dealer to inspect.

“CD OPEN”: The compact disc changer

lid of the separate unit is open. Close the

compact disc changer lid.

If “NO MUSIC” appears on the display,

it indicates that a disc with no MP3/WMA

data has been inserted. Remove the disc

from the player and insert an MP3/WMA

data disc.

If the malfunction still exists, take your

vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

 DISC 

Use these buttons to select a disc you

want to listen to.

Push “” (preset button 3) or “” (preset

button 4) until the number of the disc you

want to listen appears on the display.

Push the “FM” button to turn on the radio

and select the FM band. “FM1” or “FM2”

will appear on the display. This system

allows you to set twelve FM stations, two

for each of the preset buttons.

FOLDER (Folder up/down)

To skip up or down to a different folder:

Push either side of the “FOLDER” several

times until the number of the folder you

want to listen to appears on the display.

To jump to the first file in the current

folder:

Push and hold the “” side of the button

until you hear a beep.

When playing a disc featuring both audio

data (CD−DA) and MP3/WMA files, audio

data (CD−DA) is played.

LOAD

This button is used to load the compact

discs in the compact disc player. This

player can store up to six discs.

To load one compact disc only, quickly

push and release the button, then insert

a compact disc. After the disc is loaded,

the shutter of the slot will close.

If no compact disc is inserted, the shutter

will close after 15 seconds.

06 06.07

224 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

To load multiple compact discs, push and

hold the button (until you hear a beep

when the audio system is on), then insert

the first compact disc. After the disc is

loaded, the shutter of the slot will close.

After a few seconds, the shutter will auto-

matically open again so the next disc can

be inserted. The same process can be

applied for loading the rest of the discs.

If the player is full of discs, “DISC FULL”

will appear on the display.

If no compact disc is inserted, the shutter

will close after 15 seconds.

PWR·VOL (Power and Volume)

Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio system

on and off. Turn “PWR·VOL” to adjust the

volume.

RAND (Random)

Compact disc player

There are two random features—you can

either listen to the tracks on one compact

disc in random order, or listen to the

tracks on all the compact discs in the

magazine in random order.

To play the tracks on one disc in random

order:

Quickly push and release “RAND” (preset

button 1). “ ” will appear on the

display and the player will perform the

tracks on the disc you are listening to in

random order. To turn off the random fea-

ture, push this button again.

To play all the tracks in the magazine in

random order:

Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)

until you hear a beep. “ ” will

appear on the display and the player will

perform all the tracks on all the discs in

the magazine in random order. To turn off

the random feature, push this button

again.

MP3/WMA player

There are two random playback features—

you can either listen to all of the files on

the compact discs in random order. You

can also listen to the files in a single

folder in random order.

To randomly play the files in a folder:

Quickly push and release “RAND” (preset

button 1). “ ” will appear on the

display.

To randomly play all of the files on the

compact disc:

Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)

until you hear a beep. “ ” will

appear on the display and the player will

play all of the files on the disc in random

order. To turn off the random playback

feature, push this button again.

06 06.07

225

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

RPT (Repeat)

Compact disc player

There are two repeat features—you can

either replay a disc track or a whole com-

pact disc.

Repeating a track:

Quickly push and release “RPT” (preset

button 2) while the track is playing.

“” will appear on the display. When

the track ends, it will automatically replay.

To turn off the repeat feature, push this

button again.

Repeating a disc:

Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)

until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-

pear on the display. The player will repeat

all the tracks on the disc you are listening

to. When the disc ends, the player will

automatically go back to the first track on

the disc and replay. To turn off the repeat

feature, push this button again.

MP3/WMA player

There are two repeat features—You can

repeat a signal file or an entire folder.

Repeating a file:

Quickly push and release “RPT” (preset

button 2) while the file is playing.

“” will appear on the display. When

the file ends, it will repeat automatically.

This process will be continued until you

push the button again to turn off the re-

peat feature.

Repeating a folder:

Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)

until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-

pear on the display. The player will repeat

all of the files in the folder. When the last

file in the folder ends, the folder will re-

peat from the beginning. To turn off the

repeat feature, push this button again.

SCAN

Radio

You can either scan all the frequencies on

a band or scan only the preset stations

for that band.

To scan the preset stations:

Push and hold the “SCAN” button until

you hear a beep. The radio will tune in

the next preset station up the band, stay

there for 5 seconds, and then move to the

next preset station. To stop scanning,

push this button again.

To scan all the frequencies:

Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-

ton. The radio will find the next station up

the station band, stay there for 5 seconds,

and then scan again to the next station.

To stop scanning, push this button again.

06 06.07

226 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

XM satellite radio∗—

You can either scan the currently selected

channel category or scan only the preset

channels for that band.

To scan the preset channels:

Push and hold the “SCAN” button until

you hear a beep. “SCAN” appears on the

display. The radio will tune in the next

preset channel up the band, stay there for

5 seconds, and then move to the next

preset channel. To stop scanning, push

this button again.

To scan the currently selected channel

category:

Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-

ton. “SCAN” appears on the display. The

radio will find the next channel in the

same channel category up the band, stay

there for 5 seconds, and then scan again.

To stop scanning, push this button again.

∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM

tuner and service. Contact your Toyota

dealer for details.

Compact disc player

There are two scan features—you can ei-

ther scan the tracks on a specific disc or

scan the first tracks of all the discs in the

magazine.

Scanning the tracks on a disc:

Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-

ton. “SCAN” will appear on the display

and the player will scan all the tracks on

the disc you are listening to. To stop

scanning, push this button again. If the

player scanned all the tracks on the disc,

it will stop scanning.

Scanning the first tracks of all the discs

in the magazine:

Push the “SCAN” button until you hear a

beep. “ ” will appear on the dis-

play and the player will scan the first

track on the next disc. To stop scanning,

push this button again. If the player has

scanned all the discs, it will stop scan-

ning.

MP3/WMA player

There are two scan features—you can ei-

ther scan the files in a folder on a specif-

ic disc or scan the first file of all the

folder.

Scanning the files on a folder:

Quickly push and release “SCAN”. “SCAN”

will appear on the display and the player

will scan all the files in the folder you are

listening to. To select a file, push the

“SCAN” again. After all the tracks on the

disc have been scanned in one pass, nor-

mal play resumes.

Scanning the first file of all the folders:

Push “SCAN” until you hear a beep.

“” will appear on the display and

the player will scan the first file of the

next folder. To select a folder, push the

“SCAN” again. After all the folders have

been scanned in one pass, normal play

resumes.

06 06.07

227

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

SEEK/TRACK (Seeking/Tracking up/

down)

Radio

In the seek mode, the radio finds and

plays the next station up or down the

station band.

To seek the next station, quickly push and

release “” or “” side of the “SEEK/

TRACK” button. Do this again to find the

station after that.

XM satellite radio∗—

To select the next channel within the cur-

rent channel category, push the “” or

“” side of the “SEEK/TRACK” button.

Repeat until a desired channel is found.

∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM

tuner and service. Contact your Toyota

dealer for details.

Compact disc player

Use this button to skip up or down to a

different track.

Push “” or “” side of the “SEEK/

TRACK” button until the number of the

track you want to listen to appears on the

display. If you want to return to the begin-

ning of the current track, quickly push the

down side of the button one time.

MP3/WMA player

To file up or down to a different file:

Push either side of the “TRACK” several

times until the file you want to listen to

appears on the display. If you want to

return to the beginning of the current file,

push the “” side of the button one time,

quickly.

To fast forward or reverse the disc:

If you want to fast forward or reverse the

disc, push and hold it until you hear a

beep. When you release the button, the

player will resume playing.

Vehicles with rear seat entertainment sys-

tem—

While the DVD player is in operation, the

chapter or track can be changed by push-

ing the “” or “” side of the

“SEEK·TRACK” button.

ST (Stereo reception) display

Your radio automatically changes to stereo

reception when a stereo broadcast is re-

ceived. “ST” appears on the display. If the

signal becomes weak, the radio reduces

the amount of channel separation to prev-

ent the weak signal from creating noise.

If the signal becomes extremely weak, the

radio switches from stereo to mono recep-

tion.

TEXT

Radio

XM satellite radio∗1—

When you push the “TEXT” button, the

display changes as follows:

CH NAME → TITLE (SONG/PROGRAM

TITLE) → NAME (ARTIST NAME/FEA-

TURE) → CH NUMBER → CH NAME

Up to 10 alphanumeric characters can be

displayed. (Some information will not be

fully displayed.)

The message display will be canceled if

any button that affects the display is

pushed.

If there is no song/program title or artist

name/feature associated with the channel

at that time, “−−−−−” will appear on the

display.

This XM tuner supports “Audio Services”

(Music and Talk) of only XM satellite ra-

dio and “Text Information”∗2 linked to the

respective audio services.

∗1: Use of satellite radio requires XM

tuner and service. Contact your Toyota

dealer for details.

∗2: Text Information includes, Channel

Name, (Artist) Name, (Song) Title and

Category Name.

06 06.07

228 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Compact disc player

This button is used to change the display

for the compact disc that contains text

data.

To change the display, quickly push and

release the “TEXT” button while the com-

pact disc is playing. The display changes

in the order from the elapsed time to disc

title to track title, then back to the

elapsed time.

If this button is pushed while a compact

disc that does not contain text data is

playing, “NO TITLE” will appear on the

display.

If the entire disc or track title does not

appear on the display, push and hold the

button until you hear a beep. The rest of

the title will appear.

MP3/WMA player

This button is used to change the display

for the MP3/WMA file that contains text

data.

To change the display, quickly push and

release the “TEXT” button while the

MP3/WMA file is playing. The display

changes in the order from the elapsed

time to folder name to file name to album

title to track title to artist name, then back

to the elapsed time.

If this button is pushed while an

MP3/WMA file that does not contain text

data is playing, “NO TITLE” will appear on

the display.

If the entire text data is not displayed,

push and hold it until you hear a beep.

The rest of the text data will appear.

TUNE·FILE (Tuning and File up/down)

Radio

Turn the knob clockwise to step up the

frequency. Turn the knob counterclockwise

to step down the frequency.

XM satellite radio∗—

Turn the “TUNE·FILE” knob clockwise to

step up the channel. Turn the knob coun-

terclockwise to step down the channel.

∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM

tuner and service. Contact your Toyota

dealer for details.

MP3/WMA player

Turn the knob clockwise to file up. Turn

the knob counterclockwise to file down.

TYPE

XM satellite radio∗—

When you push the “” or “” side of

the “TYPE” button while receiving a XM

channel, the current channel category ap-

pears on the display.

When the channel category appears, push

either “” or “” side of the “TYPE” but-

ton to switch to the next or previous cate-

gory.

∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM

tuner and service. Contact your Toyota

dealer for details.

06 06.07

229

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY17029

Some parts of the audio system can be

adjusted using the switches on the steer-

ing wheel.

Details of the specific switches, controls,

and features are described below.

1. Volume control switches

2. “” switch

3. “MODE” switch

1. Volume control switches

Push the “+” side to increase the volume.

The volume continues to increase while

the switch is being pushed.

Push the “−” side to decrease the volume.

The volume continues to decrease while

the switch is being pushed.

2. “ ” switch

Radio

This switch has the following features—

To select a preset station:

Quickly push and release the “” or “”

side of the switch. Do this again to select

the next preset station.

To seek a station:

Push and hold the “” or “” side of the

switch until you hear a beep. Do this

again to find the next station. If you push

the switch on either side during the seek

mode, seeking will be cancelled.

To step up or down the frequency, push

and hold the switch even after you hear

a beep. When you release the switch, the

radio will begin seeking up or down for a

station. Do this again to find the next

station.

XM satellite radio∗—

To select a preset channel, push the “”

or “” side of the switch. Repeat until a

desired channel is found.

∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM

tuner and service. Contact your Toyota

dealer for details.

Compact disc player

Use this switch to skip up or down to a

different track in either direction.

Quickly push and release the “” or “”

side of the switch until the track you want

to listen to is set. If you want to return

to the beginning of the current track, push

the “” side of the switch once, quickly.

Vehicles with rear seat entertainment sys-

tem—

While the DVD player is in operation, the

chapter or track can be changed by push-

ing the “” or “” side of the switch.

With compact disc changer only—

Push and hold the “” or “” side of the

switch until the disc you want to listen to

is set.

06 06.07

Audio remote controls

(steering switches)

230 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

MP3/WMA player

Use this switch to select a desired file or

disc.

To select a desired file:

Quickly push and release the “” or “”

side of the switch until the file you want

to listen to is set. If you want to return

to the beginning of the current file, push

the “” side of the switch once, quickly.

To select a desired disc:

Push and hold the “” or “” side of the

switch until the disc you want to listen to

is set.

Vehicles with rear seat entertainment sys-

tem—

While the DVD player is in operation, the

chapter or track can be changed by push-

ing the “” or “” side of the switch.

3. “MODE” switch

Push the “MODE” switch to select an au-

dio mode. Each push changes the mode

sequentially if the desired mode is ready

to use.

To turn the audio system on, push the

“MODE” switch.

To turn the audio system off, push and

hold the “MODE” switch until the system

turns off.

CY17076

An AUX adapter is installed in the rear

console box.

By inserting a mini plug into the AUX

adapter, you can listen to music from a

portable audio device through the vehicle’s

speaker system.

To use the AUX adapter, switch to the

AUX mode (external device mode) by

pressing the “DISC·AUX” button. When the

AUX adapter is in use, “AUX” will appear

on the display. To adjust the volume, turn

the “PWR·VOL” knob.

When using a portable audio device con-

nected to the power outlet or cigarette

lighter, noise may occur during playback.

If this happens, use the power source of

the portable audio device.

If you install an audio system other than

a genuine audio system, you will not be

able to use the AUX adapter.

06 06.07

AUX adapter

231

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

The rear seat entertainment system con-

sists of the following components.

1. Front audio system

2. DVD player

3. Rear seat entertainment system display

4. Rear seat entertainment system

controller

5. A/V input adapter

6. Power outlet (115 VAC)

7. Power outlet main switch

06 06.07

Rear seat entertainment system—

CY17070y

232 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

The rear seat entertainment system is de-

signed for the rear passengers to enjoy

audio and DVD video separately from the

front audio system.

The rear seat entertainment system can

be operated when the ignition key is in

the “ACC” or “ON” position.

The rear passengers can enjoy DVD vid-

eo, audio CD, video CD, CD text, dts−CD

and MP3.

The rear seat entertainment system can

play DVD video, audio CD, video CD, CD

text, dts−CD or MP3 only when a disc is

loaded in the DVD player.

You can enjoy videos and sound when

your personal audio system is connected

to the A/V input adapter. For details, refer

to the manufacturer’s instructions.

You can enjoy the rear seat entertainment

system with a wireless headphone. The

wireless headphone can be used within

rear seat. If the signal becomes weak, the

headphone will mute. For details, refer to

the manufacturer’s instructions.

With some wireless headphone generally

available in the market, it may be difficult

to catch sound properly. Toyota recom-

mends the use of Toyota genuine wireless

headphone.

You can purchase a wireless headphone

at a Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

Do not operate a motor vehicle

while using headphones. Doing so

may cause an accident, resulting in

death or serious injury.

With DVD player:

Conversational speech on some

DVDs is recorded at a low volume

to emphasize the impact of sound

effects. If you adjust the volume

assuming that the conversations

represent the maximum volume lev-

el that the DVD will play, you may

be startled by louder sound effects

or when you change to a different

audio source. Be sure to adjust the

volume with this in mind.

Make sure the volume is not in-

creased, before you turn on the

headphone.

CY17058

To open the display, push the lock release

button.

06 06.07

—Display

233

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY17059

Pull the display down to an easily view-

able angle (between 90 and 125)

NOTICE

The screen should be cleaned with a

dry soft cloth. If the screen is pushed

by hand or wiped with a hard cloth,

the surface of the screen may be

scratched.

CY17060

To close, push the display up until you

hear a click.

The illumination of the screen is automati-

cally turned off when the display is

closed. However, the rear seat entertain-

ment system is not turned off.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or sudden stop

while driving, close the display when

it is not in use.

NOTICE



Benzene or alkaline solutions may

damage the coated surface of the

screen



To prevent the battery from being

discharged, do not turn on the rear

seat entertainment system longer

than necessary when the engine is

not running.

INFORMATION



Wipe off fingerprints on the surface

of the display using a glass clean-

ing cloth.



The displayed image may become

darker and moving images may be

slightly distorted when the display

is cold.



When you look at the screen

through polarised material such as

polarised sunglasses, the screen

may be dark and hard to see. If so,

change the angle of the screen ad-

just the screen settings on the

“Display” screen, or take off your

sunglasses.

06 06.07

234 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

The rear seat entertainment system can

be operated with the rear seat entertain-

ment system controller and buttons on the

DVD player unit. The system cannot be

operated by touching the switches on the

screen directly.

CAUTION

Do not disassemble or modify the

controller. It may cause an accident,

fire or electric shock.

NOTICE

Keep the controller away from direct

sunlight, high heat and high humidity.

These conditions could cause the

case to deform or the battery to ex-

plode or leak.

BEFORE USING THE CONTROLLER

(for new vehicle owners)

A battery is already set in the control-

ler with an insulating sheet, which pre-

vents the battery from being dis-

charged. Before using the controller,

remove the insulating sheet according

to the following procedure. Z17448

1. Remove the cover of the controller

as shown.

06 06.07

—Rear seat entertainment

system controller

235

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Z17449

2. Remove the insulating sheet. CY17061

USING THE CONTROLLER

To use the rear seat entertainment sys-

tem controller, direct the signal output

portion of the controller to the signal

reception portion of the rear seat enter-

tainment system display.

The controller does not operate properly

when the signal reception portion of the

display is exposed to direct sunlight.

Block the display from direct sunlight.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden stop

while driving, stow the controller in

the console box or front seat side

table when it is not in use.

06 06.07

236 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

NOTICE

Observe the followings, otherwise the

controller may be damaged.



Do not drop or strongly knock the

controller against hard objects.



Do not sit on or place heavy ob-

jects on the controller.



Do not leave the controller exposed

to high temperatures (such as on

the instrument panel) for a long

time.

06 06.07

237

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

1. “DVD” button

This button turns on the DVD mode.

2. “VIDEO” button

This button causes the display to use

the video signal from an external video

device.

3. “OFF” button

This button turns off the rear seat en-

tertainment system.

4. Joystick

This joystick selects a control switch,

mode switch on the screen or the

menu for the disc.

5. “ENT” button

This button inputs the selected switch

or the selected menu for the disc.

6. “FOLDER ” button

This button selects a desired folder.

7. “FOLDER ” button

This button selects a desired folder.

8. “ ” button

This button fast forwards a screen

when the DVD player is operated.

06 06.07

—Control buttons

Controller

Z18004y

238 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

9. “ ” button

This button stops a screen when the

DVD player is operated.

10. “SET UP” button

This button indicates the initial set up

screen when the DVD player is oper-

ated.

11. “MENU” button

This button indicates the menu screen

for DVD video when the DVD player is

operated.

12. “AUDIO” button

This button indicates the changing au-

dio screen when the DVD player is

operated.

13. “SUB TITLE” button

This button indicates the changing sub-

title screen when the DVD player is

operated.

14. “DISPLAY” button

This button adjusts the color, tone,

contrast and brightness of the screen.

15. “SIZE” button

This button changes the display mode

when the DVD player is operated.

16. “ANGLE” button

This button selects the angle of the

screen when the DVD player is oper-

ated.

17. “SEARCH” button

This button indicates the title search

screen when the DVD player is oper-

ated.

18. “TOP MENU” button

This button indicates the title selection

screen for DVD video when the DVD

player is operated.

19. “ ” button

This button reverse a screen when the

DVD player is operated.

20. “” button

This button plays or pauses a screen

when the DVD player is operated.

21. “TRACK/CHAPTER ” button

This button selects track/chapter.

22. “TRACK/CHAPTER ” button

This button selects track/chapter.

23. “OPTION” button

This button indicates the control

switches on the screen when the DVD

player is operated.

REPLACING CONTROLLER BATTERY

For replacement, use 3 AA batteries.

CAUTION

Special care should be taken to pre-

vent small children from swallowing

the removed battery or components.

NOTICE



When replacing the battery, be care-

ful not to lose the components.



Replace only with the same or

equivalent type recommended by a

Toyota dealer.



Dispose of used batteries according

to the local laws.

06 06.07

239

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Z17448

Replace the battery according to the fol-

lowing procedure:

1. Remove the cover of the controller as

shown.

Z17458

2. Remove the discharged batteries and

put in the new batteries as shown.

Install the cover.

NOTICE



Be sure that the positive side and

negative side of the controller bat-

tery should be faced correctly.



Do not replace the battery with wet

hands. Water may cause rust.



Do not touch or move any compo-

nents inside of the controller, or it

may interfere with proper operation.



Be careful not to bend the electrode

of the controller battery insertion.



Close the battery case securely.

After replacing the battery, check that the

controller operates properly. If the control-

ler still does not operate properly, contact

your Toyota dealer.

06 06.07

240 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Z17453

To turn on the system, push the “DVD”

button or “VIDEO” button.

When the “DVD” button is pushed, the

disc load screen changes to the DVD

player operation screen.

When the “VIDEO” button is pushed, the

images and sounds from the personal au-

dio machine are output.

The “DVD” button is effective only when

a disc is inserted.

Z17455

To turn off the system, push the “OFF”

button.

When the front audio system is turned off,

the rear audio system and the DVD player

will be turned off simultaneously.

Z18033

Vehicles with navigation system—The rear

seat entertainment system can be

switched ON and OFF by pushing the

“Rear” switch on the front audio system.

06 06.07

—Turning the rear seat

entertainment system on and

off

241

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

The rear DVD player can be operated

through the front audio system. The audio system controls in the instru-

ment panel allow the operation of the rear

seat entertainment system by rear seat

passengers to be disabled.

Turning on the rear system lock prevents

small children from using the remote con-

troller or operation panel of the DVD play-

er unit to operate the rear seat entertain-

ment system during driving.

Turn the audio system on. Push the

“AUDIO CONTROL” knob repeatedly until

“RSE” is displayed. Next, turn the “AUDIO

CONTROL” knob until “ON” is displayed,

and then push the “AUDIO CONTROL”

knob.

Z18031E

Vehicles with navigation system—

Push the “INFO” button to change the

screen to “Screen Setting”.

Push the “ON” switch on the “Screen

Setting” screen to turn on the “Rear

system lock”. Then push “OK”.

06 06.07

—Front audio system

operation —Rear system lock

242 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Z17443

When the rear system lock is on and any

button is pushed on the remote controller

or the operation panel, the screen shown

above is displayed for approximately 6

seconds.

Even when the rear system lock is turned

on during play mode, the images and

sounds continue without interruption.

The condition of the rear system lock is

maintained, even when the ignition switch

is turned off.

The DVD player can play audio CDs/

MP3 CDs, DVD video discs, CD texts,

dts−CDs and video CDs.

For appropriate discs for this player, see

“Audio/video system operating hints” on

page 270 in this Section.

The DVD player works when the ignition

key is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.

To turn on the DVD player, a disc must

be loaded in the player.

To turn off the player, eject the disc.

Error messages

If the player malfunctions, your audio sys-

tem will display following error messages.

If “DISC CHECK” appears on the

screen: It indicates that the disc is dirty,

damaged or it was inserted upside down.

Clean the disc or insert it correctly.

If “REGION CODE ERROR” appears on

the screen: It indicates that the DVD re-

gion code is not set properly.

If “DVD ERROR” appears on the

screen: There is a problem inside the

player. Eject the disc. Set the disc again.

If the malfunction still exists, take your

vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

CY17062

INSERTING THE DISC

Insert a disc into the slot with the label

side up.

“DISC” indicator light turns on while the

disc is loaded.

If the label faces down, the disc cannot

be played. In this case, “DISC CHECK”

and disc number appear on the screen.

06 06.07

—DVD player

243

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

If a disc which is not playable is inserted,

“DISC CHECK” will also appear on the

screen. For appropriate discs for this play-

er, see “Audio/video system operating

hints” on page 270 in this Section.

The player will play the track or chapter,

and it will play from the beginning of the

track or chapter again after it reaches the

end.

NOTICE

Never try to disassemble or oil any

part of the DVD player. Do not insert

anything other than a disc into the

slot.

8 cm (3 in.) compact disc singles

Your compact disc player needs an adap-

tor to play compact disc singles. Compact

disc singles are about 8 cm (3 in.) in

diameter−smaller than standard discs. Z17485

EJECTING THE DISC

Push the “ ” button.

06 06.07

244 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Z17461

The DVD player can be operated with the

controller buttons directly.

1. “DVD” button

2. “SET UP” button

3. “MENU” button

4. “AUDIO” button

5. “SUB TITLE” button

6. “ANGLE” button

7. “SIZE” button

8. “SEARCH” button

9. “TOP MENU” button

10. “”, “ ”, “” and “” buttons

Z17456

The player can also be operated with the

switches on the screen.

To operate the switches on the screen,

select the switch by the joystick and push

the “ENT” button. You cannot select the

switches on the screen by touching them

directly.

When the switch is selected by the joys-

tick, the outline of the switch changes to

blue. Push the “ENT” button, and the

switch will be highlighted in green.

Z17462

TURNING THE OPERATION SWITCHES

ON AND OFF

To turn on the operation switches, push

the “OPTION” button on the controller.

06 06.07

—DVD player operation

switches

245

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Z18008

Top page (DVD video operation switch)

Z17401

Second page (DVD video operation

switch)

Z17402

Top page (video CD)

Z18009

Second page (video CD)

There are operation switches on the “Page

1” and “Page 2” screens.

To change the screen, push the “Page 1”

or “Page 2” switch on the screen.

06 06.07

246 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Z17404

If “ ” appears on the screen when

you select a switch, it indicates that

the switch cannot work.

Z18010

On the screen

Z17462

Controller

To turn off the switches on the screen,

push the “OPTION” button on the control-

ler once again or push the “Hide Buttons”

on the screen.

06 06.07

247

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

—DVD player operation

NOTE: The playback condition of some

DVD video discs may be determined by

the DVD video software producer. This

DVD player plays discs as the software

producer intended. Therefore, some

functions may not work properly. Be

sure to read the instruction manual for

the DVD video disc separately provided.

For detailed information about DVD

video discs, see “—DVD video disc

information” on page 266 in this

Section.

Precautions for DVD video discs

When recording on a DVD video, video

CD or audio tracks may not record in

some cases while the menu is displayed.

As audio will not play in this case, verify

that the video tracks are playing and then

activate playback.

The title/chapter number and playback

time display may not appear while playing

back certain DVD video discs.

CAUTION

Conversational speech on some DVDs

is recorded at a low volume to em-

phasize the impact of sound effects.

If you adjust the volume assuming

that the conversations represent the

maximum volume level available for

the DVD, you may be startled by

louder sound effects or when you

change to a different audio source.

Loud sounds may have a significant

impact on the human body or pose a

driving hazard. Keep this in mind

when you adjust the volume. Z18011

06 06.07

248 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

TURNING THE MENU SCREEN FOR THE

DISC ON OR OFF

To turn on the menu screen for the disc,

push the “Top Menu” or the “Menu” switch

on the screen. You can also turn on the

menu screen by pushing the “MENU” or

“TOP MENU” button on the controller.

For the operation of the menu screen, see

the separate manual for the DVD disc.

Z18012

You can select the menu for the disc by

the joystick and the “ENT” button on the

controller.

Z18013

06 06.07

249

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

OPERATING THE “”, “ ”, “”

AND “” SWITCHES/BUTTONS

“” switch/button: Push this switch/but-

ton to pause the disc or to cancel the

pause and return to normal playing.

“” switch/button: This switch/button

stops a screen when the DVD player is

operated.

“” and “” switches/buttons: Push

and hold the “” or “” switch/button

to fast forward or reverse. When you re-

lease the switch/button, the DVD player

will resume playing.

Push the “” switch/button while paus-

ing, the DVD video plays the slow−motion

video replay.

Z17409

SKIPPING TO THE PREDETERMINED

SCREEN

To skip to the predetermined screen, push

the “Return” switch. The DVD player starts

playing from the beginning of the predeter-

mined screen.

For further details of the predetermined

screen, see the separate manual for the

DVD disc.

06 06.07

250 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Z17410

SELECTING THE TITLE

To display the searching title screen, push

the “Search” switch on the screen. You

can also display the screen by pushing

the “SEARCH” button on the controller. Z17411

Select the title number by using the

joystick and push the “ENT” button to

enter the number. The player starts play-

ing disc for that title number. The selected

title number will appear on the screen.

Push the “Back” switch to return to the

menu screen.

06 06.07

251

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Z17413

CHANGING THE SUBTITLE LANGUAGE

Push the “Sub Title” switch on the screen,

and then the changing subtitle language

screen will appear. You can also display

the screen by pushing the “SUB TITLE”

button on the controller. Z17414

Each time you push the “Sub Title” switch,

another language stored on the disc is

selected.

To turn off the subtitles, push the “Hide

Buttons” switch.

Push the “Back” switch to return to the

previous screen.

The selected subtitle language will appear

on the screen.

06 06.07

252 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Z17415

CHANGING AUDIO LANGUAGE

Push the “Audio” switch on the screen

and then the changing audio language

screen will appear. You can also display

the screen by pushing the “AUDIO” button

on the controller. Z17416

Each time you push the “Audio” switch,

another language stored on the disc is

selected.

To turn off the audio language screen,

push the “Hide Buttons” switch.

Push the “Back” switch to return to the

previous screen.

DVD video—

The selected audio language will appear

on the screen.

06 06.07

253

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Z17417

CHANGING ANGLE SCREEN

Push the “Angle” switch on the screen,

and then the changing angle screen will

appear. You can also display the screen

by pushing the “ANGLE” button on the

controller. Z17418

The angle can be selected for discs that

are multi−angle compatible when the “ ”

mark appears on the screen. Each time

you push the “Angle” switch, the angle

changes. The angle number which you

can select will appear on the screen.

To turn off the screen, push the “Hide

Buttons” switch.

Push the “Back” switch to return to the

previous screen.

06 06.07

254 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Z17419

CHANGING THE INITIAL SETTING

Push the “Set Up” switch on the screen,

and then the initial setting screen will ap-

pear. You can also display the screen by

pushing the “SET UP” button on the con-

troller. You can change the initial setting.

After the setting is done, the player plays

from the beginning of the chapter or the

track.

Z18017

Setup Menu screen

There are initial setting switches on the

“Setup Menu” screen.

After you change the initial setting, push

the “Enter” switch. The initial setting

switch will be turned off and return to the

picture previously.

When the “Default” switch is pushed, all

menus are initialized.

06 06.07

255

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Z18018

CHANGING THE AUDIO LANGUAGE

Push the “Audio Language” switch on the

“Setup Menu” and the “Select Audio

Lang.” screen appears.

Select the language you want to hear by

pushing the appropriate switch on the

screen.

To return to the “Setup Menu” screen,

push the “Back” switch.

If you cannot find the language you want

to hear, push the “Others” switch. The

“Enter Audio Lang. Code” screen will ap-

pear.

Z18019

To select an audio language, use the joys-

tick to enter the appropriate 4−digit lan-

guage code. For details of the language

codes, see the language code list.

If a code which is not on the list is en-

tered and the “ENT” button is pushed, the

“Incorrect Code” screen will appear. Enter

the code of the language you want to hear

again.

To return to the “Select Audio Lang.”

screen, push the “Back” switch.

Z18020

CHANGING THE SUBTITLE LANGUAGE

To display the “Select Subtitle Lang.”

screen, push the “Subtitle Language”

switch on the “Setup Menu” screen.

Select the language you want to read by

pushing the appropriate switch on the

screen.

To return to the “Setup Menu” screen,

push the “Back” switch.

If you cannot find the language you want

to read, push the “Others” switch. The

“Enter Subtitle Lang. Code” screen will

appear.

06 06.07

256 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Z18021

To enter the code of the language you

want to read, use the joystick to enter the

appropriate 4−digit language code. For de-

tails about the language codes, see the

language code list.

Push the “ENT” button on the controller.

If numbers which are not on the list are

entered and the “ENT” button is pushed,

the “Incorrect code” screen will appear.

Enter the language code you want to read

again.

To return to the “Select Subtitle Lang.”

screen, push the “Back” switch on the

screen.

Z18022

CHANGING THE DVD LANGUAGE

To display the “Select DVD Lang.” screen,

push the “DVD Language” switch on the

“Setup Menu” screen.

Select the language you want to read on

the screen.

To return to the “Setup Menu” screen,

push the “Back” switch.

If you cannot find a language you want to

read, push the “Others” switch. The “Enter

DVD Lang. Code” screen will appear.

Z18023

To enter the code of the language you

want to read, use the joystick to enter the

appropriate 4−digit language code. For de-

tails about the language codes, see the

language code list.

Push the “ENT” button on the controller.

If numbers which are not on the list are

entered and the “ENT” button is pushed,

the “Incorrect code” screen will appear.

Enter the language code you want to read

again.

To return to the “Select DVD Lang.”

screen, push the “Back” switch on the

screen.

06 06.07

257

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Z18024

TURNING THE ANGLE MARK ON OR

OFF

The angle mark can be turned on for

discs that are multi−angle compatible.

Each time you push the “Angle Mark”

switch on the screen, the angle mark

turns on or off alternately.

Z18025

SETTING LEVEL OF VIEWER

RESTRICTIONS

You can restrict the play back screen by

setting the viewer restrictions. You can

prevent the restriction with a password.

Some discs do not supply a restriction.

To set the level of viewer restriction, push

the “Parental Lock” switch on the “Setup

Menu” screen. The “Enter Personal Code”

screen will appear.

Z18026

Enter the password and push the “ENT”

button. The “Select Restriction Level”

screen will appear.

You cannot change the setting without in-

putting the password. When you forget or

change the password, push the “” side

of the joystick ten times to initialize the

password.

To return to the “Setup Menu” screen,

push the “Back” switch.

06 06.07

258 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Z18027

Push a parental level (1—8). The smaller

the level number, the stricter the age limit.

Push the “Back” switch to return to the

“Setup Menu” screen.

SETTING THE DISPLAY MODE

Pushing the “SIZE” button on the control-

ler causes the display modes to change

sequentially as follows:

Normal Wide1 Wide2

LANGUAGE CODE LIST

Code Language

1001 Japanese

0514 English

0618 French

0405 German

0920 Italian

0519 Spanish

2608 Chinese

1412 Dutch

1620 Portuguese

1922 Swedish

1821 Russian

1115 Korean

0512 Greek

0101 Afar

0102 Abkhazian

0106 Afrikaans

0113 Amharic

0118 Arabic

0119 Assamese

06 06.07

259

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

0125 Aymara

0126 Azerbaijani

0201 Bashkir

0205 Byelorussian

0207 Bulgarian

0208 Bihari

0209 Bislama

0214 Bengali

0215 Tibetan

0218 Breton

0301 Catalan

0315 Corsican

0319 Czech

0325 Welsh

0401 Danish

0426 Bhutani

0515 Esperanto

0520 Estonian

0521 Basque

0601 Persian

0609 Finnish

0610 Fiji

0615 Faroese

0625 Frisian

0701 Irish

0704 Scots−Gaelic

0712 Galician

0714 Guarani

0721 Gujarati

0801 Hausa

0809 Hindi

0818 Croatian

0821 Hungarian

0825 Armenian

0901 Interlingua

0905 Interlingue

0911 Inupiak

0914 Indonesian

0919 Icelandic

0923 Hebrew

1009 Yiddish

1023 Javanese

1101 Georgian

1111 Kazakh

1112 Greenlandic

1113 Cambodian

1114 Kannada

1119 Kashmiri

1121 Kurdish

1125 Kirghiz

1201 Latin

1214 Lingala

1215 Laothian

1220 Lithuanian

1222 Latvian

1307 Malagasy

1309 Maori

1311 Macedonian

1312 Malayalam

1314 Mongolian

1315 Moldavian

1318 Marathi

1319 Malay

06 06.07

260 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

1320 Maltese

1325 Burmese

1401 Nauru

1405 Nepali

1415 Norwegian

1503 Occitan

1513 (Afan) Oromo

1518 Oriya

1601 Punjabi

1612 Polish

1619 Pashto, Pushto

1721 Quechua

1813 Rhaeto−Romance

1814 Kirundi

1815 Romanian

1823 Kinyarwanda

1901 Sanskrit

1904 Sindhi

1907 Sangho

1908 Serbo−Croatian

1909 Sinhalese

1911 Slovak

1912 Slovenian

1913 Samoan

1914 Shona

1915 Somali

1917 Albanian

1918 Serbian

1919 Siswati

1920 Sesotho

1921 Sundanese

1923 Swahili

2001 Tamil

2005 Telugu

2007 Tajik

2008 Thai

2009 Tigrinya

2011 Turkmen

2012 Tagalog

2014 Setswana

2015 Tonga

2018 Turkish

2019 Tsonga

2020 Tatar

2023 Twi

2111 Ukrainian

2118 Urdu

2126 Uzbek

2209 Vietnamese

2215 Volapük

2315 Wolof

2408 Xhosa

2515 Yoruba

2621 Zulu

06 06.07

261

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Z17464

SELECTING THE CHAPTER/TRACK

To select the chapter/track, push the

“CHAPTER/TRACK ” button or

“CHAPTER/TRACK ” button on the

controller until the number of the

chapter/track you want to select appears

on the screen.

USING THE CONTROL SCREEN

When playing a disc, push the “DVD” but-

ton on the controller. The status screen

will appear on the screen.

Z17489

SELECTING THE DISC MENU NUMBER

(video CD only)

Push the “Select Number” switch and then

the disc menu number search screen will

appear. You can also display the screen

by pushing the “SEARCH” button on the

controller.

06 06.07

—DVD player operation (video

CD/audio CD/CD text/MP3)

262 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Z17433

Enter the disc menu number by using the

joystick and push the “ENT” button. The

player starts playing the disc from the

entered disc menu number. The entered

disc menu number will appear on the

screen.

Push the “Back” switch to return to the

menu screen.

Z18014

OPERATING THE “”, “” AND

“” SWITCHES (video CD only)

“” switch: Push this switch to pause

the disc or to cancel the pause and return

to normal playing.

“” and “” switches: Push this

switch to fast forward or reverse. If you

want to return to the beginning of the

current track, release the switch.

Video CD only—

Push the “” switch/button while paus-

ing, the DVD video plays the slow−motion

video replay.

Z17435

TURNING ON THE DISC MENU (video

CD only)

Push the “Return” switch to turn on the

menu screen for the disc.

For the operation of the menu screen, see

the manual for the video CD.

06 06.07

263

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Z17490

CHANGING MENU PAGE OR TRACK

(video CD only)

Push the “Next Menu” or “Prev. Menu”

switch while the disc menu is displayed.

The next or previous page will appear on

the screen.

Push the “Next Menu” or “Prev. Menu”

switch while the player is playing video.

The next or previous track will be

searched and played.

Z18006

CHANGING A MULTIPLEX

TRANSMISSION (video CD only)

Push the “Main/Sub” switch to change a

multiplex transmission. The mode changes

from Main/Sub to Main to Sub and back

to Main/Sub by pushing the “Main/Sub”

switch.

CHANGING THE INITIAL SETTING (video

CD only)

Push the “Set Up” switch on the screen

and then the initial setting screen will ap-

pear. You can also display the screen by

pushing the “SET UP” button on the con-

troller. You can change the initial setting.

(See “CHANGING THE INITIAL SETTING”

on page 254 in this Section for details.)

After the setting is done, the player plays

from the beginning of the chapter or the

track.

06 06.07

264 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Z18028

CD Text

Z18029

CD MP3

USING THE CONTROL SCREEN

When playing a disc, push the “DVD” but-

ton on the controller. The control screen

will appear on the screen.

CD text only—

The disc title and track title will appear on

the screen when pushing the “DVD” but-

ton.

Details of the specific switches, controls

and features are described below.

1. “RPT” switch (audio CD and CD text)

Push the “RPT” switch while the track

is playing. When the track ends, it will

automatically replay. To turn off the re-

peat feature, push this switch again.

2. “RAND” switch (audio CD and CD text)

Push the “RAND” switch. The player

will play the tracks on the disc in ran-

dom order. To turn off the random fea-

ture, push this switch again.

3. “SCAN” switch (audio CD and CD text)

Push the “SCAN” switch. The player

will scan all the tracks on the disc. To

stop scanning, push this switch again.

When the player has scanned all the

tracks on the disc, it will stop scan-

ning.

MP3 only—

Folder and file names will appear on the

screen when the “DVD” button is pushed.

The details of the specific switches, con-

trols, and features are described below.

1. “RPT” switch

When the “RPT” switch is pushed while

a track is played, the track file will be

played repeatedly until the switch is

pushed again. When the switch is

pushed for at least 0.8 seconds, all the

files in a folder will be played repeat-

edly. To turn off repeat play mode,

push the switch again.

2. “RAND” switch

When the “RAND” switch is pushed,

the files in a current folder will be

played in random order. When the

switch is pushed for at least 0.8 sec-

onds, all the files in the disk will be

played in random. To turn off random

play mode, push the switch again.

06 06.07

265

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

3. “SCAN” switch

When the “SCAN” switch is pushed, all

the files in a current folder will be

scanned. Only the first 10 seconds of

each file are played sequentially until

all the files are scanned. When the

switch is pushed for at least 0.8 sec-

onds, the first 10 seconds of each ini-

tial file of all the folders in the disk will

be played sequentially until the entire

initial files are scanned. To stop scan-

ning, push the switch again.

4. “FLD ” switch

When the switch is pushed, the initial

file of the next folder will be played.

5. “ FLD” switch

When the switch is pushed, the initial

file of the previous folder will be

played.

6. “DETAIL” switch

When the switch is pushed while a

track is played, the detailed file infor-

mation of the track will be displayed.

You can adjust the color, contrast, tone

and brightness of the screen.

Push the “DISPLAY” button on the control-

ler and the “Display” screen will appear.

The screen may turn purple to deflect the

sunlight. This is not a malfunction. Z18030

Operate the joystick up and down to se-

lect Brightness, Contrast, Tone, or Color

and left and right to make adjustments.

− or “Red” + or

“Green”

Brightness Darkens Brightens

Contrast Weakens

the

contrast

Strengthen

s the

contrast

Tone Weakens

the tone Strengthen

s the tone

Color Strengthen

s the red

color

Strengthen

s the green

color

06 06.07

—Screen adjustment

266 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

After adjusting the screen, push the “ENT”

button or “DISPLAY” button to return to

the previous screen.

Z17478

The audio machine connected to the input

terminal adapter can be played in the

video mode.

To select the video mode, push the

“VIDEO” button on the controller.

DVD PLAYER AND DVD VIDEO DISCS

This DVD player conforms to NTSC col-

or TV formats. DVD video discs con-

forming to other formats such as PAL

or SECAM cannot be used.

Region codes: Some DVD video discs

have a region code indicating where you

can use. If the DVD video disc is not

labeled “ALL” or “1”, you cannot use it in

this DVD player. If you attempt to play an

inappropriate DVD video disc in this play-

er, “REGION CODE ERROR” appears on

the screen. Even if the DVD video disc

does not have a region code, in some

cases you cannot use it.

06 06.07

—Selecting the video mode —DVD video disc information

267

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Marks shown on DVD video discs:

Indicates NTSC format

of color TV.

Indicates the number

of audio tracks.

Indicates the number

of language subtitles.

Indicates the number

of angles.

Indicates the screen

to be selected.

Wide screen: 16:9

Standard: 4:3

Indicates regions in

which this video disc

can be played.

ALL: all countries

Number: region code

DVD VIDEO DISC GLOSSARY

DVD video discs: Digital Versatile Disc

that holds video. DVD video discs have

adopted “MPEG2”, one of the world stan-

dards of digital compression technologies.

The picture data is compressed by 1/40

on average and stored. Variable rate en-

coded technology in which the volume of

data assigned to the picture is changed

depending on the picture format has also

been adopted. Audio data is stored using

PCM and Dolby digital, which enables

higher quality of sound. Furthermore, mul-

ti−angle and multi−language features will

also help you enjoy the more advanced

technology of DVD video.

Viewer restrictions: This feature limits

what can be viewed in conformity with the

level of restrictions of the country. The

level of restrictions varies depending on

the DVD video disc. Some DVD video

discs cannot be played at all, or violent

scenes are skipped or replaced with other

scenes.

Level 1: DVD video discs for children can

be played.

Level 2—7: DVD video discs for children

and G−rated movies can be played.

Level 8: All types of DVD video discs can

be played.

Multi−angle feature: You can enjoy the

same scene at different angles.

Multi−language feature: You can select

the language of the subtitles and audio.

Region codes: Region codes are provided

on DVD players and DVD discs. If the

DVD video disc does not have the same

region code as the DVD player, you can-

not play the disc on the DVD player. For

region codes, see page 266.

Audio: This DVD player can play liner

PCM, Dolby digital, dts and MPEG audio

format DVD. Other decoded type cannot

be played.

Title and chapter: Video and audio pro-

grams stored on DVD video discs are di-

vided in parts by title and chapter.

Title: The largest unit of the video and

audio programs stored on DVD video

discs. Usually, one piece of a movie, one

album, or one audio program is assigned

as a title.

Chapter: A unit smaller than a title. A title

comprises plural chapters.

06 06.07

268 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Manufactured under license from Dolby

Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and

the double−D symbol are trademarks of

Dolby Laboratories. Confidential unpub-

lished works.

1992−1997 Dolby Laboratories. All

rights reserved.

This product incorporates copyright

protection technology that is protected

by method claims of certain U.S. pat-

ents and other intellectual property

rights owned by Macrovision Corpora-

tion and other rights owners. Use of

this copyright protection technology

must be authorized by Macrovision Cor-

poration, and is intended for home and

other limited viewing uses only unless

otherwise authorized by Macrovision

Corporation. Reverse engineering or

disassembly is prohibited.

“dts” is a trademark of Digital Theater

Systems, Inc.

The rear entertainment system plays vid-

eos and sound when an audio−video

equipment is connected to the A/V input

adapter. For details, refer to the manufac-

turer’s instructions.

CY17030

To use the adapter, open the cover.

The A/V input adapter is composed of 3

input adapters.

Yellow: Image input adapter

Red: Audio input adapter

White: Audio input adapter

NOTICE

Close the cover when the A/V input

adapter is not in use. Inserting a for-

eign object other than the appropriate

plug may cause electrical failure or

short circuit.

06 06.07

—A/V input adapter

269

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY17073

After plugging the cord into the adapter,

let it go through the gap between the

console box and the tray. Use a cord

which is thin enough to go through the

gap. Close the console box lid.

CY19137

This power outlet is designed for use as

a power supply for the audio device con-

nected to the A/V input adapter.

The key must be in the “ON” position for

the power outlet to be used.

The maximum capacity for this power out-

let is 115 VAC/100W. If you attempt to

use an appliance that requires more than

115 VAC or 100W, the protection circuit

will activate and cut the power supply.

The power supply will restart automatically

when you use an appliance that operates

within the 115 VAC/100W limits.

CY19135

To use the power outlet, push the main

switch on the instrument panel.

An indicator light will illuminate to indicate

that the power outlet is ready for use.

Push the main switch once again to turn

the power outlet off. When the power out-

let is not in use, make sure that the main

switch is turned off.

06 06.07

—Power outlet

270 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

NOTICE



To prevent the battery from being

discharged, do not use the power

outlet longer than necessary when

the engine is not running.



Close the power outlet lid when the

power outlet is not in use. Inserting

a foreign object other than the ap-

propriate plug that fits the outlet

may cause electrical failure or short

circuit.

The power outlet is not designed for

the following electric appliances even if

their power consumption is under 115

VAC/100W. These appliances may not

operate properly.

Appliances with high initial peak watt-

age: cathode−ray tube type televisions,

compressor−driven refrigerators, electric

pumps, electric tools, etc.

Measuring devices which process pre-

cise data: medical equipment, measur-

ing instruments, etc.

Other appliances requiring an extremely

stable power supply: microcomputer−

controlled electric blankets, touch sen-

sor lamps, etc.

Certain electrical appliances may cause

radio noise.

NOTICE

To ensure correct audio/video system

operation:



Be careful not to spill beverages

over the system.



Do not put anything other than a

compact disc into the slot.



Do not put anything other than a

DVD video, video CD, dts−CD or au-

dio CD into the DVD player.



The use of a cellular phone inside

or near the vehicle may cause a

noise from the speakers of the sys-

tem which you are listening to.

However, this does not indicate a

malfunction.

RADIO RECEPTION

Usually, a problem with radio reception

does not mean there is a problem with

your radio—it is just the normal result of

conditions outside the vehicle.

06 06.07

Audio/video system operating

hints

271

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

For example, nearby buildings and terrain

can interfere with FM reception. Power

lines or telephone wires can interfere with

AM signals. And of course, radio signals

have a limited range. The farther you are

from a station, the weaker its signal will

be. In addition, reception conditions

change constantly as your vehicle moves.

Here are some common reception prob-

lems that probably do not indicate a prob-

lem with your radio:

Fading and drifting stations—Generally, the

effective range of FM is about 40 km (25

miles). Once outside this range, you may

notice fading and drifting, which increase

with the distance from the radio transmit-

ter. They are often accompanied by distor-

tion.

Multi−path—FM signals are reflective,

making it possible for two signals to reach

your antenna at the same time. If this

happens, the signals will cancel each oth-

er out, causing a momentary flutter or

loss of reception.

Static and fluttering—These occur when

signals are blocked by buildings, trees, or

other large objects. Increasing the bass

level may reduce static and fluttering.

Station swapping—If the FM signal you

are listening to is interrupted or weak-

ened, and there is another strong station

nearby on the FM band, your radio may

tune in the second station until the origi-

nal signal can be picked up again.

Fading—AM broadcasts are reflected by

the upper atmosphere—especially at night.

These reflected signals can interfere with

those received directly from the radio sta-

tion, causing the radio station to sound

alternately strong and weak.

Station interference—When a reflected sig-

nal and a signal received directly from a

radio station are very nearly the same

frequency, they can interfere with each

other, making it difficult to hear the broad-

cast.

Static—AM is easily affected by external

sources of electrical noise, such as high

tension power lines, lightening, or electri-

cal motors. This results in static.

XM∗

Alternation or modifications carried out

without appropriate authorization may in-

validate the user’s right to operate the

equipment.

∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM

tuner and service. Contact your Toyota

dealer for details.

NOTICE

This equipment has been tested and

found to comply with the limits for a

class B digital device, pursuant to

Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These lim-

its are designed to provide reasonable

protection against harmful interfer-

ence in a residential installation. This

equipment generates, uses and can

radiate radio frequency energy and, if

not installed and used in accordance

with the instructions, may cause

harmful interference to radio commu-

nications. However, there is no guar-

antee that interference will not occur

in a particular installation.

06 06.07

272 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

If this equipment does cause harmful

interference to radio or television re-

ception, which can be determined by

turning the equipment off and on, the

user is encouraged to try to correct

the interference by one or more of

the following measures:

—Reorient or relocate the receiving

antenna.

—Increase the separation between the

equipment and receiver.

—Connect the equipment into an out-

let on a circuit different from that to

which the receiver is connected.

—Consult the dealer or an experi-

enced radio/TV technician for help.

CARING FOR YOUR COMPACT DISC

PLAYER, DVD PLAYER AND DISCS

Extremely high temperatures can keep

your compact disc player and DVD

player from working. On hot days, use

the air conditioning to cool the vehicle

interior before you use the players.

Bumpy roads or other vibrations may

make your compact disc player and

DVD player skip.

If moisture gets into your compact disc

player and DVD player, the players

may not play even though they appear

to be working. Remove the disc from

the player and wait until it dries.

CAUTION

Compact disc players and DVD play-

ers use an invisible laser beam which

could cause hazardous radiation ex-

posure if directed outside the unit. Be

sure to operate the players correctly.

Z17029

Compact disc player

Use only compact discs marked as

shown above. The following products

may not be playable on your compact

disc player.

SACD

dts−CD

Copy−protected CD

CD−R (CD−Recordable)

CD−RW (CD−Re−writable)

CD−ROM

06 06.07

273

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Audio CDs

DVD video

discs

Video CDs

DVD player

Use only discs marked as shown

above. The following products may not

be playable on your DVD player.

SACD

Copy−protected CD

CD−R (CD−Recordable)

CD−RW (CD−Re−writable)

CD−ROM

DVD−R

DVD+R

DVD+RW

DVD−RW

DVD−ROM

DVD−RAM

Z17038

Special shaped discs

Z17058

Transparent/translucent discs

06 06.07

274 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Z17039

Low quality discs

Z17037

Labeled discs

NOTICE



Do not use special shaped, trans-

parent/translucent, low quality or la-

beled discs such as those shown in

the illustrations. The use of such

discs may damage the player or

changer, or it may be impossible to

eject the disc.



This system is not designed for use

of Dual Disc. Do not use Dual Disc

because it may cause damage to

the player or changer.

Z17052

Correct Wrong

Handle the discs carefully, especially

when you are inserting them. Hold

them on the edge and do not bend

them. Avoid getting fingerprints on

them, particularly on the shiny side.

Dirt, scratches, warping, pin holes, or

other disc damage could cause the

player to skip or to repeat a section of

a chapter or track. (To see a pin hole,

hold the disc up to the light.)

Remove discs from the compact disc

player when you are not playing them.

Store them in their plastic cases away

from moisture, heat, and direct sun-

light.

06 06.07

275

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Z17053

To clean a disc: Wipe it with a soft, lint−

free cloth that has been dampened with

water. Wipe in a straight line from the

center to the edge of the disc (not in

circles). Dry it with another soft, lint−free

cloth. Do not use a conventional record

cleaner or anti−static device.

MP3/WMA FILES

MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3) and WMA

(Windows Media Audio) are audio com-

pression standards.

The MP3/WMA player can play MP3

and WMA files on CD−ROM, CD−R and

CD−RW discs.

The unit can play disc recordings com-

patible with ISO 9660 level 1 and level

2 and with the Romeo and Joliet file

system.

When naming an MP3 or WMA file,

add the appropriate file extension (.mp3

or .wma).

The MP3/WMA player plays back files

with .mp3 or .wma file extensions as

MP3 or WMA files. To prevent noise

and playback errors, use the appropri-

ate file extensions.

Multi−session compatible CDs can also

be played.

MP3 files are compatible with the ID3

Tag Ver.1.0, Ver.1.1, Ver.2.2, and

Ver.2.3 formats. The unit cannot display

disc title, track title and artist name in

other formats.

WMA files can contain a WMA tag that

is used in the same way as an ID3

tag. WMA tags carry information such

as track title, artist name.

The emphasis function is available only

when playing MP3/WMA files recorded

at 32, 44.1 and 48 kHz. (The system

can play MP3 files with sampling fre-

quencies of 16, 22.05, and 24 kHz.

However, the emphasis function is not

available for files recorded at these fre-

quencies.)

The sound quality of MP3/WMA files

generally improves with higher bit

rates. In order to achieve a reasonable

level of sound quality, discs recorded

with a bit rate of at least 128 kbps are

recommended.

Playable bit rates

MP3 files:

MPEG1 LAYER3—64 to 320 kbps

MPEG2 LSF LAYER3—64 to 160 kbps

WMA files:

Ver7, 8 CBR—48 to 192 kbps

Ver9 CBR—48 to 320 kbps

06 06.07

276 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

The MP3/WMA player does not play

back MP3/WMA files from discs record-

er using packet write data transfer

(UDF format). Discs should be re-

corded using “pre−mastering” software

rather than packet−write software.

M3u playlists are not compatible with

the audio player.

MP3i (MP3 interactive) and MP3PRO

formats are not compatible with the au-

dio player.

The MP3 player is compatible with

VBR (Variable Bit Rate).

When playing back files recorded as

VBR (Variable Bit Rate) files, the play

time will not be correctly displayed if

fast−forward or reverse operations are

used.

It is not possible to check folders that

do not include MP3/WMA files.

MP3/WMA files in folders up to 8 lev-

els deep can be played. However, the

start of playback may be delayed when

using discs containing numerous levels

of folders. For this reason, we recom-

mend creating discs with no more than

two levels of folders.

RS18193

001.mp3

002.mp3

Folder 1

003.mp3

Folder 2

004.mp3

005.mp3

Folder 3

006.mp3

MP3 player (rear seat entertainment sys-

tem)

RS18193

001.mp3

002.wma

Folder 1

003.mp3

Folder 2

004.mp3

005.wma

Folder 3

006.mp3

MP3/WMA player (front audio system)

The play order of the compact disc

with the structure shown on the left is

as follows:

MP3 player (rear seat entertainment sys-

tem)

001.mp3 002.mp3 . . . 006.mp3

MP3/WMA player (front audio system)

001.mp3 002.wma . . . 006.mp3

MP3 player (rear seat entertainment

system)—It is possible to play up to

253 folders on one disc.

MP3/WMA player (front audio sys-

tem)—It is possible to play up to 192

folders or 255 files on one disc.

The order changes depending on the

PC and MP3/WMA encoding software

you use.

06 06.07

277

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CD−R and CD−RW discs

CD−R/CD−RW discs that have not been

subject to the “finalizing process” (a

process that allows discs to be played

on a conventional CD player) cannot

be played.

It may not be possible to play CD−

R/CD−RW discs recorded on a music

CD recorder or a personal computer

because of disc characteristics,

scratches or dirt on the disc, or dirt,

condensation, etc. on the lens of the

unit.

It may not be possible to play discs

recorded on a personal computer de-

pending on the application settings and

the environment. Record with the cor-

rect format. (For details, contact the

appropriate application manufacturers of

the applications.)

CD−R/CD−RW discs may be damaged

by direct exposure to sunlight, high

temperatures or other storage condi-

tions. The unit may be unable to play

some damaged discs.

Titles and other text information re-

corded on CD−R/CD−RW disc may not

be displayed by the MP3/WMA player

(in the case of audio data [CD−DA]).

The MP3/WMA player conforms to the

track skip function of the CD−R/CD−

RW disc.

If you insert a CD−RW disc into the

MP3/WMA player, playback will begin

more slowly than with a conventional

CD or CD−R disc.

Read the precautions accompanying

the CD−R/CD−RW discs before use.

Recordings on CD−R/CD−RW cannot

be played using the DDCD (Double

Density CD) system.

TERMS

Packet write—

This is a general term that describes the

process of writing data on−demand to

CD−R, etc., in the same way that data is

written to floppy or hard discs.

Bit rate—

Bit rate refers to data volume per second,

or bps units (bits per second). The higher

the rate, the more information is available

to reproduce the sound. The higher the

rate, the better the sound.

Multi−session—

Multi−session is a recording method that

allows additional data to be recorded later.

When recording data on a CD−ROM,

CD−R or CD−RW, etc., all data from be-

ginning to end is treated as a single unit

or session. Multi−session is a method of

recording more than 2 sessions on one

disc.

CD−DA—

CD−DA is an abbreviation for Compact

Disc Digital Audio. It refers to the uncom-

pressed format of regular CDs.

06 06.07

278 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

ID3 Tag—

This is a method of embedding track−re-

lated information in an MP3 file. This em-

bedded information can include the track

title, the artist’s name, the album title, the

music genre, the year of production, com-

ments and other data. The contents can

be freely edited using software with ID3

tag editing functions. Although the tags

are restricted to the number of characters,

the information can be viewed when the

track is played back.

WMA Tag—

WMA files can contain a WMA tag that is

used in the same way as an ID3 tag.

WMA tags carry information such as track

title, artist name.

ISO 9660 format—

This is the international standard for the

formatting of CD−ROM folders and files.

For the ISO 9660 format, there are two

levels of regulations.

Level 1:

The file name is in 8.3 format (8 charac-

ter file names, with a 3 character file

extension. File names must be composed

of one−byte capital letters and numbers.

The “_” symbol may also be included.)

Level 2:

The file name can have up to 31 charac-

ters (including the separation mark “.” and

file extension). Each folder must contain

fewer than 8 hierarchies.

Extended formats

Joliet:

File names can include up to 64 charac-

ters.

Romeo:

File names can include up to 128 charac-

ters.

m3u—

Playlists created using “WINAMP” software

have a playlist file extension (.m3u).

MP3—

MP3 is an audio compression standard

determined by a working group (MPEG) of

the ISO (International Standard Organiza-

tion). MP3 compresses audio data to

about 1/10 the size of that on convention-

al discs.

WMA—

WMA (Windows Media Audio) is an audio

compression format developed by Micro-

soft. It compresses files into a size small-

er than that of MP3 files. The decoding

formats for WMA files are Ver7, 8, and 9.

06 06.07

279

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND

CONTROLS

Air conditioning system

Controls 280. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Air flow selector settings 286. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Operating tips 286. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Instrument panel and rear vents 289. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Air conditioning filter 290. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

06 06.07

SECTION

−

280 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

1. Fan speed selector

2. “AUTO” button

3. Temperature selector

4. “A/C” button

5. Air flow selector

6. Air intake selector

7. “OFF” button

06 06.07

Controls (without “DUAL” button)

CY18023y

281

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

“AUTO” button

For automatic operation of the air condi-

tioning, push the “AUTO” button. An indi-

cator light will illuminate to show that the

automatic operation mode has been se-

lected.

In the automatic operation mode, the air

conditioning selects the most suitable fan

speed, air flow, air intake and on−off of

the air conditioning according to the tem-

perature.

When you push the “AUTO” button with

the air intake mode at FRESH, internal

circulation may be applied for maximum

cooling.

You may use manual controls if you want

to select your own settings.

Fan speed selector

Select the mode button you desire to ad-

just the fan speed and push it. An indica-

tor light will illuminate to show which fan

speed mode is being selected.

In automatic operation, you do not have

to adjust the fan speed unless you desire

another fan speed mode.

Temperature selector

To increase the temperature, push the

“UP” side, to decrease it, push the

“DOWN” side.

“LO” appears when you adjust to maxi-

mum cooling, and “HI” appears when you

adjust to maximum warming.

“OFF” button

Push the “OFF” button to turn off the air

conditioning system.

CY18014

Air flow selector

Push one of the buttons to select the

vents used for air flow. An indicator light

will illuminate to show which air flow

mode is being selected.

In automatic operation, you do not have

to select the air flow unless you desire

another air flow mode.

1. Panel—Air flows from the instrument

panel vents and rear vents.

2. Bi−level—Air flows from both the floor

vents, the instrument panel vents and

rear vents.

3. Floor—Air flows mainly from the floor

vents.

06 06.07

282 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

4. Floor/Windshield—Air flows mainly

from the floor vents and windshield

vents and fan speed may increase in

order to clean up the front view.

This button allows the air intake to

select FRESH automatically. This is to

clean up the front view more quickly.

If you want to return the setting to

RECIRCULATE mode, press the air in-

take selector button once again.

5. Windshield—Air flows mainly from the

windshield vents and fan speed may

increase in order to clean up the front

view.

Pressing this button once again returns

the air flow mode to the last one used.

This button allows the air intake to

select FRESH automatically. This is to

clean up the front view more quickly.

It is not possible to return to RECIR-

CULATE in this mode.

For details about air flow selector settings,

see “Air flow selector settings” described

below.

CY18004

Air intake selector

Push the button to select the air source.

An indicator light will illuminate to show

which the air source is being selected.

1. Recirculate—Recirculates the air inside

the vehicle.

2. Fresh—Draws outside air into the sys-

tem.

To prevent fogging up of the windshield,

the air intake mode may change automati-

cally to FRESH depending on the condi-

tion of the air conditioning system.

For example, when the ambient tempera-

ture is low, the air intake mode may

change automatically to FRESH. This is

not a malfunction.

If the ambient temperature is low when

the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position, the air intake mode is always set

to FRESH even though the previous mode

was RECIRCULATE.

“A/C” button

To turn on the air conditioning, push the

“A/C” button. The “A/C” button indicator

will come on. To turn the air conditioning

off, push the button again.

If the “A/C” button indicator flashes, there

is a problem in the air conditioning system

and the air conditioning automatically

shuts off. If this happens, take your ve-

hicle to a Toyota dealer for service.

06 06.07

283

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

1. Fan speed selector

2. Temperature selector

(at the independent mode: for driver)

(at the linked mode: for driver and

front passenger)

3. “AUTO” button

4. “DUAL” button

5. Temperature selector

(for front passenger)

6. Air flow selector

7. Air intake selector

8. “A/C” button

9. “OFF” button

06 06.07

Controls (with “DUAL” button)

CY18024y

284 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

“AUTO” button

For automatic operation of the air condi-

tioning, push the “AUTO” button. An indi-

cator light will illuminate to show that the

automatic operation mode has been se-

lected.

In the automatic operation mode, the air

conditioning selects the most suitable fan

speed, air flow, air intake and on−off of

the air conditioning according to the tem-

perature.

When you push the “AUTO” button with

the air intake mode at FRESH, internal

circulation may be applied for maximum

cooling.

You may use manual controls if you want

to select your own settings.

Fan speed selector

Select the mode button you desire to ad-

just the fan speed and push it. An indica-

tor light will illuminate to show which fan

speed mode is being selected.

In automatic operation, you do not have

to adjust the fan speed unless you desire

another fan speed mode.

Temperature selector

To increase the temperature, push the “”

side, to decrease it, push the “” side.

“LO” appears when you adjust to maxi-

mum cooling, and “HI” appears when you

adjust to maximum warming.

“DUAL” button

This button is used to set the tempera-

tures independently for the driver’s seat

and front passenger seat.

Pushing the button changes the mode

from independent and linked.

Independent mode: Temperatures can be

set independently for the driver’s seat and

front passenger’s seat. An indicator light

will illuminated to show that the indepen-

dent mode has been selected.

Linked mode: The same temperature is

set for the driver’s seat and front passen-

ger’s seat.

When the temperature for the front pas-

senger’s seat is changed in linked mode,

the mode is changed automatically to in-

dependent mode.

“OFF” button

Push the “OFF” button to turn off the air

conditioning system.

CY18014

Air flow selector

Push one of the buttons to select the

vents used for air flow. An indicator light

will illuminate to show which air flow

mode is being selected.

In automatic operation, you do not have

to select the air flow unless you desire

another air flow mode.

1. Panel—Air flows from the instrument

panel vents and rear vents.

2. Bi−level—Air flows from both the floor

vents, the instrument panel vents and

rear vents.

3. Floor—Air flows mainly from the floor

vents.

06 06.07

285

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

4. Floor/Windshield—Air flows mainly

from the floor vents and windshield

vents and fan speed may increase in

order to clean up the front view.

This button allows the air intake to

select FRESH automatically. This is to

clean up the front view more quickly.

If you want to return the setting to

RECIRCULATE mode, press the air in-

take selector button once again.

5. Windshield—Air flows mainly from the

windshield vents and fan speed may

increase in order to clean up the front

view.

Pressing this button once again returns

the air flow mode to the last one used.

This button allows the air intake to

select FRESH automatically. This is to

clean up the front view more quickly.

It is not possible to return to RECIR-

CULATE in this mode.

For details about air flow selector settings,

see “Air flow selector settings” described

below.

CY18004

Air intake selector

Push the button to select the air source.

An indicator light will illuminate to show

which the air source is being selected.

1. Recirculate—Recirculates the air inside

the vehicle.

2. Fresh—Draws outside air into the sys-

tem.

To prevent fogging up of the windshield,

the air intake mode may change automati-

cally to FRESH depending on the condi-

tion of the air conditioning system.

For example, when the ambient tempera-

ture is low, the air intake mode may

change automatically to FRESH. This is

not a malfunction.

If the ambient temperature is low when

the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position, the air intake mode is always set

to FRESH even though the previous mode

was RECIRCULATE.

“A/C” button

To turn on the air conditioning, push the

“A/C” button. The “A/C” button indicator

will come on. To turn the air conditioning

off, push the button again.

If the “A/C” button indicator flashes, there

is a problem in the air conditioning system

and the air conditioning automatically

shuts off. If this happens, take your ve-

hicle to your Toyota dealer for service.

06 06.07

286 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

To cool off your Toyota after it has

been parked in the hot sun, drive with

the windows open for a few minutes.

This vents the hot air, allowing the air

conditioning to cool the interior more

quickly.

Make sure the air intake grilles in front

of the windshield are not blocked (by

leaves or snow, for example).

On humid days, do not blow cold air

on the windshield. The windshield could

fog up because of the difference in air

temperature on the inside and outside

of the windshield.

Keep the area under the front seats

clear to allow air to circulate through-

out the vehicle.

On cold days, set the fan speed to

high for a minute to help clear the

intake ducts of snow or moisture. This

can reduce the amount of fogging on

the windows.

When driving on dusty roads, close all

windows. If dust thrown up by the ve-

hicle is still drawn into the vehicle after

closing the windows, it is recommended

that the air intake selector be set to

FRESH and the fan speed selector to

any setting except “OFF”.

06 06.07

Air flow selector settings

CY18015y

Operating tips

287

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

If following another vehicle on a dusty

road, or driving in windy and dusty

conditions, it is recommended that the

air intake selector be temporarily set to

RECIRCULATE, which will close off the

outside passage and prevent outside

air and dust from entering the vehicle

interior.

Heating

For best results, set controls as follows:

For automatic operation—

Press in the “AUTO” button.

Temperature—To the desired

temperature

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)

Air conditioning—OFF

For manual operation—

Fan speed—To the desired fan speed

Temperature—Towards WARM

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)

Air flow—FLOOR

Air conditioning—OFF

For quick heating, select recirculated

air for a few minutes. To keep the

windows from fogging, select fresh af-

ter the vehicle interior has been war-

med.

Press the “A/C” button on for dehumidi-

fied heating.

Choose floor/windshield air flow to heat

the vehicle interior while defrosting or

defogging the windshield.

Air conditioning

For best results, set controls as follows:

For automatic operation—

Press in the “AUTO” button.

Temperature—To the desired

temperature

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)

Air conditioning—ON

For manual operation—

Fan speed—To the desired fan speed

Temperature—Towards COLD

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)

Air flow—PANEL

Air conditioning—ON

For quick cooling, select recirculated

air for a few minutes.

06 06.07

288 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Ventilation

For best results, set controls as follows:

For automatic operation—

Press in the “AUTO” button.

Temperature—Towards low temperature

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)

Air conditioning—OFF

For manual operation—

Fan speed—To the desired fan speed

Temperature—Towards COLD

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)

Air flow—PANEL

Air conditioning—OFF

Defogging and defrosting

—The inside of the windshield

For best results, set controls as follows:

—For automatic operation

Temperature—Towards high temperature

to heat; low temperature

to cool

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)

Air flow—WINDSHIELD

—For manual operation

Fan speed—To the desired fan speed

Temperature—Towards high temperature

to heat; low temperature

to cool

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)

Air flow—WINDSHIELD

Pressing the windshield air flow button

turns on the defogging function with the

purpose of clearing the front view.

When pressing the windshield air flow but-

ton, the air intake selects FRESH auto-

matically. This is to clean up the front

view more quickly.

It is not possible to return to RECIRCU-

LATE in this mode.

Press the “A/C” button for dehumidified

heating or cooling. This setting clears the

front view more quickly.

On humid days, do not blow cold air

on the windshield—the difference be-

tween the outside and inside tempera-

tures could make the fogging worse.

—The outside of the windshield

For best results, set controls as follows:

—For automatic operation

Temperature—Towards high temperature

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)

Air flow—WINDSHIELD

—For manual operation

Fan speed—To the desired fan speed

Temperature—Towards high temperature

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)

Air flow—WINDSHIELD

06 06.07

289

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Pressing the windshield air flow button

turns on the defogging function with the

purpose of clearing the front view.

When pressing the windshield air flow but-

ton, the air intake selects FRESH auto-

matically. This is to clean up the front

view more quickly.

It is not possible to return to RECIRCU-

LATE in this mode.

Press the “A/C” button for dehumidified

heating or cooling. This setting clears the

front view more quickly.

To heat the vehicle interior while de-

frosting the windshield, choose

floor/windshield air flow.

CY18006

Center vents

CY18005

Side vents

CY18017

Rear vents

If air flow control is not satisfactory, check

the instrument panel and rear vents. The

instrument panel and rear vents may be

opened or closed as shown.

06 06.07

Instrument panel and rear

vents

290 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY72020

The air conditioning filter information

label is placed on the upper right side

of the glove box as shown and indi-

cates that a filter has been installed.

The air conditioning filter prevents dust

from entering the vehicle through the air

conditioning vent.

CY72003

The air conditioning filter is behind the

glove box.

The air conditioning filter may clog af-

ter long use. The filter may need to be

replaced if the air flow of the air condi-

tioning and heater experiences extreme

reductions in operating efficiency, or if

the windows begin to fog up easily.

To maintain the air conditioning efficiency,

inspect and replace the air conditioning

filter according to the maintenance

schedule. In dusty areas or areas with

heavy traffic flow, such as inner city or

desert areas, early replacement may be

required. (For scheduled maintenance

information, please refer to the “Scheduled

Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual

Supplement”.)

06 06.07

Air conditioning filter— —Checking and replacing the

air conditioning filter

291

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY72012

1. Open the glove box. Remove the

screw with a Phillips−head screw-

driver and slide the hook as shown.

CY72004

2. Push in each side of the glove box

to disconnect the claws.

CY72013

3. Remove the filter case by holding

both sides.

06 06.07

292 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY18022

4. Remove the filter from the filter

case.

5. Inspect the filter on the surface.

If it is the just moderately dusty, it may

be cleaned by blowing compressed air

from the reverse surface. Do not wash or

oil the filter.

If it is dirty, it should be replaced.

When setting the filter to the filter case,

ensure that the flat side of the filter is

down and the ribbed side is up.

Position the filter case so that the “↑UP”

mark is pointing up and install it in the

vehicle.

INFORMATION

The air filter should be installed prop-

erly in position. The use of air condi-

tioning with the air filter removed

may cause deteriorated dustproof per-

formance and then affect air condi-

tioning performance.

06 06.07

411

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

Introduction

Engine compartment overview 412. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fuse locations 414. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Do−it−yourself service precautions 414. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Parts and tools 416. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

06 06.07

SECTION

−

412 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

1. Windshield and back window washer

fluid tank

2. Power steering fluid reservoir

3. Engine oil level dipstick

4. Engine coolant reservoir

5. Engine oil filler cap

6. Brake fluid reservoir

7. Fuse block

8. Battery

9. Condenser

10. Radiator

06 06.07

Engine compartment overview

4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine

CY71024y

413

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

1. Windshield and back window washer

fluid tank

2. Power steering fluid reservoir

3. Engine coolant reservoir

4. Engine oil level dipstick

5. Engine oil filler cap

6. Brake fluid reservoir

7. Fuse block

8. Battery

9. Condenser

10. Radiator

06 06.07

4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine

CY71032y

414 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY71030

CY71027

Spare

fuses

CY71022

If you perform maintenance by yourself,

be sure to follow the correct procedure

given in this Section.

You should be aware that improper or in-

complete servicing may result in operating

problems.

Performing do−it−yourself maintenance

during the warranty period may affect your

warranty coverage. Read the separate

Toyota Warranty statement for details and

suggestions.

This Section gives instructions only for

those items that are relatively easy for an

owner to perform. As explained in Section

6, there are still a number of items that

must be done by a qualified technician

with special tools.

For information on tools and parts for do−

it−yourself maintenance, see “Parts and

tools” on page 416 in this Section.

Utmost care should be taken when work-

ing on your vehicle to prevent accidental

injury. Here are a few precautions that

you should be especially careful to ob-

serve:

06 06.07

Fuse locations Do−it−yourself service

precautions

415

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CAUTION

When the engine is running, keep

hands, clothing, and tools away

from the moving fan and engine

drive belts. (Removing rings,

watches, and ties is advisable.)

Right after driving, the engine

compartment—the engine, radiator,

exhaust manifold, power steering

fluid reservoir and spark plug

boots, etc.—will be hot. So be care-

ful not to touch them. Oil, fluids

and spark plugs may also be hot.

If the engine is hot, do not remove

the radiator cap or loosen the drain

plugs to prevent burning yourself.

Do not leave anything that may

burn easily, such as paper or rags,

in the engine compartment.

Do not smoke, cause sparks or al-

low open flames around fuel or the

battery. Their fumes are flammable.

Do not get under your vehicle with

just the body jack supporting it. Al-

ways use automotive jack stands or

other solid supports.

Use eye protection whenever you

work on or under your vehicle

where you may be exposed to flying

or falling material, fluid spray, etc.

Used engine oil contains potentially

harmful contaminants which may

cause skin disorders such as in-

flammation or skin cancer, so care

should be taken to avoid prolonged

and repeated contact with it. To re-

move used engine oil from your

skin, wash thoroughly with soap

and water.

Do not leave used oil within the

reach of children.

Dispose of used oil and filter only

in a safe and acceptable manner.

Do not dispose of used oil and fil-

ter in household trash, in sewers or

onto the ground. Call your dealer or

a service station for information

concerning recycling or disposal.

Be extremely cautious when work-

ing on the battery. It contains poi-

sonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.

NOTICE



Remember that battery and ignition

cables carry high currents or volt-

ages. Be careful of accidentally

causing a short circuit.



Add only “Toyota Super Long Life

Coolant” or similar high quality eth-

ylene glycol based non−silicate,

non−amine, non−nitrite, and non−bo-

rate coolant with long−life hybrid

organic acid technology to fill the

radiator. “Toyota Super Long Life

Coolant” is a mixture of 50% cool-

ant and 50% deionized water (for

the U.S.A.) or 55% coolant and 45%

deionized water (for Canada).



If you spill some of the coolant, be

sure to wash it off with water to

prevent it from damaging the parts

or paint.



Do not allow dirt or anything else

to fall through the spark plug holes.



Do not pry the outer electrode of a

spark plug against the center elec-

trode.

06 06.07

416 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)



Use only spark plugs of the speci-

fied type. Using other types will

cause engine damage, loss of per-

formance or radio noise.



Do not reuse iridium−tipped spark

plugs by cleaning or regapping.



Do not overfill automatic transmis-

sion fluid, or the transmission

could be damaged.



Do not drive with the air cleaner

filter removed, or excessive engine

wear could result. Also backfiring

could cause a fire in the engine

compartment.



Be careful not to scratch the glass

surface with the wiper frame.



When closing the engine hood,

check to see that you have not for-

gotten any tools, rags, etc.

Here is a list of parts and tools you will

need to perform do−it−yourself mainte-

nance. Remember all Toyota parts are de-

signed in metric sizes, so your tools must

be metric.

CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL

Parts (if level is low):

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equiva-

lent

See page 421 in Section 7−2 for de-

tails about engine oil selection.

Tools:

Rag or paper towel

Funnel (only for adding oil)

CHECKING THE ENGINE COOLANT

LEVEL

Parts (if level is low):

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or

similar high quality ethylene glycol

based non−silicate, non−amine, non−ni-

trite, and non−borate coolant with long−

life hybrid organic acid technology.

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a

mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deion-

ized water (for the U.S.A.) or 55%

coolant and 45% deionized water (for

Canada).

Tools:

Funnel (only for adding coolant)

CHECKING BRAKE FLUID

Parts (if level is low):

SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3

brake fluid

Tools:

Rag or paper towel

Funnel (only for adding fluid)

CHECKING POWER STEERING FLUID

Parts (if level is low):

Automatic transmission fluid

DEXRONII or III

Tools:

Rag or paper towel

Funnel (only for adding fluid)

CHECKING BATTERY CONDITION

Tools:

Warm water

Baking soda

Grease

Conventional wrench (for terminal

clamp bolts)

06 06.07

Parts and tools

417

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CHECKING AND REPLACING FUSES

Parts (if replacement is necessary):

Fuse with same amperage rating as

original

ADDING WASHER FLUID

Parts:

Water

Washer fluid containing antifreeze (for

winter use)

Tools:

Funnel

REPLACING LIGHT BULBS

Parts:

Bulb with same number and wattage

rating as original (See charts in

“Replacing light bulbs” on page 438 in

Section 7−3.)

Tools:

Screwdriver

06 06.07

418 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

06 06.07

419

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

Engine and Chassis

Checking the engine oil level 420. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checking the engine coolant level 422. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checking the radiator and condenser 423. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checking brake fluid 423. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checking power steering fluid 424. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checking tire inflation pressure 425. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checking and replacing tires 427. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rotating tires 429. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installing snow tires and chains 430. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing wheels 431. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Aluminum wheel precautions 432. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

06 06.07

SECTION

−

420 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Z72112

Low level Full level

Add oil O.K. Too full

4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine

Z72111

Low level Full level

Add oil O.K. Too full

4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine

With the engine at operating tempera-

ture and turned off, check the oil level

on the dipstick.

1. To get a correct reading, the vehicle

should be on level ground. After turning

off the engine, wait a few minutes for

the oil to drain back into the bottom of

the engine.

2. Pull the dipstick out, hold a rag under

the end and wipe it clean.

3. Reinsert the dipstick—push it in as far

as it will go, or the reading will not be

correct.

4. Pull the dipstick out and look at the oil

level while holding a rag under the

end.

CAUTION

Be careful not to touch the hot ex-

haust manifold.

NOTICE

Be careful not to drop engine oil on

the vehicle components.

If the oil level is below or only slightly

above the low level, add engine oil of

the same type as already in the engine.

Remove the oil filler cap and add engine

oil in small quantities at a time, checking

the dipstick. We recommend that you use

a funnel when adding oil.

The approximate quantity of oil needed to

raise the level between low and full on the

dipstick is indicated as follows:

1.5L(1.6qt.,1.3Imp.qt.)

For the engine oil capacity, see “Service

specifications” on page 447 in Section 8.

When the level reaches within the correct

range, install the filler cap hand−tight.

NOTICE



Be careful not to spill engine oil on

the vehicle components.



Avoid overfilling, or the engine

could be damaged.



Check the oil level on the dipstick

once again after adding the oil.

06 06.07

Checking the engine oil level

421

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

ENGINE OIL SELECTION

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in

your Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent

to satisfy the following grade and

viscosity.

Oil grade:

ILSAC multigrade engine oil

Recommended viscosity:

SAE 5W−30

OIL008

Outside temperature

SAE 5W−30 is the best choice for good

fuel economy and good starting in cold

weather.

If SAE 5W−30 is not available, SAE

10W−30 may be used. However, it

should be replaced with SAE 5W−30 at

the next oil change.

Oil identification mark

The ILSAC (International Lubricant Stan-

dardization and Approval Committee) Certi-

fication Mark is added to some oil con-

tainers to help you select the oil you

should use.

06 06.07

422 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

To ensure excellent lubrication perfor-

mance for your engine, “Toyota Genuine

Motor Oil” is available, which has been

specifically tested and approved for all

Toyota engines.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-

ther details about “Toyota Genuine Motor

Oil”.

Look at the see−through coolant reser-

voir when the engine is cold. The cool-

ant level is satisfactory if it is between

the “F” and “L” lines on the reservoir.

If the level is low, add the coolant. (For

the coolant type, see “Coolant type

selection” described below.)

The coolant level in the reservoir will vary

with engine temperature. However, if the

level is on or below the “L” line, add

coolant. Bring the level up to the “F” line.

If the coolant level drops within a short

time after replenishing, there may be a

leak in the system. Visually check the

radiator, hoses, radiator cap and drain

cock and water pump.

If you can find no leak, have your Toyota

dealer test the cap pressure and check

for leaks in the cooling system.

CAUTION

To prevent burning yourself, do not

remove the radiator cap when the en-

gine is hot.

Coolant type selection

Use of improper coolants may damage

your engine cooling system.

Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”

or similar high quality ethylene glycol

based non−silicate, non−amine, non−nitrite,

and non−borate coolant with long−life

hybrid organic acid technology. (Coolant

with long−life hybrid organic acid

technology is a combination of low

phosphates and organic acids.)

For the U.S.A.—“Toyota Super Long Life

Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and

50% deionized water. This coolant pro-

vides protection down to about −35C

(−31F).

For Canada—“Toyota Super Long Life

Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and

45% deionized water. This coolant pro-

vides protection down to about −42C

(−44F).

NOTICE

Do not use plain water alone.

06 06.07

Checking the engine coolant

level

423

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Toyota recommends “Toyota Super Long

Life Coolant”, which has been tested to

ensure that it will not cause corrosion nor

result in malfunction of your engine

coolant system with proper usage. “Toyota

Super Long Life Coolant” is formulated

with long−life hybrid organic acid

technology and has been specifically

designed to avoid engine cooling system

malfunction on Toyota vehicles.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for

further details.

If any of the above parts are extremely

dirty or you are not sure of their condi-

tion, take your vehicle to a Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

To prevent burning yourself, be care-

ful not to touch the radiator or con-

denser when the engine is hot.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the radiator

and condenser, do not perform the

work by yourself.

CY72025

To check the fluid level, simply look at

the see−through reservoir. The level

should be between the “MAX” and

“MIN” lines on the reservoir.

It is normal for the brake fluid level to go

down slightly as the brake pads wear or

when the fluid level in the accumulator is

high.

If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it

may indicate a serious mechanical prob-

lem.

If the level is low, add SAE J1703 or

FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 brake fluid to the

brake reservoir.

06 06.07

Checking the radiator and

condenser Checking brake fluid

424 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Refilling brake fluid:

1. Turn the ignition switch off.

2. Depress the brake pedal more than 20

times (until the brake pedal resistance

decreases and pedal travel increases).

3. Remove the reservoir cover by hand.

Add brake fluid up to the “MAX” line.

If you do not follow the procedure above,

the reservoir may overflow.

Use only newly opened brake fluid. Once

opened, brake fluid absorbs moisture from

the air, and excess moisture can cause a

dangerous loss of braking.

CAUTION

Take care when filling the reservoir

because brake fluid can harm your

hands or eyes. If fluid gets on your

hands or in your eyes, flush the af-

fected area with clean water immedi-

ately. If you still feel uncomfortable

with your hands or eyes, go to the

doctor.

NOTICE

If you spill some of the fluid, be sure

to wipe it off to prevent it from dam-

aging the parts or paintwork.

CY72002

If cold O.K.

If cold

add

Open

If hot O.K.

If hot

add

Check the fluid level through the reser-

voir. If necessary, add automatic trans-

mission fluid DEXRONII or III.

If the vehicle has been driven around 80

km/h (50 mph) for 20 minutes (a little

more in frigid temperatures), the fluid is

hot (60C—80C or 140F—175F). You

may also check the level when the fluid

is cold (about room temperature,

10C—30C or 50F—85F) if the engine

has not been run for about five hours.

06 06.07

Checking power steering fluid

425

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Clean all dirt from the outside of the res-

ervoir tank and look at the fluid level. If

the fluid is cold, the level should be in the

“COLD” range. Similarly, if it is hot, the

fluid level should be in the “HOT” range.

If the level is at the low side of either

range, add automatic transmission fluid

DEXRONII or III to bring the level within

the range.

To remove the reservoir cap, turn it coun-

terclockwise and lift up. To reinstall it,

turn it clockwise. After replacing the reser-

voir cap, visually check the steering box

case, vane pump and hose connections

for leaks or damage.

CAUTION

The reservoir tank may be hot so be

careful not to burn yourself.

NOTICE

Avoid overfilling, or the power steer-

ing could be damaged.

CY72026

Keep your tire inflation pressures

at the proper level.

The recommended cold tire inflation

pressures, tire sizes and the com-

bined weight of occupants and cargo

(vehicle capacity weight) are de-

scribed on pages 446 and 451. They

are also on the tire and loading infor-

mation label.

You should check the tire inflation

pressure every two weeks, or at least

once a month. And do not forget the

spare!

The following instructions for

checking tire inflation pressure

should be observed:

The pressure should be

checked only when the tires are

cold. If your vehicle has been

parked for at least 3 hours and has

not been driven for more than 1.5

km or 1 mile since, you will get

an accurate cold tire inflation pres-

sure reading.

06 06.07

Checking tire inflation

pressure

426 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

If you cannot adjust the tire

pressure when the tires are

cold, add 20 to 30 kPa more to

the front tires and rear tires than

the cold tire pressure, but never

exceed the maximum cold tire

pressure molded on the tire side-

wall.

Always use a tire pressure

gauge. The appearance of a tire

can be misleading. Besides, tire

inflation pressures that are even

just a few pounds off can degrade

ride and handling.

Do not bleed or reduce tire

inflation pressure after driving.

It is normal for the tire inflation

pressure to be higher after driving.

Never exceed the vehicle capac-

ity weight. Passenger and lug-

gage weight should be located so

that the vehicle is balanced.

CY72019

Tire pressure gauge

INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT

PROCEDURE

1. Remove the tire valve cap.

2. Press the tip of the tire pressure

gauge to the tire valve.

3. Read the pressure using the grad-

uations of the gauge.

4. In case the tire inflation pressure

is not within the prescribed range,

insert the compressed air from the

valve. In case of applying too

much air, press the center of the

valve and release the air to adjust.

5. After completing the tire inflation

pressure measurement and ad-

justment, apply soapy water to the

valve and check for leakage.

6. Install the tire valve cap.

If a gauge and air pump are not avail-

able, have your vehicle checked by

your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

Be sure to reinstall the tire valve

caps. Without the valve caps, dirt

or moisture could get into the

valve core and cause air leakage.

If the caps have been lost, have

new ones put on as soon as pos-

sible.

NOTICE

Use only the original valve cap.

If any other valve cap is used,

it may corrode or melt and be-

come difficult or impossible to

remove.

06 06.07

427

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Incorrect tire inflation pressure may

waste fuel, reduce the comfort of driv-

ing, reduce tire life and make your ve-

hicle less safe to drive.

If a tire frequently needs refilling,

have it checked by your Toyota deal-

er.

CAUTION

Keep your tires properly inflated.

Otherwise, the following condi-

tions may occur and cause an ac-

cident resulting in death or seri-

ous injuries.

Low tire pressure (underinfla-

tion)—

Excessive wear

Uneven wear

Poor handling

Possibility of blowouts from an

overheated tire

Poor sealing of the tire bead

Wheel deformation and/or tire

separation

A greater possibility of tire

damage from road hazards

High tire pressure (overinfla-

tion)—

Poor handling

Excessive wear

Uneven wear

A greater possibility of tire

damage from road hazards

CY72126

Tread wear indicator

CHECKING YOUR TIRES

Check the tire’s tread for tread

wear indicators. If the indicators

show, replace the tires. The loca-

tion of tread wear indicators is

shown by the “TWI” or “∆” marks,

etc., molded on the sidewall of

each tire.

06 06.07

Checking and replacing tires

428 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

The tires on your Toyota have built−in

tread wear indicators to help you

know when the tires need replace-

ment. When the tread depth wears to

1.6 mm (0.06 in.) or less, the indica-

tors will appear. If you can see the

indicators in two or more adjacent

grooves, the tire should be replaced.

The lower the tread, the higher the

risk of skidding.

The effectiveness of snow tires is

lost if the tread wears down below

4 mm (0.16 in.).

If you have tire damage such as

cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to

expose the fabric, or bulges indi-

cating internal damage, the tire

should be replaced.

If a tire often goes flat or cannot be

properly repaired due to the size or

location of a cut or other damage, it

should be replaced. If you are not

sure, consult with your Toyota dealer.

If air loss occurs while driving, do not

continue driving. Driving even a short

distance can damage a tire beyond

repair.

Any tires which are over 6 years

old must be checked by a qualified

technician even if damage is not

obvious.

Tires deteriorate with age even if they

have never or seldom been used.

This applies also to the spare tire and

tires stored for future use.

REPLACING YOUR TIRES

When replacing a tire, use a tire of

the same size and construction,

and the same or greater maximum

load as the originally installed

tires. Also, on four−wheel drive

models, all the tires must be the

same brand and have the same

tread patterns.

Using any other size or type of tire

may seriously affect handling, ride,

speedometer/odometer calibration,

ground clearance, and clearance be-

tween the body and tires or snow

chains.

Check that the maximum load of the

replaced tire is greater than 1/2 of the

Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR)

of either the front axle or the rear

axle, whichever is greater. As for the

maximum load of the tire, see the load

limit at maximum cold tire inflation

pressure mentioned on the sidewall

of the tire, and as for the Gross Axle

Weight Ratings (GAWR), see the Cer-

tification Label.

06 06.07

429

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

For details about the side wall of the

tire and the Certification Label, see

pages 339 and 342.

CAUTION

Observe the following instruc-

tions. Otherwise, an accident

may occur resulting in death or

serious injuries.

Do not mix radial, bias belted,

or bias−ply tires on your ve-

hicle, as this may cause dan-

gerous handling characteris-

tics resulting in loss of control.

Do not use tires other than the

manufacturer’s recommended

size, as this may cause danger-

ous handling characteristics

resulting in loss of control.

Four−wheel drive models:

Do not use tires of different

brands, sizes, construction or

tread patterns, as this may

cause dangerous handling

characteristics resulting in

loss of control.

Toyota recommends all four tires,

or at least both of the front or rear

tires be replaced at a time as a set.

See “If you have a flat tire” on page

379 for tire change procedure.

When a tire is replaced, the wheel

should always be balanced.

An unbalanced wheel may affect ve-

hicle handling and tire life. Wheels

can get out of balance with regular

use and should therefore be balanced

occasionally.

When replacing a tubeless tire, the

air valve should also be replaced

with a new one.

CY72009

To equalize the wear and help

extend tire life, Toyota

recommends that you rotate your

tires according to the maintenance

schedule. (For scheduled

maintenance information, please

refer to the “Scheduled

Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s

Manual Supplement”.) However,

the most appropriate timing for tire

rotation may vary according to

your driving habits and road

surface conditions.

06 06.07

Rotating tires

430 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

See “If you have a flat tire” on page

379 in Section 4 for tire change proce-

dure.

When rotating tires, check for uneven

wear and damage. Abnormal wear is

usually caused by incorrect tire pres-

sure, improper wheel alignment, out−

of−balance wheels, or severe braking.

WHEN TO USE SNOW TIRES OR

CHAINS

Snow tires or chains are recommended

when driving on snow or ice.

On wet or dry roads, conventional tires

provide better traction than snow tires.

SNOW TIRE SELECTION

If you need snow tires, select tires of

the same size, construction and load

capacity as the originally installed tires.

Also, on four−wheel drive models, all

the tires must be the same brand and

have the same tread patterns.

Do not use tires other than those men-

tioned above. Do not install studded tires

without first checking local regulations for

possible restrictions.

CAUTION

Observe the following instructions.

Otherwise, an accident may occur re-

sulting in death or serious injuries.

Do not use snow tires other than

the manufacturer’s recommended si-

ze, as this may cause dangerous

handling characteristics resulting in

loss of control.

Four−wheel drive models:

Do not use snow tires of different

brands, sizes, construction or tread

patterns, as this may cause danger-

ous handling characteristics result-

ing in loss of control.

SNOW TIRE INSTALLATION

Snow tires should be installed on all

wheels.

Installing snow tires on the front wheels

only can lead to an excessive difference

in road grip capability between the front

and rear tires which could cause loss of

vehicle control.

When storing removed tires, you should

store them in a cool dry place.

Mark the direction of rotation and be sure

to install them in the same direction when

replacing.

CAUTION

Do not drive with the snow tires

incorrectly inflated.

Never drive over 120 km/h (75 mph)

with any type of snow tires.

06 06.07

Installing snow tires and

chains

431

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

TIRE CHAIN SELECTION

Use the tire chains of correct size.

Regulations regarding the use of tire

chains vary according to location or

type of road, so always check local reg-

ulations before installing chains.

CHAIN INSTALLATION

Install the chains on the rear tires as

tightly as possible. Do not use tire

chains on the front tires. Retighten

chains after driving 0.5—1.0 km

(1/4—1/2 mile).

When installing chains on your tires, care-

fully follow the instructions of the chain

manufacturer.

If wheel covers are used, they will be

scratched by the chain band, so remove

the covers before putting on the chains.

CAUTION

Do not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) or

the chain manufacturer’s recom-

mended speed limit, whichever is

lower.

Drive carefully avoiding bumps,

holes, and sharp turns, which may

cause the vehicle to bounce.

Avoid sharp turns or locked−wheel

braking, as use of chains may ad-

versely affect vehicle handling.

When driving with chains installed,

be sure to drive carefully. Slow

down before entering curves to

avoid losing control of the vehicle.

Otherwise an accident may occur.

WHEN TO REPLACE YOUR WHEELS

If you have wheel damage such as

bending, cracks or heavy corrosion, the

wheel should be replaced.

If you fail to replace a damaged wheel,

the tire may slip off the wheel or cause

loss of handling control.

WHEEL SELECTION

When replacing wheels, care should be

taken to ensure that the wheels are re-

placed by ones with the same load ca-

pacity, diameter, rim width, and offset.

Correct replacement wheels are available

at your Toyota dealer.

A wheel of a different size or type may

adversely affect handling, wheel and bear-

ing life, brake cooling, speedometer/odom-

eter calibration, stopping ability, headlight

aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clear-

ance, and tire or snow chain clearance to

the body and chassis.

06 06.07

Replacing wheels

432 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Replacement with used wheels is not rec-

ommended as they may have been sub-

jected to rough treatment or high mileage

and could fail without warning. Also, bent

wheels which have been straightened may

have structural damage and therefore

should not be used. Never use an inner

tube in a leaking wheel which is designed

for a tubeless tire.

CAUTION

Observe the following instructions.

Otherwise, an accident may occur re-

sulting in death or serious injuries.

Do not use wheels other than the

manufacturer’s recommended size,

as this may cause dangerous han-

dling characteristics resulting in

loss of control.

Four−wheel drive models:

Do not use wheels of different

brands, sizes and types, as this

may cause dangerous handling

characteristics resulting in loss of

control.

When installing aluminum wheels,

check that the wheel nuts are tight

after driving your vehicle the first 1600

km (1000 miles).

If you have rotated, repaired or

changed your tires, check that the

wheel nuts are still tight after driving

1600 km (1000 miles).

When using tire chains, be careful not

to damage the aluminum wheels.

Use only Toyota wheel nuts and

wrench designed for your aluminum

wheels.

When balancing your wheels, use only

Toyota balance weights or equivalent

and a plastic or rubber hammer.

As with any wheel, periodically check

your aluminum wheels for damage. If

damaged, replace immediately.

06 06.07

Aluminum wheel precautions

433

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

Electrical components

Checking battery condition 434. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Battery recharging precautions 435. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checking and replacing fuses 436. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Adding washer fluid 437. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing light bulbs 438. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

06 06.07

SECTION

−

434 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CAUTION

BATTERY PRECAUTIONS

The battery produces flammable and

explosive hydrogen gas.

Do not cause a spark from the bat-

tery with tools.

Do not smoke or light a match near

the battery.

The electrolyte contains poisonous

and corrosive sulfuric acid.

Avoid contact with eyes, skin or

clothes.

Never ingest electrolyte.

Wear protective safety glasses when

working near the battery.

Keep children away from the bat-

tery.

EMERGENCY MEASURES

If electrolyte gets in your eyes,

flush your eyes with clean water

immediately and get immediate

medical attention. If possible, con-

tinue to apply water with a sponge

or cloth while en route to the medi-

cal office.

If electrolyte gets on your skin,

thoroughly wash the contact area. If

you feel pain or burning, get medi-

cal attention immediately.

If electrolyte gets on your clothes,

there is a possibility of its soaking

through to your skin, so immediate-

ly take off the exposed clothing and

follow the procedure above, if nec-

essary.

If you accidentally swallow electro-

lyte, drink a large quantity of water

or milk. Follow with milk of magne-

sia, beaten raw egg or vegetable

oil. Then go immediately for emer-

gency help.

CY73024

Terminals

Hold−down

clamp

Ground cable

Check the battery for corroded or loose

terminal connections, cracks, or loose

hold−down clamp.

a. If the battery is corroded, wash it off

with a solution of warm water and bak-

ing soda. Coat the outside of the termi-

nals with grease to prevent further cor-

rosion.

b. If the terminal connections are loose,

tighten their clamp nuts—but do not

overtighten.

c. Tighten the hold−down clamp only

enough to keep the battery firmly in

place. Overtightening may damage the

battery case.

06 06.07

Checking battery condition—

—Precautions —Checking battery exterior

435

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

NOTICE



Be sure the engine and all accesso-

ries are off before performing main-

tenance.



When checking the battery, remove

the ground cable from the negative

terminal (“−” mark) first and rein-

stall it last.



Be careful not to cause a short cir-

cuit with tools.



Take care no solution gets into the

battery when washing it.

If the battery is disconnected or run

down, the power window, power back win-

dow and moon roof may not operate auto-

matically, the jam protection function will

not function correctly, and the back door

will not open after you reconnect, replace

or recharge the battery. In any of these

cases, you should normalize the power

window, power back window, back door

and moon roof. To normalize them, see

“Power windows” on page 27, “Power back

window” on page 30, “Back door” on page

32 and “Electric moon roof” on page 39

in Section 1−2.

CY73015

Type A

Type B

Green

Blue

Dark

White Red

Clear or light

yellow

CHECKING BY INDICATOR

Check the battery condition by the indi-

cator color.

Indicator color

Condition

Type A Type B

Green Blue Good

Dark White

Charging necessary.

Have battery

checked by your

Toyota dealer.

Clear or

light

yellow Red Have battery

checked by your

Toyota dealer.

During recharging, the battery is pro-

ducing hydrogen gas.

Therefore, before recharging:

1. If recharging with the battery installed

on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect

the ground cable.

2. Be sure the power switch on the re-

charger is off when connecting the

charger cables to the battery and when

disconnecting them.

CAUTION

Always charge the battery in an un-

confined area. Do not charge the

battery in a garage or closed room

where there is not sufficient ventila-

tion.

Only do a slow charge (5 A or

less). Charging at a quicker rate is

dangerous. The battery may ex-

plode, causing personal injuries.

NOTICE

Never recharge the battery while the

engine is running. Also, be sure all

accessories are turned off.

06 06.07

—Checking battery condition Battery recharging precautions

436 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY73023

Type A

Type B

Type C

Good

Blown

CY73033

If the headlights or other electrical

components do not work, check the

fuses. If any of the fuses are blown,

they must be replaced.

See “Fuse locations” on page 414 in Sec-

tion 7−1 for locations of the fuses.

Turn the ignition switch and inoperative

component off. Pull the suspected fuse

straight out and check it.

Determine which fuse may be causing the

problem. The lid of the fuse box shows

the name of the circuit for each fuse. See

page 452 in Section 8 for the functions

controlled by each circuit.

Type A fuses can be pulled out by using

the pull−out tool. The location of the pull−

out tool is shown in the illustration.

If you are not sure whether the fuse has

blown, try replacing the suspected fuse

with one that you know is good.

If the fuse has blown, push a new fuse

into the clip.

Only install a fuse with the amperage rat-

ing designated on the fuse box lid.

If you do not have a spare fuse, in an

emergency you can pull out the “PWR

OUTLET” or “HEATER NO.2” fuse, which

may be dispensable for normal driving,

and use it if its amperage rating is the

same.

If you cannot use one of the same amper-

age, use one that is lower, but as close

to the rating as possible. If the amperage

is lower than that specified, the fuse

might blow out again but this does not

indicate anything wrong. Be sure to get

the correct fuse as soon as possible and

return the substitute to its original clip.

It is a good idea to purchase a set of

spare fuses and keep them in your ve-

hicle for emergencies.

06 06.07

Checking and replacing fuses

437

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

If the new fuse immediately blows out,

there is a problem with the electrical sys-

tem. Have your Toyota dealer correct it as

soon as possible.

CAUTION

Never use a fuse with a higher am-

perage rating, or any other object, in

place of a fuse. This may cause ex-

tensive damage and possibly a fire.

CY73025

If any washer does not work, the wash-

er tank may be empty. Check the wash-

er fluid level on the level gauge. If the

washer fluid level is below “LOW” or

only slightly above the “LOW” level,

add washer fluid.

For vehicles sold in Canada—

If any washer does not work or low

windshield washer fluid level warning

light comes on, the washer tank may be

empty. Add washer fluid.

You may use plain water as washer fluid.

However, in cold areas where tempera-

tures range below the freezing point, use

washer fluid containing antifreeze. This

product is available at your Toyota dealer

and most auto parts stores. Follow the

manufacturer’s directions for how much to

mix with water.

NOTICE

Do not use engine antifreeze or any

other substitute because it may dam-

age your vehicle’s paint.

06 06.07

Adding washer fluid

438 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

The following illustrations show how to

gain access to the bulbs. When replacing

a bulb, make sure the ignition switch and

light switch are off. Use bulbs with the

wattage ratings given in the table.

The stop/tail and rear side marker lights

consist of a number of LEDs. If any of

the LEDs burn out, take your vehicle to

your Toyota dealer to have the light re-

placed.

CAUTION

To prevent burning yourself, do not

replace the light bulbs while they

are hot.

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas

inside and require special handling.

They can burst or shatter if

scratched or dropped. Hold a bulb

only by its plastic or metal case.

Do not touch the glass part of a

bulb with bare hands.

NOTICE

Only use a bulb of the listed type.

The inside of the lens of exterior lights

such as headlights may temporarily fog up

when the lens becomes wet in the rain or

in a car wash. This is not a problem

because the fogging is caused by the

temperature difference between the outside

and inside of the lens, just like the

windshield fogs up in the rain. However, if

there is a large drop of water on the

inside of the lens, or if there is water

pooled inside the light, contact your

Toyota dealer.

06 06.07

Replacing light bulbs—

439

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

A: HB3 halogen bulbs

B: H11 halogen bulbs

C: HB4 halogen bulbs

D: Wedge base bulbs (amber)

E: Single end bulbs

F: Wedge base bulbs (clear)

G: Double end bulbs

06 06.07

9005

TypeWBulb No.Light bulbs

Headlights (high beam)

Headlights (low beam)

Front fog lights

Parking and front side marker lights

Front turn signal lights

Rear turn signal lights

Back−up lights

License plate lights

High mounted stoplight

Interior light

Personal lights

Vanity lights

Door courtesy lights

Glove box light

Luggage compartment light

Running board lights

—

9006

168

—

921

—

921

168

1156NA

3.8

1.2

3.8

440 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY73039

High beam

(inside)

Low beam

(outside)

1. Turn the bulb base counterclockwise

to the front of the vehicle as shown.

CY73004

2. Unplug the connector while depress-

ing the lock release.

If the connector is tight, wiggle it.

CY73040

3. Install a new bulb and connector

into the mounting hole and turn

them clockwise to the front of the

vehicle.

Aiming is not necessary after replacing

the bulb. When aiming adjustment is nec-

essary, contact your Toyota dealer.

06 06.07

—Headlights

441

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY73041

1. Turn the bulb base counterclockwise

to the front of the vehicle as shown.

CY73009

2. Unplug the connector while depress-

ing the lock release.

If the connector is tight, wiggle it.

CY73042

3. Install a new bulb and connector

into the mounting hole and turn

them clockwise to the front of the

vehicle.

06 06.07

—Front fog lights

442 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY73043

CY73044

CY73045

CY73046

CY73047

Use a flathead screwdriver which is

wrapped with a cloth.

CY73048

06 06.07

—Parking and front side

marker lights —Front turn signal lights —Rear turn signal and

back−up lights

443

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY73049

a: Rear turn signal light

b: Back−up light

CY73028

Use a Phillips−head screwdriver.

CY73029

CY73030

Clips

Disconnect the clips by using a flathead

screwdriver which is wrapped with a

cloth.

06 06.07

—License plate lights —High mounted stoplight

444 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY73031

CY73032

06 06.07

293

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND

CONTROLS

Other equipment

Multi−information display 294. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Compass 297. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear view monitor system 302. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Power outlet 305. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Glove box 307. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Garage door opener 308. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Auxiliary boxes 312. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear console box 314. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tissue box holder 315. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Coin holder 316. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Trash holder 316. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front cup holders 317. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear cup holders and tray 318. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear cup holders 320. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Bottle holders 320. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tie−down hooks 321. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Grocery bag hooks 321. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cargo net hooks 322. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Luggage cover 322. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Double deck 323. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Roof luggage carrier 324. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Floor mat 326. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

06 06.07

SECTION

−

294 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

1. “RESET” button

2. “MODE” button

3. Air conditioning system without “DUAL”

button—Cruise information display

Air conditioning system with “DUAL”

button—Outside temperature and cruise

information display

4. Clock

5. Air conditioning system without “DUAL”

button only—Outside temperature

display

6. “:00” button

7. “M” button

8. “H” button

06 06.07

Multi−information display—

CY19124y

295

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Operate the multi−information display

with the ignition switch on.

When the ignition switch is turned to

“ON”, the last previously used mode dis-

played just before the ignition switch is

turned off will appear.

If the electrical power source has been

disconnected from the multi−information

display, the display will automatically be

set to the initial mode.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the display while the

vehicle is moving. Be sure to adjust

the display only when the vehicle is

stopped.

CY19001

To reset the hour: Push the “H” button.

To reset the minutes: Push the “M” button.

If quick adjustment to a full hour is de-

sired, push the “:00” button.

For example, if the “:00” button is de-

pressed when the time is between

1:01—1:29, the time will change to 1:00.

If the time is between 1:30—1:59, the

time will change to 2:00.

The key must be in the “ACC” or “ON”

position.

If the electrical power source has been

disconnected from the clock, the time dis-

play will automatically be set to 1:00 (one

o’clock).

CY19082

The displayed temperature ranges from

−30C (−22F) up to 50C (122F).

The key must be in the “ON” position.

If an abnormality exists in the connection

of the outside air temperature sensor,

“−−C” (“−−F”) will appear on the display.

If “−−C” (“−−F”) appears on the display,

contact your Toyota dealer.

There may be a case that “−−C” (“−−F”)

appears momentarily when the ignition is

quickly turned to “ON”. It is normal if it

goes out soon.

06 06.07

—Before using the

multi−information display —Clock

—Outside temperature display

(air conditioning system

without “DUAL” button)

296 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY19121

Air conditioning system with

“DUAL” button only—

The outside temperature display (air

conditioning system with “DUAL” but-

ton) and cruise information display indi-

cates the following information.

Every time you push the “MODE” but-

ton, the display toggles through this

information.

1. Outside temperature

2. Driving range

3. Average fuel consumption

4. Average vehicle speed

5. Display off

The displayed values in the cruise infor-

mation display indicate general driving

conditions. Accuracy varies with driving

habits and road conditions.

1. Outside temperature (“OUTSIDE F”

or “OUTSIDE C”)

The displayed value is updated every 1

second.

The displayed temperature ranges from

−30C (−22F) up to 50C (122F).

If an abnormality exists in the connection

of the outside air temperature sensor,

“−−C” (“−−F”) will appear on the display.

If “−−C” (“−−F”) appears on the display,

contact your Toyota dealer.

There may be a case that “−−C” (“−−F”)

appears momentarily when the ignition is

quickly turned to “ON”. It is normal if it

goes out soon.

06 06.07

—Cruise information display

297

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

2. Driving range

(“RANGE MI” or “RANGE km”)

The distance the vehicle can travel with

the remaining fuel is calculated and

displayed based on the quantity of re-

maining fuel and past fuel consumption.

The driving range display indicates the

approximate distance that you can drive

until the fuel gauge reaches “E”. It is

different from the actual distance traveled.

The displayed value is updated about ev-

ery 10 seconds.

Every time you refuel the vehicle, the cal-

culation is reset.

The actual driving range varies with driv-

ing habits and road conditions. If fuel con-

sumption is good, the driving range will be

longer than indicated. If fuel consumption

is poor, the driving range will be shorter

than indicated.

If the low fuel level warning light comes

on, refuel the vehicle even if the display

indicates that the vehicle can be driven

further.

3. Average fuel consumption

(“AVG. MPG” or “AVG. L/100 km”)

Average fuel consumption is calculated

and displayed based on total driving

distance and total fuel consumption

with the engine running.

The displayed value is updated about ev-

ery 10 seconds.

To reset the calculation, push the

“RESET” button about 1 second.

4. Average vehicle speed

(“AVG. MPH” or “AVG. km/h”)

Average vehicle speed is calculated and

displayed based on total driving dis-

tance and total driving time with the

engine running.

The displayed value is updated about ev-

ery 10 seconds.

To reset the calculation, push the

“RESET” button about 1 second.

CY19138

The direction is indicated on the inside

rear view mirror.

If the ignition switch was turned off with

the system on, the system will automati-

cally turn back on when the ignition switch

is turned on.

Push the “ ” switch for longer than 3

seconds turn the compass system on and

off.

06 06.07

Compass

298 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

The compass indicates the direction

that the vehicle is heading. In the

above case, it shows that the vehicle is

heading north.

Displays Directions

North

Northeast

East

Southeast

South

Southwest

West

Northwest

The compass may not show the correct

direction in the following conditions:

The vehicle is stopped immediately af-

ter turning.

The compass does not adjust while the

vehicle is stopped.

The ignition switch is turned off imme-

diately after turning.

The vehicle is on an inclined surface.

The vehicle is in a place where the

earth’s magnetic field is subject to in-

terference by artificial magnetic fields

(underground parking, under a steel

tower, between buildings, roof parking,

near a crossing, near a large vehicle,

etc.).

The vehicle is magnetized. (There is a

magnet or a metal object on or near

the inside rear view mirror.)

The battery has been disconnected.

If your vehicle is out of the set zone,

refer to “CALIBRATING THE COMPASS”

below to set the zone number.

If the deviation is small, the compass

works to calibrate the direction automati-

cally while the vehicle is in motion.

For additional precision or for complete

calibrating, see “CALIBRATING THE

COMPASS” below.

CY19139

Compass sensor

The compass sensor is in the inside

rear view mirror.

NOTICE

Do not put magnets or a metal object

on or near the inside rear view mirror

of the vehicle. Doing this may cause

malfunction of the compass sensor.

06 06.07

299

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY19140

CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (deviation

calibration)

The direction display on the compass

deviates from the true direction deter-

mined by the earth’s magnetic field. The

angle of deviation varies according to the

geographic position of the vehicle.

To adjust this deviation, stop the vehicle,

then push and hold the “ ” switch until

the zone number appears on the display.

Then push the “ ” switch, referring to

the following map to select the number of

the zone where the vehicle is.

06 06.07

300 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Zone numbers

After calibration, leaving the system for

several seconds returns it to the compass

mode.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the display while the

vehicle is moving. Be sure to adjust

the display only when the vehicle is

stopped.

06 06.07

Z19004y

Samoa: 5 Guam: 8 Saipan: 8

301

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY19141

CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (circling

calibration)

Sometimes the direction display on the

compass may not change after a turn. To

rectify this, stop the vehicle and push and

hold the “ ” switch until “C” appears on

the display.

If “C” appears on the display because of

a drastic change in the magnetic field,

perform circling calibration.

CY19033

Drive the vehicle in a circle at 8 km/h (5

mph) or less. If there is not enough space

to drive in a circle, drive around the

block.

After driving 1 to 3 circles in the above

method, calibration is completed when the

direction is shown on the display.

If calibration cannot be performed because

of the magnetized vehicle etc., take your

vehicle to Toyota dealer.

Perform circling calibration just after

you have purchased your Toyota. And

then always perform circling calibration

after the battery has been removed, re-

placed or disconnected.

Do not perform circling calibration of

the compass in a place where the

earth’s magnetic field is subject to in-

terference by artificial magnetic fields

(underground parking, under a steel

tower, between buildings, roof parking,

near a crossing, near a large vehicle,

etc.).

During calibration, do not operate elec-

tric systems (moon roof, power win-

dows, etc.) as they may interfere with

the calibration.

06 06.07

302 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CAUTION

When doing the circling calibration,

be sure to secure a wide space,

and watch out for people and ve-

hicles in the neighborhood. Do not

violate any local traffic rules while

performing circling calibration.

Do not adjust the display while the

vehicle is moving. Be sure to adjust

the display only when the vehicle is

stopped.

The rear view monitor system assists

the driver by displaying an image of

the view behind the vehicle while back-

ing up. The image is displayed in re-

verse on the screen. This allows the

image to appear in the same manner as

that of the rear view mirror.

To display the rear view image on the

screen, place the selector lever in the

“R” position when the ignition switch is

in the “ON” position.

If you move the selector lever out of the

“R” position, the screen returns to the

previous screen. Operating another func-

tion of the navigation system will display

another screen.

The rear view monitor system is a supple-

ment device intended to assist back up.

When backing up, be sure to check be-

hind and all around the vehicle visually.

CAUTION

Never depend on the rear view

monitor system entirely when back-

ing up. Always make sure your in-

tended path is clear.

Use caution, just as you would

when backing up any vehicle.

Never back up while looking only at

the screen. The image on the

screen is different from actual con-

ditions. Depicted distances between

objects and flat surfaces will differ

from actual distance. If you back up

while looking only at the screen,

you may hit a vehicle, a person or

an object. When backing up, be

sure to check behind and all around

the vehicle visually and with mir-

rors before proceeding.

06 06.07

Rear view monitor system

303

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

Do not use the system when the

back door is not completely closed.

If the back of the vehicle is hit, the

position and mounting angle of the

camera may change. Be sure to

have the camera’s position and

mounting angle checked at your

Toyota dealer.

If the temperature changes rapidly,

such as when hot water is poured

on the vehicle in cold weather, the

system may not operate normally.

If the camera lens becomes dirty, it

cannot transmit a clear image. If

water droplets, snow, or mud ad-

here to the lens, rinse with water

and wipe with a soft cloth. If the

lens is extremely dirty, wash it with

a mild cleanser and rinse.

Use your own eyes to confirm the

vehicle’s surroundings, as the dis-

played image may become faint or

dark, and moving images will be

distorted, or not entirely visible

when the outside temperature is

low. When backing up, be sure to

check behind and all around the ve-

hicle visually and with mirror before

proceeding.

When replacing the tires, please consult

your Toyota dealer. If you replace the

tires, the area displayed on the screen

may change.

NCY002

On screen

Corners of bumper

06 06.07

304 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

AREA DISPLAYED ON SCREEN

Image is displayed approximately level

on screen.

The area detected by the camera is

limited. The camera does not detect

objects which are close to either

corner of the bumper or under the

bumper.

The area displayed on the screen

may vary according to vehicle orien-

tation or road conditions.

CY19136

THE REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM

CAMERA

The rear view monitor system camera is

located on the back door as shown in the

illustration. The camera uses a special

lens. The distance of the image that ap-

pears on the screen differs from the actu-

al distance.

In the following cases, it may become

difficult to see the images on the screen,

even when the system is functioning.

In the dark (for example, at night)

When the temperature near the lens is

high or low

When water droplets are adhering to

the camera, or when humidity is high

(for example, when it rains)

When foreign matter (for example,

snow or mud) is adhering to the cam-

era

When the sun or the beam of head-

lights is shining directly into the cam-

era lens

06 06.07

305

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY19118

If a bright light (for example, sunlight re-

flected off the vehicle body) is picked up

by the camera, the smear effect∗ peculiar

to the camera may occur.

∗: Smear effect—A phenomenon that oc-

curs when a bright light (for example, sun-

light reflected off the vehicle body) is

picked up by the camera; when trans-

mitted by the camera, the light source

appears to have a vertical streak above

and below it.

CY19035

Rear console box

CY19002

Luggage compartment

The power outlets are designed for

power supply for car accessories.

In the rear console box—To use the

power outlet, push the lid of the auxil-

iary box to open.

The key must be in the “ACC” or “ON”

position for the power outlet to be used.

06 06.07

Power outlet (12 VDC)

306 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

NOTICE



To prevent the fuse from being

blown, do not use the electricity

over the total vehicle capacity of 12

VDC/120W.



To prevent the battery from being

discharged, do not use the power

outlets longer than necessary when

the engine is not running.



Close the power outlet lids when

the power outlets are not in use.

Inserting anything other than an ap-

propriate plug that fits the outlet,

or allowing any liquid to get into

the outlet may cause electrical fail-

ure or short circuits.

CY19137

This power outlet is designed for use

as a power supply for electric ap-

pliances in the vehicle.

The key must be in the “ON” position for

the power outlet to be used.

The maximum capacity for this power out-

let is 115 VAC/100W. If you attempt to

use an appliance that requires more than

115 VAC or 100W, the protection circuit

will activate and cut the power supply.

The power supply will restart automatically

when you use an appliance that operates

within the 115 VAC/100W limits.

CY19135

To use the power outlet, push the main

switch on the instrument panel.

An indicator light will illuminate to indicate

that the power outlet is ready for use.

Push the main switch once again to turn

the power outlet off. When the power out-

let is not in use, make sure that the main

switch is turned off.

06 06.07

Power outlet (115 VAC)

307

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

NOTICE



To prevent the battery from being

discharged, do not use the power

outlet longer than necessary when

the engine is not running.



Close the power outlet lid when the

power outlet is not in use. Inserting

anything other than an appropriate

plug that fits the outlet may cause

electrical failure or short circuits.

The power outlet is not designed for

the following electric appliances even

though their power consumption is un-

der 115 VAC/100W. These appliances

may not operate properly.

Appliances with high initial peak watt-

age: cathode−ray tube type televisions,

compressor−driven refrigerators, electric

pumps, electric tools, etc.

Measuring devices which process pre-

cise data: medical equipment, measur-

ing instruments, etc.

Other appliances requiring an extremely

stable power supply: microcomputer−

controlled electric blankets, touch sen-

sor lamps, etc.

Certain electrical appliances may cause

radio noise.

CY19127

To use the glove box:

Open by pulling the lever.

Lock by inserting the master key and turn-

ing it clockwise.

Unlock by inserting the master key and

turning it counterclockwise.

With the instrument panel lights on, the

glove box light will come on.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden stop,

always keep the glove box door

closed while driving.

06 06.07

Glove box

308 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY19070

On some models, an auxiliary box is

located inside the glove box.

To increase the capacity of the glove box,

raise the lower panel of the auxiliary box.

CY19130

Indicator light

Buttons

The garage door opener ( 

Universal Transceiver) is manufactured

under license from HomeLink and can

be programmed to operate garage

doors, gates, entry doors, door locks,

home lighting systems, and security

systems, etc.

06 06.07

Garage door opener

309

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

(a) Programming the HomeLink

The HomeLink in your vehicle has 3

buttons and you can store one program

for each button.

To ensure correct programming into the

HomeLink, install a new battery in the

hand−held transmitter prior to program-

ming.

The battery side of the hand−held trans-

mitter must be pointed away from the

HomeLink during the programming pro-

cess.

For Canadian users, follow the procedure

in “Programming an entrance gate/pro-

gramming all devices in the Canadian

market”.

1. Decide which of 3 HomeLink buttons

you want to program.

CY19131

HomeLink

25 to 75 mm

(1 to 3 in.)

Hand−held

garage

transmitter

2. Place your hand−held garage transmit-

ter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.) away from

the surface of the HomeLink.

Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink

in view while programming.

CY19132

3. Simultaneously press and hold the

hand−held garage transmitter button

along with the selected HomeLink but-

ton.

Do not release the buttons until step 4

has been completed.

4. When the indicator light on the

HomeLink changes from a slow to a

rapid flash after 20 seconds, you can

release both buttons.

06 06.07

310 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY19034

5. Test the operation of the HomeLink by

pressing the newly programmed button.

If programming a garage door opener,

check to see if the garage door opens

and closes.

If the garage door does not operate,

identify if your garage transmitter is of the

“Rolling Code” type. Press and hold the

programmed HomeLink button. The

garage door has the rolling code feature if

the indicator light (on the HomeLink)

flashes rapidly and then remains lit after 2

seconds. If your garage transmitter is the

“Rolling Code” type, proceed to the

heading “Programming a rolling code

system”.

6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each re-

maining HomeLink button to program

another device.

Programming a rolling code system

If your device is “Rolling Code”

equipped, it is necessary to follow

steps 1 through 4 under the heading

“Programming the HomeLink” before

proceeding with the steps listed below.

1. Locate the “training” button on the ceil-

ing mounted garage door opener motor.

The exact location and color of the

button may vary by brand of garage

door opener. Refer to the owner’s

guide supplied by the garage door

opener manufacturer for the location of

this “training” button.

2. Press the “training” button on the ceil-

ing mounted garage door opener motor.

Following this step, you have 30 seconds

in which to initiate step 3 below.

3. Press and release the vehicle’s pro-

grammed HomeLink button twice. The

garage door may open. If the door

does open, the programming process is

complete. If the door does not open,

press and release the button a third

time. This third press and release will

complete the programming process by

opening the garage door.

The ceiling mounted garage door opener

motor should now recognize the

HomeLink unit and be able activate the

garage door up/down.

4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each re-

maining HomeLink button to program

another rolling code system.

Programming an entrance gate/program-

ming all devices in the Canadian market

1. Decide which of the 3 HomeLink but-

tons you want to program.

2. Place your hand−held gate/device

transmitter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.)

away from the surface of the

HomeLink.

Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink

in view while programming.

3. Press and hold the selected

HomeLink button.

4. Continuously press and release (cycle)

the hand−held gate/device transmitter

button every two seconds until step 5

is complete.

5. When the indicator light on the

HomeLink changes from a slow to a

rapid flash after 20 seconds, you can

release both buttons.

06 06.07

311

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

6. Test the operation of the HomeLink by

pressing the newly programmed button.

Check to see if the gate/device oper-

ates correctly.

7. Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each re-

maining HomeLink button to program

another device.

Programming other devices

To program other devices such as home

security systems, home door locks or

lighting, contact your authorized Toyota

dealer for assistance.

Reprogramming a button

Individual HomeLink buttons cannot be

erased, however, to reprogram a single

button, follow the procedure “Programming

the HomeLink”.

(b) Operating the HomeLink

To operate the HomeLink, press the

appropriate HomeLink button to activate

the programmed device. The HomeLink

indicator light should come on. The

HomeLink continues to send the signal

for up to 20 seconds as long as the

button is pressed.

CY19133

memory (all three programs)

To erase all previously programmed codes

at one time, press and hold down the 2

outside buttons for 20 seconds until the

indicator light flashes.

If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase

the programs stored in the HomeLink

memory.

For additional programming assistance

with your HomeLink Universal

Transceiver call the:

The Toyota Customer Experience

Center at 1−800−331−4331 (U.S.A.)

Toyota Canada Customer Interaction

Centre at 1−888−869−6828 (Canada)

Refer to HomeLink on the internet at:

WWW.HOMELINK.COM

06 06.07

312 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CAUTION

When programming the HomeLink

Universal Transceiver, you may be

operating a garage door or other

device. Make sure people and ob-

jects are out of the way of the ga-

rage door or other device to pre-

vent potential harm or damage.

Do not use this HomeLink Univer-

sal Transceiver with any garage

door opener that lacks the safety

stop and reverse feature as re-

quired by federal safety standards.

(This includes any garage door

opener model manufactured before

April 1, 1982.) A garage door open-

er which cannot detect an object

(signaling the door to stop and re-

verse), does not meet current feder-

al safety standards. Using a garage

door opener without these features

increases risk of serious injury or

death.

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules and with RSS−210 of the IC

Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

WARNING: This transmitter has been

tested and complies with FCC and IC

rules. Changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party re-

sponsible for compliance could void

the user’s authority to operate the

device.

To use the auxiliary boxes, open the

lids as shown in the following illustra-

tions.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden

stop, always keep the auxiliary box

closed while driving.

Type A—As this holder is designed

for holding a light object such as

eyeglasses, do not place any heavy

objects in them. Heavy objects may

cause the holder to open and the

contents to fly out resulting in inju-

ries.

NOTICE

Type A—During hot weather, the inte-

rior of the vehicle becomes very hot.

Do not leave anything flammable or

deformable such as a lighter, glasses,

etc. inside.

06 06.07

Auxiliary boxes—

313

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY19005

Type A (overhead console)

CY19007

Type B (instrument panel)

CY19036

Type C (rear console box)

CY19112

Type D (rear tire house)

CY19069

Type E (right side of luggage compart-

ment)

06 06.07

314 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY19074

The right side of luggage compartment

auxiliary box is equipped with a belt to

hold the objects.

To use the belt, do the following.

1. To loosen: Pull the buckle forward.

2. To tighten: Pull on the belt.

Make sure the objects are securely held.

CY19071

CONSOLE BOX TABLE

To use the console box table, open it.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden stop,

always keep the table closed while

driving.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the table, do

not place any object heavier than 1

kg (2.20 lb.) on it, and do not leave

any object on the table for a long

time.

06 06.07

—Using the holding belts Rear console box

315

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY19104

CONSOLE BOX

To access the rear console box, pull up

the console box lid while pushing the

lock release button.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden stop,

always keep the console box closed

while driving.

CY19105

The rear console box is equipped with

a tissue box holder on the inside of the

rear console box lid.

To use the tissue box holder:

1. Pull up the console box lid while push-

ing the lock release button.

2. Place a tissue box in the lid.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden stop

while driving, keep the console box

lid closed when it is not in use.

06 06.07

Tissue box holder

316 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY19106

The rear console box is equipped with

a coin holder.

To use the coin holder:

1. Pull up the console box lid while push-

ing the lock release button.

2. Push coins down into the holder.

The coin holder is detachable.

CY19038

06 06.07

Coin holder Trash holder

317

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

The trash holder is designed to use the

grocery bag as a trash bag.

To use the trash holder:

1. Raise the trash holder.

2. Fit the grocery bag onto the holder by

hanging its handles on the two hooks

indicated at the left and right.

The trash holder can support to 1 kg

(2.20 lb.).

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden stop

while driving, keep the trash holder

closed when it is not in use.

CY19064

If the trash holder is pulled strongly or

stepped on, it will detach from the rear

console box to protect it from damag-

ing.

If the trash holder becomes detached, re-

install it in a horizontal direction as indi-

cated in the illustration. It cannot be

installed in any other direction.

NOTICE

Do not deliberately pull or step on

the trash holder, as it may be dam-

aged or broken.

CY19111

06 06.07

Front cup holders

318 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

The cup holders are designed for hold-

ing cups or drink−cans securely.

The cup holder can be adjustable to the

size of the cups or drink−cans by

changing the holder position and the

arm position, as shown.

With the instrument panel lights on, the

front cup holder position indicator lights

will come on.

CAUTION

Do not place anything else other than

cups or drink−cans in the cup holder,

as such items may be thrown about

in the compartment and possibly in-

jured people in the vehicle during

sudden braking or in an accident.

CY19075

The rear cup holders and tray are

housed in the armrest.

The cup holders are designed to hold

cups or beverage cans securely.

1. To use the rear cup holders and tray,

pull the armrest out.

CY19100

06 06.07

Rear cup holders and tray

(vehicles without third seats)

319

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

2. To use the rear cup holder, push and

pull it out.

CY19101

3. To use the tray, pull it out.

CAUTION

Do not place anything else other

than cups or drink−cans in the cup

holder, as such items may be

thrown about in the compartment

and possibly injure people in the

vehicle during sudden braking or in

an accident.

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or sudden stop

while driving, keep the cup holder

closed when it is not in use.

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden

stop, always keep the tray closed

while driving.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the tray, do not

place any object heavier than 2 kg

(4.40 lb.) on it, and do not leave any

object on the tray for a long time.

06 06.07

320 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY19114

Type A (armrest)

CY19113

Type B (rear tire house)

The cup holders are designed for hold-

ing cups or drink−cans securely.

Type A—To use the holder, pull the arm-

rest out and push the lid.

CAUTION

Do not place anything else other

than cups or drink−cans in the cup

holder, as such items may be

thrown about in the compartment

and possibly injure people in the

vehicle during sudden braking or in

an accident.

Type A—To reduce the chance of

injury in case of an accident or

sudden stop while driving, keep the

cup holder closed when it is not in

use.

CY19015

Front doors

CY19016

Rear doors

06 06.07

Rear cup holders

(vehicles with third seats) Bottle holders

321

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

The bottle holders are designed to hold

bottles securely.

CAUTION

Do not attempt to use the holder for

any other purpose for which it was

intended. Inappropriately sized or

shaped objects may be thrown about

in the compartment and possibly in-

jure people in the vehicle during a

sudden braking or an accident.

NOTICE

Do not put a cup or open bottle in

the bottle holder because the con-

tents may spill when the door opens

or closes.

CY19044

To secure your luggage, use the tie−

down hooks as shown above.

See “—Stowage precautions” on page 351

in Section 2 for precautions when loading

luggage.

CAUTION

To avoid personal injury, keep the tie−

down hooks folded in place on the

floor when not in use.

NOTICE

Do not use the seat anchors instead

of the tie−down hooks.

CY19076

These hooks are designed to hang

things like grocery bags.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the hook, do

not hang any object heavier than 1 kg

(2.20 lb.) in it.

06 06.07

Tie−down hooks Grocery bag hooks

322 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY19045

These hooks are designed to hang the

cargo net.

To hang the cargo net, use the cargo net

hooks and rear tie−down hooks.

Although the cargo net itself is not in-

cluded as an original equipment, these

hooks can be used to hang the cargo net.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the hook, avoid

hanging things other than a cargo net

on it.

CY19103

USING LUGGAGE COVER

To use the luggage cover:

1. Attach the front hooks of the lug-

gage cover to the head restraint.

2. Pull out the rear luggage cover and

hook it on the anchors.

CAUTION

Do not place anything on the luggage

cover. Such items may be thrown

about and possibly injure people in

the vehicle during sudden braking or

a collision.

06 06.07

Cargo net hooks Luggage cover

323

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY19067

REMOVING LUGGAGE COVER

To remove the luggage cover, detach its

hooks from the head restraint. Then,

retract and release both ends, and re-

move the luggage cover.

After you remove the luggage cover, place

it somewhere other than the passenger

compartment. This will prevent passengers

from injury in the event of a sudden stop

or accident.

CY19058

To use the double deck:

1. Turn the left and right knobs from

the “LOCK” position to the

“UNLOCK” position.

CY19068

2. Hold the handle and raise the double

deck on the rear tire houses.

06 06.07

Double deck

324 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY19052

3. Turn the left and right knobs from

the “UNLOCK” position to the

“LOCK” position.

Make sure the double deck is securely

locked.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or sudden stop,

make sure that the double deck

knobs are always in the “LOCK” posi-

tion when the double deck is in the

raised or lowered position.

NOTICE

When using the double deck at the

raised position, do not place any ob-

ject heavier than 30 kg (66 lb.).

CY19129

06 06.07

Roof luggage carrier

325

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

The roof luggage carrier consists of

roof rails (1) attached to the roof and

sliding cross rails (2).

To adjust the positions of cross rails, do

this.

1. Turn the knobs counterclockwise to

loosen the cross rails.

2. Slide the cross rails to the desired

position for loading the luggages of

various sizes.

3. After adjusting, be sure to tighten the

cross rails by turning knobs clockwise.

Follow the manufacturer’s instructions and

precautions when installing the attach-

ments or their equivalent.

When there is no luggage on the roof

luggage carrier, Toyota recommends that

the front and rear cross rails be secured

in the positions indicated in the illustra-

tion, according to the following procedure.

This may diminish wind noise during driv-

ing.

CAUTION

When you load cargo on the roof lug-

gage carrier, observe the following:

Place the cargo so that its weight

is distributed evenly between the

front and rear axles.

If loading long or wide cargo, never

exceed the vehicle overall length or

width. (See “Dimensions and

weights” on page 446 in Section 8

for information on your vehicle

overall length and width.)

Before driving, make sure the cargo

is securely fastened on the roof

luggage carrier.

Loading cargo on the roof luggage

carrier will make the center of the

vehicle gravity higher. Avoid high

speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns,

sudden braking or abrupt maneu-

vers, otherwise it may result in loss

of control or vehicle rollover due to

failure to operate this vehicle cor-

rectly.

If driving for a long distance, on

rough roads, or at high speeds,

stop the vehicle now and then dur-

ing the trip to make sure the cargo

remains in its place.

Do not exceed 54 kg (120 lb.) cargo

weight on the roof luggage carrier.

NOTICE

When loading the luggages, be careful

not to scratch the surface of the

moon roof.

06 06.07

326 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06 Prod. (OM35866U)

CY19047

Use a floor mat of the correct size.

If the vehicle carpet and floor mat have

2 holes, then they are designed for use

with locking clips. Attach the floor mat to

the vehicle carpet using the clips. Look

the clips into the holes in the vehicle

carpet.

CY19048

CAUTION

Make sure the floor mat is properly

placed on the vehicle carpet. If the

floor mat slips and interferes with the

movement of the pedals during driv-

ing, it may cause an accident.

06 06.07

Floor mat

i2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06Prod. (OM35866U)

Foreword

Welcome to the growing group of value−conscious people who drive Toyotas. We are proud of the advanced engineering and

quality construction of each vehicle we build.

This Owner’s Manual explains the operation of your new Toyota. Please read it thoroughly and have all the occupants

follow the instructions carefully. Doing so will help you enjoy many years of safe and trouble−free motoring. For

important information about this manual and your Toyota, read the following pages carefully.

When it comes to service, remember that your Toyota dealer knows your vehicle very well and is interested in your complete

satisfaction. Your Toyota dealer will provide quality maintenance and any other assistance you may require.

If there is not a Toyota dealer near you, please call the following number:

U.S. OWNERS: When traveling in the U.S. mainland or Canada:

Toyota Customer Experience Center Toll−free:1−800−331−4331

Hawaii:

Servco Automotive Customer Services Toll−free:1−888−272−5515

CANADIAN OWNERS: When traveling in Canada or the U.S. mainland:

Toyota Canada Customer Interaction Centre Toll−free:1−888−TOYOTA−8 or 1−888−869−6828

Please leave this Owner’s Manual in this vehicle at the time of resale. The next owner will need this information also.

All information and specifications in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of Toyota’s policy of

continual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.

Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may

find some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.

Please access our websites for further information.

The U.S. mainland www.toyota.com

Hawaii www.toyotahawaii.com

Canada www.toyota.ca

2006 TOYOTA MOTOR CORPORATION

Motor Corporation.

06 06.07

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06Prod. (OM35866U)

06 06.07

Publication No. OM35866U

Part No. 01999-35866

Printed in Japan 01−0607−00

4 ( U)

Quick index

If a service reminder indicator or warning buzzer comes on 147. . . . . . . .

If your vehicle will not start 374. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If your engine stalls while driving 377. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If your vehicle overheats 378. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If you have a flat tire 379. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If your vehicle needs to be towed 389. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tips for driving during break−in period 329. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

How to start the engine 356. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General maintenance 407. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Complete index NO TAG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Gas station information

Fuel type:

UNLEADED gasoline, Octane Rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or

higher.

See page 329 for detailed information.

Fuel tank capacity:

87 L (23.0 gal., 19.1 Imp. gal.)

Engine oil:

ILSAC multigrade engine oil is recommended.

See page 421 for detailed information.

Tire information: See pages 425 through 432.

Tire inflation pressure: See page 451.

U−2

ii 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06Prod. (OM35866U)

Important information about this manual

Safety and vehicle damage warnings

Throughout this manual, you will see safety and vehicle dam-

age warnings. You must follow these warnings carefully to

avoid possible injury or damage.

The types of warnings, what they look like, and how they are

used in this manual are explained as follows:

CAUTION

This is a warning against anything which may cause

injury to people if the warning is ignored. You are

informed about what you must or must not do in

order to reduce the risk of injury to yourself and

others.

NOTICE

This is a warning against anything which may cause

damage to the vehicle or its equipment if the warning

is ignored. You are informed about what you must or

must not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of

damage to your vehicle and its equipment.

Safety symbol

When you see the safety symbol

shown above, it means: “Do not...”;

“Do not do this”; or “Do not let this

happen”.

06 06.07

iii 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06Prod. (OM35866U)

Important information about your Toyota

Occupant restraint systems

Toyota encourages you and your family to take the time to

read Section 1−3 of this Owner’s Manual carefully. In

terms of helping you understand how you can receive the

maximum benefit of the occupant restraint systems this

vehicle provides, Section 1−3 of this Owner’s Manual is

the most important Section for you and your family to

read.

Section 1−3 describes the function and operation concern-

ing seats, seat belts, SRS airbags and child restraint sys-

tems of this vehicle and some potential hazards you

should be aware of. These systems work together along

with the overall structure of this vehicle in order to provide

occupant restraint in the event of a crash. The effect of

each system is enhanced when it is used properly and

together with other systems. No single occupant restraint

system can, by itself, provide you or your family with the

equal level of restraint which these systems can provide

when used together. That is why it is important for you and

your family to understand the purpose and proper use of

each of these systems and how they relate to each other.

The purpose of all occupant restraint systems is to help

reduce the possibility of death or serious injury in the

event of a collision. None of these systems, either individ-

ually or together, can ensure that there is no injury in the

event of collision. However, the more you know about

these systems and how to use them properly, the greater

your chances become of surviving an accident without

death or serious injury.

Seat belts provide the primary restraint to all occupants of

the vehicle, and every occupant of the vehicle should wear

seat belts properly at all times. Children should always be

secured in child restraint systems that are appropriate for

their age and size. SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)

airbags are, as their names imply, designed to work with,

and be supplemental to, seat belts and are not substitutes

for them. SRS airbags can be very effective in reducing

the risk of head and chest injuries by preventing contact of

the head and chest with interior portions of the vehicle.

06 06.07

iv 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06Prod. (OM35866U)

In order to be effective, the SRS airbags must deploy with

tremendous speed. The rapid deployment of the SRS air-

bags makes the SRS airbags themselves potential sources

of death or serious injury if an occupant is too close to an

airbag, or if an object or some part of his or her body has

been placed between the occupant and the airbag at the

time of deployment. This is just one example of how the

instructions in Section 1−3 of this Owner’s Manual will help

ensure proper use of the occupant restraint systems, and

increase the safety they can provide to you and your fami-

ly in the event of an accident.

Toyota recommends you to read the provisions in Section

1−3 carefully and refer to them as needed during your time

of ownership of this vehicle.

Event data recorder

Your vehicle has computers that monitor and control cer-

tain aspects of your vehicle. These computers assist in

driving and maintaining optimal vehicle performance. Be-

sides storing data useful for troubleshooting, there is a

system to record data in a crash or a near car crash

event. This is called an Event Data Recorder (EDR).

The SRS airbag sensor assembly contains the EDR. In a

crash or a near car crash event, this device may record

some or all of the following information:

Engine speed

Whether the brake pedal was applied or not

Vehicle speed

To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed

Position of the transmission selector lever

Whether the driver and front passenger wore the

seat belts or not

Driver’s seat position

Front passenger’s occupant classification

06 06.07

v2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06Prod. (OM35866U)

SRS airbag deployment data

SRS airbag system diagnostic data

If your vehicle is equipped with a vehicle stability control

(VSC) system, its Electronic Control Unit (ECU) may con-

tain another EDR. There are a variety of driving situations

which include activating the VSC under which the VSC

EDR will record certain information. The VSC EDR may

record some or all of the following information:

Behavior of the vehicle

Steering wheel angle

Vehicle speed

To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed

To what extent the brake pedal was applied

To what extent the ECU controlled the condition of

the 4 wheels

Vehicle stability control system diagnostic data

The information above is intended to be used for the

purpose of improving vehicle safety performance. Unlike

general data recorders, the EDR does not record sound

data such as conversation between passengers.

Toyota will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a

third party except when:

An agreement from the vehicle’s owner (or the leas-

ing company for a leased vehicle) is obtained

Officially requested by the police or other authorities

Used as a defense for Toyota in a law suit

Ordered by the court

However, if necessary Toyota will:

Use the data for research on Toyota vehicle safety

performance

Disclose the data to a third party for research pur-

poses without disclosing details of the vehicle

owner, and only when it is deemed necessary

Disclose summarized data cleared of vehicle identifi-

cation information to a non−Toyota organization for

research purposes

06 06.07

vi 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06Prod. (OM35866U)

New vehicle warranty

Your new vehicle is covered by the following Toyota limited

warranties:

New vehicle warranty

Emission control systems warranty

Others

For further information, please refer to the “Owner’s

Warranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual

Supplement”.

Your responsibility for

maintenance

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that the speci-

fied maintenance is performed. Section 6 gives details of

these maintenance requirements. Also included in Section

6 is general maintenance. For scheduled maintenance in-

formation, please refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance

Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

Important health and safety

information about your Toyota

CAUTION

WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constitu-

ents, and a wide variety of automobile compo-

nents contain or emit chemicals known to the

State of California to cause cancer and birth de-

fects and other reproductive harm. In addition,

oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as

well as waste produced by component wear con-

tain or emit chemicals known to the State of

California to cause cancer and birth defects or

other reproductive harm.

Battery posts, terminals and related accessories

contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your

hands after handling. Used engine oil contains

chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory

animals. Always protect your skin by washing

thoroughly with soap and water.

06 06.07

vii 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06Prod. (OM35866U)

Accessories, spare parts and

modification of your Toyota

A wide variety of non−genuine spare parts and accessories

for Toyota vehicles are currently available in the market.

You should know that Toyota does not warrant these prod-

ucts and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or

replacement, or for any damage they may cause to, or

adverse effect they may have on, your Toyota vehicle.

This vehicle should not be modified with non−genuine

Toyota products. Modification with non−genuine Toyota

products could affect its performance, safety or durability,

and may even violate governmental regulations. In addi-

tion, damage or performance problems resulting from the

modification may not be covered under warranty.

Spark ignition system of your

Toyota

The spark ignition system in your Toyota meets all require-

ments of the Canadian Interference−Causing Equipment

Standard.

06 06.07

viii 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06Prod. (OM35866U)

Installation of a mobile

two−way radio system

As the installation of a mobile two−way radio system in

your vehicle could affect electronic systems such as fol-

lows, be sure to check with your Toyota dealer for precau-

tionary measures or special instructions regarding installa-

tion.

Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport

fuel injection system

SRS airbag system

Seat belt pretensioner system

Traction control system (two−wheel drive models)

Active traction control system

(four−wheel drive models)

“AUTO LSD” system (two−wheel drive models)

Vehicle stability control system

Downhill assist control system

(four−wheel drive models)

Hill−start assist control system

Rear height control air suspension

Tire pressure warning system

Cruise control system

Anti−lock brake system

Electronic throttle control system

Tires and loading on your

Toyota

Underinflated or overinflated tire pressure and the

excess load may result in the deterioration of

steering ability and braking ability, leading to an

accident. Check the tire inflation pressure periodi-

cally and be sure to keep the load limits given in

this Owner’s Manual. For details about tire inflation

pressure and load limits, see pages 425 and 350.

06 06.07

ix 2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06Prod. (OM35866U)

Scrapping of your Toyota

The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your

Toyota contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is

scrapped with the airbags and pretensioners left as they

are, it may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to

have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt preten-

sioner removed and disposed of by a qualified service

shop or by your Toyota dealer before you dispose of your

vehicle.

On−pavement and off−road

driving tips

This vehicle belongs to the utility vehicle class. Utility ve-

hicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other

types of vehicles. This vehicle will handle and maneuver

differently from an ordinary passenger car because it is

designed for off−road use also. In addition, this vehicle

has a higher ground clearance and center of gravity than

that of an ordinary passenger car. This vehicle design fea-

ture causes this type of vehicle to be more likely to rol-

lover. Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in

loss of control, accidents or vehicle rollover causing death

or serious injury. Be sure to read “Off−road vehicle precau-

tions” on page 328 in Section 2 and “Off−road driving pre-

cautions” on page 359 in Section 3.

06 06.07

x2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06Prod. (OM35866U)

Leak detection pump

This pump performs fuel evaporation leakage check. This

check is done approximately five hours after the engine is

turned off. So you may hear sound coming from under-

neath the luggage compartment for several minutes. It

does not indicate a malfunction.

06 06.07

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06Prod. (OM35866U)

06 06.07

You should know as much about the quality and

importance of proper maintenance of your new

vehicle as the people who built it.

The Toyota authorized Repair Manual

tells you how to maintain your vehicle and

enables you to correctly perform your own

maintenance.

The best way to keep your new vehicle in top

running order is to maintain it properly from

the moment you drive it off the showroom

floor.

The Toyota authorized Repair Manual is

packed with literally everything you need to

know to perform your own maintenance in

virtually every area of your new vehicle.

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06Prod. (OM35866U)

06 06.07

Where to obtain the

Repair Manual

The repair manual for 4RUNNER may be pur-

chased from any Toyota dealer or the Material

Distribution Center. To purchase the repair

manual, please contact your Toyota dealer or call

the Material Distribution Center toll−free at

1−800−622−2033.

Maintenance procedures for the engine,

chassis, body, electrical system, and more,

are clearly explained and illustrated.

Periodic maintenance and tune−up

Periodic maintenance and tune−up helps to pre-

vent small problems from growing into larger ones lat-

er on. The repair manual outlines exactly what main-

tenance is required and clearly explains how to do the

work yourself step−by−step.

Areas covered include such things as spark plug re-

placement, valve clearance adjustment and engine oil

and filter replacement.

2007 4Runner from Aug. ’06Prod. (OM35866U)

06 06.07

WE REALLY CARE ABOUT YOU  PLEASE BUCKLE UP

Toyota has made a special effort to encourage use of seat belts.

Toyota belts are:

Comfortable

Easy to use

Convenient

We encourage you to use your belts every time you drive.

Toyota 2007 4Runner Owners Manual

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation